Home

GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide

Contents

1. 295 13 1 1 Adding a News Account 295 13 1 2 Subscribing to a Newsgroup 296 13 2 Working With Newsgroup Messages 297 13 2 1 Reading Newsgroup Messages 297 13 2 2 Posting a New Discussion to a Newsgroup 297 13 2 3 Replying to a Message in a Newsgroup 298 13 2 4 Marking Messages According to Your Interests 298 13 2 5 Adding a Signature to All Newsgroup Items You Send 298 13 2 6 Changing the Display Name for Newsgroup Postings 299 13 2 7 Deleting a Newsgroup Message 299 13 3 Working With Newsgroups 299 13 3 1 Collapsing or Expanding All Threads in a Newsgroup 299 13 3 2 Performing a Search on a Newsgroup Server 300 13 3 3 Specifying Download Settings for Individual Newsgroups 300 13 3 4 Updating the Local Newsgroup Folder 300 13 3 5 Deleting a News Account 300 14 RSS Feeds 301 14
2. 340 15 14 1 Understanding Document Version Categories 340 15 14 2 Creating a New Version of a Document 341 15 14 3 Viewing Version Information fora Document 342 15 14 4 Specifying the Official Version of a Document 342 15 15 Managing Groups of Documents 342 15 15 1 Preparing for a Mass Operation 343 15 15 2 Selecting Documents for the Mass Operation 343 15 15 83 Acting as the Librarian p sse acces be Se ba eas See ee Sa we eens eae Baa 344 15 15 4 Copying a Group of Documents 345 15 15 5 Changing the Properties of a Group of Documents 348 15 15 6 Changing Sharing for a Group of Documents 351 15 15 7 Deleting a Group of Documents 356 15 15 8 Moving a Group of Documents 358 15 16 Viewing Documents When Your Network or GroupWise Is Unavailable 361 15 16 1 Enabling Document Echoing 361 15 16 2 Deleting Unneeded Documents from Your Remote Library 363 15
3. 161 4 9 Sharing Your Free Busy Schedule on the Internet 161 4 9 1 Publishing Your Free Busy Schedule 161 4 9 2 Sending Free Busy Information 161 4 9 3 Using Free Busy Information 161 4 10 Using the Multi User Calendar 162 4 10 1 Viewing the Calendars of Multiple Users or Resources 162 4 10 2 Modifying a Multi User List 163 4 10 3 Creating a Multi User Calendar View 163 4 1 Printing Calendar ts arsana s Goring aoe Canoe ed eaten L a te LA 164 4 11 1 Printing Your Main Calendar 164 4 11 2 Printing a Specific Calendar 165 4 11 3 Printing the Calendars of Multiple Users 165 4 12 Junking Calendar Items from Unknown Senders 166 Tasks and the Tasklist 167 5 1 Understanding TASKS 5 382 228 fi OS Se Ba ee Sd 167 5 2 Understanding the Tasklist Folder 167 5 3 Using Tasks a 2 0 e ea ee Sik ee he Re A i ee Se Re ee see 168 5 3 1 Assigning a Task 55e ee ed Gee ae
4. 45 2 3 1 Understanding Folder Lists 45 2 3 2 Displaying Folder Lists 47 2 33 Working with Folders ses eg ee en en ptet ane eee est de era dir Gone 48 2 3 4 Managing Item Lists in Folders 50 2 3 5 Customizing Folder Display Settings 52 2 3 6 Understanding Find Results Folders 56 2 3 7 Using Shared Folders iris arnt ee een re ree aad ck hea aaa ks 57 2 4 Using Panels to Organize Your Home Folder 60 2 4 1 Understanding Panels 000 eee ees 60 2 4 2 Resizing a Panel 222456 dues Oe Sah SR Bea alee eg Mee ek ee Sete take 61 2 4 3 Moving a Panel 3 tte hl ab aio peg we peed Mb da eee gg ew Boe 61 2 4 4 CustomizingaPanel 0 0 2 61 2 4 5 Creating a New Panel 61 2 4 6 Removing a Paneli ci cn rote ea i A EE rame he ire sl Ova eee 62 2 4 7 Exporting and Importing Home View Settings 62 2 5 Customizing Other GroupWise Functionality 63 2 5 1 Changing GroupWise Modes 63 2 5 2 Changing Your Display Name
5. 288 12 4 1 Using POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts in Online Mode 288 12 4 2 Using POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts in Remote and Caching Modes 289 12 43 Changing the Length of Time for POP3 and IMAP4 Server Timeouts 289 12 4 4 Using SSL to Connect to a POP3 or IMAP4 Server 289 12 4 5 Downloading Items from POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts 289 12 4 6 Sending POP3 and IMAP4 Mail from GroupWise 290 12 4 7 Deleting an Item from a POP3 or IMAP4 Account 291 12 5 POPI Features miss net mit Eat aren ea ed it eee Ge ee ae 291 12 5 1 Storing Your Items on a POP3 Mail Server 291 12 5 2 Deleting Items from a POP3 Mail Server 292 12 6 IMAP4 Features ine Pa od eee Eh eee See Se Meee ee Bale a eat aies doe 292 12 6 1 Subscribing and Unsubscribing to IMAP4 Folders 292 12 6 2 Alphabetizing the Folders in an IMAP4 Account 292 12 6 3 Downloading Only the Header Subject for IMAP4 Accounts 293 12 6 4 Downloading Voice Mail Attachments through an IMAP4 Account 293 12 6 5 Deleting Items from an IMAP4 Mail Server 293 13 Newsgroups 295 13 1 Setting Up Newsgroups
6. 397 19 2 Starting a Conferencing Meeting within GroupWise 400 19 3 Joining a Conferencing Meeting within GroupWise 400 19 4 Receiving Conferencing Calendar Items within GroupWise 400 A What s New in GroupWise 8 401 A Improved Interface eet eee bale ee ee ee ee ben eee 401 A2 New Folder Types seis a t e4 ett detii badd Se bedded Oo bagged ed debe ed 402 A3 E Mail Improvements 0 00000 cee ee eee eee eens 402 A 4 Calendar Improvements 403 AS Tasklist ccc eteeani teeing ed eee ee ae ee et a ENE eee 403 A6 Address BOOK owed red ek eda E ee eas ey 404 A 7 Integrations with Other Novell Products 404 A 7 1 Novell Vibe OnPrem and Novell Teaming 404 A 7 2 Novell Conferencing 405 A B Other Enhancements 405 Contents GroupWise Frequently Asked Questions 407 Startup Options 409 C 1 GroupWise Startup Options 409 C2 Using a GroupWise Startup Option 410 C 3 GroupWise Language Codes 411 Shortcut Keys 4
7. 183 6 3 3 Using the Frequent Contacts Address Book 184 6 3 4 Sending Mail from a Contacts Folder 185 6 3 5 Sending Mail from the Address Book 185 6 3 6 Sending Mail to an Entire Address Book 186 6 4 Using Contacts Folders ye ans et alertes REA Re EE ee nn ua alah bea 186 6 4 1 Creating a Contacts Folder 186 6 4 2 Managing Contacts 187 643 Managing Groups idare nt Ae eee eA Paes Meee elena 193 6 4 4 Managing Resources 198 6 4 5 Managing Organizations 201 6 5 Working with Address Books 202 6 5 1 Opening an Address Book 203 6 5 2 Creating a Personal Address Book 204 6 5 3 Editing a Personal or Frequent Contacts Address Book 204 6 5 4 Renaming a Personal Address Book 205 6 5 5 Copying a Personal Address Book 205 6 5 6 Deleting a Personal Address Book 205 6 5 7 Setting Addres
8. 387 17 Novell Messenger 389 17 1 Enabling Messenger in GroupWise 389 17 2 Sending an Instant Message from Novell Messenger 390 17 8 Sending an Instant Message from the File Menu 390 17 4 Displaying the Messenger Contact List 390 17 5 Displaying the Novell Messenger Presence Status 390 17 6 Adding Contacts from GroupWise to Novell Messenger 391 17 7 Specifying Whether to Start Novell Messenger When GroupWise Starts 391 17 8 Displaying Novell Messenger Options 391 18 Novell Vibe OnPrem 393 18 1 Accessing Vibe through the Novell Vibe OnPrem Folder or the Novell Teaming Folder 393 18 2 Accessing Vibe from a GroupWise Web Panel 394 18 3 Searching GroupWise and Vibe Simultaneously 394 18 4 Dragging and Dropping GroupWise Items into Vibe Folders 394 18 5 Viewing Vibe Feeds in GroupWise 395 18 6 Understanding Task and Calendar Synchronization between Vibe and GroupWise 396 19 Conferencing 397 19 1 Scheduling a Conferencing Meeting within GroupWise
9. 313 Organizing Your Documents 313 1531 1 Find Results Folders coc cia urine ne Gammes mea een ae eae bere 314 15 3 2 Specifying When Document References Are Added to the Documents Folder 314 15 3 3 Changing the Maximum Number of References in the Documents Folder 315 Importing Documents into a GroupWise Library 316 15 4 1 Specifying Files to Import 316 15 4 2 Choosing an Import Method 316 15 4 3 Using Quick Import to Import Documents 316 15 4 4 Using Custom Import to Import Documents 318 Sharing DOCUMENTS lt 0 saem nie beh ee het Ba ena miens peg dta enti eye eon ha aiina Au 320 15 5 1 Specifying Users Who Can Share the Document 321 15 5 2 Specifying Default Sharing Rights for Documents 321 15 5 3 Specifying Users Rights to the Document 322 15 5 4 Giving a User Rights for All Document Versions 322 15 5 5 Giving a User Rights to a Specific Document Version 323 15 5 6 Giving Users Rights to Modify the Sharing Settings fora Document 323 15 5 7 Preventing Other Users from Accessing
10. 95 3 2 2 Retracting Sent E Mail 0 cette teens 98 3 2 3 R sending E Mail o reset ae ca ee aie ee GN amen bed ee PE orient 98 3 2 4 Replying to Sent E Mail 98 3 2 5 Confirming Delivery of E Mail You Send 99 33 Receiving E Mails rer eraa ie he Pee ee a eS eh te 101 3 3 1 Reading Received E Mail 0 cee eee eee 101 3 3 2 Reading Attachments 105 3 3 3 Replying to E Mail nos sce wo ie een ands sly dale eae Cem AAR ee ee oe ae Se ES 107 3 3 4 Forwarding E Mails tect een Pe PE A ddr ee 109 3 4 Managing Received E Mail 109 3 4 1 Personalizing Received E Mail 110 3 4 2 Changing E Mail to Another Item Type 112 3 4 3 Saving Received E Mail to Disk or a GroupWise Library 113 3 4 4 Deleting E Mail 0 0 tenet tees 114 3 4 5 Viewing the Discussion Thread of a E Mail 115 3 4 6 Viewing the Source of External Messages 115 3 4 7 Archiving and Backing Up E Mail 115 3 5 Printing E2Mail treste ohini D mate team deal E eee Re nn name 115 3 5 1 S l cting Printer ss cies tenn Mi ei are
11. Team Meeting E Thursday September 25 2008 g Shared folder notification From Richard Steadman 9 25 20 1 E Friday October 03 2008 Be Marketing Meeting From Richard Steadman 10 3 20 E You can open more than one Main Window by clicking Window then clicking New Main Window You can open as many Main Windows as your computer s memory allows This is useful if you proxy for another user You can look at your own Main Window and the Main Window belonging to the person you are proxying for For more information about accessing other users mailboxes see Chapter 10 Mailbox Calendar Access for Proxy Users on page 257 Understanding the Main Menu The Main Menu provides access to all GroupWise client features that can be used in the Main Window File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help The most frequently used GroupWise features are conveniently available on item drop down menus toolbars and so on Getting Started 19 20 1 4 3 1 4 4 Turning the Main Menu On and Off 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt Appearance 3 Select or deselect Display Main Menu With the Main Menu turned off you can still access all its functionality by clicking the drop down arrow on the left end of the Nav Bar When you have the Nav Bar displayed 1 Click the drop down arrow on the left end of the Nav Bar then click Display Main Menu or Hide Main Menu Group
12. GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Use this page to specify a name for the resource a phone number resource type e mail address owner and comments about this resource In the Owner field you can specify a contact that is already in your address book or you can use the arrow button to create a new contact entry Adding a Personal Resource The GroupWise Address Book includes resources defined by your GroupWise administrator You can add a personal resource to the Frequent Contacts folder or another personal Contacts folder In the Folder List select the Contacts folder where you want to add a personal resource Click New Resource on the toolbar In the Name field specify the name for the resource In the Phone field specify the phone number of the contact responsible for the resource a BB N In the Type field specify the type of resource it is You can specify Resource or Place If you specify Place the resource description is automatically added to the Place field in the appointment 6 In the E mail Address field specify the e mail address of the person to receive notifications about this resource 7 Inthe Owner field specify the owner of the resource 8 Inthe Comments field specify any comments you might have for the resource For example you might want to specify how big a conference room is or what type of equipment is in the room 9 Click Close then click Yes to save your changes Modifying
13. 266 12 Using Remote M de 222 888 cask eme Go Ree doe Bae aoe kee Oe abs Spe Eade Moe 266 11 2 1 Preparing to Use Remote Mode 267 11 2 2 Setting a Remote Password 276 11 2 3 Understanding Remote Connection Types 276 11 2 4 Understanding Remote Features 0 0 eects 277 11 2 5 Sending Remote Requests 277 11 2 6 Processing Remote Requests 277 11 2 7 Sending and Retrieving Items in Remote Mode 277 11 2 8 Allowing Offline Send Receive 283 Contents 12 POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts 285 12 1 Understanding POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts 285 12 1 1 Understanding POP3 Accounts 285 12 1 2 Understanding IMAP4 Accounts 285 12 2 Adding POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts to GroupWise 286 12 2 1 Adding a POP3 or IMAP4 Account 286 12 2 2 Importing POP3 and IMAP4 E Mail 287 12 8 Configuring POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts 288 12 4 Using POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts
14. Moving or deleting a file on a disk or network drive does not affect a file you have attached to an item If you delete an attached file it is not erased from disk or network drive it is simply removed from the attachment list E Mail 111 3 4 2 Assigning a Category to an E Mail You Receive Categories provide you with a way to organize your items You can assign a category to any item including contacts that you send or receive You create and add categories and can give each category an identifying color The colors display in the Item List and in the Calendar For additional Information on how to assign a category to an item see Assigning Categories to Items on page 42 Adding a Contact to an E Mail You Receive When you add a contact to an e mail you receive the e mail is then associated with the contact you added This is helpful when viewing the history for a particular contact because the e mail displays in the contact history for the contact even though that contact did not send the e mail For additional information on contact history see Viewing All Correspondence with a Contact on page 192 1 Open an item from your Mailbox or Calendar 2 Click the Personalize tab 3 In the Contact field type a user name then press Enter Repeat for additional users or To select user names from a list click Address Selector icon next to the Contact field Double click each user then click OK Changing E Mail to
15. 64 2 5 3 Changing Your Time Zone 64 2 5 4 Setting the Interval for Refreshing GroupWise 65 2 5 5 Customizing Date and Time Formats 65 E Mail 67 Sil Sending E Malle fs cee tee pace he asa eee Baie ete lene enr een etre 67 3 1 1 Selecting the Default Compose View 68 3 12 Composing E Mails ss Si ied ede ey ee eee ee ed Ee ed ee 68 3 1 3 Formatting E Maill 2 sertie cians eae RE 2 RER awit see eae une 69 3 1 4 Spell Checking Messages 73 81 90 Attaching Files tesco i ie eee eee ee a en a ee 76 3 1 6 Adding a Signature or vCard 79 3 1 7 Routing Mail to Multiple Recipients Consecutively 81 3 1 8 Sending S MIME Secure Messages 83 3 1 9 Saving Unfinished E Mail 90 3 1 10 Selecting Send Options 91 3 1 11 Posting a Discussion Note 94 3 1 12 Sending Phone Messages 94 3 2 Managing Sent E Mail ser treri g nee eee heed eka ee pe ee ee en ae es 95 3 2 1 Working with Sent Items
16. Action Open online help Open the Spell Checker Search for text Find next instance Find previous instance Open the selected item From the Main Window or Calendar exit GroupWise Exit the item Exit the dialog box Refresh the view Toggle between the Main Window and the most recently opened item Open the thesaurus Mark the selected item Private Open the Font dialog box Retrieve a file Activate the menu bar Use the underlined letters in the menu names In the Folder List Shift the first letter of a subfolder name goes to the subfolder Select all items select all text Bold text Copy selected text Where It Works Main Window Calendar item dialog box In an item In an item In text In text Item List Main Window Calendar In an item Dialog box Main Window Calendar Main Window item In an item Item List In an item In an item Main Window Calendar item Folder List Item List text In text In text Shortcut Keys 413 414 Keystroke Ctrl D Alt D Ctrl F Ctrl G Ctrl I Ctrl L Ctrl M Ctrl N Ctrl N Ctrl O Ctrl P Ctrl Q Ctrl R Ctrl Shift R Ctrl S Alt S Ctrl U Ctrl V Ctrl X Ctrl Y Ctrl Z Ctrl Shift A Ctrl Shift D Ctrl Shift L Ctrl Shift P Ctrl Shift R Ctrl Shift T Tab Shift Tab Ctrl Tab Ctrl Tab Action Open a new document management document Send item Open the Global Find dialog box Go to today s date Italicize text
17. Changing the Background for Calendar Areas You can change the background appearance for All Day Events Appointments Reminder Notes and Tasks 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Calendar gt General 3 Under Line Color Options select if you want to display a background color for All Day Events Appointments Reminder Notes and Tasks 4 If you selected to display a background color for any of the calendar items select a color for each item To use the default GroupWise 6 0 background colors click GW60 To use the default GroupWise 6 5 background colors click GW65 The GroupWise 6 5 and GroupWise 7 default background colors are the same 5 Select if you want to display separating lines for reminder notes and tasks 6 Click OK then click Close GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 4 2 5 Sending a Calendar 4 2 6 4 2 7 When you send a calendar the calendar is sent as an Internet Calendar attachment to an e mail message Internet Calendar attachments have the file extension of ics 1 Right click the calendar to export then click Send N Oo OO fF Select the time period Select Entire calendar to send your entire calendar or Select Previous to send part of your calendar If you select Previous you must specify a range of days to send Select the level of detail Busy Time Only Sends only the busy information for the calendar and no information about the calendar items Busy Time and Subject Send
18. QuickViewer at Right If Display QuickViewer is selected this option displays the QuickViewer at the right of the window 4 Click OK 2 1 3 Customizing the Main Toolbar 36 You can customize each toolbar by adding and deleting buttons choosing button order and placing separators between buttons 1 To customize the Main toolbar if the toolbar is not displayed right click the toolbar then click Customize Toolbar 2 Click the Show tab GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Toolbar Properties Show Customize Toolbar button style O Picture O Picture and text 2E 2 Address Book Find Property Picture and selected text on the right CE address Book 2 Display options Single row of buttons only Multiple rows of buttons if necessary All buttons will be displayed Show display settings drop down list Show item context toolbar Show folder context toolbar 3 Click how you want the toolbar to display You can select to show buttons as pictures pictures with text below them or pictures with selected text on the right Select if you want a single row of buttons or multiple rows of buttons if necessary To remove or show the display settings drop down list deselect or select the Show display settings drop down list To show the buttons that are most useful for the selected item select Show item context toolbar To show the buttons that are most useful for the selecte
19. Understanding Your Archive on page 375 Section 16 3 2 Specifying Where Archives Are Stored on page 376 Section 16 3 3 Moving an Item to the Archive on page 376 Section 16 3 4 Archiving Items Automatically on page 377 Section 16 3 5 Viewing Archived Items on page 377 Section 16 3 6 Unarchiving Items on page 377 Section 16 3 7 Moving Your Archive from One Location to Another on page 378 Section 16 3 8 Combining Archived Items from Multiple Archives on page 379 Understanding Your Archive You can view archived items whenever you need to You can also unarchive any archived item When you archive an item you have sent you cannot track the status of that item The system administrator might specify that your items are archived automatically on a regular basis Automatic archiving occurs every time the GroupWise client is opened Items are archived from the mailbox the user is currently using This means if you are in Caching Mode items are archived from your Caching Mailbox and if you are in Online Mode items are archived from your Online Mailbox Maintaining GroupWise 375 16 3 2 16 3 3 Some items like appointments might be scheduled to be archived before the actual appointment date When these items are archived they are removed from the Sent Items folder but remain on your calendar This allows you to schedule items far in advance without worrying about l
20. i Send XX Cancel Address D Busy Search E Appointment Send Options Conference This appointment is a conference General Room Name default Key On Join Features C Require email Key makes conference private C Pre registered email only Repeat Option i None Account Novell Groupwise Folder Calendar 5 From the General tab specify the following information for your conference Room Name Specify a room name for your conference Key Specify a key for the meeting if you want to make the meeting private Only users who know the key are able to attend the meeting Require email Requires attendees to enter their e mail address when they join the meeting Pre registered email only Users are not permitted to access the meeting unless they are either invited to the meeting or they are preregistered for the meeting When accessing the meeting users are required to enter their e mails address Repeat Option Select whether you want this conference to repeat every day every week every month or never Countdown timer Starts a countdown timer one hour before the meeting starts Users are restricted from registering for the meeting after the countdown timer starts Show recording after meeting Provides a link to the meeting recording on the widget after the meeting Show chat transcript after meeting Provides a link to the chat transcript on the widget after the meeting Registrat
21. No Yes Searches on selected item types message appointment task andso No on Searches on specific item statuses received sent posted draft Searches on additional item statuses Searches for items with attachments Searches for contacts Searches by category Searches in the From To CC BC and Subject fields Searches by date range Searches in the text of items Searches in attachments Searches in documents in libraries Searches on whole words in a search index Searches on strings and partial words Searches on punctuation Searches on basic search criteria based on common fields Searches on complex search criteria based on any field Allows wildcard characters such as and Allows Boolean operators such as AND and OR Saves search criteria for repeated use Lists saved search criteria in a convenient menu Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Global Find Yes No Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes No Yes No Finding Items Advanced Find Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No 239 7 5 3 Comparing GroupWise Versions Users of earlier versions of the GroupWise client can see that Find provides new functionality while Global Find provides the standard Find functionality that was available in earlier versions of the
22. Private Chat Enables attendees to privately chat with meeting host or other attendees Computer Screen Enables you to share your computer screen Web pages Enables you to share a Web page Participant list Displays the participant list so attendees can see who else is participating in the meeting Assistant Displays the Meeting Assistant when users first access the meeting The Meeting Assistant provides options to share the computer screen share the whiteboard or share a presentation Whiteboard Enables you to share your whiteboard Documents Enables you to share a document Recording Enables you to record the meeting Lobby Provides an area where attendees wait before the meeting begins Participants Select the number of expected participants for the meeting The maximum number allowed might vary depending on your Conferencing license Conferencing 399 19 2 19 3 19 4 Starting a Conferencing Meeting within GroupWise If you are the creator of a Conferencing meeting you can start your Conferencing meeting directly from the GroupWise client 1 Open your previously scheduled Conferencing appointment in GroupWise 2 Click the link that is provided in the appointment or Copy the provided URL and paste it into a Web browser Joining a Conferencing Meeting within GroupWise You can access a Conferencing meeting directly from the GroupWise client 1 Open the Conferencing appointment in GroupWise 2 Click the
23. Section 2 5 5 Customizing Date and Time Formats on page 65 Changing GroupWise Modes GroupWise provides four different ways to run the GroupWise client Online mode Caching mode Remote mode and Remote Offline mode Online Mode on page 63 Caching Mode on page 63 Remote Mode on page 64 Changing Modes on page 64 You might be able to run GroupWise in any of the four modes or your system administrator might require that you use only a certain mode Most GroupWise features are available in all four GroupWise modes with some exceptions Subscribing to other users notifications is not available in Caching mode Subscribing to other users notifications and Proxy are not available in Remote mode Any feature that requires a connection such as to the GroupWise system or to an IMAP4 account is not available in Remote Offline mode Online Mode When you use Online mode you are connected to your post office on the network Your mailbox displays the messages and information stored in your network mailbox also called your Online Mailbox Online mode is connected to your network mailbox continuously In Online mode if your Post Office Agent shuts down or you lose your network connection you temporarily lose your connection to your mailbox You should use this mode if you do not have a lot of network traffic or if you use several different workstations and do not want to download a local mailbo
24. The Calendar has several view options The view that is displayed when you exit your Calendar displays when you open the Calendar folder again 1 In the Nav Bar click Calendar then click the buttons on the Calendar toolbar to choose different views GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Figure 4 1 Week View File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help T i Address Book E O Q A newmait GD Newappt if NewTask 11 ala ol EB Onlinev v E Calendar Find T s 9 4 2008 41 47 431 4365 E Today E Day EJ Week Et Month ies Year Ga Multi User OMA a September 2008 m SMTWTF sE m 12 3 4 5 6 W m S D Janet DeSoto Home 7 8 9 10111213 y 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 a 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 MO o0 ereer 28 29 30 AM 30 B f Frequent Contacts 1000 E Janet DeSoto October 2008 AM 30 a Documents SMTWTES 15 f Tasklist 123 4 MS 00 peeing B7 WorkIn Progress J 5 6 7 8 9 1011 PM 30 Es A Cabinet 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 L 4 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 4 1 00 GIElCarerere BD Projects 30 26 27 28 29 30 31 En T Plans 2 00 P Trash 7 PM 30 greg Fa e it Working SMTWTF S F racy 1 2345678l k 9 101112131415 fg D Marketing 2 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Briefing E 242 Hiem Presentation A i i i Sr 2 Mailbox 1 M Tasklist fg Janet DeSoto Home 2 Mailbox 1
25. Using a GroupWise Template to Create a Document on page 311 Using a File as a Template to Create a Document on page 312 Templates Description Application Templates You can select an application to create a document based on the application s template file The Applications list box lists all the applications that are registered as having templates in your Windows registry file GroupWise Templates You can select GroupWise templates to use a document in the library as the foundation of a new document You can make any document a template and you can use these templates as the foundation for new documents All documents have a document type memo expense report letter template and so on When document type is a template the document appears in the Templates list 310 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Templates Description Files as Templates File templates are documents that are not in the library You can select a file anywhere on your system and use it as a foundation for a new document If a document already exists in the library and you just want to create an item for it in your Mailbox click File gt New then click Document Reference You can also use Find to locate a document and then drag the document to your Mailbox or folder Using an Application s Template to Create a Document You can create a document by using an application s default template For example you can select Word to create anew
26. on page 230 7 2 1 Using a Global Find 1 Click Tools gt Find Finding Items 227 7 2 2 228 4 Select each item type you are looking for then select each item source you are looking for 5 To specify a date range select the Created or delivered between check box then type or select the 7 Use Advanced Find to make your search more specific For example you might want to search for Find Find Find by Example LES Look in 4 GY anet DeSoto Home ba 8B Greg Farnsworth sawed a o a All Libraries From uthor gt Item type E Mail Appointment Task Phone message C Note F Document Item source Received Posted Sent Draft Date range Created or delivered between 30 200 and 8 30 200 E Advanced Find Reset V Find only official document versions Cok canca To search for specific text select Full Text or Subject from the drop down list then type what you are looking for in the field To search for a name select From Author or To CC from the drop down list then type the name in the field dates In the Look in list box click the folders and or libraries you want to search in You might need to click the plus sign next to your user folder to expand the folder structure Your folders and library are selected for search by default with a check in the box To speed up your search deselect any folde
27. on page 348 When you copy a group of documents all versions of the document are copied In the destination library each copy of the document receives anew document number but the document retains the same version number that it had in the source library For example if document 458 had versions one two and five in the Marketing library and you copy it to the Sales library it would become document 459 or whatever the next number is in the Sales library but it would still have versions one two and five GroupWise copies all the document properties including document activity and custom fields to the destination library and stores them with the document however the custom fields do not display in Document Properties if the destination library doesn t contain the field When you copy documents document references are not updated Copying a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example 1 Click Tools gt Mass Document Operations Document Management 345 Select the operation you want to perform The operation will affect all versions of a document Operation Change sharing Copy Selection method Use Find Advanced Find to select documents Use Find by Example to select documents Use currently selected documents Use documents listed in a file Browse Process errors only ss a j 2 Inthe Operation group box click Copy 3 Inthe Selection method group box click Use Find by Example
28. or Click Prompt before adding to give you the choice whether or not to add a signature to each item you post 6 Click OK 298 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 13 2 6 Changing the Display Name for Newsgroup Postings 1 Click Accounts gt Account Options 2 Click the News tab then click Properties News Properties ES General Server Connection Advanced Signature Type the name you will use to refer to this account Novell Groupwise From name Janet DeSoto Organization E mail address jdesoto corporate com Reply address Include this account when doing Send Retrieve on All Marked Accounts Jpload this account to the GroupWise Online Mailbox 3 Type a display name 4 Click OK 13 2 7 Deleting a Newsgroup Message 1 Right click the item then click Delete and Empty Deleting a newsgroup item from your GroupWise Item List does not delete the item from the news server You cannot delete an item posted to a newsgroup To redisplay the item in your GroupWise Item List right click the newsgroup in the GroupWise Cabinet then click Reset 13 3 Working With Newsgroups Section 13 3 1 Collapsing or Expanding All Threads in a Newsgroup on page 299 Section 13 3 2 Performing a Search on a Newsgroup Server on page 300 Section 13 3 3 Specifying Download Settings for Individual Newsgroups on page 300 Section 13 3 4 Updating the Local Newsgroup Folder on
29. rate 11022 me LE man Dharma adhamapalan porate arketing pE fee Q At Ramirez aramirez Corporate net x11010 Development a Don B Baseball car pool New Hires Benji Gensomino bgelsomino Comorate net 11003 Marketing Conference Room 11055 Corporate Doug Newman dnewman Corporatenet 11000 Development 18 Favian Haughey fhaughey Comoratenet 11017 Marketing B Friends 8 Greg Famsworth gfamswoth Coporate net 11015 Sales J Ishmael Yacoub jyacoub Corporate net 11006 Marketing Janet DeSoto idesoto Corporate net Jason Stevens istevens Corporate net x11022 Development Lori Tanaka tanaka Comorete net You can use File gt Open Book and File gt Close Book to display and hide the address books in this pane The right pane lists all the entries in the selected address book In an address book you can open contacts to view details select names to send an item to create and modify groups and create and delete contacts You also have advanced options such as creating and modifying personal address books changing your Name Completion search order changing the properties of an address book defining copy options changing your MAPI configuration importing and exporting address books sharing address books adding directory services printing labels and more Contacts and Address Books 203 6 5 2 6 5 3 Creating a Personal Address Book 1 In the Main Window click on the toolbar 2 Click File gt
30. 124 4 2 1 Viewing Your Calendar 124 4 2 2 Reading a Calendar Entry 2 222 129 4 2 3 Creating a Personal Calendar 129 4 2 4 Customizing a New Calendar 130 4 2 5 Sending a Calendar 135 4 2 6 Exporting a Calendar 135 4 2 7 Importing a Calendar 135 4 3 Sending Calendar ltems 136 4 3 1 Understanding Calendar Items 136 4 3 2 Scheduling Appointments 136 4 3 3 Sending Reminder Notes 144 4 3 4 Scheduling Recurring ltems 146 4 4 Receiving Calendar Items 151 4 4 1 Accepting or Declining Calendar Items 152 4 4 2 Accepting or Declining Internet Items 153 4 4 3 Delegating Calendar Items 153 4 4 4 Changing Calendar Item Types 154 4 4
31. 15 17 2 Deleting Unneeded Documents from Your Remote Library Disk Space Management does not remove documents from the Master Library It also does not remove the document references for the deleted documents The files are removed only from the computer where you have your Remote Mailbox freeing disk space for you 1 In Remote mode click Tools gt Manage Library Size 2 Click the documents you want to delete then click Delete 3 When you re done click Close If you delete an In Use document the status of the document in the Master Library is reset to Available the next time you connect Integrating GroupWise with Your Applications GroupWise Integrations make it possible for you to link your applications to your GroupWise Mailbox In an integrated application you can see the documents in your Mailbox and folders when you select Open in the application In addition you can save a document as a new version using the application s Save As feature Integrating makes it possible for you to create edit and save GroupWise documents within your applications Section 15 17 1 Integrating Applications During Setup on page 363 Section 15 17 2 Integrating Applications After Setup on page 363 Section 15 17 3 Turning Off Integrations on page 364 Section 15 17 4 Turning On Integrations on page 365 Section 15 17 5 Using Non Integrated Applications on page 366 GroupWise can integrate with applic
32. 2 Click General Options Internet Account General Settings Display name Janet DeSoto J Send Retreve All Marked Accounts every 5 minute s V Send Retrieve All Marked Accounts at startup Hang up when Send Retrieve is done 3 To download items periodically select Send Retrieve All Marked Accounts every _ minutes Specify how often you want items to be sent and retrieved 4 To download items every time you start GroupWise select Send Retrieve All Marked Accounts at startup The settings affect all accounts that have Include this account when doing Send Retrieve on All Marked Accounts selected in the accounts properties If you have created new items for these accounts and have not yet sent them they are sent at the same time new items are downloaded To quickly turn this option on and off click Accounts gt Auto Send Retrieve It is active when a check mark is displayed Sending POP3 and IMAP4 Mail from GroupWise 1 Inan item you want to send click Actions gt Send Using then click the account from which you want to send or 290 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Click then click the account The From name associated with that account will be in the From field of this item To set the default account from which items are sent click Accounts gt Account Options click an account then click Set Default 12 4 7 Deleting an Item from a POP3 or IMAP4 Account 1 To delete an item fr
33. Allows the selection of the separator character allows you to choose to include original sender e mail address date time and message identifier Color Available for Internet standard only Allows you to select a reply color This color appears on the original text not any new text you enter Type my reply Select Top or Bottom if you selected Include headers or Internet standard above 4 If you use the HTML reply format select from the following format options GroupWise classic Provides separator characters original sender date and time HTML enhanced Allows the selection of the separator character allows you to choose to include original sender e mail address date time and message identifier Select Include headers to provide the original sender recipient date time and subject instead Type my reply Select Top or Bottom if you selected HTML enhanced above 5 Click OK Setting Up an Automated Reply If you are going on vacation or are out of the office for some other reason you can create a rule to reply to messages you receive while you are away For setup instructions see Section 9 4 2 Creating a Vacation Rule or Auto Reply on page 252 Replying to an E Mail in a Shared Folder 1 Open or select an item in the shared folder 2 Click Reply on the toolbar Reply E Options Reply a Cancel Reply privately outside discussion o sender onl Include message received from sender Include
34. Ar Name Completion fills in the rest of the name with a name from the address book for example Arthur Ramirez However if there are two GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide people named Arthur Ramirez in the address book one in Accounting and one in Development it might be difficult for you to know which name Name Completion has filled in unless you take the time to look at more properties You can change the display name so that it s easy to know which name Name Completion has filled in For example if you only correspond with Arthur Ramirez in Development and if he goes by Art rather than Arthur you could change the display name to Art Ramirez 1 Click a Contacts folder 2 Double click a contact File View Actions Help EE Close J Save Delte gt Send Mail Send Contact CN Instant Message Z Busy Search Summary Contact Details Address Advanced Notes History Art Ramirez Engineer Group B x11010 ramir rate net x11010 x11010 Professional Personal Development Other User Defined E Frequent Contacts 3 Click the Contact tab Eile View Actions Help Close u Save Delete gt Send Mail Send Contact QN Instant Message BE Busy Search PY view Msp Summary Contact Details Address Advanced Notes History Ma Rants Display As Art Ramirez Job Tit
35. Canada GMT 07 00 Mountain Time US amp Canada GMT 06 00 Central America GMT 06 00 Central Time US amp Canada GMT 06 00 Guadalajara Mexico City Monterrey GMT 06 00 Saskatchewan GMT 05 00 Bogota Lima Quito Rio Branco GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada GMT 05 00 Indiana East GMT 04 30 Caracas GMT 04 00 Atlantic Time Canada GMT 04 00 La Paz GMT 04 00 Manaus GMT 04 00 Santiago m 3 Click Send on the toolbar When the users you have scheduled with the Time Zone feature receive the appointment they see a time annotation after the subject when they see the appointment in their Mailboxes For example if the subject of the meeting is Marketing Conference and the time zone is Saskatchewan users would see a subject and time annotation similar to the following Marketing Conference Saskatchewan In the users Calendars the place is annotated with the time zone rather than the subject Rescheduling an Appointment If you want to make sure the people and resources for the appointment are available you can do a busy search by clicking Busy Search on the toolbar 1 In your calendar right click the appointment you want to reschedule then click Resend If you are rescheduling just one appointment in a series of recurring appointments select the appointment on the day you want to reschedule 2 Ifthe original appointment was an auto date appointment click This Instance or Al
36. GroupWise creates a new folder If auto archive has been configured unarchived messages remain in your active mailbox for 7 days before they are moved back to your archive 16 3 7 Moving Your Archive from One Location to Another You might want to move your archive from one location to another location in your computer s file system 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Environment then click the File Location tab Environment P Reply Format Editors Viewers Signature Appearance General Views File Location Cleanup Default Actions Archive directory Custom views C Program Files x86 Novell GroupWise Save check out Caching mailbox directory C Users username AppD ata Local Novell GroupWise gwstrbyu ok JT cena a 3 Inthe Archive directory field specify the location where you want to move your archive NOTE If you are moving your archive to a location where a GroupWise archive currently exists or previously existed do not specify a directory that contains archive files Archive files are stored in the ofxxxarc directory which is a directory that GroupWise automatically generates as a subdirectory to the archive directory If you specify the ofxxxarc directory as your GroupWise archive directory the result is multiple archives which is a situation that you want to avoid For information on how to remedy this problem see Section 16 3 8 Combining Archived Items from Multiple Arch
37. If you select both Leave a copy of messages on the server and Remove from server after __ days the POP3 items are deleted from the POPS server the specified number of days after the item is downloaded If you select both Leave a copy of messages on the server and Remove from server after deleting from Trash the POP3 items are deleted from the POP3 server when you manually empty them from the Trash If GroupWise automatically empties your Trash the items are not deleted from the POP3 server 12 6 IMAP4 Features Section 12 6 1 Subscribing and Unsubscribing to IMAP4 Folders on page 292 Section 12 6 2 Alphabetizing the Folders in an IMAP4 Account on page 292 Section 12 6 3 Downloading Only the Header Subject for IMAP4 Accounts on page 293 Section 12 6 4 Downloading Voice Mail Attachments through an IMAP4 Account on page 293 Section 12 6 5 Deleting Items from an IMAP4 Mail Server on page 293 12 6 1 Subscribing and Unsubscribing to IMAP4 Folders This feature is available if your IMAP4 server supports subscribing and unsubscribing to folders When you unsubscribe to a folder it no longer displays in your list of folders under the IMAP4 server even though it is still in your IMAP4 account This is especially useful if you are accessing an NNTP account through an IMAP4 folder 1 Click Accounts gt Account Options 2 Click the IMAP4 account then click Folders 3 Click the All tab to see all th
38. Multi User Table 4 1 Calendar Toolbar Button Descriptions Button Eu ES v LkLELEUEBE Description Select a date to view Return to today s date Move forward or back one day one week one month or one year depending upon what the calendar display is set to See a day view See a week view See a month view See a year view See a Multi User view Show or hide appointments on views where this applies Show or hide tasks on views where this applies Show or hide reminder notes on views where this applies Adds another day in the week view Remove a day from the week view Displaying Two Time Zones in the Calendar You can display two different time zones in the calendar In addition you can quickly switch between the two time zones This is helpful when you frequently travel between time zones or when you need to schedule meetings across time zones 1 Right click in your Calendar and select Additional Time Zone 2 Select Display Additional Time Zone 3 Type a label for the additional time zone such as London 4 Select the time zone from the additional Time zone drop down list 5 Type a label for your workstation time zone Calendar 127 128 6 Select the time zone where your workstation is located from the workstation time zone drop down list 7 Click OK To swap the two time zones click Swap in the Additional Time Zone window By clicking Swap you are also changing your
39. New Book 3 Type a name for the new book then click OK Editing a Personal or Frequent Contacts Address Book In a personal address book including the Frequent Contacts address book you can add or delete entries edit existing information copy names from one book to another or rename a book You can also create your own custom address book fields Quickly Adding Contacts to Your Personal Address Book on page 204 Editing Entries in a Personal Address Book on page 204 Copying Entries between Personal Address Books on page 204 Defining Custom Fields in a Personal Address Book on page 205 Deleting Entries from a Personal Address Book on page 205 Quickly Adding Contacts to Your Personal Address Book You can quickly add any recipient in an item to any personal address book 1 Open an item addressed to one or more recipients 2 Right click the recipient you want to add to a personal address book 3 Click Add To Address Book then click the address book to add the contact to Editing Entries in a Personal Address Book 1 In the Main Window click on the toolbar 2 Click an address book then double click the name you want to edit 3 Edit the information on the different tabs then click OK Copying Entries between Personal Address Books You cannot copy entries to a closed address book you must open the book first You cannot copy names to the GroupWise Address Book 1 In the Main Window
40. See Specifying Document Properties on page 308 Default Sharing Rights If you usually share your documents with the same users or groups you can specify default sharing rights for all the documents you create When you specify the default sharing rights GroupWise applies these rights to each document you create or import into the selected library See Specifying Default Sharing Rights for Documents on page 321 Document Tab Configuration The Document tab appears each time you create import copy or select properties for a document You can specify which fields you want to display on the Document tab In addition you can specify the number of lines in each field the field s order on the dialog box and you can insert blank lines and separators in the dialog box See Specifying Document Properties on page 308 Document Property Pages When you create a new document or a new version of a document GroupWise prompts you to specify document properties You can specify whether you want GroupWise to prompt you for the document subject only or for all the document properties See Specifying Document Properties on page 308 Document Management Integration with Other Applications If you are using integrated applications you can specify whether you want GroupWise Library features integrated with the application s Save and Open features To use the integration you must have installed Integrations during GroupWise S
41. September 05 2007 Art Ramirez Presentation Janet DeSoto Engineer Group B E Monday August 27 2007 x11010 De Presentation Janet DeSoto aramirez Corporate net x11010 x11010 Development a Frequent Contacts The Folder column shows where each item is located Double click in item to view its contents To add or remove columns right click the column heading then click an option To sort by the information of a column for example by date or subject click the column heading You can use Quick Find to quickly find items or to create custom searches For more information on how to use Quick Find see Chapter 7 Finding Items on page 225 Viewing a Contact s Address on a Map The View Map feature allows you to quickly find the location of one of your contacts You can use the main address to open a Web browser and search for a map to the contacts location 1 Click a Contacts folder 2 Double click a contact 3 Click View Map 4 Optional Use the View Map drop down list to select a specific map location like office home or other address Deleting a Contact You can delete a contact in the Frequent Contacts folder or another personal Contacts folder You cannot delete a contact from the GroupWise Address Book 1 In the Folder List select the Contacts folder where you want to delete the contact 2 Inthe contact list right click the contact then click Delete 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Managing
42. Setting a Remote Password on page 276 266 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 11 2 1 Section 11 2 3 Understanding Remote Connection Types on page 276 Section 11 2 4 Understanding Remote Features on page 277 Section 11 2 5 Sending Remote Requests on page 277 Section 11 2 6 Processing Remote Requests on page 277 Section 11 2 7 Sending and Retrieving Items in Remote Mode on page 277 Section 11 2 8 Allowing Offline Send Receive on page 283 Your system administrator can specify settings that do not allow you to use Remote mode Preparing to Use Remote Mode Use Hit the Road on the Tools menu or switch from Online mode to Remote mode to create set up or update your Remote Mailbox Your local mailbox is created on your local drive and any current connections are detected and set up If you have already used Caching mode your local mailbox has already been created You can also use Hit the Road to create setup files on a diskette to set up your Remote Mailbox ona computer that is not connected to the network Several users can set up their Remote Mailboxes on a single shared computer Setting Up Your Remote Mailbox on page 267 Setting Up Multiple Remote Mailboxes on a Shared Computer on page 269 Configuring Your Remote Connections on page 269 Specifying Remote Properties on page 274 Setting Up Your Remote Mailbox If you switch from
43. When you archive GroupWise items they are stored at the location you have specified using Tools gt Options gt Environment gt File Location You must open your archive using File gt Open Archive in order to repair your archive Caching Mailbox If you are using Caching mode your Caching Mailbox is stored at the location you specified when you set up your Caching Mailbox You must be in Caching mode in order to repair your Caching Mailbox Remote Mailbox If you are using Remote mode your Remote Mailbox is stored in whatever location you specified when you used the Hit the Road feature in the client to create your Remote Mailbox You must be in Remote mode in order to repair your Remote Mailbox Three databases are associated with each of these mailbox locations 382 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 16 7 2 16 7 3 16 7 4 User Database Your user database contains your client options settings pointers to messages personal groups personal address books and rules Message Database Your message database contains your GroupWise items Document Database Your document database contains any documents you are accessing from a GroupWise Library When you are repairing a mailbox you can choose which databases to repair depending on the type of problem you are having with the mailbox Deciding Whether Your Mailbox Needs Repair It is possible for your GroupWise Mailbox or other GroupWise databases to become corrupt Th
44. You can now use the shared address book to address items or look up user information just as you would in other address books Contacts and Address Books 209 6 5 11 Synchronizing Address Book Entries You can use Synchronize to make sure that your personal address book entries match the corresponding entries in the GroupWise Address Book You can synchronize an entire personal address book or just the entries you have selected For example you might have a personal address book containing the names of your contacts in the Marketing department When the Marketing department changes buildings and phone numbers Synchronize saves you from needing to create a new personal address book 1 In the Main Window click on the toolbar 2 Click the personal address book you want to synchronize 3 To synchronize an address book click File gt Synchronize gt Current Book or To synchronize selected entries Ctrl click or Shift click the entries then click File gt Synchronize gt Selected Items 6 5 12 Displaying Quick Info Summary information about users is displayed in an address book and in the Address Selector when you mouse over that name The same information displays in the To CC BC or From fields of a message if you first click the name This display is called Quick Info Figure 6 7 shows Quick Info in a mail message Figure 6 7 Mail View With Information about a User pail Tox tot File Edt View Actions Tools Accoun
45. an e mail address to the Junk List or Block List Figure 3 5 Junk Mail Handling Dialog Box Showing the Junk List Tab Junk Mail Handling g Settings Junk List Block List Trust List Show V Addresses Edit Delete Move to Jun v Domains Trust Last Used Count lt i Total E mail from addresses in your Black List will not be delivered OK Cano Am Blocking or Junking E Mail from a Particular Internet Domain An Internet domain is the part of the e mail address that comes after the For example in the address Henry example com the Internet domain is example com 1 Right click an item then click Junk Mail 2 Click Junk Sender or Click Block Sender 3 Select Junk any e mail from this internet domain or Block any e mail from this internet domain If you select Junk the Internet domain is added to the Junk List All future e mail items from this Internet domain are delivered to the Junk Mail folder E Mail 119 You can specify that the items in this folder be automatically deleted after a certain number of days This folder is not created in the folder list unless a Junk Mail option is enabled or an address or Internet domain is added to the Junk List which enables the Junk List option If you select Block the Internet domain is added to the Block List All future e mail items from this Internet domain are not delivered to your Mailbox Your Junk List and Block List ca
46. do not have any rights to the document and the author and creator have full rights to the document You can use the lt General User gt entry to grant the same rights to all users who have access to the library and if you are the author of the document you can use the lt Creator gt entry to limit the rights of the creator For example your secretary creates several blank performance review documents in the library one for each employee in your team and specifies you as the author of each document This gives you full rights to each document because you re the author however this also gives your secretary full rights 320 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 5 1 15 5 2 to each document because he created them Of course you don t want your secretary to be able to read everyone s performance reviews so you could use the lt Creator gt entry to remove your secretary s rights to the performance review documents Specifying Users Who Can Share the Document You can use the options on the Sharing tab in Properties to give sharing rights to a document You can use one of the following methods to give sharing rights Click Not shared to prevent other users from viewing editing or deleting the document Click Shared with to select specific users and groups and specify sharing rights for each user or group When a user tries to access a document GroupWise checks the rights of the individual user If the user doesn t ha
47. gt Save As Document Management 339 15 14 15 14 1 Save wx ltems to save iWork Assignments Save to Disk x Saved message format Rich text ATF 7 Save file as Work Assignments txt Current directory C Program Files x86 Novell Groupwise Browse V Report file name conflicts 3 Inthe Save file as field specify a name for the document 4 Click Browse specify the path to the location where you want the document saved then click OK 5 Click Save Storing Multiple Versions of a Document You can store multiple versions of a document in GroupWise Each document reference in your Mailbox points to a single document version You can view information about a specific version of a document on the Version tab in Properties You can manage open check out check in and so forth document versions in the Version List dialog box Section 15 14 1 Understanding Document Version Categories on page 340 Section 15 14 2 Creating a New Version of a Document on page 341 Section 15 14 3 Viewing Version Information for a Document on page 342 Section 15 14 4 Specifying the Official Version of a Document on page 342 Understanding Document Version Categories You can have up to three different version categories for any document Current Version on page 341 Official Version on page 341 Specific Version on page 341 340
48. typically with numbers representing the day month and year Long Date Format Use the Long date setting to specify how the date appears in its long format typically with numbers representing the day and year and the month spelled out Setting the General GroupWise Format Use the General GroupWise format setting to determine whether the long date or short date is used throughout GroupWise 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Calendar 2 Click the Date Time tab 3 Under General GroupWise format view the Time format and specify whether the Date format should show the long date or short date then click OK Getting Organized 65 Setting Specific GroupWise Formats Use the Specific GroupWise formats settings to specify the date and time formats used in the Main Window properties and file info areas throughout GroupWise 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Calendar 2 Click the Date Time tab 3 Under Specific GroupWise formats select the formats you prefer for each of the settings then click K You can select either Time Short Date Long Date or one of the available combinations of date and time formats 66 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 1 E Mail An e mail item is basically a text message sent to a recipient In GroupWise an e mail item can be a message appointment task reminder note or a phone message note You can write them in plain text or HTML and you can add attachments
49. your Tasklist items and your unread messages The Home View is fully customizable You can create additional panels that display the information you need For information on how to customize your Home View see Section 2 4 Using Panels to Organize Your Home Folder on page 60 1 8 Understanding GroupWise Item Types Every day you communicate in a variety of ways To accommodate these needs GroupWise delivers your items using a variety of item types Section 1 8 1 Mail on page 27 Section 1 8 2 Appointment on page 28 Section 1 8 3 Task on page 28 1 8 1 Section 1 8 4 Section 1 8 5 Mail A mail message is for basic correspondence such as a memorandum or letter See Section 3 1 Reminder Note on page 28 Phone Message on page 28 Sending E Mail on page 67 and Section 3 3 Receiving E Mail on page 101 Getting Started 28 1 8 2 1 8 3 1 8 4 1 8 5 1 9 Appointment An appointment lets you invite people to and schedule resources for meetings or events You can schedule the date time and location for the meeting You can use posted appointments to schedule personal events such as a doctor s appointment a reminder to make a phone call at a certain time and so forth Appointments display on the Calendar See Section 4 3 Sending Calendar Items on page 136 Task A task lets you place a to do item on your own or on another
50. 1 Click new ma to create a new e mail message 2 Optional Type the subject of the e mail message in the Subject field 3 Type the message of the e mail in the Message field 4 Click File gt Save View GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 1 4 By default a custom view is saved in the C Novell Groupwise directory Custom view files have a vew file extension 5 Type a name for the view then click Save Opening a Custom View 1 Click the down arrow next to the New Mail icon 2 Select the custom view file you saved earlier The custom view opens displaying the information you entered when you saved the custom view file 3 Add any additional information as needed then click Send Defining the Location Where Custom Views are Saved 1 Click Tools gt Options gt Environment then open the File Location tab 2 Inthe Custom views field type the location where custom views are stored or browse to and select the location 3 Click OK Spell Checking Messages There are two ways to spell check the items you send Both features check for misspelled words duplicate words and irregular capitalization in items you are creating Each feature has advantages in different situations Using Quick Speller on page 73 Using Spell Checker on page 74 Using Quick Speller Quick Speller checks the spelling as you type and underlines the words that are spelled incorrectly When Quick Speller finds a misspelled
51. 1 Inthe Folder List select the Contacts folder where you want to add contacts to a group or In an item you are composing click EJ aires On the toolbar 2 Right click the group then click Details Groups are marked by the 88 icon 3 On the Details tab click Add to open the Address Selector dialog box and display the address list Click the drop down list to restrict the list to contacts groups or resources 4 To add a contact click the Look In drop down list then click the address book the contact is in 5 Click the Match drop down list then click the way you want to locate the contact by first name last name or full name 6 Inthe Look For field type the contact you want to add The address list scrolls to the nearest match 7 Double click the contact in the list so that it is added to the Selected list 8 Click OK twice to save the group Deleting a Contact from a Group 1 In the Folder List select the Contacts folder where you want to delete a contact from a group 2 Inthe contact list double click the group 3 Select the contact to delete then click Delete 4 Click OK GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Addressing Items to a Group a Address 1 Inan item view click a on the toolbar m n Martha de la Torre mdelatorre Corp 7 Richard Steadman rsteadman Corp Sammie Murphy smurphy Corpor _ Bea rx Lookin E Frequent Contacts 7 BC Look for Mat
52. 11 1 15 11 2 15 11 3 15 11 4 When you delete the document from the folder the reference is removed from the folder but the document remains in the library When you delete the document version from the library the selected version of the document is removed from the library and the document reference is removed from the folder When you delete all versions of the document in the library all versions of the document are removed from the library and the reference is removed from the folder When you drag a document reference to the Trash folder the document reference is deleted but the document in the library is not deleted Deleting Documents According to Document Type You can delete documents in your folders or you can let GroupWise automatically delete documents that have exceeded their defined document life GroupWise removes documents based on the document type assigned to the document on the Document tab in Properties Each document type has an expiration date and a expiration action associated with it The system administrator defines the expiration date and action delete or archive when he or she creates the library Deleting Groups of Documents You can delete a group of documents by using the Mass Document Operations Wizard To delete a group of documents you must have Delete rights to each document or you must have Manage rights and be a librarian for the library For more information see Section 15 15 Managing Gro
53. 17 Integrating GroupWise with Your Applications 0 0 0 0 assau aeaaaee 363 15 17 1 Integrating Applications During Setup 363 15 17 2 Integrating Applications After Setup 363 15 17 3 Turning Off Integrations 364 15 17 4 Turning On Integrations 365 15 17 5 Using Non Integrated Applications 366 15 18 Returning Documents to the Library 367 15 18 1 Using Reset Document Status 368 15 18 2 Using Reset Document Status in Remote Caching Mode 368 15 18 3 Using the Unreturned Documents Dialog Box 369 15 19 Replacing a Document with a Backup File 369 16 Maintaining GroupWise 371 16 1 Managing Non Standard Login Requirements 371 16 1 1 Logging In to Your Mailbox from Another User s Workstation 371 16 1 2 Logging In to Your Mailbox from a Shared Workstation 371 16 2 Managing Mailbox Passwords 372 16 2 1 Using LDAP Authentication instead of GroupWise Passwords 372 16 2 2 Adding Ch
54. 5 Saving Calendar Items 155 4 5 Setting Calendar Alarms 155 4 5 1 Setting the Default Alarm 1 0 0 0 cette teens 155 4 5 2 Setting an Alarm on a Calendar Item 156 4 5 3 Sending an Alarm to an Electronic Pager 156 4 6 Sharing a Personal Calendar 156 4 6 1 Sharing an Existing Calendar with Other Users 157 4 6 2 Posting a Calendar Entry to a Shared Calendar 158 4 7 Subscribing to an Internet Calendar 158 4 7 1 Manually Subscribing to an Internet Calendar 159 4 7 2 Subscribing to an Internet Calendar from a Link 159 Contents 5 6 Contents 4 7 3 Editing a Subscribed Internet Calendar 159 4 7 4 Deleting a Subscribed Internet Calendar 159 4 8 Publishing Personal Calendars on the Internet 160 4 8 1 Publishing a Personal Calendar 160 4 8 2 Modifying a Published Calendar s Settings 160 4 8 3 Unpublishing a Calendar
55. 7 1 Quickly Finding Items in a Folder 2 225 7 1 1 Finding tems oria Line re Rene ea ae Va ee ee Et au 225 7 12 Einding CONTACTS sen han rent eA until rene ics heen g BANE ee wre 226 7A Clearing a Find 22248288 dates es Se ea nus en ene dre pen ee 226 7 1 4 Creating and Saving a Find 4 226 7 1 5 Using a Saved Find 2 2 82 227 7 1 6 Deleting a Saved FInd 2 aide tein pu tas Li a KEEA E A tea eed bad 227 7 2 Finding Items Anywhere in Your Mailbox 227 7 2 1 Using a Global Find nde a eda dre Ae ee eked bbe 227 7 2 2 Narrowing a Global Find 0 0 cect eens 228 7 2 3 Finding an Item by Example 0 0c eee tenets 229 7 2 4 Saving the Results of a Find 229 7 2 5 Finding a Document and Creating a Reference to It in Your Mailbox 230 7 8 Using Advanced Find xs enfant nn ane be A eed ee eA ee ha glee ale ee 230 7 3 1 Composing an Advanced Find 231 7 3 2 Selecting Fields in Advanced Finds and Rules 231 1333 Using Operators in Advanced Finds and Rules 235 7 3 4 Using Wildcard Characters and Switches in Advanced Finds and Rules 237 FA Finding Textinn tems an yam
56. 87 Selecting the Method Used for Encrypting Items on page 87 Checking Whether the Digital Signature of an Item Was Verified on page 89 Viewing Received Security Certificates and Changing the Trust on page 89 Viewing Your Own Security Certificates on page 90 Importing or Exporting Security Certificates on page 90 Understanding Secure Message Concepts The security features described in this section are available only if you have installed one of the following security providers Entrust 4 0 or Higher You must install an Entrust client from Entrust Technologies Inc You must also have an Entrust security certificate issued by your administrator Microsoft Base Crytographic Provider Version 1 0 or Higher On Windows XP or later it is installed by default You must also obtain a security certificate from an independent certificate authority Microsoft Enhanced Crytographic Provider Version 1 0 or Higher On Windows XP or later it installed by default E Mail 83 84 Adding Security You can add security to the items you send by digitally signing them and or encrypting them When you digitally sign an item the recipient is able to verify that the item was not modified en route and that it originated from you When you encrypt an item you are able to ensure that the intended recipient is the only one who can read it When you sign or encrypt items using GroupWise the recipients can read the items wi
57. Another Item Type You can use Change To to convert an item in your Mailbox to another type of item For example you can change a mail message in your Mailbox to an appointment in your Calendar The new appointment contains all the information from the mail message such as To CC and BC lists subject and message text that is applicable in the appointment When you change a mail or phone message to another type of item such as an appointment or task the original item is removed from your Mailbox and the new item is added in the appropriate location such as the Calendar When you change an item GroupWise displays the default item view selected in Environment Options 1 In your Mailbox click the item you want to change 2 Click Edit gt Change To then click an item type or Click Edit gt Change To click More then click an item type You can choose posted or group items 112 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 4 3 Select All Ctr A Delete Del Delete and Empty Shift Del Empty Trash Calendars Reminder Note al oe a eminder Move Link te ELS Si e o Folders Phone Message More Posted items are sent directly to your Calendar Group items are sent to the Mailboxes of individuals and groups the message is sent to 3 Type any necessary information 4 Click Send or Post on the toolbar When you change a mail or phone message to another type of item such as an appointment or task the original item is remove
58. Click the operator drop down list click an operator then type your search criteria in the box or click a value if provided For example click then type Accounts to search for addresses from the Accounts department Use the operator that is most appropriate for your search Your search criteria such as a person s name or a subject can include wildcard characters such as an asterisk or a question mark Filter is not case sensitive to the criteria you type 5 To add more filter conditions click the last drop down list then click And After specifying all filter conditions read the text beginning with Include entries where as you create your filter to understand how your filter will work 7 Click OK then click Connect For more information on operators see Using Advanced Find on page 230 Remote and Caching Modes 281 282 Deleting Items from Your Remote Mailbox Use Delete and Empty and Manage Library Size to remove items from your Remote Mailbox Deleting Items from Your Remote Mailbox on page 282 Deleting Unneeded Documents from Your Remote Library on page 282 Document Reference Attachments and Remote Mode on page 282 Deleting Items from Your Remote Mailbox In Remote mode you can delete items retract items and empty the Trash the same way you would in the Online mode 1 Click the item in your Mailbox 2 Click Edit gt Delete 3 If you re deleting an outgoing ite
59. Dae Q3 Project Marie Lamaroux Working from Home 09 04 08 Benji Gensomino Computer Upgrades 09 04 08 12 16 PM Richard Steadman New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 19 PM Benji Gensomino Implementation 09 04 08 12 20 PM Ishmael Yacoub Marketing Briefing Notes 09 04 08 12 21 PM F1 Calendar BR Billing M Frequent Contacts M Janet DeSoto B Documents M Tasklist Work In Progress Cabinet Trash 13 _ Selecteds2 Totak7 G Address Book F P A Qinewmait Newappt M NewTask 1 1 I E Reply QO Replya Fy Accept FD Decline PR Delegate EF E8 Onlinev vy Favorites oe ena amp Mailbox Thu Sep 4 2008 M Tasklist AY Janet DeSoto Home September 2008 Mailbox SMTWTFS amp Sent Items G2 3 5 6 M Calendar 7 8 9 10111213 Frequent Contacts 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Janet DeSoto 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 B Documents M Tasklist Work In Progress Cabinet B Trash 13 LS 4 19 20 21 22 23 2425 26 27 28 29 30 31 Four default categories Follow Up Low Priority Personal and Urgent are available for you to immediately assign to items You can modify and delete them if you choose as well as create new categories If you assign one of the default categories Follow Up Low Priority Personal and Urgent to an item you are sending the item arrives in the recipient s Mailbox with that
60. Default You can change the name of your security certificate by clicking Edit Properties then editing the text in the Certificate name field The certificate name is reflected in the list and is not stored in the actual certificate This is not available when using Entrust Importing or Exporting Security Certificates When you export your security certificate with the private key to a file a password is required to protect the exported file You can use the exported file as a backup copy or you can import the file on another workstation If another user obtains the file and its associated password he or she can digitally sign items in your name and can read encrypted items you receive When you export your public certificate you can send it to another user The other user can then import your public certificate and send you encrypted items 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Certificates 3 Click Import or Export Import My Certificate Es Certificate file to import Browse Enter password vV Allow export of private key in the future Set strong private key protection Can or Click Certificate Authorities Certificates then click Import or Export 4 Type a filename including the path You can also click Browse to find the certificate file click the filename then click Save or Open 5 If required type your certificate password 6 Click OK 3 1 9 Saving Unfinished E Mail
61. Default gt Print Lunch Group Members To Anita Olivos To Basil Forsgren To Doug Newman To Samantha Murphy g Frequent Contacts Creating and Saving a Personal Group 1 In the Folder List select the Contacts folder where you want to create the personal group 2 Click New Group on the toolbar 194 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide oa fF OQ 8 84 New Group Essen File View Actions Help Close jj Save Hoel Mail Summary Details Name Comments Members 0 Contacts 0 Groups 0 Resources amp Add Frequent Contacts E Modified Type a name for the group Optional Type any comments such as a description for the group Click Add to open the Address Selector dialog box and display the address list Click To CC or BC then double click or Ctrl click and drag the users and resources for your group in the Group panel If the users you want to add are in a different address book click the address book on the Look In drop down list To restrict the list of entries by contacts groups or resources click an option on the drop down list To add an entry that is not in an existing Contacts folder click New Contact fill in the information click OK then double click the entry Click OK twice to save the group in the Contacts folder You can also create and save a personal group from the Address Selector when you are addressing a message or
62. Entry or To change an entry select it make the changes then click Replace Entry 3 Click Close when you have finished making changes Selecting the Spell Checker Language Click the Subject field or the Message field or Select the text to spell check 2 Click Tools gt Spell Check 3 Click Customize gt Language 4 Select the language to use then click OK 5 Click Close 3 1 5 Attaching Files Use Attach File to send one or more files to other users You can attach files that exist on your hard disk diskette or network drive to an item you are sending The recipients can open the attached file save it view it or print it If you change the attached file after you have sent it the recipients do not see the changes If you attach a file that is password protected the recipient cannot open or view the attachment without entering the password For information about attaching documents that are in a GroupWise Library see Attaching a Document Reference to an Item on page 77 Attaching a File to an Item on page 77 Attaching a Document Reference to an Item on page 77 Embedding an OLE Object in an Item on page 78 76 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Attaching a File to an Item 1 Opena new item 2 Fillin the To Subject and Message fields 3 Click the icon on the toolbar then browse to and select the file or files you want to send To attach more then one file in a f
63. Folder List click File gt New gt Folder 2 Click Find results folder 3 To create a Find Results folder with your own search criteria click Custom find results folder then click Next or To create a Find Results folder based on Find By Example click Custom find by example folder then click Next or If you want to use a predefined Find Results folder as a template for creating a custom folder click Predefined find results folder select the predefined folder you want to base your folder on for example Sent Items select Modify predefined find results folder then click Next 4 Type the name and the description for your folder 5 Click Up Down Right or Left to position the folder where you want it in the Folder List then click Next 6 Specify the search criteria find by example criteria or information for items you want to find 7 If you don t want the folder to update results each time you open it deselect Find new matching items each time the folder is opened GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 8 Click Next 9 Specify any display settings you want for this folder then click Finish 2 3 7 Using Shared Folders Understanding Shared Folders on page 57 Sharing an Existing Folder with Other Users on page 58 Creating a Shared Folder on page 58 Accepting Shared Folders on page 59 Posting an Item to a Shared Folder on page 59 Viewing Discussion Threads in a
64. GroupWise administrator Section 8 2 1 Starting Notify When GroupWise Starts on page 242 Section 8 2 2 Starting Notify from the Windows Start Menu on page 242 Starting Notify When GroupWise Starts You can configure Notify to start when GroupWise is opened whether you use a shared workstation or your own 1 In GroupWise click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt General 3 Select Launch Notify at startup This starts Notify when GroupWise starts and closes Notify when GroupWise is closed 4 Click OK then click Close Starting Notify from the Windows Start Menu 1 Click Start on the Windows taskbar 2 Click All Programs gt Novell GroupWise gt GroupWise Notify To make access easier you can create a shortcut to Notify on your Windows desktop Using Notify When you receive a notification the Notify dialog box displays for 15 seconds then closes During that time you have the following options Clear Clears the notification from your screen Cleared alarms do not repeat Read Opens the item for you to read Delete Deletes the item without opening it Close All Closes the Notify dialog box If there are multiple notifications in your Notification List subsequent notifications do not display Close Closes the Notify dialog box If there are multiple notifications in your Notification List the next notification displays If a Notify dialog box does not appear when you receive notification
65. GroupWise inserts the document number version and extension as the check out filename If you don t specify a different filename make a note of the filename so you can locate your checked out document Repeat Step 3 and Step 4 until you have specified check out filenames for each document In the Selected documents list box Ctrl click all the documents you want to check out Click Check Out While the document is checked out users who have View rights can look at the copy of the document in the library Document Management 329 15 8 3 Viewing All the Documents You Have Checked Out 1 Click Actions gt Check In 2 Click Show all checked out documents in selected library Check In FF ES Check in method CRUE Check in and move document z aa es Close Check in as Checked out version v Remove Documents to be checked in List of documents Show original list Show all checked out documents in selected library Select library Support Library Default Z Checked out location and filename Browse You can select a different library in the Select Library drop down list to see the documents you have checked out in that library 15 8 4 Updating a Checked Out Document without Checking It In 1 In your Mailbox click the document reference for the document you want to update in the library 2 Click Actions gt Check In 330 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide eee a o
66. If you or your system administrator has set up auto archiving of items in your Mailbox items in the Tasklist folder are also archived based on the original date you received the item not based on the due date you assign it If you have automatic archiving set up it only archives items to one computer If you are working on a computer where the automatic archive is not available the items are not archived to the computer where the archive is not available Viewing Archived Items 1 Inthe Main Window click File gt Open Archive or Click the folder list header drop down list above the Folder List it probably displays Online or Caching to indicate what mode of GroupWise you are running in then click Archive Unarchiving Items 1 Click File gt Open Archive or Maintaining GroupWise 377 Click the folder list header drop down list above the Folder List it probably displays Online or Caching to indicate what mode of GroupWise you are running in then click Archive 2 Click the item you want to unarchive click Actions gt Move to Archive 3 Click File gt Open Archive to close the archive and return to the Main Window or Click the folder list header drop down list above the Folder List it displays Archive then click your user folder your name to return to the mode of GroupWise you were running previously Unarchived messages are returned to the folder from which they were archived If the folder has been deleted
67. In the Target field after the GroupWise executable type a space type u then click OK 2 Start GroupWise 3 Type your user ID in the User ID field 4 Inthe Password field specify your password then click OK Logging In to Your Mailbox from a Shared Workstation If you use the same workstation for multiple people it is highly recommended that each user have a separate login for the workstation When GroupWise saves the display settings for a user they are saved to the current user s registry This allows GroupWise to display the settings for the user who is currently logged in to the workstation so each user can have a customized view When a user finishes using the workstation he or she should completely log out of the workstation This allows other users to log in to the system with their own GroupWise settings Maintaining GroupWise 371 16 2 16 2 1 16 2 2 However there are circumstances when having a different login for each user on the workstation is not a viable option In these cases there are some steps you should perform to properly set up GroupWise The login screen startup option allows you to specify certain criteria when starting GroupWise Perform the following steps 1 Right click the GroupWise icon on the desktop click Properties then click the Shortcut tab 2 Inthe Target field after the GroupWise executable type a space type u then click OK 3 Start GroupWise 4 Type your user ID in the User I
68. Janet DeSoto Re New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 42 PM B Ree a Richard Steadman Re New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 42 PM Tasklist David Jones Training Slides 09 04 08 Work In Progress mn i H E Cabinet Trash 15 Selected 0 Total 14 Document references are created when you create a new document import a document copy a document select a document from the results of a Find or select File gt New gt Document Reference To see document references in your Mailbox or folder you must have a display setting selected that includes documents and posted items You can select a reference to check out check in open view copy or delete the corresponding document depending on the rights you have Multiple document references can point to the same document For example each employee in a company could create a reference to the employee handbook Sharing Document References with Other Users If you are the author of a document or if you have sharing rights to the document you can post the document reference in a shared folder and make it available to all users who have access to the folder Document References and Remote Caching Modes If you use Remote or Caching mode updating your Remote or Caching Mailbox always gives you all of your document references unless you choose to have none You can use the document references to retrieve copies of the documents into your Remote or Caching Mailbox Specifying Docu
69. Mailbox es Request Status Date Requested Delet Update Item Waiting to be Sent 8 30 2008 1 49 F Update Item Waiting to be Sent 8 30 2008 1 49 F Update Item Waiting to be Sent 8 30 2008 1 49 f Update Item Waiting to be Sent 8 30 2008 1 49 F Update Item Waiting to be Sent 8 30 2008 1 49 F Update Item Waiting to be Sent 8 30 2008 1 49 F New Mail Waiting to be Sent 8 30 2008 1 49 F Bl nee hd wil taikaa ba ha Cant 0 9N 9NNOG 1 40 TT Last connection 8 30 2008 1 49 PM To prevent a request from being processed click the request then click Delete Only requests that haven t been sent to the master GroupWise system and have the Waiting to be Sent status can be deleted If you have already sent a request to the master GroupWise system you cannot cancel the request Retrieving Items That Were Not Completely Downloaded If you set size limit restrictions or specified Subject Line Only when you downloaded items you might have items in your Remote Mailbox that are only partially downloaded 1 Select the items in your Remote Mailbox 2 Click Accounts gt Retrieve Selected Items Remote and Caching Modes 279 280 3 To connect immediately to your Online Mailbox click Connect Now or To create the request but not send it click Connect Later This way you can wait until you have several requests before you connect Using Busy Search in Remote Mode 1 Create a new appointment 2 To select the f
70. Marie Lamaroux Working from Home 09 04 08 Benji Gensomi Aei A Benji Gensomino Implementation 09 04 08 12 20 PM Ai Ishmael Yacoub Marketing Briefing Notes 09 04 08 12 21 PM David Jones Lunch 09 04 08 12 30 PM Discussion Threads Discussion Threads shows the e mail discussion of an original item and all its replies grouped in hierarchical order By default only items that are received are displayed in a discussion thread Figure 2 6 Discussion Threads View From Subject Date Eap Janet DeSoto Office Party 09 03 08 2 12 PM g Marie Lamaroux Working from Home 09 04 08 An Benji Gensomino a Bu E fn Janet DeSoto Re New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 40 PM BH Ae Richard Steadman Re New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 42 PM E Qr Janet DeSoto Re New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 42 PM amp 4 Richard Steadmar Re New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 42 PM AQ Benji Gensomino Implementation 09 04 08 12 20 PM Ao Ishmael Yacoub Marketing Briefing Notes 09 04 08 12 21 PM Q David Jones Lunch 09 04 08 12 30 PM By default only items that are in the folder are displayed in a discussion thread You can add other types of items to the folder to be viewed in the discussion thread For example sent items can be added to the folder to complete the discussion thread Getting Organized 53 54 To display sent items in a discussion thread 1 Right click the folder that is displaying discussion threads then click Properties 2 Click the D
71. Mode After the Caching Mailbox is primed you might want to run GroupWise in Caching Mode without changing modes from Online to Caching GroupWise automatically starts in the mode that it was last in 11 1 3 Changing to Caching Mode To change to Caching mode from any other mode 1 Click the Mode Selector then click Caching If your Caching mailbox is not located at the location currently specified in the Caching mailbox directory field under Tools gt Options gt Environment gt File Location you are prompted for the location This could happen if you run GroupWise on a workstation that is shared by multiple GroupWise users who have local Caching mailboxes If your Caching mailbox password is different from your Online mailbox password you are prompted for your Caching mailbox password For more information about passwords see Section 16 2 Managing Mailbox Passwords on page 372 2 When you are asked to restart GroupWise click Yes When GroupWise restarts you are in Caching mode Remote and Caching Modes 263 11 1 4 Setting Caching Properties You can set properties that determine how your caching mailbox functions 1 In Caching mode click Accounts gt Account Options gt Properties gt Advanced 2 Make sure the IP address and port are correct 3 To change the password click Online Mailbox Password type the old password type the new password twice then click OK Select whether to get only the
72. Notify options for Janet DeSoto V Subscribe to alarms V Subscribe to notification 6 Make sure Subscribe to notification and Subscribe to alarms are selected You are automatically subscribed to alarms and notification for yourself If you deselect Subscribe to alarms and Subscribe to notification for yourself you no longer receive alarms and notifications You need to repeat the steps in this topic for your username 7 Click OK 8 6 Sending an Alarm to an Electronic Pager You can set an alarm in your mailbox or calendar to notify you about the status of a message through an electronic paging device Notify must be running for you to receive notification of alarms incoming items or a change in status of outgoing items To set up alarms to be diverted to a pager 1 Make sure Notify is running 2 Right click in the Windows notification area then click Options 3 Click the Alarms tab 246 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide GroupWise Notify Options Es Retum Status BEEP gt o Launch program D E Send to pager Example 80014567 example com 4 Click Send to Pager 5 Specify the SMTP address for your electronic pager For example 8001234567 example com You can also use the GroupWise Pager Gateway addressing syntax For additional information see Configuring Paging Services in the GroupWise 8 Administration Guide Notify sends the subject of th
73. Online mode to Remote mode you can enter the path to the Remote Mailbox If this path does not exist Hit the Road runs automatically The following steps explain how to set up your Remote Mailbox by using Hit the Road 1 Make sure GroupWise is installed on the computer where you want to set up your Remote Mailbox 2 Make sure you have a password on your Online Mailbox 3 Run GroupWise in your office on your docked laptop or a workstation 4 Click Tools gt Hit the Road Remote and Caching Modes 267 268 5 6 Hit the Road Wizard Ea Welcome to Hit the Road This Wizard will guide you through the steps necessary to update your Remote Mailbox from your Network Mailbox Do you want your Remote Mailbox created on Another machine Novell Type your Mailbox password then click OK To create your Remote Mailbox on the docked laptop that is currently connected to the network with your Online GroupWise system click This Machine then click Next If you click This Machine and GroupWise is not installed on the docked laptop you are prompted to install GroupWise To use GroupWise away from your office click Yes to install GroupWise on the computer you re traveling with Continue with Step 7 or To create a setup diskette for another computer such as your home computer click Another Machine then click Next Have a diskette ready When your setup diskette is created insert it into the computer where you wa
74. Options Include entries where ee um End Cancel Author Created Glen J Delivered Document Number From Item Status Item Type Subject o All Fields For an explanation of the available fields see Section 7 3 2 Selecting Fields in Advanced Finds and Rules on page 231 The available operators depend upon the field you choose For information about the operators and their functions see Section 7 3 3 Using Operators in Advanced Finds and Rules on page 235 and Section 7 3 4 Using Wildcard Characters and Switches in Advanced Finds and Rules on page 237 4 Click the last drop down list then select an action And Creates a new row The Find results list items that match the conditions in each row joined by And Or Creates a new row The Find results list items that match the conditions in either row joined by Or The items don t need to match the conditions in both rows Insert Row Inserts a new row below the current row and pushes the remaining rows down Insert Row is useful if you ve already created some search criteria and you want to add more criteria in the middle Delete Row Removes the current row from the search criteria New Group Begins a new group of rows You can then join the groups by an And or Or If two groups are joined by And the items must match all conditions in both groups If two groups are joined by Or the items must match all conditions in either gr
75. Reply on page 108 Replying to an E Mail in a Shared Folder on page 108 Replying to an E Mail 1 Open the item you want to reply to 2 Click Reply on the toolbar to send the e mail just to the sender or Click Reply All on the toolbar to send the e mail to the sender and all recipients 3 Type your message then click Send on the toolbar If the original item included BC or CC recipients and you selected to reply to all your reply is sent to the CC recipients but not to the BC recipients Including the Sender s Message or Attachments in a Reply When replying to an e mail you can select to include the sender s message and any attachments included with the message Open the e mail you want to reply to Click Actions gt Reply Select whether to reply to the sender or reply to all To include the sender s message select Include message received from sender To include the sender s attachments in the reply select Include attachments received from sender Click OK oa fF OON E Mail 107 108 Setting the Default Reply Format 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt Reply Format 3 If you use the Plain Text reply format select from the following format options GroupWise classic Provides separator characters original sender date and time Include Headers Allows the selection of the separator character provides original sender recipient date time and subject Internet standard
76. Reply BA Reply All E Forward F8 Online T Calendar Contacts Mailbox Find vy Favorites From Subject Date E Calendar Janet DeSoto Office Party 09 03 08 2 12 PM gt a Marie Lamaroux Working from Home 09 04 08 M Tasklist Benji Gensomino Computer Upgrades 09 04 08 12 16 PM Richard Steadman New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 19 PM a Janet DeSoto Home Benji Gensomino Implementation 09 04 08 12 20 PM gt a Ishmael Yacoub Marketing Briefing Notes 09 04 08 12 21 PM 2 Sent Items David Jones Lunch 09 04 08 12 30 PM Calendar Janet DeSoto Re New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 40 PM f Frequent Contacts Richard Steadman Re New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 42 PM Janet DeSoto Re N Richard Steadman R P E Janet DeSoto 2EM Documents M Tasklist amp Work In Progress E Cabinet Projects Plans P Trash 7 Selected 1 Total 11 Reading Received E Mail You can read items you receive in your Mailbox or Calendar Your Mailbox displays a list of all of the items you have received from other users Posted appointments tasks and reminder notes appear in your Calendar not in your Mailbox You can open and read all types of new items in your Mailbox However you might want to read tasks and reminder notes in your Calendar so you can view new messages while looking at your schedule E Mail 101 102 Phone and mail mess
77. Scheduling a Reminder Note for Yourself on page 145 Scheduling a Reminder Note for Others on page 145 144 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Scheduling a Reminder Note for Yourself A reminder note to yourself is called a posted reminder note Posted reminder notes are placed in your Calendar on the date you specify They are not placed in your Mailbox or in any other user s Mailbox 1 2 From your Calendar open a view with a Reminder Notes List for example the Week view Click a date then double click an empty space in the Reminder Notes List 3 If necessary click to specify a start date or auto date for your reminder note 4 Type a subject and the reminder note message 5 You can specify many options such as making this reminder note a high priority and more by clicking the Send Options tab Click Post on the toolbar To access the information later open your Calendar and select the date the information appears on Double click the reminder note in the Reminder Notes List Scheduling a Reminder Note for Others 1 Click File gt New gt Reminder Note J Reminder Note To ce aS File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help Send 3 Cancel E Address Ll See 45 6 M amp Reminder Note Send Options From x Janet DeSoto cc To BC Start date Thu Sep 4 2008 E Subject Segoe UI y By Bz u HE Eel S
78. Section 3 1 12 Sending Phone Messages on page 94 E Mail 67 68 3 1 1 3 1 2 Selecting the Default Compose View By default GroupWise provides the HTML Compose view for composing items The HTML view offers a broad selection of fonts point sizes and colors text formatting options that include paragraph styles indentation bulleted lists numbered lists hyperlinked text and horizontal lines as well as image options for embedded images and background images If you prefer a simpler editing environment you can use the Plain Text Compose view 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt Views 3 Select either Plain text or HTML 4 Select the font and font size in the appropriate fields 5 Click OK TIP In a new item you are composing you can change your Compose view for that one item by clicking View gt Plain Text or View gt HTML Composing E Mail 1 Click New Mail on the toolbar You can select a different mail view by clicking the down arrow next to New Mail 2 In the To box type a username then press Enter Repeat for additional users or To select usernames from a list click Address Book on the toolbar search for and double click each user then click OK 3 If necessary type usernames in the CC and BC boxes CC Carbon Copy Carbon copy recipients CC receive a copy of an item CC recipients are users who would benefit from the information in an item but are not affected by o
79. Shared Folder on page 59 Deleting a Shared Folder on page 59 Understanding Shared Folders A shared folder is like any other folder in your Cabinet except other people have access to it and it appears in their Cabinets You can create shared folders or share existing personal folders in your Cabinet You choose whom to share the folder with and what rights to grant each user Then users can post messages to the shared folder drag existing items into the folder and create discussion threads You cannot share system folders which include the Calendar Documents Mailbox Sent Items Tasklist Contacts Cabinet Work In Progress Junk Mail and Trash folders Figure 2 7 Shared Folder View eS 3 SD Novell GroupWise Plans File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help Home Mailbox 1 Calendar Sentitems Contacts G Address Book amp A LjNewmail NewAppt M NewTak B El A amp B Gireply Bo Reply all Gy Forward F8 Onlines gt Plans Find vy Favorites Name Subject Date E Calendar a Implementation 09 04 08 12 20 2 Mailbox 1 Wi Tasklist a Janet DeSoto Home b Mailbox 1 Sent Items E Calendar Frequent Contacts Janet DeSoto H Documents M Tasklist Work In Progress Cabinet E Projects Piens B Trash 7 Selected 1 Total 1 If you place a document in a shared folder people with rights to the share
80. Signed and encrypted item Specific version of a document Official version of a document Unopened mail message with a low standard or high priority Opened mail message with a low standard or high priority Unopened and opened appointment with a low standard or high priority Unopened and opened task with a low standard or high priority Unopened reminder note with a low standard or high priority Opened reminder note with a low standard or high priority Unopened phone message with a low standard or high priority Opened phone message with a low standard or high priority A reply is requested for this low standard or high priority item Getting Started 29 1 10 1 10 1 1 10 2 Icon LE ARR EDS Description In a Busy Search the icon indicates that you can click a scheduled time next to the username or resource to display more information about the appointment However the user or resource owner must give you appointment Read rights in the Access List before this icon appears An alarm is set for this Calendar item A group appointment reminder note or task A private Calendar item A Calendar item that was declined but not deleted Unopened document reference Opened document reference Shared folder notification Shared address book notification Unopened posted item shared folder Opened posted item shared folder Learning More You can learn more about GroupWise fr
81. Solutions Web Community Getting Started 31 32 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Getting Organized In Getting Started you learned the basics of the GroupWise environment Now in Getting Organized you learn how to transform the basic GroupWise environment into an efficient customized collaboration environment that suits your personal work style Section 2 1 Customizing the GroupWise Interface on page 33 Section 2 2 Using Categories to Organize Items on page 40 Section 2 3 Using Folders to Organize Your Mailbox on page 45 Section 2 4 Using Panels to Organize Your Home Folder on page 60 Section 2 5 Customizing Other GroupWise Functionality on page 63 2 1 Customizing the GroupWise Interface You can select to customize the look and feel of GroupWise in many different ways Section 2 1 1 Selecting a GroupWise Scheme on page 33 Section 2 1 2 Customizing Individual GroupWise Appearance Settings on page 34 Section 2 1 3 Customizing the Main Toolbar on page 36 Section 2 1 4 Setting Your Default Start Folder on page 38 Section 2 1 5 Setting Default Views for Reading on page 38 Section 2 1 6 Setting the Default Read Compose View and Font on page 38 Section 2 1 7 Setting the QuickViewer Default Behavior on page 39 Section 2 1 8 Changing Your Default Item Views on page 39 Section 2 1
82. Three or more columns columns lt a Q D a is g Available Panels Column One pian Aad Move Up Recent Activity gt Edit Panel j rar Calendar Move Down It a Deltemeneta es lens Edit Delete Column Two Move Up Tasklist Move Down Edit Add Delete Restore Defaults Cancel 5 Select whether you want to view the panels in one two or three columns If you select Three or more columns select the number of columns in the column field 6 Select from the list of available panels or create your own panels by clicking New Panel 7 Click Add next to the column you want the column to display in 8 Optional Click Move Up or Move Down to position the column where you want it to display 9 Click OK 24 5 Creating a New Panel 1 Click the panel drop down arrow then click Add Panel 2 Click New Panel Getting Organized 61 Create Panel Name the new panel New Panell Cancel Choose folder or Web page Selected folder janet desoto Home Change Folder Selected Web page re Choose display settings View by Details Z More Display Settings Choose filter Filter lt No Filter gt 3 Type the panel name in the Name the new panel field 4 Select whether you want the panel to display a folder or Web page If you select a folder click Change Folder to select the folder to display the contents of or If
83. Use same setting for all types to use the same settings for all types of items 5 Select the following options for items when opened when accepted when completed and when deleted 5a Select if you want the Notify pop up dialog box to display 5b Select if you want to play a sound If you select to play a sound click the folder to browse to and select the sound you want Notify to play 5c Select if you want Notify to launch a program when notifying you 6 Click OK Being Notified of Someone Else s Messages Notify must be running for you to receive notification of alarms incoming items or a change in status of outgoing items You can receive notification for another GroupWise user only if he or she has given you appropriate Proxy rights in his or her Access List and if you have added that user s name to your Proxy List in GroupWise See Section 10 Mailbox Calendar Access for Proxy Users on page 257 for more information You cannot receive notification for someone who is in a different post office than you 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Security then click the Notify tab 3 Type the name of a user for whom you proxy 4 Click Add User 5 Click the user s name in the Notification List Notify 245 Security Options ME Password Notify Proxy Access Send Options Name Add User Remove User Notification list Name Address Janet DeSoto jdesoto Marketing Pr
84. Web Community 31 2 Getting Organized 33 2 1 Customizing the GroupWise Interface 33 2 1 1 Selecting a GroupWise Scheme 33 2 1 2 Customizing Individual GroupWise Appearance Settings 34 Contents 3 4 Contents 2 1 3 Customizing the Main Toolbar 36 2 1 4 Setting Your Default Start Folder 38 2 1 5 Setting Default Views for Reading 38 2 1 6 Setting the Default Read Compose View and Font 38 2 1 7 Setting the QuickViewer Default Behavior 39 2 1 8 Changing Your Default Item Views 39 2 1 9 Automatically Reading the Next Item in Your Mailbox 40 2 1 10 Changing the GroupWise Interface Language 40 2 2 Using Categories to Organize ItemS 40 2 2 1 Understanding Categories 40 2 2 2 Assigning Categories to ltems 42 2 2 3 Working with Categories 44 2 3 Using Folders to Organize Your Mailbox
85. Word document 1 Click File gt New gt Document 2 Click Select an Application click the application you want to use as a template in the Applications list box then click OK The Applications list box contains all the applications that are registered as having templates in your Windows registry file 3 Type a subject for the document To specify additional information about the document such as author or document type click Properties after you type the subject 4 Click OK Using a GroupWise Template to Create a Document 1 Click File gt New gt Document New Document Ex Select an application Select a file Templates library Support Library Default v 4 w p Library where document will be stored Support Library Default x 2 Click Select a GroupWise template then select a template in the list box To select a template from a different library click the library in the drop down list 3 Click OK Document Management 311 New Document Ex Document subject Open document now Cancel Properties 4 Type the subject of the document then click OK To specify additional information about the document such as author name or document type click Properties after you type the subject 5 Double click the document reference in the current folder to open the new document You can select Open document now to immediately open the documen
86. Z C Receiwed C Sent C Posted Draft From aj To CC a Subject Message Attachments ok Cancel 2 Inthe Item type drop down list click the type of item you want to search for 3 If you selected Document in Step 2 click the library you want to search in the Library drop down list 4 Ineach field specify the information you want to look for 5 Click OK to begin the Find 7 2 4 Saving the Results of a Find 1 Click Tools gt Find 2 Perform a Global Find 3 In the GroupWise Find Results dialog box click File gt Save As Folder Finding Items 229 1 25 230 Create Find Results Folder Name the new folder and set its position in the folder list Name Find Results Folder Description Position fat Janet DeSoto Home 4 Mailbox 8 amp Sent Items FS Calendar Frequent Contacts Documents SF Tasklist Work In Progress Cabinet i Find Results Folder Q3 Shared Folder m V Find new matching items each time the folder is opened 4 Type a name for the folder type a description for the folder click Up Down Right or Left to place your folder where you want it to display in your Folder List then click Finish To see your Global Find results at any time select the folder For more information about Find Results folders see Understanding Find Results Folders on page 56 You can update a Global Find folder each time you open it Make sure Find new
87. a Document 323 Publishing Documents to the Web with WebPublisher 324 15 6 1 Composing a Document 324 15 6 2 Publishing a Document 324 15 6 3 Locating and Viewing a Published Document 326 Viewing the History of a Document 327 15 7 1 Viewing the Activity Log for Deleted Documents 327 15 7 2 Viewing the Activity of a Document 327 15 7 3 Viewing Who Has a Document Open or Checked Out 328 Checking Out Documents 2 328 15 8 1 Checking Out a Document 328 15 8 2 Checking Out Multiple Documents 329 15 8 3 Viewing All the Documents You Have Checked Out 330 15 8 4 Updating a Checked Out Document without Checking It In 330 Opening Documents ie eee et Ee eee ea deat one 331 15 9 1 Opening a Document 2 0 ccc tenes 332 15 9 2 Opening Multiple Versions of a Document 333 Checking In Boc um nts 314 288 rares nement Rate etes Geechee meted Goad 333 15 10 1 Checking In a Document
88. a Folder 1 Inthe Folder List right click the folder then click Rename 2 Type a new name for the folder You cannot rename the Calendar Documents Mailbox Sent Items Tasklist Contacts Cabinet Work In Progress or Trash folders Deleting a Folder 1 Right click the folder you want to delete then click Delete 2 Click Yes to confirm the deletion You cannot delete the Calendar Documents Mailbox Sent Items Tasklist Contacts Cabinet Work In Progress or Trash folders You can delete the Junk Mail folder only if Junk Mail Handling has been disabled To delete a folder that is shared with you right click the folder click Delete then click Yes Deleting Multiple Subfolders at Once You can delete multiple folders contained within another folder 1 Open the folder containing the subfolders 2 Inthe item list select the subfolders you want to delete 3 Right click the selected folders then click Delete 4 Select whether to delete only the items contained in the folders or the items and the folders then click OK Getting Organized 49 50 2 3 4 Managing Item Lists in Folders Enabling Group Labels for a Folder on page 50 Enabling Message Previews for a Folder on page 50 Using Columns on page 50 Moving or Linking an Item to Another Folder on page 52 Changing the Item Read Options on page 52 Enabling Group Labels for a Folder Group Labels organize a list of items based
89. address book is linked to an entry in another book When one is updated the other is also updated Links are created when you copy an entry from one address book to another Links are also created when entries from the GroupWise Address Book are added to your Frequent Contacts address book because correspondence has occurred 214 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 6 5 17 6 5 18 Choosing the Display Format of Names In the Main Window click amp on the toolbar Click View gt Name Format Click a radio button to display address books by first name first or last name first Ctrl click the personal address books you want the format to apply to ao A O N Click Apply to selected books to apply these changes without exiting the dialog box or Click OK to apply these changes and exit the dialog box Sorting an Address Book 1 In the Main Window click G on the toolbar 2 Click the address book you want to sort 3 Right click the column you want to sort by then click Sort on column First for example sort by the E Mail Address column rather than by the Name column or Right click any column heading click Sort All Ascending for example A to Z or 1 2 3 or Sort All Descending for example Z to A or 3 2 1 to sort the column entries Importing and Exporting Addresses and Address Books Use the Import and Export features to transfer your existing Novell and third party address books into and out of a Grou
90. all e mails If you set up a vCard your vCard is added automatically to all e mails as well You can have both a signature and a vCard at the same time Understanding Global Signatures In addition to personal signatures your system administrator can create a global signature for everyone to use on external Internet messages If the system administrator requires the global signature it is automatically appended to all items that are sent If a global signature is available but not required it is appended to your signature if you already use a personal signature If you don t have a personal signature the global signature is added only if required When you resend an item the global signature is not automatically added to the message GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 1 7 Routing Mail to Multiple Recipients Consecutively Use Routing Slip to send a mail message or task to several users consecutively You determine the order of the route When a user marks the routed item Completed it is sent to the next user on the route If there are attachments to the routed item each user on the route can view and add comments to them When comments are added to an attachment all subsequent users on the route see the comments The final user on the route sees all the comments that were added You can track the status of a routed item you have sent by checking the item s Properties When you send a routed item to an external address th
91. amp icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the organization Sending Messages to a Personal Organization You can simultaneously send e mail messages to all users in a personal organization 1 In the Folder List select the Contacts folder where you want to send an e mail to a personal organization 2 Right click the organization then click Details Organizations are marked by the amp icon 3 Click Send Mail or Click the down arrow next to the Send Mail button then click one of the following options Send Mail Send Appointment Send Note Send Task Send Phone Message Working with Address Books Address books are the databases that store contact information including names address e mail addresses phone numbers and much more Contacts folders give you a more flexible view of address book information Section 6 5 1 Opening an Address Book on page 203 Section 6 5 2 Creating a Personal Address Book on page 204 Section 6 5 3 Editing a Personal or Frequent Contacts Address Book on page 204 Section 6 5 4 Renaming a Personal Address Book on page 205 Section 6 5 5 Copying a Personal Address Book on page 205 Section 6 5 6 Deleting a Personal Address Book on page 205 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 6 5 1 Section 6 5 7 Setting Address Book Properties on page 206 Section 6 5 8 Using Predefined Filters for the Frequent Contacts Address
92. applications When you turn off integrations your applications work like non integrated applications and GroupWise can t monitor when you open and save documents As a result your documents are returned to the library when you close the application not when you close the document Turning Off Integrations for All Your Applications on page 364 Turning Off Integrations for One Application on page 364 Turning Off Integrations for All Your Applications Documents Setup Registered applications Bitmap Image OpenDocument Drawing OpenDocument Presentation OpenDocument Spreadsheet OpenDocument Text Shortcut Text Document WinRAR archive WinRAR ZIP archive Enabled ee i Par Disabled Advanced A Turning Off Integrations for One Application 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Documents 2 Click the Integrations tab 3 Make sure the Enable integrations check box is selected 364 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 Deselect the Enable integrations check box then click OK 4 Inthe Registered applications box click the application for which you want to turn off integrations 5 Click Disabled then click OK When an application integration is disabled no text displays to the right of the application name in the Registered Applications list box 15 17 4 Turning On Integrations Application integration is enabled during GroupWise setup After set
93. attachments received fror 3 Click a reply option You can reply to the original discussion topic rather than to the item you are reading Or you can reply to any item you are reading whether it s an original discussion topic or someone else s reply In both cases these replies are posted in the shared folder and not sent to individuals If you reply privately to the individual who wrote the item your reply is not posted to the shared folder GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 3 4 3 4 4 Click OK 5 Type your reply then click Post on the toolbar Forwarding E Mail Use Forward to send items you receive and document references to other users The mail message includes your name and any additional comments you have made Forwarding an E Mail on page 109 Forwarding Multiple E Mails on page 109 If you want to automatically forward some or all messages to another e mail account see Section 9 4 3 Creating a Rule to Forward All Mail to Another Account on page 253 Forwarding an E Mail 1 Open the item you want to forward 2 Optional Click the drop down arrow on the Forward button and select the forwarding option you wish to use The option you select is saved as the default for the next time you use the Forward button 3 Click Forward on the toolbar or Click Actions gt Forward as Attachment 4 Add the names of the users to whom you want to forward the item 5 Optional Type a
94. click Documents 2 Click the Integrations tab 3 In the Registered applications list box click the application for which you want to specify the wait interval 4 Click Advanced then click the Non Integrated tab 366 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 18 OpenDocument Presentation C lees Non ntegrated Executable Message Display message for all non integrated applications that cannot be tracked by GroupWise Wait Set for This application Default for all applications Wait time to detect application 1 seconds Co Go 5 Click This application to apply the wait interval to the selected application or Click Default for all applications to apply the wait interval to all non integrated applications 6 Inthe Wait time to detect application field type the number of seconds GroupWise should wait for the application to open 7 Click OK Returning Documents to the Library Most of the time you open a document make changes and save it in the library without any interruptions however once in a while the power goes out or the network goes down and GroupWise can t copy your document back to the library This also happens if you exit GroupWise while a document is open in an application or if you exit GroupWise before you close a non integrated application In these cases GroupWise stores the document including any changes in a temporary directory called the staging directory The documen
95. click Properties To access the Full Folder List click the folder list header drop down list above the Folder List it probably displays Online or Caching to indicate what mode of GroupWise you are running in then click Full Folder List 314 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 3 3 2 Click the Documents tab Beene Properties General Display Documents The Documents folder displays the last several documents that you have touched as a user You may determine how many of those documents are to be displayed and when they are to be added to this folder Once you reach the document display count each time a new document is added to this folder the oldest document will no longer be displayed Document display count Actions that add documents to the folder Jl Create Open El View E Import 3 Select the check boxes to select which actions add document references to the Documents folder By default the Create and Open actions are selected This means document references are placed in the Documents folder when you create or open them Selecting View as an action places any document references in the Documents folder that were viewed with the Viewer not with the Quick Viewer 4 Click OK Changing the Maximum Number of References in the Documents Folder After the maximum number is reached an additional document reference added to the Documents folder causes the oldest document reference to b
96. comment if desired then click OK NO oO fF W Step 6 and Step 7 instruct the rule to accept the appointment for the resource only if the resource is available 8 Click Save then click Close Deleting a Personal Resource 1 In the Folder List select the Contacts folder where you want to delete the personal resource 2 Right click the resource then click Delete Resources are marked by the icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the resource 200 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 6 4 5 Managing Organizations Understanding Personal Organizations on page 201 Adding a Personal Organization on page 201 Modifying a Personal Organization on page 202 Deleting a Personal Organization on page 202 Sending Messages to a Personal Organization on page 202 Understanding Personal Organizations Each organization in a Contacts folder is marked with the Organization icon When you double click an organization the organization item view displays Figure 6 5 Organization Item View Li te es File View Actions Help Close FJ Save Delte 2 Send Mail F View Map Summary Details People Advanced Organization Corporate Phone Primary Contact Janet DeSoto Ex Address City Location State Province Zp Postal Code Country Web Site http A Comments Categories E Frequent Contacts Use this page to specify a name for the
97. connect now or connect later You can also configure your connection before you connect Downloading Items Rules Addresses and Documents to Your Remote Mailbox 1 If you re running GroupWise in Online mode click Tools gt Hit the Road type your Online Mailbox password select a connection phone number if prompted then click OK or If you re running GroupWise in Remote mode click Accounts gt Send Retrieve gt GroupWise Options 2 To retrieve items make sure Items is selected click Advanced click a tab if available click an option then click OK If you specify to limit the items you retrieve for example by selecting Get Subject Line Only or setting size limits you can download the rest of the item or items later See Retrieving Items That Were Not Completely Downloaded on page 279 If you are in Remote mode and only want to download new items select New Only on the Retrieve tab 3 Click OK 4 To retrieve rules click Rules 5 To retrieve addresses from the system Address Book click System Address Book click Filter specify the addresses to retrieve then click OK Because retrieving address books can take a long time with a modem connection it is recommended that you retrieve address books by using a network or TCP IP connection For more information about filtering the GroupWise address book see Filtering the GroupWise Address Book for Your Remote Mailbox on page 281 6 To retrieve your personal ad
98. create edit save and rename multiple address books for your personal use and you can share these address books with other users For information on creating a personal address book see Creating a Personal Address Book on page 204 Personal address books are marked with a Fl icon in the Address Book list You can add and delete names and address information for any contact person company or resource you want in your personal address books You can also create your own information properties fields When you create a personal address book a book icon is added to the Address Book list You can expand and collapse open books by clicking and When you create multiple address books you can include the same name and address in several books If the entry is copied from an address book and you edit the entry s information in one book it is updated in all books Personal address books list addresses according to your preferences You can also create personal groups If you save a list of people as a group you only need to type the group name in the To box to send the entire group a message See Organizing Addresses in Groups on page 194 180 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 6 1 4 6 2 LDAP Address Book The LDAP Address Book supports LDAP Lightweight Directory Services Protocol for accessing external directory services You can add directory services from your Internet service provider or third party companie
99. day event by selecting All Day Event located next to the time input field You can specify how you want the appointment to appear by clicking the availability button located below the All Day Event select box Appointments can appear as Busy Free Out of the Office or Tentative Unlike regular appointments by default all recipients receive all day event appointments as Free This is because all day events are often intended to be strictly informational for recipients For example you might send out an all day event to inform colleagues that you are going to be on vacation In this case colleagues who receive the event are not shown as Busy on the day of the event Time Input When you schedule appointments and other items you might be required to specify a time In most cases you have the option to specify the time by typing it directly into the time field or entering it through the time input field Click E to open the time input window Calendar 141 142 Figure 4 7 Time Input Window 1 00 PM 2 00 PM 1 Hour s 0 Minute s Time Zone Use the green arrow to select a start time and the red arrow to select an end time The currently selected times display on the right side of the screen You can use intervals as small as 15 minutes If a correct time has already been entered you can it by dragging the selected area up or down A time zone option is available to specify a specific time zone for the event For
100. documents to another person or if anew employee joins the company you might need to give him or her access to several documents You can use the Change Properties in the Mass Document Operations Wizard to efficiently perform these types of tasks reassigning documents changing document types and so on for groups of documents Changing the Properties of a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example on page 348 Changing the Properties for Selected Documents on page 350 Changing the Properties for a Group of Documents Listed in a File on page 351 You can change the subject author or document type for a group of documents In addition you can change the value of any custom fields defined in the library The fields you can modify vary depending on the location of the documents you select for the mass change operation If the documents you select are all stored in the same library you can make changes to system fields subject author and document type and custom fields If the documents you select are stored in different libraries you can modify only system fields GroupWise imposes this restriction because the libraries you select might not contain the same custom fields Changing the Properties of a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example 1 Click Tools gt Mass Document Operations 2 Inthe Operation group box click Change Properties 348 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Select the ope
101. for each item you send Click OK ON OD oa RAON a Setting Up a vCard vCards are electronic business cards formatted according to standards set by the Internet Mail Consortium A vCard file has a vcf extension and you can add the file to your outgoing e mail items Third party companies create software you can use to create vCards that include text graphics and sound When you use GroupWise to generate your vCard it uses the information from the fields in your Address Book listing 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt Signature 3 Select Electronic business card vCard to automatically add a vCard to every e mail you send 4 Select the source of the vCard information Generate from system address book Composes a vCard based on your personal information in the GroupWise Address Book Select from personal address book Allows you to select any user in a personal address book and create a vCard from their personal information This is useful when you send e mail on behalf of other users Select a vCard file Enables you to select a custom vCard vcf file provided by a third party company 5 Select whether you want to be prompted to add a vCard for each item you send 6 Click OK Adding the Signature or vCard to an E Mail If you selected Prompt before adding you re prompted for a signature or vCard each time you send an e mail If you selected Automatically add your default signature is automatically added to
102. from this e mail address or Internet domain are not blocked or delivered to the Junk Mail folder no matter what is specified in the Block List and Junk List 3 6 6 Modifying Junk Mail Handling Lists and Settings 1 Click Tools gt Junk Mail Handling 2 On the Settings tab modify any settings 3 Click the tab of the list you want to modify 4 To add an e mail address or Internet domain to a list click New type the e mail address or Internet domain then click OK An address or Internet domain can be in uppercase lowercase or mixed case For example amy example com and AMY EXAMPLE COM are both the same You cannot use wildcard characters such as or in an Internet domain name However an Internet domain such as idomain com affects all e mail from idomain com and any subdomains that prefix this Internet domain such as offers idomain com or members idomain com A domain of abcidomain com is not affected 5 To change an e mail address or Internet domain click the address or Internet domain click Edit make changes then click OK E Mail 121 6 To remove an e mail address or Internet domain from a list click the address or Internet domain then click Remove 7 Click OK 3 6 7 Automatically Deleting Items from the Junk Mail Folder 1 Click Tools gt Junk Mail Handling 2 Click Automatically delete items from the junk mail folder Items are moved to the Trash folder 3 Specify how long you want items retained in the Junk
103. in the Nav Bar If you also assigned the task to yourself you can find it in the Calendar or in the Tasklist folder 2 Open the task you want to check 3 Click the Properties tab Using the Tasklist Folder The Tasklist folder is a system folder used to keep track of GroupWise tasks and other items that require action Any item type mail appointment task reminder note phone message can be placed in the Tasklist folder Section 5 4 1 Adding an Item to the Tasklist Folder on page 171 Section 5 4 2 Creating a Tasklist in a Folder Other Than the Tasklist Folder on page 173 Section 5 4 3 Organizing the Tasklist Folder on page 174 Section 5 4 4 Assigning a Due Date to a Tasklist Item on page 176 Section 5 4 5 Tracking Status in the Tasklist Folder on page 176 Section 5 4 6 Printing the Contents of Your Tasklist Folder on page 177 Adding an Item to the Tasklist Folder Configuring New Tasklist Items on page 171 Moving an Item from Another Folder to the Tasklist Folder on page 172 Creating a Task or Tasklist Item in the Tasklist Folder on page 172 Marking an Item to Display in the Tasklist Folder on page 173 Configuring New Tasklist Items You can configure the type of item that is automatically created when you create a new item in the Tasklist 1 Click Tools gt Options gt Environment 2 Open the Default Actions tab 3 Under New Taskli
104. integer Depending on the operator you can specify a time period that the task falls within or specify an exact date Specify part or all of the Subject field Specify a single letter Specify an integer Specify Read Watch or Ignore Specify a To field name 7 3 3 Field Name This Field Refers to Field Criteria Entry Total Recipients The total number of recipients of an item Depending on the operator you can specify an integer or select a variable from the drop down list Version Created Date The date a specific version of adocument Depending on the operator was Created you can specify a time period that the document falls within or specify an exact date Version Creator The name of the person who created this Specify the document version of a document creator s name Version Description The description of the document version Specify a document version description Version Number The version number of the document Select the version from the drop down list or click Select Version and specify the version number Version Status The current status of a document Select a status from the drop down list View Name The name of the view in which you re Specify a view name creating or reading an item The view names correspond to the names displayed when you click the down arrow next to the item view buttons on the toolbar Using Operators in Advanced Finds and Rules When you click Advanced Find
105. link that is provided in the appointment or Copy the provided URL and paste it into a Web browser For information about how to use Novell Conferencing after you have accessed your meeting see the Novell Conferencing User Guide http www novell com documentation novell_conferencing conferencing_user_guide data bookinfo html Receiving Conferencing Calendar Items within GroupWise Novell Conferencing appointments are handled like any other GroupWise calendar item For example you can accept decline or delegate Conferencing appointments within GroupWise For more information about receiving calendar items in GroupWise see Section 4 4 Receiving Calendar Items on page 151 400 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide A 1 What s New in GroupWise 8 Welcome to the GroupWise 8 client You ll find new features a fresh user interface and significant updates The following list is an overview of the new features in GroupWise 8 Section A 1 Improved Interface on page 401 Section A 2 New Folder Types on page 402 Section A 3 E Mail Improvements on page 402 Section A 4 Calendar Improvements on page 403 Section A 5 Tasklist on page 403 Section A 6 Address Book on page 404 Section A 7 Integrations with Other Novell Products on page 404 Section A 8 Other Enhancements on page 405 Improved Interface The GroupWise 8 Windows client has been i
106. list of all his or her moved documents and the new location of the documents Other users who are not authors of the document are not notified that the document was moved GroupWise automatically updates any document references to moved documents at the end of the move process However if a document reference is attached to a mail message GroupWise does not update the reference Instead when a user clicks the attached document reference a message displays that explains the document was moved and gives the new location of the document Moving a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example 1 Click Tools gt Mass Document Operations 2 Inthe Operation group box click Move 358 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Select the operation you want to perform The operation will affect all versions of a document Operation Change properties D Change sharing g D Copy Delete Selection method Use Find Advanced Find to select documents Use Find by Example to select documents Use currently selected documents Use documents listed in a file Browse Process errors only ico O i 3 Inthe Selection method group box click Use Find by Example to select documents then click Next Item type Document Library Support Library Default Z Document text Document number Subject Document type Author Creator Date created Official version Curr
107. machine s time zone Working with Time and Date Differences You can configure the Calendar to show the difference between two time zones and to calculate start and end dates based on a specified number of days Use Time Zone Difference to see the time zone in one locale based on the time zone in another For example if you are in New York you can use Time Zone Difference to see the time in London You can calculate a starting or ending date based on a given date and a specified number of days For example you might have a deadline 90 days after a certain action Date Difference lets you calculate the date the deadline will fall on Calculating a Start or End Date on page 128 Calculating a Start or End Date 1 Click Tools gt Date Difference 2 To calculate a start date when you know the end date click the arrow buttons to move forward or backward one month or year at a time in the End Date group box then click a date or To calculate an end date when you know the start date use the arrow buttons to move forward or backward one month or one year at a time in the Start Date group box then click a date 3 Type a number in the Number of days different text box 4 Click Calculate Start Date then view the calculated start date in the Start Date text box and calendar or Click Calculate End Date then view the calculated end date in the End Date text box and calendar Understanding the Calendar Item Icons The
108. mail product that supports GroupWise Library or if the library is unavailable only a copy of the document opens If the recipient edits the copy the changes do not affect the actual document in the library For more information about document rights see Section 15 5 Sharing Documents on page 320 To attach a document reference to an item 1 Opena new item 2 Fillin the To Subject and Message fields 3 Right click in the Attachments window then click Attach Document Reference E Mail 77 C3 Mail To File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help AB Send 3 Cancel Gl Address H ee Goi 6 EE From v Benji Gensomino cc Mail Send Options To BC Subject Segoe Ul io B z u S EE SE j e npe Bs Attach File Attach Object Attach Document Reference Account Novell GroupWise View gt Arrange Icons 4 The Select Document dialog box displays Folders Available Documents fe Benji Gensomino Home Sent Items fF Calendar fe Frequent Contacts E B Documents M Tasklist 7 Work In Progress H Cabinet Trash m 0 From Subject Library Document Version Support Library Default LA 5 Inthe Library drop down list click the library that contains the document you want to attach 6 Inthe Document field type the document number If you don t know the number of the d
109. matching items each time the folder is opened is selected Click Tools gt Find Click OK to begin the Find a Ff N The GroupWise Find Results dialog box displays only the documents to which you have at least View rights GroupWise creates a document reference in the current folder 7 3 Using Advanced Find Use Advanced Find when you want to use very specific and possibly complex search criteria Advanced Find is available both from Find and from Global Find Section 7 3 1 Composing an Advanced Find on page 231 Section 7 3 2 Selecting Fields in Advanced Finds and Rules on page 231 Section 7 3 3 Using Operators in Advanced Finds and Rules on page 235 Section 7 3 4 Using Wildcard Characters and Switches in Advanced Finds and Rules on page 237 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Finding a Document and Creating a Reference to It in Your Mailbox On the Find by Example tab click Document from the Item type drop down list Specify the information about the document you want to search for In the GroupWise Find Results dialog box click the document for which you want to create a document reference then click OK 7 3 1 Composing an Advanced Find 1 Click Find in the Item List header of a folder or Click 7 on the toolbar 2 Click Advanced Find Select a field in the first drop down list click an operator then type or select a value Advanced Find em ex
110. message that contains a GroupWise display settings attachment right click the attachment in the attachment window 2 Click Import Display Settings The display setting is added to your list of available display settings For information on how to select a display setting see Selecting Saved Display Settings for a Folder on page 55 Understanding Find Results Folders A Find Results folder is a folder that displays the results of a query When the folder is opened GroupWise examines the search criteria defined for the folder searches for everything specified then displays everything it finds in the Item List You can act on items in a Find Results folder the same way you act on items in any folder such as opening forwarding printing copying moving or deleting them The original item remains stored in the folder where the search found it and is also acted on This means that if you move or delete an item from a Find Results folder the item is deleted from the Item List and from the original location You can see the folder where each item originated if you open a Find Results folder and look at the columns of information displayed in the Item List The Folder column lists where each item is actually stored You can create your own Find Results folders and define the search criteria you want such as all items from a particular address or all items with a certain word in the Subject line Creating a Find Results Folder 1 In the
111. more information on time zones see Specifying a Time Zone for an Appointment on page 142 Specifying a Time Zone for an Appointment The Time Zone feature lets you schedule a meeting for recipients in different time zones who will meet in a single location Normally GroupWise automatically adjusts meeting times based on the recipients time zones For example a meeting scheduled by a user in Utah for 10 00 would be displayed as 9 00 for a recipient in California and as 12 00 for a user in New York because these users are in different time zones Because GroupWise adjusts the time all the users scheduled for a conference call can call in at the same moment even though their local time might differ Use the Time Zone feature if you don t want GroupWise to adjust to the recipients local time zone For example if you are in the Saskatchewan time zone and include users from the Mountain Time US amp Canada time zone in your appointment you would use the Time Zone feature if these users are flying to Saskatchewan for the appointment Time Zone ensures that the appointment in their Calendars and Mailboxes shows the correct Saskatchewan time 1 Open and create a new appointment 2 Click Actions gt Select Time Zone click the Time Zone drop down list and select the time zone for the appointment location then click OK GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Select Time Zone CES Time Zone 07 00 Mountain Ti amp
112. not see the Repair Mailbox option in the Tools menu you need to copy the files listed above from the GWCheck directory novel1 groupwise gwcheck to the main GroupWise directory novell groupwise Analyzing and Fixing Databases The Analyze Fix Databases action of GroupWise Mailbox Maintenance can check your mailbox for various types of problems and can repair problems that it detects To check and optionally repair your Mailbox 1 Click Tools gt Repair Mailbox then click Yes 2 From the Action drop down list select Analyze Fix Databases 3 Select from the following Analyze Fix Databases options as needed Maintaining GroupWise 383 16 7 5 Structure The structure check verifies the structural integrity of the mailbox and reports the amount of space that could be recovered if the mailbox is rebuilt Index Check If you select Structure you can also select Index Check You should perform an index check if you try to open a message and get a read error or if someone sends you a message that does not appear in your mailbox even though the sender sees a Delivered status for the message Depending on the size of your mailbox an index check can be time consuming Contents A contents check verifies references to other items For example in your user database a contents check verifies that all messages listed in your mailbox actually exist in your message database In your message database a contents check verifies that all attac
113. on page 201 6 4 1 Creating a Contacts Folder 1 Right click the Frequent Contacts folder then click New Contacts Folder 2 Type the name for the new Contacts folder then press Enter 3 Right click the new Contacts folder then click Properties 186 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide On the General tab you can change the name of the Contacts folder and provide a description as needed 4 Click the Display tab 5 Select whether you want to view the Contacts folder by Address Cards Details or Panels Display options vary depending on how you choose to view the Contacts folder Sort By Select the GroupWise field that you want to sort the contacts by for example First Name or Last Name Sort Order Select Ascending or Descending Summary Select Summary to summarize contact information under each contact name Columns Select Columns to display all contact information on a single line organized into columns Under More Display Settings select the GroupWise fields that you want to use as column headers Show Group Labels Select Show Group Labels if you want contact information organized into expandable collapsible groups Contact Type Select the types of contacts that you want to display in the Contacts folder people groups resources or organizations Customize Panels Click Customize Panels to display contacts in one panel and other related information in one or more additional panels For instructions on setting
114. on the type of items displayed For example in your Mailbox folder Group Labels separate items based on the received date of the items 1 Right click a folder then click Properties 2 Click the Display tab 3 Select Show Group Labels 4 Click OK To collapse or expand Group Labels click the or sign next to the label Enabling Message Previews for a Folder A message preview shows two lines of the message You cannot configure the number of lines displayed 1 Right click a folder then click Properties 2 Click the Display tab 3 Select Message Preview 4 Click OK Using Columns The Item List in a folder is divided into columns Each column displays information about the items in the list For example different columns display the subject of items the date they were sent and so forth You can customize the column display for each folder Moving a Column on page 50 Resizing a Column on page 51 Adding a Column on page 51 Sorting by a Column on page 51 Removing a Column on page 51 Moving a Column Drag a column to a new position in the column header TIP You can also right click a column heading click More columns click a column name in the Selected columns box then click Down or Up GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Resizing a Column Drag the edge of the column heading to make the column wider or narrower Adding a Column 1 Right click the column h
115. other item 1 Inan item view click on the toolbar Address Selector o Lookin Novell Groupwise Address Book Jomm mmc bG Look for Match Name x Selected Routing Slip E Name E Mail c LS 8 Anita Olivos aolivos Art Ramirez aramire Basil Forsgren bforsgr B Benji Gensomino bgelso Conferencing Administrator confad 8 Doug Newman dnewrr 8 Flavian Haughey fhaugh _ a Tt i 8 N Details a4 7x 2 Double click contacts to add them to the right pane Contacts and Address Books 195 196 If the users you want to add are in a different address book click the address book on the Look In drop down list To restrict the list of entries to contacts groups or resources click an option on the drop down list 3 To add an entry that is not in an existing address book click New Contact fill in the information click OK then double click the entry 4 Click Save Group or If you want to save the group to a different address book than the one that is displayed click the arrow on the right of Save Group then select the address book 5 Type a name for the group 6 Type comments such as a description of the group 7 Click OK twice TIP You can also create a personal group by dragging and dropping an item addressed to multiple users into a Contacts folder to create a group consisting of the recipients of that item Adding Contacts to a Group
116. own Sent Items Frequent Contacts Janet DeSoto Workin Progress fg 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 G Cabinet 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Projects 28 29 30 D Marketing Briefing Notes it See O Trash 7 5 6 7 8 91011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 You can view the Calendar in various formats including week month and year To see another view click a different button on the Calendar toolbar You can right click any day in the Calendar to get more options For example you can see any day in an expanded view that displays in a separate window You can also switch between Graphic Display and Text Display Calendar 125 126 Fonts cannot be changed or modified in the calendar view However the text inside the appointment can be modified to other fonts styles and sizes If you want you can close your folder list to leave more room for other views in the Main Window Click View gt Folders List to open or close the Folder List display Switching the Calendar View Between Graphic Display and Text Display 1 Right click the Appointments List gt click Graphic Display to show lines in the box or Right click the Appointments List gt click Text Display to remove existing lines This only applies to calendar views that have an Appointments List Selecting Calendars to Display GroupWise has the ability to display m
117. page 300 Section 13 3 5 Deleting a News Account on page 300 13 3 1 Collapsing or Expanding All Threads in a Newsgroup 1 Right click the newsgroup then click Collapse All Threads Newsgroups 299 13 3 2 13 3 3 13 3 4 13 3 5 or Right click the newsgroup then click Expand All Threads Performing a Search on a Newsgroup Server 1 Right click the newsgroup then click Search on Server 2 In the first drop down list click the field you want to search type the search words in the Contains field then click OK 3 Double click an item in the GroupWise Find Results dialog box to read the item Specifying Download Settings for Individual Newsgroups The download settings for an NNTP account are specified in Accounts gt Account Options gt News gt the account gt Properties gt Advanced Use the following procedure to change the download settings for an individual newsgroup in the NNTP account 1 Right click the newsgroup folder then click Properties 2 Click the NNTP tab 3 Deselect Use download settings from account 4 Select options in the Override Account group box 5 Click OK Updating the Local Newsgroup Folder 1 Click Accounts gt Account Options 2 Click the News tab then click General Options 3 Click Send Retrieve All Marked Accounts every check box then specify how often you want to update the folders contents 4 Click the Send Retrieve All Marked Accounts at startup check box t
118. person s Calendar after the item has been accepted You can schedule a due date for the task and include a priority such as A1 Uncompleted tasks are carried forward to the next day See Section 5 3 1 Assigning a Task on page 168 TIP You can also create a Tasklist that is not associated with your Calendar In this type of Tasklist any item type mail appointment task reminder note phone message can be used Reminder Note A reminder note is posted on a specific date on your own or another person s Calendar You can use reminder notes to remind yourself or others of deadlines holidays days off and so forth See Section 4 3 3 Sending Reminder Notes on page 144 Phone Message A phone message helps you inform someone of a phone call or visitor You can include such information as caller phone number company urgency of the call and so forth You cannot answer your phone from a phone message See Sending Phone Messages on page 94 Identifying Icons Appearing Next to Items The icons that appear next to items in your Mailbox Sent Items folder and the Calendar show information about the items The following table explains what each icon means Table 1 1 Icon Descriptions Icon Description In Remote or Caching mode indicates that the item has been queued but the queue has not been uploaded After the item has been uploaded it indicates that status information has not been received about the ite
119. portions of text Formatting Lists in a Plain Text Message In an open item you are composing in the Plain Text view 1 Press Ctrl Shift L to insert a bulleted list 2 Press Ctrl Shift L again to change it to a numbered list 3 Continue to press Ctrl Shift L to select from the six list formats available 4 Type a list item then press Enter to create the next item in the list 5 To turn off the list formatting press Enter twice after the last list item Undoing the Last Text Action in a Plain Text Message You can undo the last text action in the Subject or Message field of a message you are composing 1 Click Edit gt Undo You can also use Ctrl Z for Undo For information about other shortcut keys see Appendix D Shortcut Keys on page 413 Using Custom Views in the GroupWise Text Editor Custom views make it possible to create an e mail template then save that template to use again This is helpful when you want to frequently send an e mail that has certain text or certain appearance You can create an e mail message with your desired look and feel then save that e mail message as a custom view Saving a Custom View on page 72 Opening a Custom View on page 73 Defining the Location Where Custom Views are Saved on page 73 NOTE Some HTML formatting might not be preserved if you save an HTML message as a view Using a Plain Text message for a custom view is recommended Saving a Custom View
120. processes only the documents that generated errors during the previous session In the Select library to move documents to list box click the destination library then click Next 6 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file You can click Generate a log file without performing the move operation to see the outcome of the move without actually moving the documents If you are a librarian in the destination library you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents you are copying Allow Documents With Validation Errors To Be Created or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors Click Finish to move the documents GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 16 15 16 1 Viewing Documents When Your Network or GroupWise Is Unavailable After you have edited and closed a document or documents in your Online Mailbox you can have a copy of every document you edited placed in your Remote Library This is called document echoing When your network GroupWise Library or GroupWise post office is unavailable you can open and modify your latest edited documents in Remote or Caching mode Section 15 16 1 Enabling Document Echoing on page 361 Section 15 16 2 Deleting Unneeded Documents from Your Remote Library on page 363 You must have a Remote or Caching Mai
121. receive an error If you have copied an OLE object to the clipboard you can embed it in an open item by using Paste Special on the Edit menu Adding a Signature or vCard Use Signatures to insert a signature or tag line at the end of items you send For example you can have GroupWise automatically list your name phone number and e mail address at the bottom of every item you send If you have a number of different accounts including POP3 IMAP4 and NNTP newsgroup accounts you can create a different signature for each account You can also create multiple signatures for the same account Signatures are created in HTML which allows you to add graphics and formatting to your signature When you send a text message the HTML signature is converted to text You can also have GroupWise automatically add a vCard or virtual business card to the end of messages Creating a Signature on page 80 Setting Up a vCard on page 80 Adding the Signature or vCard to an E Mail on page 80 Understanding Global Signatures on page 80 E Mail 79 80 Creating a Signature Click Tools gt Options then double click Environment Click the Signature tab Select Signature then click New Type a name for the signature then click OK Create your signature in the HTML editor that is provided Select if you want this signature to be your default signature Select whether you want to be prompted to add a signature
122. right click amp in the Windows notification area then click Read Mail GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 8 4 8 4 1 8 4 2 8 4 3 Customizing Notify There are several options that you can set so that Notify works best for you including the following Section 8 4 1 Setting How Long to Display the Notification on page 243 Section 8 4 2 Setting Notification for New Items on page 243 Section 8 4 3 Setting Which Folders to Check for New Items on page 243 Section 8 4 4 Setting How Often to Check for New Items on page 244 Section 8 4 5 Setting How to Be Notified for Calendar Alarms on page 244 Section 8 4 6 Setting How to Be Notified about Outgoing Message Status on page 244 Section 8 4 7 Setting How to Be Notified about Return Status Messages on page 244 Setting How Long to Display the Notification oa BR O N 7 Make sure Notify is running Right click amp on the Windows taskbar then click Options Click the Notify tab Make sure Show dialog is selected for the item types and priorities you want Click the General tab Type the number of seconds you want the dialog box to display under Show Notify dialog for You can specify up to 32 767 seconds which is just over nine hours Click OK Setting Notification for New Items 1 2 3 4 6 Make sure Notify is running Right click in the Windows notification are
123. select one or more items then press the Delete key 2 If you delete a sent item the Delete Item dialog box displays Select the appropriate Delete from option then click OK You can choose from the following options If you delete a document reference from your Mailbox only the reference is deleted The document remains in the library Deleted items are moved to your Trash and remain there until the Trash is emptied 114 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 4 5 3 4 6 3 4 7 3 5 3 5 1 3 5 2 Viewing the Discussion Thread of a E Mail Discussion threads shows the e mail discussion of an original item and all its replies grouped in hierarchical order When you view the discussion thread of an e mail you receive a list of all messages sent and received is displayed above the e mail message 1 Double click an item that you want to view 2 Click the Discussion Thread tab Viewing the Source of External Messages When you receive or send messages to and from external systems you can view the source for a message The source includes all the data that is contained in a message 1 Double click an item that you received from an external source 2 Click the Message Source tab Archiving and Backing Up E Mail E mail can accumulate rapidly See Chapter 16 Maintaining GroupWise on page 371 for long term management strategies Printing E Mail From GroupWise you can print any item and its attachments Wh
124. tables and more il ll Mi Tahoma v hio E BzwU i E E a age E You might need to resize the item view horizontally to see all the buttons on the HTML toolbar Changing the Font in an HTML Message on page 70 Adding a Horizontal Line in an HTML Message on page 70 Adding a Bulleted or Numbered List in an HTML Message on page 70 Adding a Table in an HTML Message on page 70 Adding Images in an HTML Message on page 71 Adding a Background Image in an HTML Message on page 71 E Mail 69 Adding a Hyperlink in an HTML Message on page 71 Undoing or Redoing the Last Text Action in an HTML Message on page 71 Changing the Font in an HTML Message In an open HTML message C3 Mail To Sara McCann File Edit View Actions Tools el Window Help a Send 3 Cancel A Address EH he 485 spell Check a aja Mail Send Options From x Benji Gensomino To Sara McCann Subject Conversation Segoe UI M 10 Ey Bz u Sarah Wt ut ot i Ml I h I M i il RS oo Gly Ey How was your conversation with Steve Account Novell GroupWise 1 Use the HTML toolbar to change the font font size and other font attributes as needed You can set a default font for HTML items For information see Setting the Default Read Compose View and Font on page 38 Adding a Horizonta
125. the items in descending order from the largest file size to the smallest You can click Stop Query at any time to stop the query 3 Select an item or multiple items then click Archive 4 Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 until the storage size is below the limit set by your GroupWise administrator 380 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 16 5 16 6 16 6 1 16 6 2 Using Remote Library Disk Space Management Use the Remote Library Disk Space Management tool to maintain your documents in your Remote Library Documents are typically kept in a separate directory from your standard mail items in your caching mailbox Deleting items from your Remote Library does not delete them from the Master Library To access Remote Library Disk Space Management 1 Click Tools gt Manage Library Size In the Remote Library Disk Space Management window you can see all of your stored documents and the amount of space they take up Documents can be removed by selecting the document and clicking Delete Backing Up E Mail Your system administrator typically backs up your network Mailbox on a regular basis You can back up your local mailbox if you want to have an additional copy of your Mailbox or if you want to back up information that is no longer in your network Mailbox If the system administrator has created a restore area and has backed up the entire GroupWise system or if you have backed up your local Mailbox in Remote or Caching mode you can
126. the process 8 Click Close then click OK when the analyze fix process is complete 9 Click Close to return to your GroupWise Mailbox Rebuilding the Mailbox Structure The Structural Rebuild action of GroupWise Mailbox Maintenance forces a structural rebuild of a database in your Mailbox regardless of whether problems with the database have been detected through using the Analyze Fix Databases action A structural rebuild ensures that the various record containers in the database are correctly organized so that data can be successfully retrieved from them by the GroupWise client To perform a structural rebuild on your Mailbox 1 Click Tools gt Repair Mailbox then click Yes 2 From the Actions drop down list select Structural Rebuild 3 On the Databases tab select one or more databases to rebuild For information about the databases see Section 16 7 Repairing Your Mailbox on page 382 384 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 16 8 16 8 1 16 8 2 4 On the Logging tab the Log File field shows that by default a file named gwchk32 1og is created in the GroupWise client installation directory You can specify a different filename and location You can also select Verbose Logging to record more detailed information during the structural rebuild 5 Click Run to start the structural rebuild A progress log displays during the structural rebuild You can click Stop at any time to stop the rebuild An error code
127. the Advanced Find dialog box appears Select the operator from the Operator drop down list The available operators depend on the field you have selected in the first drop down list With the exception of the Contains and x Does Not Contain all of the operators use a string pattern algorithm to find matching items as is used in many programs such as Web browsers and text editors For example mac would find all items with mac macos macintosh etc You can use wildcard characters and switches as discussed in Section 7 3 4 Using Wildcard Characters and Switches in Advanced Finds and Rules on page 237 The Contains and x Does Not Contain operators use a whole word index that matches the entire word and not a set of characters included in any word However you should not include punctuation with the words For example OS will not find any results however OS would find OS and other words such as cost across post etc Operator Example Result Includes Equal To Item Type Mail Only mail messages Not Equal To Item Type Appointment All item types except appointments lt Less Than Number Accepted lt 4 Items that fewer than 4 recipients accepted Finding Items 235 236 Operator Example lt Less Than or Equal To Number Accepted lt 4 gt Greater Than Number Read gt 6 gt Greater Than or Equal To Number Read gt 6 Equal to Field Number Accepted Total Recipients Not Equal to Field N
128. the Folder List select the Tasklist folder Click File gt Print Calendar In the Format group box select List In the Available forms group box select Task List Click the Contents tab then select any information you want to include or exclude Click the Options tab then select Selected folder Optional Click Preview to see a preview of how it will appear on paper Click Print ON OD oa RAON Tasks and the Tasklist 177 178 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 6 1 6 1 1 Contacts and Address Books Use an address book like a contact management tool phone directory and information center for your addressing needs Address books are databases that store names and addresses e mail addresses phone numbers and much more Contacts folders can display address book information in convenient address card format or as a list Entries in an address book can be a contact group resource or organization Section 6 1 Understanding Address Books on page 179 Section 6 2 Understanding Contacts Folders on page 181 Section 6 3 Addressing Items on page 182 Section 6 4 Using Contacts Folders on page 186 Section 6 5 Working with Address Books on page 202 Section 6 6 Printing Labels and Lists from the Address Book on page 222 Understanding Address Books GroupWise uses the following types of address books Section 6 1 1 GroupWise Address Book on page 17
129. the default font and font size 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Environment 2 Click the Views tab 3 Click Use default views for reading 4 Select either Plain text or HTML If you select Plain text select the font and the font size in the appropriate fields 5 Optional Select Force view if you want to force all messages to be displayed in text only 6 Click OK Reading Items Reading Text Items on page 102 Reading HTML Items on page 103 Reading Text Items Depending on your default view options text messages are automatically displayed in text format To read a text message 1 Double click the message in the Message list to view the message in a new window or Select the message to view the message in the QuickViewer GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Reading HTML Items Depending on your default view options HTML messages are automatically displayed in HTML format To read an HTML message 1 Double click the message in the Message list to view the message in a new window or Select the message to view the message in the QuickViewer NOTE For security reasons images are not displayed by default in HTML messages To view the images click GroupWise has prevented images on this page from displaying Click here to display the images Setting Default Options for Images in HTML E Mail When you receive an HTML message from an external address the images are blocked for secur
130. the libraries where you store and create documents You can specify a default library default sharing rights default document properties layout such as the order and size of fields and default values for document properties You can also specify whether you want to use the short or long form of the property sheet The library and property settings you specify affect only your library setup You cannot modify other users settings Default Library on page 307 Default Property Values on page 307 Default Sharing Rights on page 307 Document Tab Configuration on page 307 Document Property Pages on page 307 Document Management Integration with Other Applications on page 307 306 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 1 2 Default Library When you create import or copy a document in GroupWise it is saved in the default library unless you specify a different library In addition Find searches for documents in the default library first You can change the default library See Specifying a Default Library on page 306 Default Property Values You can specify default values for the document property fields that can be edited The default values are used when you create a new document or import a document into the selected library If no default values have been specified for author and document type GroupWise uses the creator s name as the author and Document as the document type
131. the month 1 2 3 4 In an appointment task or reminder note you are scheduling click Actions gt Auto Date Click the Example tab In the Range group box specify the starting date and ending date Click the months you want to include To include all months double click any month in the Months group box Click one or more ordinal numbers in the row across from the day of the week you want to base your scheduling on for example 1st in the Sun row 6 Click a day of the week for example Sun 7 Specify the number of days to offset for example 1 then click OK 8 To verify the dates you have scheduled click the Dates tab and check the dates selected in the calendar Click OK Scheduling a Recurring Item Based on the Last Day of the Month You can schedule recurring items for events that occur a specified number of days before or after the last day of the month For example if you want a reminder note to appear in your Reminder Notes List on the second to last day of each month type 1 in Step 8 below 1 2 3 4 In an appointment task or reminder note you are scheduling click Actions gt Auto Date Click the Example tab In the Range group box specify the starting date and ending date Click the months you want to include Calendar 147 148 To include all months double click any month in the Months group box 5 Click the Days of the Week pop up list then click Days of the Month 6 Click one or mor
132. the new address book then click OK For information see Creating a Personal Address Book on page 204 The Choose GroupWise Fields for CSV Data window is displayed GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Choose GroupWise Columns For CSV Data Doug Newman csv EX CSV Column CSV Data GroupWise Column Name Doug Newman Name First Name Doug First Name Middle Name Middle Name Last Name Newman Last Name 3 Prefix Prefix Suffix Suffix E Mail Address dnewman Corporate net E Mail Address E Mail Addresses dnewman Corporate net E Mail Addresses User ID dnewman Click to choose Post Office Marketing Click to choose Domain Provo3 Click to choose Internet Domain Corporate net Click to choose Additional Routing Click to choose Preferred E Mail ID Click to choose E Mail Address Format 2 Click to choose GUID FAFD3C00 129F 0000 882B 7F Click to choose External GUID Click to choose File ID Click to choose Network ID Network ID eDirectory Distinguishe eDirectory Distinguish TT 1of1 Lox The CSV Fields column lists the data fields as provided in the csv file The CSV Data column lists the data provided in the csv file The GroupWise Fields column lets you choose the associations between CSV fields and GroupWise fields By default the import process can recognize characters such as comma semicolon and colon as field delimiters It can also recognize characters su
133. the option of having the account available in Caching mode but not in Online mode as described in Section 12 4 2 Using POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts in Remote and Caching Modes on page 289 Subscribing to other users notifications is not available in Caching mode 11 1 6 Changing the Download Interval Time for Your Caching Mailbox 264 You can specify how often GroupWise refreshes the items in your GroupWise Caching mailbox 1 2 3 Click Accounts gt Account Options Click General Options In the Send Retrieve All Marked Accounts every x minutes field specify the number of minutes to refresh the accounts 4 Click OK GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 11 1 7 11 1 8 Synchronizing Your Caching Mailbox with Your Online Mailbox Use the following steps to update or synchronize your Caching Mailbox items rules addresses documents and settings with your Online Mailbox 1 To synchronize items click Accounts gt Send Retrieve gt Novell GroupWise 2 To synchronize rules click Tools gt Rules then click Refresh 3 To retrieve addresses from an address book click Tools gt Address Book Select the system address book click View gt Retrieve System Address Book To retrieve your personal address books click Retrieve Personal Address Books 4 To specify that the system address book your personal address books and rules be downloaded to your Caching Mailbox on a regular basis click Accounts gt Account Op
134. then click Next You can specify any text file ASCII or ANSI as the source file for a copy operation as long as the file contains a list of document IDs If you re creating a file make sure that each document ID is at the beginning of a line and that there is only one document per line If the file you specify is a log file from a previous copy operation you can click Process errors only and GroupWise processes only the documents that generated errors during the previous session 5 Inthe Select library to copy documents to list box click the destination library then click Next 6 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file You can click Generate a log file without performing the copy operation to see the outcome of the copy without actually copying the documents If you are a librarian in the destination library you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents you are copying Allow Documents With Validation Errors To Be Created or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors 7 Click Finish to copy the documents Changing the Properties of a Group of Documents As you manage your GroupWise documents you often need to change the properties of several documents at the same time For example if an employee leaves the company you might need to reassign all of his or her
135. then click the Insert Hyperlink icon e 2 Specify the Web address you want to link to 3 Select OK The text changes color and is underlined to indicate it is a link An image does not change color but still functions as a link Undoing or Redoing the Last Text Action in an HTML Message You can undo the last text action in the Subject or Message field of a message you are composing 1 Click Edit gt Undo or To redo the action click Edit gt Redo You can also use Ctrl Z for Undo and Ctrl Y for Redo For information about other shortcut keys see Appendix D Shortcut Keys on page 413 Using the GroupWise Text Editor to Format Plain Text E Mail In a plain text message you can change the font size and color You can use bold italics and underline However in the Plain Text Compose view you cannot indent text or insert hyperlinks or horizontal lines Changing the Font in a Plain Text Message on page 72 Formatting Lists in a Plain Text Message on page 72 Undoing the Last Text Action in a Plain Text Message on page 72 E Mail 71 72 Changing the Font in a Plain Text Message In an open item you are composing in the Plain Text view 1 Click the Message field 2 Click Edit gt Font then click Font again 3 Select a font and a font style 4 Select a size 5 Select any other options you want to change then click OK You can also use the toolbar buttons to bold italicize or underline
136. to drag GroupWise e mail messages and drop them into Vibe folders Vibe displays the content of the message as a Vibe folder entry in the folder where you dropped the message When you drag and drop e mail messages into Vibe you should be aware of the following behaviors Messages are copied from GroupWise they are not moved GroupWise retains a copy of the e mail message E mail attachments appear in Vibe as folder entry attachments Dragging and dropping a message from GroupWise into a Vibe folder is accomplished within the GroupWise client You must drag GroupWise messages into the Vibe directory and sub directories that are located in the GroupWise Folder List You cannot drag GroupWise messages and drop them into Vibe when Vibe is displayed in a Web browser If you do not see the Novell Vibe OnPrem folder or the Novell Teaming folder in your GroupWise Folder List then your GroupWise administrator has not enabled the Vibe integration 394 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 18 5 You can drop messages into any Vibe folder that you have rights to mail into To drag an e mail message and drop it into a Vibe folder within the GroupWise client 1 Inthe GroupWise client locate the Novell Vibe OnPrem folder or the Novell Teaming folder in your GroupWise Folder List 2 Expand the Vibe or Teaming folder You see a list of your Vibe folders in the GroupWise Folder List 3 Select an e mail message and drag it into one of your V
137. to select documents then click Next Item type Document Library Support Library Default Z Document text Document number Subject Document type Author Creator Date created Official version Current version V Find only official document versions 4 Inthe Library drop down list click the library you want to search 5 In each field specify the information you want to look for 6 Click Next 7 Inthe Select library to copy documents to list box select the destination library then click Next 346 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 8 9 10 er Select library to copy documents to 1S gst iby pr Cie Ce Click Preview to see a sample of the documents that will be copied based on the Find criteria you specified You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview Specify the directory where you want to save the log file You can click Generate a log file without performing the copy operation to see the outcome of the move without actually copying the documents If you are a librarian in the destination library you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents you are copying or moving Allow Documents With Validation Errors To Be Creat
138. to send the message to then click Send 6 Click OK Modifying a Published Calendar s Settings 1 In the Folder List right click the published calendar then click Publish 2 Modify any publish options For more information see Step 3 through Step 5 of Section 4 8 1 Publishing a Personal Calendar on page 160 3 Click OK 160 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 4 8 3 4 9 4 9 1 4 9 2 4 9 3 Unpublishing a Calendar When you unpublish a calendar the published calendar no longer displays in the list of published calendars on the Calendar Publishing Host Likewise if anyone has subscribed to your calendar they no longer receive updates to your calendar and they might receive an error message 1 Inthe Folder List right click the published calendar then click Publish 2 Deselect Publish this calendar then click OK Sharing Your Free Busy Schedule on the Internet Free busy information in GroupWise can be published to allow access for other users The free busy information can be accessed by other GroupWise users or any other users who can accept a ifb file type Section 4 9 1 Publishing Your Free Busy Schedule on page 161 Section 4 9 2 Sending Free Busy Information on page 161 Section 4 9 3 Using Free Busy Information on page 161 Publishing Your Free Busy Schedule To make your free busy information available to Internet users 1 Inthe Main Window click Tools gt Opti
139. to the Trash folder Days to retain items after delivery LES Blocked Mail Y Enable Block List Mail from addresses in the Block List will not be delivered 0K const Ave 3 Click OK All future e mail from addresses not in your Frequent Contacts address book and other personal address books is delivered to the Junk Mail folder You can specify that the items in this folder are deleted after a specified number of days 3 6 5 Preventing E Mail from a User or Internet Domain from Being Junked or Blocked 1 Click Tools gt Junk Mail Handling 2 Click the Trust List tab 120 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Junk Mail Handling Ga Settings Junk List Block List Trust List Show V Addresses Edit Delete Move to Junk J Domains E i F Total E mail from addresses in your Trust List will always be delivered to your inbox 1 3 Click New type an e mail address or Internet domain then click OK An address or Internet domain can be in uppercase lowercase or mixed case For example amy example com and AMY EXAMPLE COM are both the same You cannot use wildcard characters such as or in an Internet domain name However an Internet domain such as example com affects all e mail from example com and any subdomains that prefix this Internet domain such as offers example com or members example com A domain of abcexample com is not affected 4 Click OK All future items
140. top or bottom of the list 4 Add a due date 5 Click Close In the Tasklist folder the items display with a check box next to them When you complete an item in the Tasklist you can mark it completed by selecting the check box Creating a Task or Tasklist Item in the Tasklist Folder The Tasklist is useful for assigning yourself tasks and reminders These tasks come from other people or from yourself 1 Open the Tasklist folder 2 Optional If desired select the position where you want to create the new task in the list If no items exist in the Taskbar or if you don t want to create the task in a specific position on the list continue with Step 3 or Click the position in the Tasklist where you want to add a new item For example if you want the new item to appear after the third Tasklist item click the existing third item then continue with Step 3 3 Click New Task to create a new task that you want to assign to other people or To create a posted task that you are not sending to other GroupWise users click the down arrow next to New Task and select Posted Task GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 5 4 2 Or To create a new Tasklist item click the Tasklist folder right click in the Tasklist then click New gt Tasklist Item 4 Optional If you are creating a new task not a posted task or Tasklist item add the names of the recipients who will receive the task 5 Specify the start and due dates 6
141. triggering event is New Item or Filed Item Marks all items matching the rule conditions as if they have not been read For example you could create a user activated rule to mark as unread all items you have opened from your manager to remind yourself to re read or act on them GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 9 3 9 4 Action Stop Rule Processing Result Stops other rules from acting on items that meet the rule conditions Rules are executed in the order they are listed in the Rules dialog box If there are other rules that would normally affect these items this rule action prevents the other rules from executing Events That Trigger a Rule There are several events that can cause a rule that you create to be activated In addition you can limit the items that are affected by a rule For more information see Limiting Items Affected by a Rule on page 254 Event New Item Filed Item Completed Item Open Folder Close Folder Startup Exit User Activated Result The rule is triggered when a new item is placed in your GroupWise Mailbox Clicking Received lets only incoming items trigger the rule Clicking Sent lets only items you send trigger the rule Clicking Posted triggers the rule each time you create a posted appointment reminder note or task Clicking Draft lets only items marked as unfinished or draft trigger the rule The rule is triggered when an item is placed in a specific folder I
142. up panels see Section 2 4 4 Customizing a Panel on page 61 6 Select display options for the new Contacts folder then click OK 7 Specify a unique name for this set of display options so that you can select it for other folders then click OK 6 4 2 Managing Contacts Each contact in a Contacts folder is marked with the Contact icon When you double click a contact the contact item view displays Adding a Contact on page 187 Modifying a Contact on page 189 Finding a Contact on page 190 Organizing Contacts with Categories on page 190 Sending a Contact on page 190 Changing the Display Name of a Contact on page 190 Viewing All Correspondence with a Contact on page 192 Viewing a Contact s Address on a Map on page 193 Deleting a Contact on page 193 Adding a Contact When you add a contact to a Contacts folder it is added to the corresponding address book 1 In the Folder List select the Contacts folder where you want to add the contact 2 Click New Contact on the toolbar Contacts and Address Books 187 a B New Contact FERR x File View Actions Help Z Close A Save 8 fa X A Send Contact N E fl X Summary Contact Details Address Advanced Notes Bull Name Display As MM Job Title Company lad Email Address Office Phone Add Email Address Home Phone Add Messenger ID Mobile Phone Fax Add Phone Nu
143. user You cannot share address books across external domains Click each user s name in the Share list then assign him or her access rights in the Access group box 208 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Janet DeSoto Properties FES General Sharing Not shared Shared with Name Add User l o Remove User Share list Name Status Access Greg Famsworth Opened Read Only 4 m Access for Greg Famsworth 6 Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box or Click Apply to apply your changes and keep the dialog box open When you click OK or Apply the person with whom you want to share the address book receives a notification The Status column displays as Pending until the user accepts or declines the shared address book request then the column is updated to reflect the user s selection In the Address Book list shared address books are marked with the amp icon You and the users you share an address book with can arrange your address book columns differently 6 5 10 Accepting a Shared Address Book When you accept a shared address book it appears in your Address Book List along with the GroupWise Address Book Frequent Contacts address book and personal address books 1 Click the Mailbox icon in the Folder List 2 Click the shared address book notification to open it or right click it gt click Open 3 Click Accept Address Book to add the address book to the address book list
144. versions of GroupWise The nab files created by earlier versions of GroupWise can be imported into GroupWise 8 In the Main Window click e on the toolbar Click File gt Import Select the address book nab file then click Open ao A N Click the address book you want to import addresses into or Create a new personal address book to import the addresses into For information see Creating a Personal Address Book on page 204 6 Click OK To stop the import press Esc then click Yes You cannot import addresses into the GroupWise Address Book Importing Contacts from a vCard A vCard can contain either a single contact or multiple contacts GroupWise supports either format To import information into an address book from a vCard you have received 1 Right click the vCard then click Import 2 Click the address book where you want the information to be added then click OK Importing Third Party Address Books Importing Contacts with a CSV File on page 216 Importing Address Books from POP3 IMAP4 E Mail Accounts on page 218 Importing Contacts with a CSV File To import a CSV comma separated values file 1 In the Main Window click S on the toolbar 2 Click File gt Import 3 Select the csv file then click Open 4 Select the address book you want to import addresses into then click OK or Click New to create a new personal address book to import the addresses into type a name for
145. via a TCP IP connection or a network drive mapping These connections are useful to download large quantities of information such as your system address book For more information see Configuring Your Remote Connections on page 269 If your remote connection is expensive you can save money and connection time by connecting after peak business hours downloading address books with a network connection prior to being on the road restricting the messages you download and waiting until you have a number of requests before connecting Understanding Remote Features Most GroupWise features are available in Remote mode with the exception of subscribing to other users notifications and Proxy Sending Remote Requests Each time you send and retrieve messages move items into folders delete items create rules and so forth this is stored as a request If you have made requests but exit GroupWise without connecting to your network mailbox your pending requests are stored until the next time you run GroupWise when you are prompted to complete the requests Processing Remote Requests GroupWise automatically processes outstanding Remote requests when you run GroupWise on your docked laptop after you return to the office For example you might send an item while you are away from your office but you don t connect to the GroupWise system to process that request When you return to the office and run GroupWise you are asked if you wa
146. will end Click Save Rules that trigger a reply such as this vacation rule keep a record of who a reply has been sent to and make sure that a reply is sent only once to that user 9 4 3 Creating a Rule to Forward All Mail to Another Account AN OO BR WO ND N Click Tools gt Rules then click New Type a name in the Rule name field such as Forward Rule Click the When event is pop up list then click New Item Next to And items are select Received Make sure no other item source is selected Select Mail under Item types Click Add Action then select Forward Type the address that you want the items forwarded to in the To field Type a subject you want to use for forwarded items for example Fwd Optional Type a name of a filter to use for forwarded items Optional Type a message for all forwarded items Click OK Click Save verify that the rule has a check mark next to it indicating that it is enabled then click Close 9 4 4 Creating a Rule that Sends a New E Mail 1 2 3 4 Click Tools gt Rules then click New Click Add Action then select Send Mail In the New Mail Item form fill in any relevant fields You must at least specify a recipient for the new e mail Click OK 9 4 5 Copying a Rule to Make a New Rule 1 2 3 Click Tools gt Rules Click the rule you want to copy then click Copy Type the name of the new rule Rules 253 4 5 Make changes to the rule Cl
147. word you can replace it with a word that Quick Speller suggests or skip the word whenever it appears in that message You can also add the word to a user word list Enabling Quick Speller by Default on page 73 Spell Checking with Quick Speller on page 73 Disabling Quick Speller as You Compose an E Mail on page 74 Enabling Quick Speller by Default 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt General 3 Select Check spelling as you type then click OK Deselect this option to disable Quick Speller Spell Checking with Quick Speller 1 Right click the misspelled word in the Subject or Message field 2 Click the correctly spelled word E Mail 73 74 or Click Skip Always to skip the word in the rest of the message or Click Add to Word List to add the word to your word list Disabling Quick Speller as You Compose an E Mail 1 Right click in the Subject or Message field 2 Click Disable Quick Speller To re enable Quick Speller right click in the Subject or Message field then click Enable Quick Speller Using Spell Checker You run Spell Checker separately either manually or by selecting to have it run when you click Send When Spell Checker finds a misspelled word you can replace it with a word Spell Checker suggests edit the word manually or skip the word You can also define an automatic replacement for the word or add the word to a user word list You use Environment Options to set
148. you can enable it when you need it again 1 Click Tools gt Rules GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Rules fe A Rules are executed in the order they appear in the list Drag a Close tule to a different position to change the order Rule list New Rule Name Event Edit M Junk Mail New Item Delegate New Item Copy Delete Enable Bun Move Up 2 Click the rule you want to enable or disable 3 Click Enable or Disable An enabled rule has a check mark in the box 9 7 Running a Rule Manually 1 Click the items or folders that you want affected by the rule 2 Click Tools gt Rules 3 Click the rule you want to run 4 Click Run then click Close The rule actions occur after you close the Rules dialog box 9 8 Deleting a Rule 1 Click Tools gt Rules 2 Click the rule you want to delete click Delete then click Yes Rules 255 256 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 10 1 Mailbox Calendar Access for Proxy Users Use Proxy to manage another user s Mailbox and Calendar Proxy lets you perform various actions such as reading accepting and declining items on behalf of another user within the restrictions the other user sets As a proxy user you do not need the mailbox owner s password because the mailbox owner grants you the access rights he or she wants you to have in the mailbox There is currently no limit
149. you want to print 3 Ctrl click or Shift click to select individual entries or Make no selections if you want to print the entire address book 4 Click File gt Print 5 If prompted click Selected items or Click Entire address book 6 Make sure the Form tab is selected 7 Click List in the Format group box 8 Click what you want to print in the Available forms list box You can only print information that has been entered in the address book fields If there is no information for a particular field nothing is printed for that field 9 Click a paper size in the Form size group box 10 Click Portrait or Landscape in the Form orientation group box 11 Click the Content tab 12 Depending on what you selected to print in Step 8 select and deselect the fields you want to print 13 Click Font make selections then click OK 14 Click the Options tab then make selections Contacts and Address Books 223 nt Address Form Content Header Footer Options T Name v Overflow extra text to following pages Print on both sides of page duplex v Page number V Date and time Y Use shading Print separator lines between items Center form on page horizontally Print items ET Insert blank page at beginning of print job All F Use category color Selected Preview Printer Setup Close 15 Cli
150. 08 SMTWT S ia B Self Review 2 From janet desoto 08 28 08 net deste Homa 3456789 Mailbox 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Sent Items 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 FS Calendar M Frequent Contacts M janet desoto 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 D fH Documents SMTWTES M Tasklist 123456 Work In Progress 7 8 9 10111213 Cabinet 6 17 18 19 20 P Trash 3 24 25 26 27 E Today Thursday August 28 2008 Ti Computer Updates From benji gensomino 08 28 08 8 1234 From marie lamaroux 08 28 08 5 67 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 60 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 2 4 2 Resizing a Panel You might want to resize the height of a panel to display more or less information To change the height of a panel move your mouse cursor to the top of the line until displays then drag the mouse cursor up or down to resize the panel 24 3 Moving a Panel 1 Place your cursor in the title bar of a panel then drag and drop the panel to its new location 2 Resize surrounding panels to accommodate the panel in its new location See also Customizing a Panel 2 4 4 Customizing a Panel 1 Right click the folder that you want to modify the panels for then click Properties 2 Click the Display tab 3 Select Panels from the View by drop down list 4 Click Customize Panels Customize Panels ES X Choose Layout One Column Two Column
151. 1 5 6 Tasklist Folder on page 23 Section 1 5 7 Documents Folder on page 23 Section 1 5 8 Cabinet Folder on page 23 Section 1 5 9 Work in Progress Folder on page 24 Section 1 5 10 Junk Mail Folder on page 24 Section 1 5 11 Trash Folder on page 24 Section 1 5 12 Shared Folders on page 24 Section 1 5 13 IMAP4 Account Folder on page 24 Section 1 5 14 NNTP Newsgroup Account Folder on page 25 Section 1 5 15 RSS Feeds Folder on page 25 Home Folder Your Home folder t indicated by your name represents your GroupWise database All folders in your Main Window are subfolders of your Home folder The Home folder can be organized into panels to display your most important folders For more information see Section 2 4 Using Panels to Organize Your Home Folder on page 60 Mailbox Folder The Mailbox displays all the items you have received with the exception of scheduled items appointments tasks and reminder notes you have accepted or declined By default scheduled items and tasks are moved to the Calendar when you accept them Your received items are stored in your Mailbox You can quickly change what is displayed by clicking a setting in the Display drop down list You can further restrict which items display in your Mailbox by using Find See Section 7 1 Quickly Finding Items in a Folder on page 225 for more informati
152. 1 Subscribing to RSS Feeds 301 TANA Firefox Sosea suv eg ee ofS head eae Sea cae ied 3 ele a bam dae es e Beles gta 301 141 2 Internet Explorer i sco vain ea ee ann ns eee 302 145453 GGROUPWISE sn steed tbe ee mr nt ia tel letra pla en LM mn ie 303 14 2 Reading RSS Feeds 303 14 3 Refreshing an RSS Feed 303 14 4 Deleting an Individual RSS Entry 4 303 14 5 Deleting a Subscribed RSS Feed 303 Contents 9 10 15 Document Management 305 Contents 15 1 15 2 15 3 15 4 15 5 15 6 15 7 15 8 15 9 15 10 15 11 15 12 15 13 Managing Your Documents in GroupWise 305 15 1 1 Storing Documents in Libraries 306 15 1 2 Understanding Document References 307 15 1 3 Specifying Document Properties 308 Creating Documents 0 0 0 cece tenet tenes 310 15 2 1 Selecting a Template 310 15 2 2 Making Any Document a Template 313 15 2 3 Creating a Reference to a Document
153. 13 Accessibility for People with Disabilities 417 E 1 Configuring JAWS for GroupWise 417 Documentation Updates 419 F 1 June 27 2011 Compatibility with Vibe OnPrem 419 F 2 December 9 2010 Compatibility with Vibe OnPrem 419 F 3 July 14 2010 GroupWise 8 0 2 419 F 4 August 31 2009 GroupWise 8 0 1 420 Contents 13 14 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide About This Guide This Novell GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide explains how to use the GroupWise Windows client The guide is divided into the following sections Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 17 Chapter 2 Getting Organized on page 33 Chapter 3 E Mail on page 67 Chapter 4 Calendar on page 123 Chapter 5 Tasks and the Tasklist on page 167 Chapter 6 Contacts and Address Books on page 179 Chapter 7 Finding Items on page 225 Chapter 8 Notify on page 241 Chapter 9 Rules on page 249 Chapter 10 Mailbox Calendar Access for Proxy Users on page 257 Chapter 11 Remote and Caching Modes on page 261 Chapter 12 POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts on page 285 Chapter 13 Newsgroups on page 295 Chapter 14 RSS Feeds on page 301 Chapter 15 Documen
154. 16 4 3 Archiving E Mail by Using Mailbox Storage Size Information 380 16 5 Using Remote Library Disk Space Management 381 16 6 Backing Up E Mail saaa 2 dea efile wes teens Pre eo eae ne te Ae oie nes 381 Contents 11 12 16 6 1 Backing Up Your Mailbox 381 16 6 2 Restoring Items from Backup 381 16 7 Repairing Your Mailbox 23252448 gee ets hae aca Sige ae RE ea BSG poh nana dele aoe plese E 382 16 7 1 Understanding Mailbox Maintenance 382 16 7 2 Deciding Whether Your Mailbox Needs Repair 383 16 7 3 Installing GroupWise Check 383 16 7 4 Analyzing and Fixing Databases 383 16 7 5 Rebuilding the Mailbox Structure 384 16 8 Managing Trash nes ta gare ee TAL ee chee ees Wa Lh oe ed At 385 16 8 1 Displaying Items in Your Trash 385 16 8 2 Undeleting an Item in Your Trash 385 16 8 3 Saving an Item From Your Trash 386 16 8 4 Emptying the Trash sans nee LR Re art to dr in ee ee ee 386 16 9 GroupWise Support Information
155. 5 15 6 8 If you are a librarian in the destination library you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents you are copying Allow Documents With Validation Errors To Be Created or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors Click Finish to change document properties Changing the Properties for a Group of Documents Listed in a File 1 2 3 4 Click Tools gt Mass Document Operations In the Operation group box click Change Properties In the Selection method group box click Use documents listed in a file Specify the name of the file that contains the list of documents for which you want to change properties then click Next You can specify any text file ASCII or ANSI as the source file for a change properties operation as long as the file contains a list of document IDs If you re creating a file make sure that each document ID is at the beginning of a line and that there is only one document ID on each line If the file you specify is a log file from a previous session you can click Process errors only and GroupWise processes only the documents that generated errors during that session 5 Specify new values for any of the document properties fields then click Next Click Preview to see a sample of the documents that will be modified based on the Find criteria you speci
156. 5 P T Guestbook 5 Photo Album D Task Folder 1 Favorites My Teams 7 _ Selected 1 Total 14 4 Click the Vibe folder where you placed the e mail message The Vibe folder is displayed within the GroupWise interface The e mail message that you placed in this folder is displayed as a Vibe folder entry Viewing Vibe Feeds in GroupWise Vibe OnPrem enables you to view live feeds of the latest entries in your teams tracked places or across the entire site so you can be up to date in real time without entering the Vibe site And like Twitter you can see live feeds for the micro blog entries of the people you are tracking GroupWise 8 0 2 and later enables you to view live Vibe feeds directly from the GroupWise client 1 Inthe GroupWise client locate and select the Novell Vibe OnPrem folder or the Novell Teaming folder in your GroupWise Folder List The Vibe feed is displayed Novell Vibe OnPrem 395 Home Mailbox 9 Calendar Sentitems Contacts G Address Book BE amp Anum NewAppt M NewTask t B Ely 3 5 F8 Onlinev v E Novell Teaming Find v Novel Teaming Olivos Anita aolivos Favorites My Teams Refresh Teaming Feed Micro Blog Last updated 5 6 10 8 46 PM s updated every 5 minutes with the latest information Meeting Notes ArtRamirez Msy 6 2010 8 46 PM Project Development Wiki May 6 2010 m Moving Office Locations Jade Sumi
157. 9 Automatically Reading the Next Item in Your Mailbox on page 40 Section 2 1 10 Changing the GroupWise Interface Language on page 40 2 1 1 Selecting a GroupWise Scheme You can select from four schemes Default The Default scheme has a new color scheme and displays the Nav Bar Full Folder List the Main Menu and two columns with panels GroupWise 6 5 The GroupWise 6 5 scheme has the Folder List Main Toolbar and Item List displaying in the old colors Simplified The Simplified scheme has a new color scheme and has the Nav Bar Simple Folder List and two columns with panels Custom The Custom scheme allows you to set the appearance settings however you like If you edit one of the predefined schemes those settings become your Custom scheme Getting Organized 33 To select a scheme 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Environment then select the Appearance tab 3 Select a scheme from the Schemes drop down list General Views File Location Cleanup Default Actions Reply Format Editors Viewers Signature Appearance Choose a Scheme Schemes lt Custom gt lt Custom gt Choose Ind Default V Display Groupwise 6 5 I Display Sad F Display Nav Bar V Display Folder List Favorites Folder List Simple Folder List V Display Main Toolbar F Full Folder List F Use Groupwise Color Schemes Long Folder List Sky Blue Z E Di
158. 9 Section 6 1 2 Frequent Contacts Address Book on page 180 Section 6 1 3 Personal Address Books on page 180 Section 6 1 4 LDAP Address Book on page 181 GroupWise Address Book The GroupWise Address Book is the address book configured and maintained by the system administrator Use the GroupWise Address Book to view information about everyone in your GroupWise system The GroupWise Address Book is marked with a icon in the Address Book list Because the GroupWise Address Book is generally quite large you might want to search for names or use predefined filters to find the name you are looking for rather than scrolling through the entire address book For more information see Searching for Users Resources Organizations and Groups on page 213 and Using Filters to Narrow an Address Search on page 213 The Address Book sorts all names alphabetically by first name If you want to view names by the last name you can edit the columns to remove the Name column and add the First Name and Last Name columns For more information on adding and removing columns see Specifying the Columns to Display in an Address Book on page 214 Contacts and Address Books 179 6 1 2 6 1 3 You can view information about contacts in the GroupWise Address Book but you cannot edit this information When you use Remote mode you can restrict the entries that are downloaded from the GroupWise Address Book to re
159. Accounts on page 288 Section 12 4 Using POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts on page 288 Section 12 5 POP3 Features on page 291 Section 12 6 IMAP4 Features on page 292 Understanding POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts Section 12 1 1 Understanding POP3 Accounts on page 285 Section 12 1 2 Understanding IMAP4 Accounts on page 285 Understanding POP3 Accounts When you add a POP3 account you can associate an existing folder for example your Mailbox folder with the account or you can create a new folder When you download e mail from your POP3 account to GroupWise it is typically deleted from the POP3 server You can choose to have your POP3 account items stored on the POP3 server If you store items on the server you can read those items from more than one computer Understanding IMAP4 Accounts When you add an IMAP4 account the folder you see in GroupWise represents the folder on your IMAP4 server Your IMAP4 account items are always stored on the IMAP4 server Any actions in the GroupWise folder such as creating or deleting are also performed on the IMAP4 server Because your items are always stored on the IMAP4 server you can read those items from more than one computer Find in IMAP4 folders is not supported Proxy for IMAP4 folders is not supported POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts 285 12 2 Adding POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts to GroupWise Before you add a POP3 or IMAP4 account to GroupWise you need to know t
160. Another Library 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox 2 Click Actions gt Copy Document 3 Select the library to which you want to copy the document in the Select library to copy to drop down list 4 Select the method you want to use for creating document properties then click OK The information in the system fields Document Type Author and Document Subject is copied with the document to the new library Saving Documents The GroupWise Library provides a secure location for you to save your documents If you need to share a document with users who do not have access to GroupWise you can save a copy of the document outside of the library Section 15 13 1 Saving Items as Documents on page 338 Section 15 13 2 Saving Changes to a Document s Contents on page 339 Saving Items as Documents You can save any of the items in your Mailbox as a document in the library Items are saved in WordPerfect format but with a doc extension so that they can also be opened in Word or OpenOffice For more information see Saving Received E Mail to Disk or a GroupWise Library on page 113 338 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 13 2 Saving Changes to a Document s Contents To save changes you have made to the contents of a document use the Save feature in the corresponding application The Save feature in your application functions differently depending on whether you are using an integrate
161. Attach a file to a message Open a new mail message Open a new reminder note Normal text Open the selected message Open the Print dialog box Turn the QuickViewer on and off Mark the selected item unread Reply to all Save a draft in the Work in Progress folder Send item Underline text Paste selected text Cut selected text Redo the last action Undo the last action Open a new appointment Open a new document reference Insert a numbered or bulleted list Open a new phone message Reply To all Open a new task Cycle through fields buttons and areas Reverse the order of cycling through fields buttons and areas Indent the text Open the next tab GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Where It Works Main Window Calendar item dialog box In a new item Main Window Calendar item dialog box Calendar In text In a new item Main Window Calendar item dialog box Main Window Calendar item dialog box In text Item List Main Window item Main Window Calendar Item List In an item In an item In an item In text In text In text In text In text Main Window Calendar item dialog box Main Window Calendar item dialog box In text Main Window Calendar item dialog box In an Item Main Window Calendar item dialog box Main Window Calendar dialog box item Main Window Calendar dialog box item In text In a tabbed dialog box Keystroke Ctrl Enter Ctrl En
162. Book on page 208 Section 6 5 9 Sharing an Address Book with Another User on page 208 Section 6 5 10 Accepting a Shared Address Book on page 209 Section 6 5 11 Synchronizing Address Book Entries on page 210 Section 6 5 12 Displaying Quick Info on page 210 Section 6 5 13 Viewing Contacts Groups Organizations or Resources in an Address Book on page 211 Section 6 5 14 Editing a Distribution List in the GroupWise Address Book on page 212 Section 6 5 15 Searching for Address Book Entries on page 212 Section 6 5 16 Customizing an Address Book Display on page 213 Section 6 5 17 Sorting an Address Book on page 215 Section 6 5 18 Importing and Exporting Addresses and Address Books on page 215 Section 6 5 19 Using the LDAP Address Book on page 219 Section 6 5 20 Advanced Address Book Options on page 221 Opening an Address Book To open an address book click amp on the Main Window toolbar The left pane lists the GroupWise Address Book LDAP Address Book Frequent Contacts address book and any personal address books you have created Figure 6 6 The Address Book Window e_ Address Book SES File Edit View Help C New E Details fH Delete JO Find A Action pa a Novell GroupWise Ad ook For Inside Name Pal Novell LDAP Address p a Famy FY Ahman Dh Ea
163. D field 5 Inthe Password field specify your password then click OK Managing Mailbox Passwords Section 16 2 1 Using LDAP Authentication instead of GroupWise Passwords on page 372 Section 16 2 2 Adding Changing and Removing Your Password on page 372 Section 16 2 3 Bypassing Your GroupWise or LDAP Password on page 373 Section 16 2 4 Using Mailbox Passwords in Caching Mode on page 374 Section 16 2 5 Using Mailbox Passwords in Remote Mode on page 375 Section 16 2 6 Using Mailbox Passwords with Proxies on page 375 Using LDAP Authentication instead of GroupWise Passwords If your system administrator has turned on LDAP authentication your LDAP password is used to access your Mailbox instead of a GroupWise password With LDAP authentication you are required to have a password and you cannot remove your password If your system administrator has disabled changing your LDAP password in GroupWise you might need to use a different application to change your password Contact your system administrator for more information Adding Changing and Removing Your Password Changing Your Password on page 372 Using Single Sign On on page 373 Removing Your Password on page 373 Changing Your Password If your system administrator has turned on LDAP authentication and has disabled changing your LDAP password in GroupWise you might need to use a different applicati
164. Day of the Week in Your Calendar on page 133 Highlighting Weekends on page 133 Showing Week Numbers on page 133 Setting Whether to Include Yourself on New Appointments on page 133 Setting How to Display Appointment Length on page 134 Changing a Calendar s Color on page 134 Changing the Background for Calendar Areas on page 134 Customizing Your Calendar Views for a New Calendar Various GroupWise Calendar views can be selected to provide the look and feel that best suits your needs For example you can choose to remove the monthly calendars from the Week view or display the calendars with pages that resemble a planner The following sections provide examples of some of the ways you can customize your Calendar view These sections do not provide information about all of the possible views but they show you how to perform some common changes Changing a Calendar View on page 130 Removing the Month Calendar from the Week View on page 131 Adding Month Calendars to the Month View on page 131 Adding Extended Navigation to the Calendar on page 132 Saving a Calendar View on page 132 Changing a Calendar View 1 Click Calendar on the Nav Bar 2 Right click the view you want to change then click Properties The Calendar View Properties dialog box opens GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Calenda
165. GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 14 2 Current Version The most recent revision of the document Official Version The version you designate as official When you designate an official version you can grant users different access rights to the official version than you grant them to all other versions of the document For example you can grant all users rights to view the official version of the employee handbook but grant only yourself rights to view and edit all other versions of the handbook If you do not specify an official version of the document the current version is considered to be the official version In the Item List a star displays next to the document reference for the official version Specific Version A version of a document that is referenced directly by its version number In the Item List the number symbol displays next to the document reference You can grant different access rights for each version of the document For example you can grant all users on your system View rights to the official version and grant specific users View rights to the current version Creating a New Version of a Document 1 In your Mailbox click the document reference for the document you want to create a new version of 2 Click File gt New gt Document Version New Version Ex Version description Open document now Cancel Properties 3 Type a description for this version of the d
166. GroupWise client The GroupWise 8 WebAccess client does not yet offer the distinction between Find and Global Find The WebAccess client Find is the standard Find available in earlier versions of GroupWise The WebAccess client does not provide Advanced Find 240 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 8 1 Notify Notify is a program that works with GroupWise to alert you when you have new items placed in your mailbox when your outgoing items are opened or when you have an upcoming appointment Section 8 1 Understanding Notify on page 241 Section 8 2 Starting Notify on page 242 Section 8 3 Using Notify on page 242 Section 8 4 Customizing Notify on page 243 Section 8 5 Being Notified of Someone Else s Messages on page 245 Section 8 6 Sending an Alarm to an Electronic Pager on page 246 Section 8 7 Turning Off Notification on page 247 Understanding Notify Notify can alert you in four ways a sound a dialog box a small icon or by launching an application Each method is described in the following table Notification Method What Happens Notify icon on the An envelope appears over the Notify icon in the taskbar when you receive a new Windows taskbar item or alarm If the Notify icon doesn t appear on the taskbar Notify is not running Notify dialog box The Notify dialog box opens on top of whatever application you are using when you receive a new it
167. Groups Organizing Addresses in Groups on page 194 Creating and Saving a Personal Group on page 194 Adding Contacts to a Group on page 196 Contacts and Address Books 193 Deleting a Contact from a Group on page 196 Addressing Items to a Group on page 197 Viewing Group Information on page 197 Deleting a Group from a Contacts Folder on page 198 Organizing Addresses in Groups A group is a list of users or resources you can send messages to Use groups to send a message to several users or resources by typing the group name in the To BC or CC fields There are two types of groups public and personal A public group is a list of users created by the system administrator and it is available for use by each GroupWise user For example there might be a public group for the Accounting Department Each employee in Accounting is included in the group Public groups are listed in the GroupWise Address Book A personal group is a group created by you For example if you often send an appointment to your work group you can include each co worker s address or name and a meeting place a resource in a personal group Each group in a Contacts folder is marked with 88 When you double click a group the group item view displays Figure 6 3 Group Item View BY Lunch Group Le ne File View Actions Help ZZ Close 3 Save Delete 2 Send Mail Summary Details
168. L Setting the QuickViewer Default Behavior 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Environment 2 Click the Default Actions tab 3 Select if you want the QuickViewer to display on All folders Selected folders only or Prompt 4 Click OK Changing Your Default Item Views 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Environment then click the Views tab Environment 2 Reply Format Editors Viewers Signature Appearance General Views File Location Cleanup Default Actions Set Default Views Mail Appointment Task Reminder Note Posted Posted Message Group Mail Phone Message Calendar Toolbar Group Posted Use default views for reading Default Compose View amp Font Default Read View amp Font Plain Text Plain Text HTML HTML x Cok cancer 3 Select an item type from the box on the left 4 Select the Group setting in the Group drop down menu 5 Select the Posted setting from the Posted drop down menu 6 Select Group or Posted 7 Repeat Step 3 through Step 6 until you have selected a default view for each item type 8 Click OK Getting Organized 39 2 1 9 2 1 10 2 2 2 2 1 Automatically Reading the Next Item in Your Mailbox You can configure GroupWise to automatically open the next item in your mailbox after you accept decline or delete the item you are reading By default this option is disabled 1 Click Tools gt O
169. LDAP to Search for Recipient Encryption Certificates Before you can use an LDAP directory service to search for security certificates you must add the LDAP directory service to your GroupWise Address Book For more information see Adding a Directory Service to an Address Book on page 219 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Security 2 Click the Send Options tab 3 Click Advanced options 4 Select Search for recipient encryption certificates in the default LDAP directory defined in LDAP Address Book 5 Click OK twice then click Close Selecting the Method Used for Encrypting Items 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Security then click the Send Options tab 3 Click Advanced options E Mail 87 Advanced Security Options mex Ener F Search for recipient encryption certificates in the default LDAP directory defined in LDAP Address Book Default encryption algorithm RC2 40 bits X Broadcast my preferred encryption algorithm in signed item as RC2 40 bits X Signed item v Send the message portion in clear text format clear signing v Include my Certificate Authority s certificates Certificate revocation V Check incoming outgoing security item for revoked certificates 4 Warn if revocation server is offline Warn if there is no certificate revocation information in certificates S MIME compliance check Do not check certificate for S MIME compliance Check certificate for complia
170. Mail folder 4 Click OK 3 6 8 Manually Deleting Items from the Junk Mail Folder To manually delete items from the Junk Mail folder right click the Junk Mail folder click Empty Junk Mail Folder then click Yes 122 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 4 1 Calendar You can view your schedule in a variety of views or formats including day week month year task list project planner and multi user For example the month view lets you view a month schedule the Multi User view lets you view compare and manage the schedules of multiple users or resources to whose Calendars you have proxy rights and the Summary Calendar Panel lets you see a text summary of your calendar Section 4 1 Understanding the Calendar on page 123 Section 4 2 Managing Your Calendar on page 124 Section 4 3 Sending Calendar Items on page 136 Section 4 4 Receiving Calendar Items on page 151 Section 4 5 Setting Calendar Alarms on page 155 Section 4 6 Sharing a Personal Calendar on page 156 Section 4 7 Subscribing to an Internet Calendar on page 158 Section 4 8 Publishing Personal Calendars on the Internet on page 160 Section 4 9 Sharing Your Free Busy Schedule on the Internet on page 161 Section 4 10 Using the Multi User Calendar on page 162 Section 4 11 Printing a Calendar on page 164 Section 4 12 Junking Calendar Items from Unknown Sen
171. Manage rights you are called a librarian and you can perform mass document operations such as changing document properties moving documents and so on on all the documents in the library Viewing Document Properties in Remote and Caching Modes on page 345 Librarians and Older Versions of GroupWise on page 345 When a librarian performs a search the Find dialog box displays an extra option Apply Librarian Rights When selected this allows the librarian to find any documents created by other users that might not have been explicitly shared with the librarian However the librarian cannot perform a full text search when using this option The librarian can see and modify all the properties of a document such as author creator security subject document type and so on but the librarian can t see the content of the document To see the content of a document the librarian must have View rights for that version of the document If the librarian makes any changes to the author or sharing rights of a document the original author of the document receives a mail message that notifies him or her of the change This prevents the librarian from giving unauthorized users access to a document In addition to modifying the properties listed above the librarian can also perform the following actions on all the documents in the library Delete a group of documents from the library Move or copy documents to a different libra
172. May 2010 8 43 PM Marketing File Folder Marketing Mix Jade Sumi May 6 2010 8 41 PM Marketing Blog Don t forget the 4 P s Product Price Place Promotion Basic fundamentals that will help our team succeed in a difficult economy Se Selected 1 Totak14 For more information about how to use Vibe feeds see Viewing Live Feeds in Getting Informed in the Novell Vibe OnPrem 3 1 User Guide http www novell com documentation vibe_onprem31 vibeprem31_user data bookinfo html 18 6 Understanding Task and Calendar Synchronization between Vibe and GroupWise You can synchronize Vibe tasks and calendars to GroupWise by using iCal functionality as described in Synchronizing Tasks and Calendars to a Desktop Application in the Novell Vibe OnPrem 3 1 User Guide http www novell com documentation vibe_onprem3 1 vibeprem31_user data bookinfo html 396 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 19 1 Conferencing GroupWise 8 0 2 and later provides tight integrations with Novell Conferencing which can enhance your GroupWise collaboration experience by providing instant voice conferencing phone number management meeting scheduling and management chat desktop sharing whiteboarding and more Novell Conferencing must be configured to work with GroupWise by your GroupWise administrator as described in the Novell Conferencing Administration Guide http www novell com documentation novell_confere
173. Setting an Expiration Date for E Mail You Send If you set an expiration date for an e mail or phone message you send to another GroupWise user the message is retracted from the recipient s GroupWise Mailbox when the message expires 1 To set an expiration date for one mail or phone message you sent to GroupWise users open an item then click the Send Options gt General tab or To set an expiration date for all mail and phone messages you send to GroupWise users click Tools gt Options gt Send gt Send Options 2 Select Expiration Date 3 Specify how long you want the message to remain in the recipient s Mailbox 4 Return to the item you are composing or Click OK then click Close to save the setting for all items Changing the Security Setting Classification of All Items You Send A classification is a security setting that lets the recipient know if the item is confidential top secret and so forth This information appears at the top of the item A classification does not provide any encryption or additional security It is meant to alert the recipient to the relative sensitivity of the item 1 Inthe Main Window click Tools gt Options 2 Click Send gt Send Options 3 Select a security setting from the Classification drop down list Normal Proprietary Confidential Secret Top secret For your eyes only 4 Click OK Changing the MIME Encoding for E Mail You Send Many languages require different char
174. Share List If you select Add New Users And Rights To The Selected Documents you can add remove or change a user s rights to the group of documents without changing any of the rights you ve given to other users For example you could grant a new employee rights to all the benefit documents in the library This adds the new employee to the Share List for each document in the group but it doesn t modify the rights of any of the other employees If the user you want to add already has rights to one or more of the documents in the group the rights you specify in the wizard replace any previous rights this user had to the documents but this does not reduce rights the user already has For example suppose you give View rights to pam for a group of documents that includes Document A but Pam already has both View and Edit rights to Document A In this case GroupWise will give Pam View rights to all the documents in the group including Document A but GroupWise does not remove Pam s Edit rights to Document A Replacing an Existing Share List with a New Share List If you select Replace Share List for Selected Documents you can create a new Share List for each of the selected documents This new Share List replaces the existing Share List and only the users on the new Share List have rights to the selected documents Changing the Sharing Rights for a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example 1 Click Tools gt Mass Document Operatio
175. TML to display the message the way you formatted it Selecting a Text Editor on page 69 Using the GroupWise Text Editor to Format HTML E Mail on page 69 Using the GroupWise Text Editor to Format Plain Text E Mail on page 71 Using Custom Views in the GroupWise Text Editor on page 72 Selecting a Text Editor When composing a message in GroupWise you have a choice of using GroupWise OpenOffice org or Microsoft Word as your editor to compose the message If you choose to use OpenOffice org or Word as your editor the application s functionality and formatting are available within the GroupWise compose window If you select Word or OpenOffice the editor must be properly installed on your workstation in order to be available for use in GroupWise 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Environment 2 Click the Editors Viewers tab 3 Under Compose plain text using select the editor to use 4 Under Compose HTML using select the editor to use 5 Click OK If you select to use OpenOffice org or Word as your default editor you must refer to their documentation for formatting assistance Using the GroupWise Text Editor to Format HTML E Mail You can use the HTML tools available in GroupWise to add additional formatting to your messages Standard text features like font underline and italics are all still available on the toolbar as well as features like alignment indentation adding images and
176. Type a subject then type the description of the task 7 Click Send or If you are creating a posted task or a Tasklist item click Post Marking an Item to Display in the Tasklist Folder Use this action to mark an item in another folder so it displays in the Tasklist folder 1 Select one or more items then right click the selected items 2 Click Show in Tasklist The item or items stay in the original folder but they also display in the Tasklist folder where you can arrange them in the order you want assign due dates mark them as completed and so forth If there is a Tasklist in the original folder the items also appear there You can mark these items completed in either the original folder or the Tasklist folder NOTE You can only mark items to display in the Tasklist folder from a shared folder if you are the owner of the shared folder Creating a Tasklist in a Folder Other Than the Tasklist Folder You can create a Tasklist area in another folder and drag items to that area After items are ina Tasklist area of any folder they also display in the master Tasklist folder even though they are still located in the original folder 1 Click a folder 2 Click View gt Display Settings gt As Tasklist The top of the item list for this folder now displays Drag items here to add them to the Tasklist 3 Select one or more items and drag them to this area of the item list for this folder The items now display with a check
177. Understanding Auto Save on page 91 Saving an Unfinished E Mail on page 91 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 1 10 Understanding Auto Save When you compose a new message in GroupWise items are automatically saved for you This prevents the loss of any messages you are authoring if GroupWise unexpectedly shuts down When GroupWise restarts you have the option to recover these messages to finish composing them When you are composing a new message in GroupWise by default the message is automatically saved to disk every thirty seconds The message is saved as a MIME file to c Documents and Settings user Local Settings Application Data Novell GroupWise GWItemSave eml The filename increments if you are composing multiple messages simultaneously When you save the message to your Work in Progress folder or close the item the auto saved message is deleted When GroupWise starts if there are auto saved messages in the c Documents and Settings user Local Settings Application Data Novell GroupWise directory a window is displayed letting you know you have auto saved messages You have the following options to deal with auto saved messages Retrieve all saved messages into GroupWise Recovers the auto saved messages in GroupWise so that you can finish composing the messages later Delete all saved messages Deletes the auto saved messages from disk The information in them is permanently lost Ask again next time GroupWi
178. Web site click the Internet calendar link The Subscribe to Calendar window is displayed For most Internet calendars the Location and Folder Name fields are pre populated If the Folder Name field is not prepopulated type the name of the folder In the Update Frequency drop down list select how often you want the calendar contents to be updated Click Subscribe Editing a Subscribed Internet Calendar After you have subscribed to an Internet calendar you can change the location of the Internet calendar the update frequency and force an update 1 2 3 4 In the Folder List right click the subscribed calendar then click Subscribe Optional In the Location field type the new URL for the Internet calendar Optional In the Update Frequency drop down list select the update frequency Optional Click Refresh to force the Internet calendar to reload 5 Click OK Deleting a Subscribed Internet Calendar 1 In the Folder List right click the subscribed calendar then click Delete 2 Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the subscribed calendar Calendar 159 4 8 4 8 1 4 8 2 Publishing Personal Calendars on the Internet You can select to publish personal calendars to the Internet When you publish a personal calendar to the Internet that calendar can then be viewed by anyone on the Internet When you publish your personal calendar it is published to your system s Calendar Publishing Host For additional infor
179. Windows Client User Guide GroupWise 8 December 9 2010 Novell Legal Notices Novell Inc makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents or use of this documentation and specifically disclaims any express or implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Further Novell Inc reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes to its content at any time without obligation to notify any person or entity of such revisions or changes Further Novell Inc makes no representations or warranties with respect to any software and specifically disclaims any express or implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Further Novell Inc reserves the right to make changes to any and all parts of Novell software at any time without any obligation to notify any person or entity of such changes Any products or technical information provided under this Agreement may be subject to U S export controls and the trade laws of other countries You agree to comply with all export control regulations and to obtain any required licenses or classification to export re export or import deliverables You agree not to export or re export to entities on the current U S export exclusion lists or to any embargoed or terrorist countries as specified in the U S export laws You agree to not use deliverables for prohibited nuclear missile or chemical biological weaponr
180. Wise requires that the Main Menu the Nav Bar or both be displayed at all times Understanding the Nav Bar The Nav Bar is located at the top of the GroupWise window It is designed for quick access to the folders you use the most Mailbox 6 RE CS une By default the Nav Bar contains the Home Mailbox Calendar Sent Items and Contacts folders However the Nav Bar is customizable so you can add the folders you use the most Turning the Nav Bar On and Off 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt Appearance 3 Select or deselect Display Nav Bar GroupWise requires that the Main Menu the Nav Bar or both be displayed at all times Customizing the Nav Bar 1 Right click the Nav Bar then click Customize Nav Bar 2 Select the folders you want to display on the Nav Bar 3 Select a color scheme for the Nav Bar 4 Click OK Understanding the Main Toolbar The Main Toolbar provides single click access to the most common GroupWise features such as sending a message or appointment performing a search and so on Gp address Book E G O Qpnewmal CB newappt newtask 1 B ES wy GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 1 4 5 1 5 Turning the Main Toolbar On and Off 1 Click View gt Toolbars 2 Select or deselect Main When a toobar is displayed a check mark is displayed next to the toolbar name in the Main Menu For more information see Section 2 1 3 Customizing the Mai
181. a then click Options Click the Notify tab Select the type of item that you want to set notification for or Select Use same settings for all types to use the same settings for all items Select the Notify options for high priority standard priority and low priority items If you select to play a sound click the folder to browse to and select the sound you want Notify to play Click OK In order for the notifications to work make sure you are subscribed to the Notify options in Tools gt Options gt Security gt Notify Setting Which Folders to Check for New Items You can select multiple folders for Notify to check and send notifications for 1 2 Make sure Notify is running Right click amp in the Windows notification area then click Options Notify 243 3 Click the General tab 4 In the Select folders to check for notifications list box Ctrl click the folders to have Notify check You can select any folder in the list whether it is a shared folder or a folder you own 5 Click OK 8 4 4 Setting How Often to Check for New Items 1 2 3 Make sure Notify is running Right click in the Windows notification area then click Options Type the number of minutes under Check for mail every 4 Click OK 8 4 5 Setting How to Be Notified for Calendar Alarms 8 4 6 8 4 7 ao Ff N Make sure Notify is running Right click in the Windows notification area then click Options Click the A
182. a Document 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox 2 Click Actions gt Version List 3 Select the versions you want to open in the Version list box 4 Click Actions then click Open Checking In Documents Use Check In to check in documents you have checked out After you check in a document the document is unlocked in the library and other users can modify it Section 15 10 1 Checking In a Document and Leaving a Copy in the Check Out Location on page 334 Section 15 10 2 Checking In an Unchanged Document on page 335 Section 15 10 3 Checking In a Document and Deleting It from the Check Out Location on page 335 Section 15 10 4 Checking In a Document and Making It a New Version on page 335 You can check in individual documents or you can check in multiple documents The documents you check in can be in any location If one or more checked out documents are selected when you click Check In GroupWise displays the selected documents in the Documents to be checked in list box If no checked out documents are selected GroupWise displays a warning and then displays all the documents you have checked out in the list There are four check in methods Check In Method What It Does Check In and Move Moves the document to the library and deletes it from the check out location For more information see Section 15 10 3 Checking In a Document and Deleting It from the Check Out Location
183. a Personal Resource 1 In the Folder List select the Contacts folder where you want to modify a personal resource 2 Right click the resource then click Details Resources are marked by the icon 3 On the Details tab modify any information as needed 4 Click Close then click Yes to save your changes Accepting and Declining Resource Requests You can accept or decline requests for a resource only if you are the owner and have been granted Read and Write rights Personal resources cannot be shared with other users through proxy rights 1 Inthe Main Window or Calendar click File gt Proxy or Click the Folder List header drop down list above the Folder List probably displays Online or Caching to indicate what mode of GroupWise you are running in then click Proxy 2 Click the resource you own If the resource you own isn t listed in the Proxy pop up list click Proxy type the name of the resource you own in the Name field then click OK Contacts and Address Books 199 3 Double click the item you need to accept or decline 4 Click Accept or Decline on the toolbar Receiving Notification for Another User or Resource 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Security gt Notify 3 Select the name of a user for whom you are a proxy or select the name of the resource you own If the user or resource is not listed in the Notification list type the name then click Add User You can select the name from the Address Selector dialo
184. acter encodings to display certain characters properly In GroupWise you can change the encoding for items that you send if this is necessary for the recipient to view the item correctly 1 To change the MIME encoding for one item open an item view then click Send Options gt General or To change the MIME encoding for all items you send click Tools gt Options gt Send gt Send Options 2 Select your MIME encoding from the MIME Encoding drop down list 3 Return to the item you are composing or Click OK then click Close to save the setting for all items E Mail 93 3 1 11 Posting a Discussion Note A discussion note is a message that is posted to your mailbox only Discussion notes are a way of creating personal notes for yourself 1 Click File gt New gt Discussion Note 2 Type a subject 3 Type a message 4 Include any attachments by clicking Attach a File on the toolbar 5 Click Post on the toolbar 3 1 12 Sending Phone Messages 94 A phone message is a note you can send to notify other GroupWise users of calls they received while they were out of the office or unavailable Phone messages are stored in the recipient s Mailbox You cannot answer your phone from a phone message You can change the phone messages you receive into tasks reminder notes or other posted item views This way you can leave a record of the conversation on the date it was held reminder note or create a to do item to complete at a later da
185. addition you must have Add rights to the destination library Delete Requires Delete rights to the document or you must be a librarian for the library In addition you must have Delete rights to the library Share Requires Modify Security rights to the document or you must be a librarian for the library In addition you must have Change rights to the library Assign documents toa Requires Edit and Modify Security rights to the document or you must be a new author librarian for the library Modify document You must have Edit rights or be a librarian for the library In addition you properties must have Change rights to the library For more information about what a librarian can and cannot do see Section 15 15 3 Acting as the Librarian on page 344 Selecting Documents for the Mass Operation Before you begin the mass operation you must specify which documents you want to include Previewing the Results of a Mass Document Operation on page 344 Notifying the Author of Changes After You Perform a Mass Document Operation on page 344 Using Mass Document Operations in Remote Caching Modes on page 344 There are four methods you can use to select documents You can select the documents from a Find Advanced Find dialog box in the Mass Document Operations Wizard You can select the documents from a Find by Example dialog box in the Mass Document Operations Wizard You can select the documents in a fo
186. age 226 226 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 In the Find In Folder dialog box click Save type a name then click OK to display the search results of your saved search criteria By default the name of your customized Find is added to the Find drop down list 4 Click to clear the search criteria and display all items in the folder 7 1 5 Using a Saved Find 1 To select a saved Find click Find then select your customized Find from the drop down list 7 1 6 Deleting a Saved Find 1 Click Find in the Item List header 2 Click Find in folder to display the Find in Folder dialog box 3 Click Open to list your customized Finds 4 Click the Find you want to delete then click Delete 5 Click OK twice 7 2 Finding Items Anywhere in Your Mailbox Global Find on the toolbar is the most detailed search feature in GroupWise You can create a search query by choosing from a variety of search criteria until you find the item you are looking for When you search with Global Find GroupWise compares the whole words in your search criteria and attempts to match them with the words in the search index Section 7 2 1 Using a Global Find on page 227 Section 7 2 2 Narrowing a Global Find on page 228 Section 7 2 3 Finding an Item by Example on page 229 Section 7 2 4 Saving the Results of a Find on page 229 Section 7 2 5 Finding a Document and Creating a Reference to It in Your Mailbox
187. ages stay in your Mailbox until you delete them Appointments reminder notes and tasks stay in your Mailbox until you accept decline or delete them When you accept an appointment reminder note or task it is moved to your Calendar All Mailbox items are marked with an icon The icons change depending on whether or not the item has been opened See Section 1 9 Identifying Icons Appearing Next to Items on page 28 for more information All unopened items in your Mailbox are bolded to help you easily identify which items and documents you have not yet read This is especially useful for collapsed discussion threads because it saves you the time of expanding each thread to check if there are newly posted items Selecting the Default Read View on page 102 Reading Items on page 102 Changing the Font of Received Items on page 103 Setting the Default Viewer on page 104 Setting the Web Browser Behavior on page 104 Marking an Item Read Later on page 105 Marking an Item Read on page 105 Selecting the Default Read View By default GroupWise uses the HTML Read view to display items for reading This Read view enables both HTML formatted and plain text e mail to display correctly When you read an item in GroupWise you can select how you want the message to display You can select whether the message is displayed in text or HTML If the message is a text message you can also select
188. al item You can check the Properties of the original item to see if GroupWise was able to retract it Right click the item in the Sent Items folder then click Properties Mail and phone messages cannot be retracted if they have already been opened Replying to Sent E Mail Use Reply to make additions to any sent mail 1 Click the Sent Items folder in the Nav Bar 2 Right click the item you want to reply to then click Reply 3 Select Reply to sender to send the reply just to yourself or Select Reply to all to send the reply to yourself and all others on the original message GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 2 5 4 Click OK 5 Make all necessary additions to the message then click Send on the toolbar Confirming Delivery of E Mail You Send GroupWise provides several ways to confirm that your item was delivered Receiving Notification About Items You Send on page 99 Requesting a Reply for Items You Send on page 100 Notifying Recipients About Items You Send on page 100 If you are sending messages to non GroupWise systems remember that those systems must have status tracking capability in order to return the status of your outgoing message to your GroupWise system Receiving Notification About Items You Send You can receive notification when the recipient opens or deletes a message declines an appointment or completes a task 1 To get a return receipt for one item open an item view click t
189. al words unless you use a wildcard character On the other hand Find recognizes consecutive characters even if they are not whole words as long as the characters exist in exactly the same order you enter them in the Find field For example if you are looking for an e mail with Project status meeting next Tuesday as the subject you can search for any or all of the words in the subject in either Find or Global Find The following are among the successful search criteria that will find that e mail in each search tool Tool Example Finds Global Find by meeting tuesday All items with either meeting or tuesday subject somewhere in the subject Global Find by meeting tuesday All items with either meeting meetings subject or tuesday somewhere in the subject Advanced Find by meeting tuesday All items with both meeting and tuesday subject somewhere in the subject Find meeting tuesday All items with the characters meeting tuesday together in exactly that order in the subject 238 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 7 5 2 Tool Example Find meeting day Comparing Find Functionality Finds All items with meeting followed immediately by a day of the week in the subject The following table compares Find Global Find and Advanced Find in more detail Functionality Searches throughout your whole mailbox Searches within a selected folder Find
190. alendar If a description field is available for the calendar you are importing type a description then specify whether to replace or add to the existing contents Click OK Calendar 135 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 Sending Calendar Items Section 4 3 1 Understanding Calendar Items on page 136 Section 4 3 2 Scheduling Appointments on page 136 Section 4 3 3 Sending Reminder Notes on page 144 Section 4 3 4 Scheduling Recurring Items on page 146 Understanding Calendar Items You can schedule appointments and reminder notes for yourself and other users You can also reserve a block of time by using a posted appointment For information about how appointments and reminder notes differ from other item types see Section 1 8 Understanding GroupWise Item Types on page 27 If you want to find out if someone is coming to your meeting you can check for an accepted or declined status in the item s Properties For more information see Working with Sent Items on page 95 All scheduled items can be retracted or rescheduled even if the recipients have already opened and accepted them For more information see Rescheduling an Appointment on page 143 For more information about managing items after they have been sent or received see Section 3 1 Sending E Mail on page 67 and Section 3 3 Receiving E Mail on page 101 Scheduling Appointments Use appointments to schedu
191. ally inserted in the corresponding document property field for every document you add to the selected library You can specify default values for the document property fields that can be edited The default values are used when you create a new document or import a document into the selected library If no default values have been specified for Author and Document Type GroupWise uses the creator s name as the author and Document as the Document Type 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Documents 2 Click the library for which you want to specify default values 3 Click Properties then click the Document Defaults tab 4 Click a field then type the default value For example you could type your name as the default value for the Author field If you do not include a required field in the Selected fields list box on the Property Configuration tab you must specify a default value for the field here on the Default Values tab Required fields are marked with an asterisk on the Property Configuration tab Document Management 309 15 2 15 2 1 Field names that are indented under another field are related to that field For example the parent field might be a project name and the child fields might be the subproject names If you want to specify a default value for a child field you must first specify a default value for its parent field 5 Click OK Understanding Document Types When you create a document in Gro
192. and Leaving a Copy in the Check Out Location 334 15 10 2 Checking In an Unchanged Document 335 15 10 3 Checking In a Document and Deleting It from the Check Out Location 335 15 10 4 Checking In a Document and Making Ita New Version 335 Deleting Documents cn sick he ea se eee olen toe eet ly ees Paw ew et are 335 15 11 1 Deleting Documents According to Document Type 336 15 11 2 Deleting Groups of Documents 336 15 11 3 Deleting a Document Reference from Your Mailbox 336 15 11 4 Deleting a Specific Version of a Document 336 15 11 5 Deleting All Versions of a Document 337 Copying DOCUMENTS ig diiin ana at did e ec deep ied eee D Ds 337 15 12 1 Copying Groups of Documents 337 15 12 2 Copying a Document mrs 4188 hehe Ohne a eee ee pea ee a Be 337 15 12 3 Copying a Document to Another Library 338 Saving Documents nee E eid na sie set pdt anie RATS Sonos en sk theca wed nad 338 15 13 1 Saving Items as Documents 338 15 13 2 Saving Changes to a Document s Contents 339 15 14 Storing Multiple Versions of a Document
193. anging and Removing Your Password 372 16 2 3 Bypassing Your GroupWise or LDAP Password 373 16 2 4 Using Mailbox Passwords in Caching Mode 374 16 2 5 Using Mailbox Passwords in Remote Mode 375 16 2 6 Using Mailbox Passwords with Proxies 375 16 3 Archiving EMail saesae Jette CME alee and Je Sect aces ey ala weg mien ane 375 16 3 1 Understanding Your Archive 375 16 3 2 Specifying Where Archives Are Stored 376 16 3 3 Moving an Item to the Archive 376 16 3 4 Archiving Items Automatically 377 16 3 5 Viewing Archived Items 377 16 3 6 Unarchiving REMS si arei eee ee ea nent SOO Seidler ee Pe beh kPa alate 377 16 3 7 Moving Your Archive from One Location to Another 378 16 3 8 Combining Archived Items from Multiple Archives 379 16 4 Using Mailbox Storage Size Information 379 16 4 1 Viewing Your Mailbox Size Information 380 16 4 2 Deleting E Mail by Using Mailbox Storage Size Information 380
194. ar Day Organizer Day Trifold Expanded Day Calendar and Franklin Day Calendar When you print the Calendar on a color printer the Calendar prints in full color This shows which appointments belong to which calendar and which appointments have categories Section 4 11 1 Printing Your Main Calendar on page 164 Section 4 11 2 Printing a Specific Calendar on page 165 Section 4 11 3 Printing the Calendars of Multiple Users on page 165 4 11 1 Printing Your Main Calendar 164 1 Click File gt Print gt Print Calendar Print Calendar 2a Form Content Options ss E Format Selected fom Form size Day Letter 44 Week 5 5 8 5in 85 Month Custom List Width Height Multi User 8 50 in 00 in Setup Franklin sizes Available forms Monarch 8 5 x 11 in Daily Text Calendar Day Organizer Day Trifold Landscape Portrait Landscape Expandable Day Calendar bs Preview Printer Setup Close Form orientation mi Click a calendar format in the Format group box Click a paper size in the Form gt Form Size group box Click a calendar view under Available Forms Click Portrait or Landscape Click the Content tab type a starting date then read and select other options N oO BB WOW N style and size 8 Click the Options tab then read and select other options GroupWise 8 Windows Client User G
195. are met For example if you are on a core team you can have a rule forward meeting minutes to extended team members This action forwards the message as a regular message item with the forwarded message visible in the message Forwards items as attachments to one or more users when the rule conditions are met For example if you are on a core team you can have a rule forward meeting minutes to extended team members Delegates an appointment reminder note or task to another user when the rule conditions are met For example if someone is covering for you while you re away from the office your rule can delegate appointments tasks or reminder notes to that person Sends a prepared reply to the sender when the rule conditions are met For example if you need to be out of the office for several days your rule could send a reply to incoming items indicating when you ll be back You can also use Define Conditions to prevent replies going to mail list servers and other large groups Accepts an appointment reminder note or task when the rule conditions are met For example your rule could accept all appointments from a specific individual Assigns a category to any item meeting the specified conditions Categories include Low Priority Urgent Follow up Personal and any other user defined category Deletes or declines any item when the rule conditions are met For example your rule could decline any appointment scheduled for a c
196. aries By default the main Documents folder is your default document library NNTP Displays a list of subscribed groups within the newsgroup GroupWise Feeds Displays a list of the RSS feeds you have subscribed to Favorites Displayed whenever you are not in the Calendar folder Contacts folder Documents folder or any NNTP folders or RSS feeds The Favorites Simple Folder List allows you to copy folders into the folder list for quicker access Favorites Folder List The Favorites Folder List allows you to add your most commonly used folders to the Simple Folder List for quick access This is helpful when you drag and drop items to your folder list 46 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 2 3 2 Figure 2 4 Simple Folder List vr Favorites Mailbox Calendar A Tasklist B Home Bugs User Comments Displaying Folder Lists Arranging Your Folder Lists on page 47 Building Your Favorites Folder List on page 47 Reorganizing Your Folders on page 48 Alphabetizing a Folder List on page 48 Closing the Folder List on page 48 Arranging Your Folder Lists 1 Click the Folder List drop down arrow 2 Select one or more Folder Lists Favorites Simple or Full 3 If you selected more than one type of Folder List click the Folder List drop down arrow again then click Choose Order 4 Move the Folder Lists into the order you want them to display then click OK 5 Size th
197. arketing Briefing Notes Ishmael Yacoub Janet DeSoto 09 04 08 12 21 Mailbox gy Janet DeSoto Home my Mailbox 1 Sent Items 4 F Calendar A amp Billing cy Frequent Conta By Janet DeSote T m 0 Selected 0 Total 3 After you have placed an item in the Tasklist folder you can Change its position in the Tasklist Reordering the Tasklist Folder on page 174 Assign it a due date Section 5 4 4 Assigning a Due Date to a Tasklist Item on page 176 Track its progress by specifying the percent completed Specifying a Completion Percentage on page 177 Mark it as completed Section 5 3 2 Tracking Task Completion on page 170 IMPORTANT If you or your system administrator has set up auto archiving of items in your Mailbox Tasklist items are also archived based on the original date you received the item not based on the due date you assign it Using Tasks A task is an item to be completed by a specified date and time When you assign a task to a user the user can accept or decline the task but until it is declined or completed the task appears in the user s Tasklist folder and on the user s Calendar each day Section 5 3 1 Assigning a Task on page 168 Section 5 3 2 Tracking Task Completion on page 170 Assigning a Task When you create a task you can assign it to yourself a posted task or assign it to multiple people Assi
198. ary and Marking It Available on page 368 Marking a Document Available without Returning It to the Library on page 368 Returning a Document to the Library and Marking It Available 1 Right click the document reference in your Mailbox or folder 2 Click Reset Document Status Reset Document Status EE v Return the document to the library ETE 3 Make sure that both Mark the document as available and Return the document to the library are selected then click OK Marking a Document Available without Returning It to the Library 1 Right click the document reference in your Mailbox or folder 2 Click Reset Document Status 3 Click Mark the document as available 4 Make sure that Return the document to the library is not selected 5 Click OK Using Reset Document Status in Remote Caching Mode When you use Reset Document Status in Remote or Caching mode you can specify whether or not you want to return the document to the Master Library Use the Make the Document Available in the Master Library option to remove the In Use status and make the document available in the Master Library without updating the document 1 In Remote or Caching mode right click the document reference 2 Click Reset Document Status 368 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 18 3 15 19 Reset Document Status Ex Z Mark the document as Remote library v Return the document to the Remote library Mark the document
199. as Mae ad eee towers 115 3 5 2 Printing E Mail with Attachments 115 3 5 3 Displaying a Header c acu rennes ne Pet eee gen gone pans at date 116 8 5 4 Changing the Default Printed Font Size on Plain Text Items 116 3 5 5 Printing an ten Lists anses techy cee pen SNe ge Meee EE ue et are 116 3 5 6 Configuring the Default Print Option for Distribution Lists 116 3 6 Handling Unwanted E Mail Spam 116 3 6 1 Understanding Junk Mail Handling 117 3 6 2 Blocking or Junking All E Mail from a Particular User 118 3 6 3 Blocking or Junking E Mail from a Particular Internet Domain 119 8 6 4 Junking E Mail from Users Not In a Personal Address Book 120 3 6 5 Preventing E Mail from a User or Internet Domain from Being Junked or Blocked 120 3 6 6 Modifying Junk Mail Handling Lists and Settings 121 8 6 7 Automatically Deleting Items from the Junk Mail Folder 122 3 6 8 Manually Deleting Items from the Junk Mail Folder 122 4 Calendar 123 4 1 Understanding the Calendar 2 123 4 2 Managing Your Calendar
200. as available in the Master library ETE 3 To make the document available without updating the document in the Remote Library click Mark the document as available in the remote library or To make the document available and update the document in the Remote Library click Mark the document as available in the remote library then click Return the document to the remote library 4 To change the document status from In use to Available in the master library click Mark the document as available in the master library Using the Unreturned Documents Dialog Box When you start or exit GroupWise GroupWise checks the registry file to see if you have any documents open in the staging directory If you do GroupWise lists all the documents in the Unreturned Documents dialog box so you can decide what to do with them At this point you can click the check box to select the documents by default all are selected you want to return to the library and have GroupWise return them Or you can switch to the application in which you created the document and return the documents by saving or closing them yourself If you switch to an integrated application closing the document returns it to the library If you switch to a non integrated application you must close the application to return the document to the library You cannot manually access the Unreturned Documents dialog box Use Reset Document Status to move documents from a staging directo
201. atabase so they follow you from machine to machine You can select from a list of default preconfigured display settings or customize your own display settings Understanding Basic Folder Display Settings on page 53 Changing or Deleting Folder Display Settings on page 54 Saving Your Display Settings on page 55 Selecting Saved Display Settings for a Folder on page 55 Sending a Display Setting on page 55 Importing a Display Setting on page 56 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Understanding Basic Folder Display Settings You can view the items in your Mailbox different ways depending on how you want the information organized 1 Right click the folder you want to change the display settings for then click Properties 2 Click the Display tab then click More Display Settings 3 Select the display setting from the View by drop down list You can select from the following settings Details Discussion Threads Panels Calendar Tasklist 4 Click OK twice Details Details displays a list of your items and information about them organized in columns including Subject Date CC Priority Document Type Due Date Size Version and many other categories Details is the default Mailbox view if you have not changed your Mailbox properties For information about adding or rearranging columns see Using Columns on page 50 Figure 2 5 Details View From Subject Date g
202. atenet 11000 Development IB Favian Haughey fhaughey Coporate net 11017 Marketing 8 Greg Famsworth gfamsworth Comorate net 11015 Sales Ishmael Yacoub jyacoub Comporate net 11006 Marketing Janet DeSoto jdesoto Comorate net Jason Stevens jstevens Corporate net x11022 Development Lori Tanaka tanaka Comporate net B Lunch Group 2 Click an address book 3 Ctrl click the users you want to send mail to 4 Click File gt Mail Message 6 3 6 Sending Mail to an Entire Address Book 1 In the Main Window click on the toolbar 2 Click an address book 3 Shift click the first and last users in the address book 4 Right click the group of selected users 5 Click Action gt Send Mail 6 4 Using Contacts Folders Contacts folders give you a convenient view of address book information The Frequent Contacts folder is associated with your Frequent Contacts address book When you create a new address book as described in Section 6 5 2 Creating a Personal Address Book on page 204 the new address book is automatically added as a new Contacts folder When you create a new Contacts folder a corresponding personal address book is created automatically Section 6 4 1 Creating a Contacts Folder on page 186 Section 6 4 2 Managing Contacts on page 187 Section 6 4 3 Managing Groups on page 193 Section 6 4 4 Managing Resources on page 198 Section 6 4 5 Managing Organizations
203. ates are received D Do not wait for responses Manually 4 Type a descriptive name for the TCP IP connection Type the IP address and port information provided by your system administrator Instead of an IP address you can also type the DNS Domain Name System host name in the IP Address field Check with your system administrator 6 Click a disconnect method click OK then click Close Creating a Network Connection 1 Click Accounts gt Send Retrieve gt GroupWise Options 2 Click Configure click Connect To then click New 3 Click Network then click OK Network Connection EX Connection name Path to post office E Disconnect method When all updates are received D Do not wait for responses Manually 4 Type a descriptive name for the network connection 5 Type the path to any post office directory in your GroupWise system 272 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Contact your system administrator for the path to your post office You can also connect to any post office in your GroupWise system to access your Online Mailbox You don t need to connect to the post office containing your Online Mailbox 6 Click a disconnect method click OK then click Close Copying a Remote Connection 1 Click Accounts gt Send Retrieve gt GroupWise Options 2 Click Configure click Connect To click the connection then click Copy 3 Modify the connection then click OK Editing a Remote Connect
204. ations in one of two ways through the Open Document Management API ODMA supplied by the application or through a point to point integration macro ODMA is an open standard that makes it possible for GroupWise Library and other document management programs to communicate with your applications Each application vendor is responsible for implementing ODMA standards If an application is ODMA compliant you can integrate it with GroupWise Library Integrating Applications During Setup If Setup detects that you have an ODMA enabled application such as WordPerfect Microsoft Word or Excel properly installed Setup prompts you to specify whether you want GroupWise to integrate with the application If you integrate your applications and later want to disable the integration you can turn off the integration in the Documents Setup dialog box Integrating Applications After Setup If you don t enable the integrations during Setup but later decide you do want to use integrations you must run Setup again to install the integrations After you run Setup you can turn integrations on or off for each application in the Integrations tab in Documents Setup After you ve enabled integrations you can turn them on or off at any time Document Management 363 15 17 3 Turning Off Integrations 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Documents 2 Click the Integrations tab You can turn off integrations for one application or for all your
205. ators The six relative operators are Before On Before After On After Near and On Near Use these operators to schedule days relative to a specific date For example to schedule the Monday closest to November 6 in all years you could enter the following formula GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide mon on near nov 6 If you need to schedule the first Tuesday after November 6 2011 you could enter the following formula tue after nov 6 2011 Or You can use the Or operator a comma or the word Or to indicate that one or the other function or statement must hold true in order to schedule days For example to schedule an appointment on the 15th day of each month in the year 2011 but only if the 15th falls on a Tuesday or Thursday enter the following formula 15 2011 tue thu Not When it is placed before a function the Not operator or the word Not negates that function For example if you want to schedule all days in January 2011 except for Tuesdays and Thursdays you could use the following formula jan 2011 tue thu Low Priority And Like a space the low priority And operator amp or the word And between two functions indicates that both functions must hold true However the low priority And has the lowest priority of all operators For example examine the following formula tue thu julaug This means that scheduled days must be a Tuesday or must be a Thursday and must be in July or must be in August Ho
206. box click Online Mailbox Password type your Online Mailbox password then click OK Specify the new password in both fields then click OK Remote and Caching Modes 275 11 2 2 11 2 3 If your administrator has turned on LDAP authentication read and follow the additional information about your Online Mailbox password that is provided in this dialog box Your Online Mailbox must have a password before you can use Remote mode If you have not assigned a password to your Online Mailbox do so in Security Options while running GroupWise in your office Changing Remote Delete Options By default if you delete an item from your Remote Mailbox the item is deleted from your Online mailbox the next time you connect You can change the deletion options in Remote Properties so that an item deleted from your Remote Mailbox stays in your Online mailbox or vice versa 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Accounts Remote 2 Click the remote account click Properties then click the Advanced tab 3 Make your changes then click OK TIP This process does not apply to Caching mode GroupWise automatically synchronizes the deletions between the Online and Caching modes Changing Your Signature The signature you specify for Remote mode is the same signature that is used for Online mode You can specify this signature in Remote Properties 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Accounts Remote 2 Click the remote accoun
207. box to the left of them Tasks and the Tasklist 173 TTS Novell GroupWise Q3 Project 5 fom e File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help Home Mailbox 1 Calendar Sentitems Contacts LA G Address Book FB A Nemai NewAppt M Neutask Ela 8 Onliner B Project Find v Vy Favorites Name Subject Date E Calendar A Davidjones TrainingSlides 8 04 08 en Motte 1 Qi ishmael Yacoub Marketing Briefing Notes 09 04 08 i221 M Tasklist Janet DeSoto Home 2 Mailbox 1 DE Poea Sent Items E Calendar J Billing Frequent Contacts m Selected 0 Total 2 4 To rearrange the items drag them to their new positions 5 To show only the items that are part of the Tasklist in this folder click an item in the folder click Actions gt Tasklist Actions gt Hide items not in Tasklist Repeat this step to show all items in the folder Any items you add to the Tasklist area of a folder also display as part of the master Tasklist in the Tasklist folder If you perform a sort on this folder only the non Tasklist items are sorted 5 4 3 Organizing the Tasklist Folder There are several ways to change the order of the items in the Tasklist You can also use subtasks to help organize your Tasklist folder Reordering the Tasklist Folder on page 174 Using Subtasks to Organize Your Tasklist Folder on page 175 Reo
208. can also select an item before creating the new category then immediately assign the new category to the selected item Renaming a Category 1 Display the Edit Categories dialog box 2 Select the category name then click Rename 3 Type the new name then click OK The category is renamed in the list and for all the items to which it was assigned Finding Items by Category in a Folder 1 Inthe upper right corner of any folder click Find gt Categories then click the category name All items that have been assigned this category are displayed 2 To clear this selection click 44 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 2 3 2 3 1 Sorting Items by Category 1 Add a Category column to the folder Item List as described in Adding a Column on page 51 2 Click the Category column to sort the Item List by category Deleting a Category 1 Display the Edit Categories dialog box 2 Select the category name then click Delete 3 Click Yes then click OK The category is removed from the list and from all the items to which it was assigned Using Folders to Organize Your Mailbox Use folders to store and organize your items For example you can group all items related to a particular task or subject together By default the items in your mailbox are deleted and archived only when you choose to do so However your GroupWise administrator can change this functionality to delete or archive your messages after a
209. category assigned If you assign a category that you created to an item you are sending the item arrives in the recipient s Mailbox with no category assigned You can assign more than one category to an item and specify which category is the primary one The color of the primary category is used to identify the item Getting Organized 41 2 2 2 Assigning Categories to Items Assigning a Category Quickly on page 42 Assigning Any Category to Any Item Type on page 42 Assigning a Category by Using Item Properties on page 43 Assigning Multiple Categories on page 43 Removing a Category from an Item on page 43 Assigning a Category Quickly In any Item List 1 Click the item icon 2 Click a category in the drop down list The 10 most recently used categories are listed If you have not yet used categories they are displayed alphabetically Assigning Any Category to Any Item Type To assign a category to a message appointment task note or contact 1 Right click the item 2 Click Categories Open Save As Print Find in Mailbox folder Reply Forward Forward as Attachment Delete Delete and Empty Archive Change to Junk Mail gt Read Later Mark Private Show in Tasklist Categories Urgent Properties FRE Personal Low priority 3 Click a category in the drop down list or If the category you want isn t listed click More to dis
210. ch Name x Selected Routing Slip d H To g amp Lunch Group Name E Mail Address e Ishmael Yacoub jyacoub Corpori Nyi pi Janet DeSoto jdesoto Corpora J pi Jason Stevens jstevens Corpor J p B Lori Tanaka ltanaka Corpora _ 8 New Contact fia ta au Save Group XK Re 2 Select a group then click To CC or BC 3 Repeat as necessary 4 Optional To show all the members of the group right click the group then click Expand Group 5 Optional To see more information about the group right click the group then click Details 6 Click OK to return to the item view Viewing Group Information 1 In the Folder List select the Contacts folder where you want to view group information 2 Right click the group then click Details 3 Click the Details tab jt Lunch Group File View Actions Help Summary Details Close i Save Delete 2 SendMail Name Comments Members 4 Contacts 0 Groups 0 Resources amp Add 8 To Anita Olivos X Rer 8 To Basil Forsgren 8 To Doug Newman 8 To Samantha Murphy Frequent Contacts Contacts and Address Books 197 198 6 4 4 Deleting a Group from a Contacts Folder 1 In the Folder List select the Contacts folder where you want to delete the group 2 Right click the group then click Delete 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the group Managing Resources Resources are items that can be sc
211. ch as quotation marks as text delimiters However if unusual characters are used as delimiters the import process won t recognize them If the csv file does not display in proper columns 5a Click Options 5b Change the field delimiter character as required by the csv file 5c Change the text delimiter character as required by the csv file The csv file should redisplay in proper columns Click L and L to page through the csv file data The import process attempts to assign the CSV fields to GroupWise fields To change an automatic field assignment click the GroupWise field link that you want to change or To select a field assignment click the Click to choose link Select a displayed field or Click a field category then select the GroupWise field that you want to correspond to the csv file field Contacts and Address Books 217 218 9 10 To not import the data from a CSV field click the link in the GroupWise Fields column then click Clear When you are finished assigning field mappings click OK to import the CSV data into the selected address book TIP You can also initiate an import by dragging and dropping a csv file into a Contacts folder Importing Address Books from POP3 IMAP4 E Mail Accounts 1 Click File gt Import POP3 IMAP The Installed E Mail Clients list box displays the e mail accounts installed on your machine 2 Select the e mail account you want to import into G
212. ck OK 3 View the users schedules 4 If you have appropriate Proxy rights and want to schedule an appointment you can click and drag from the time you want the appointment to be to include the users you want to include in the appointment You can modify the Multi User List associated with this Multi User view You can also create additional Multi User views 162 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 4 10 2 4 10 3 Modifying a Multi User List You must have the appropriate Proxy rights to add users and resources to a Multi User List and to view their calendars in a Multi User view See Section 10 Mailbox Calendar Access for Proxy Users on page 257 1 Click Calendar in the Nav Bar then click El on the Calendar toolbar If you have created additional Multi User views the button might look like l 2 Click the arrow to the right of Gal then click Add or Remove Users 3 To add a user or resource click Add User double click a name then click OK 4 To delete a user or resource click the name then click Remove User or To delete all the names in the list click Edit then click Remove All To change the order of the names in the list click a name then click the up arrow or down arrow button The order of names determines the order in which the calendars display in the Multi User view To remove a user or resource calendar from the Multi User view without deleting the name from the list deselect th
213. ck Preview to see how the list will look 16 Click Print 224 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 7 1 7 1 1 Finding Items GroupWise provides a variety of methods for locating specific items in your e mail appointments and other GroupWise items Section 7 1 Quickly Finding Items in a Folder on page 225 Section 7 2 Finding Items Anywhere in Your Mailbox on page 227 Section 7 3 Using Advanced Find on page 230 Section 7 4 Finding Text in Items on page 238 Section 7 5 Comparing the GroupWise Find Methods on page 238 Quickly Finding Items in a Folder If the folder you are in for example your Mailbox or Calendar contains many items you might have a difficult time finding just one of them Find lets you list items by sender and by text in the Subject field It also lets you display items according to specific search criteria including received items sent items posted items draft items by category or with attachments When you use Find all items that do not match the search criteria you select are hidden from view Find does not actually move or delete items from the folder it displays certain items based on the search criteria you specify When you clear the search criteria the hidden items are displayed again When you use Find GroupWise searches the sender recipients and the message subject for the specified word or phrase Find does not search message text or attachme
214. click on the toolbar 2 Click an address book then click or Ctrl click the names you want to copy 3 Click Edit gt Copy To 4 Select the address book you want to copy the names to then click OK When you copy an entry from one address book to another the entries are linked so that if you edit one entry the other entry is updated as well 204 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 6 5 4 6 5 5 6 5 6 Defining Custom Fields in a Personal Address Book In the Main Window click on the toolbar Click the personal address book where you want to define custom fields Double click an entry then click the Advanced tab Click Add then type a title for the field in the Field Name field In the Value field type the information you want to display in the field for that entry 6 Click OK ao Ff O N After you have added a custom field to an address book the field cannot be deleted However because custom fields are displayed as columns you can remove the column from your display Because each address book can have different columns displayed the column must be removed from each address book individually Deleting Entries from a Personal Address Book 1 In the Main Window click amp on the toolbar 2 Click an address book then click or Ctrl click the names you want to delete 3 Press the Delete key then click Yes Renaming a Personal Address Book 1 Inthe Main Window click G on the toolbar 2 Click the personal a
215. click Properties The Calendar View Properties dialog box opens 3 Select Extended Navigation 4 Click OK to close the Calendar View Properties dialog box Now when you view the monthly calendar as many month calendars display below the current month s appointment calendar as can fit in your GroupWise window Saving a Calendar View You can save a customized calendar view 1 Click Calendar on the Nav Bar 2 Customize your calendar views 3 Right click any view then click Properties The Calendar View Properties dialog box opens 4 Select the view you want to save then click New 5 Type the name of your custom view select a view type then click OK The new view is added to the list of views GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Defining Your Work Schedule Your work schedule shows others when you are available and affects how calendars display By default GroupWise assumes an 8 00 a m to 5 00 p m workday Monday through Friday If you have a different work schedule you can set your schedule to display accurately 1 Click Tools gt Options gt Calendar then click the Work Schedule tab 2 Optional If you are always available for appointments click Set Always Available and skip the remaining steps In the Start time field specify the time when your day typically begins In the End time field specify the time when your day typically ends Select the days when you work and leave your usual days off deselected OO a
216. click the Category icon then select the category TIP You can also add a contact by dragging and dropping an item from someone new into a Contacts folder to create a contact record for that person In addition you can add a contact by double clicking in the white space of an address card list Contacts can also be added by right clicking an e mail address or name in any GroupWise item and selecting Add To Address Book Modifying a Contact You can modify a contact s information in the Frequent Contacts folder or a personal Contacts folder In order to modify a contact in the GroupWise address book you must first copy the contact to the Frequent Contacts folder or another personal Contacts folder 1 Inthe Folder List select the Contacts folder where you want to modify the contact 2 Inthe contact list double click the contact to modify 3 Make any needed modifications to the contact For information about the contact details you can enter on each tab see Adding a Contact on page 187 Contacts and Address Books 189 190 TIP If you fill in the Company field on the Contact tab with an existing organization click the Organization icon amp to retrieve organization information into the contact 4 Click Close then click Yes to save your changes Finding a Contact Use the Find field in the Item List header of a Contacts folder to search for specific contacts as described in Section 7 1 2 Finding Contact
217. clicking the document reference clicking File gt Properties then clicking the Version tab Checking Out Documents Use Check Out when you want to lock the documents you are working on for extended periods of time For example you can use Check Out to lock documents you want to work on when you are at home or away from the office You do not need to use Check Out to lock a file every time you edit it When you open a document GroupWise marks the document as In Use and it can t be edited by other users until you close it Section 15 8 1 Checking Out a Document on page 328 Section 15 8 2 Checking Out Multiple Documents on page 329 Section 15 8 3 Viewing All the Documents You Have Checked Out on page 330 Section 15 8 4 Updating a Checked Out Document without Checking It In on page 330 When a document is checked out it is locked in the library and other users can t modify it however they can view it if they have View rights GroupWise copies the document to the check out location you specify The document remains locked in the library until you check it back in You can select one or more documents to check out in the Main Window and you can specify a different filename for each document you check out You can specify a default check out location in the File Location tab in Environment options Checking Out a Document 1 In your Mailbox click the document reference for the document you wan
218. counts gt Account Options 2 Click the account then click Properties 3 Click the Advanced tab 4 Select Use SSL for both the outgoing and incoming mail servers then specify the digital certificate you want to use This certificate enables GroupWise to use SSL to authenticate to the mail server you have chosen If no certificates are listed in the drop down list you need to use your Web browser to obtain a certificate from an independent certificate authority For more information see Obtaining a Security Certificate from a Certificate Authority on page 86 5 Click OK then click Close 12 4 5 Downloading Items from POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts Downloading Items Manually on page 289 Downloading Items Automatically on page 290 Downloading Items Manually 1 To download items from one account click Accounts gt Send Retrieve then click the account name or POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts 289 12 4 6 To download items from all accounts in which Include this account when doing Send Retrieve on All Marked Accounts is selected in the account properties click Accounts gt Send Retrieve gt All Marked Accounts In Remote mode if Include this account when doing Send Retrieve on All Marked Accounts is selected in Remote Properties you can download items from your Online Mailbox at the same time as you download your Internet mail accounts Downloading Items Automatically 1 Click Accounts gt Account Options
219. ct a different address book in the Address Selector Using the Frequent Contacts Address Book Use the Frequent Contacts address book to access your most frequently used or most recently used entries When you use an address in a message the entry is copied to the Frequent Contacts address book if the book s options are set to do so You can view the date and time you last used an entry and the number of times you have used it After an entry is placed in Frequent Contacts it remains there until you delete it The entry also remains in its original address book You can use Frequent Contacts Properties to decide which addresses to capture if any from either received or sent items and how long you want addresses to remain in the address book before deleting them 1 Click in an item you are composing 2 Select Frequent Contacts from the Look in drop down list 3 Double click the names you want then click OK 184 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide The Frequent Contacts address book can be closed but it cannot be deleted 6 3 4 Sending Mail from a Contacts Folder 1 Click a Contacts folder 2 If you are viewing the Contacts folder as address cards click the e mail address you want to send a message to or If the e mail address is not immediately displayed in the Contacts folder 2a Double click a contact 2b On the Summary page click the e mail address you want to send a message to r 8 Art Ramirez Fil
220. ction 9 4 6 Limiting Items Affected by a Rule on page 254 Rules 9 4 1 Creating a Basic Rule 1 Click Tools gt Rules then click New New Rule P E Rule name When event is New Item And items are Received Sent Posted Draft If conditions are optional Item types Define Conditions Mail Act on all items Appointment Task Reminder note Phone message Appointment conflict exists Does not matter Yes or No Then actions are l Add Action 5 Cancel 2 Type a name in the Rule name field 3 Click the When event is pop up list then click an event to trigger the rule 4 If you clicked New Item Startup Exit or User Activated click one or more sources for the item For example click Received and Posted or If you clicked Filed Item Open Folder or Close Folder click the folder icon click a folder then click OK to display the folder name 5 Click one or more types of items you want the rule to act on in the Item Types list If you want to further restrict the items affected by the rule click Define Conditions click the appropriate options then click OK For more information about the options that you can choose from see Section 7 3 2 Selecting Fields in Advanced Finds and Rules on page 231 6 Click Add Action then click the action you want the rule to perform Some actions such as Move to Folder and Reply require you to fill in additional informatio
221. cument references from the Documents folder Deleting a document reference does not affect the document itself Document Management 313 15 3 1 15 3 2 The Documents folder has two Find Results folders Authored contains document references for all the documents for which you are the author Default Library contains document references for all the documents you have access to in the default library You can change or delete the Authored and Default Library folders You can create other document Find Results folders according to your needs For example you can create a Find Results folder for a specific library subject author or document type Section 15 3 1 Find Results Folders on page 314 Section 15 3 2 Specifying When Document References Are Added to the Documents Folder on page 314 Section 15 3 3 Changing the Maximum Number of References in the Documents Folder on page 315 Find Results Folders The Documents folder has two Find Results folders The Authored folder contains document references for all the documents for which you are the author Figure 15 2 Mailbox View 1 Novell GroupWise Mailbox File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help i ip Mailbox 1 WAG E E E Res Address Book amp po 3 2 New Mail v New Appt M NewTask Eyl pB 3 Gre D amp 4 F8 Onlinev v Mailbox Find vy Favorites From Subject Date j faz T B Q3 Project Ss ap Janet D
222. d From Ishmael Yacoub 9 4 2008 1221 14 PM Toc Janet DeSoto Subject Marketing Driefing Notes Here aro the notes kom marketing Message marketing notes tt Selected 1 Totak 7 Section 1 6 1 Turning the QuickViewer On and Off on page 25 Section 1 6 2 Positioning the QuickViewer on page 26 Section 1 6 3 Using the QuickViewer on page 26 Turning the QuickViewer On and Off 1 Click View then select QuickViewer Getting Started 25 or Click on the toolbar 1 6 2 Positioning the QuickViewer 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt Appearance 3 Select whether you want the QuickViewer displayed at the bottom or at the right of the folder 1 6 3 Using the QuickViewer 26 Size the QuickViewer by dragging a corner of the window or by dragging the horizontal dividing line up or down If you size and close the Quick Viewer it is the same size when you open it again Size it by dragging a corner of the window not by clicking the maximize button Inthe Mailbox click an item that you want to read or In the Calendar click an appointment that you want to see details for To view an attachment click the drop down list on the QuickViewer header then click the attachment You cannot open OLE attachments in the QuickViewer To change how information displays in the header right click the header and choose the options you want to set Right click in
223. d double click the word or select the word and click Replace To make your own corrections edit the word in the Replace with field then click Replace Skip Once Skips the word one time Spell Checker stops the next time it encounters the word Skip Always Skips every occurrence of the word throughout the document Spell Checker ignores the word until the next time you spell check Add Adds the word to the current user word list which stores supplemental words so that Spell Checker can recognize the word in future spell checks QuickCorrect Defines an automatic replacement for a word or phrase When Spell Checker stops on a word click QuickCorrect to replace the word with the text in the Replace with field and add the replacement to the user word list QuickCorrect uses Next time you type the word QuickCorrect automatically replaces it Suggest Displays additional words or phrases in the Replacements list box 6 Click Yes when spell checking is complete Spell Checking Items Automatically with Spell Checker You can set GroupWise to automatically spell check items every time you click Send 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt General 3 Select the check box for Check Spelling as you type and Check spelling before send then click OK Configuring Spell Checker You can modify the types of words the Spell Checker considers misspelled 1 When the Spell Checker stops on a misspelled word click Customize 2 Select
224. d Be bes ated hk Etant re dense dad aie Rene Gna legates 255 10 Mailbox Calendar Access for Proxy Users 257 10 1 Granting Proxy Rights as a Mailbox Owner 257 10 2 Protecting Private Items as a Mailbox Owner 258 10 3 Becoming a Proxy User in Another User s Mailbox 259 11 Remote and Caching Modes 261 11 1 Using Caching Mode ee sitesi erie he eee ae Adee ent a Eden un ref tenta een 261 11 1 1 Understanding Caching Features 261 11 1 2 Setting Up Your Caching Mailbox 262 11 1 8 Changing to Caching Mode 263 11 1 4 Setting Caching Properties 264 11 1 5 Working in Caching Mode 264 11 1 6 Changing the Download Interval Time for Your Caching Mailbox 264 11 1 7 Synchronizing Your Caching Mailbox with Your Online Mailbox 265 11 1 8 Opening a Different Version of a Document in Your Caching Mailbox 265 11 1 9 Viewing Pending Requests 266 11 1 10 Displaying Connection Status 266 11 1 11 Changing the Download Interval Time for Your Caching Mailbox
225. d about Return Status Messages 244 8 5 Being Notified of Someone Else s Messages 245 8 6 Sending an Alarm to an Electronic Pager 246 8 7 Turning Off Notification 247 9 Rules 249 9 1 Understanding Rules 2 2 0 5 a 4408 tr ant An die oe entente ee gy eh acne 249 9 2 Actions a Rule Can Perform 2 249 9 8 Events That Trigger a Rule sini seiere ie ale be nie oe it aa ee wise ab png Woe le 251 9 4 Creating a Rules ovsnde akg an nt ne fae ns nat dat be aia na Beene gace ad BAGG ERE RGR 251 9 4 1 Greating a Basic Rulen pis aa m re ken da dln more define mare eu ae sata re ee AURAI EE RE 252 9 4 2 Creating a Vacation Rule or Auto Reply 252 9 4 3 Creating a Rule to Forward All Mail to Another Account 253 9 4 4 Creating a Rule that Sends a New E Mail 253 9 4 5 Copying a Rule to Make a New Rule 253 9 4 6 Limiting Items Affected by a Rule 254 9 5 Editing asRuley 0 7 oser sd wa ey a ee ee ee eee ey 254 9 6 Enabling or Disabling a Rule 2 ttt eee 254 9 7 Running a Rule Manually 0 0 0 teens 255 9 8 Del tingia Rul casas dace wee
226. d by specifying additional criteria For more information see Narrowing a Global Find on page 228 The icon indicates that search criteria are in effect Click the icon to clear the search criteria and display all items in the folder 5 Choose the item you want from the displayed list 7 1 2 Finding Contacts You do not need to open an address book to find a contact 1 Open the Contacts folder 2 Type a name in the Find field in the Item List header 3 Choose the contact you want from the displayed list of items To provide search criteria 1 Open the Contacts folder 2 Click Find gt In Contacts 3 Select the types of contacts you want to search for contact group resource or organization 4 Specify information related to the display name e mail address last name first name organization department or category of the contact you want to find then click OK The icon indicates that search criteria are in effect Click the icon to clear the search criteria and display all contacts in the folder 5 Choose the contact you want from the displayed list 7 1 3 Clearing a Find 1 Inthe Find field in the Item List header click to clear the current search criteria and display all items in the folder 7 1 4 Creating and Saving a Find 1 Open the folder you want to search 2 Provide search criteria as described in Section 7 1 1 Finding Items on page 225 or Section 7 1 2 Finding Contacts on p
227. d folder select Show folder context toolbar 8 Click the Customize tab Toolbar Properties Show Customize Select a category then click a button to see its description Drag the button to the toolbar or push Add Button Categories Controls Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help Description 9 To add a button click a category from the Categories list box click a button in the Controls box then click Add Button Categories are menu titles in the Main Window The buttons in the Controls box correspond to features found under the menu title For example the buttons for the File category are actions under the File menu opening views printing saving and so on Getting Organized 37 38 2 1 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 10 To remove a button drag it off the toolbar 11 To change the order of a button on a toolbar drag it to where you want it to display 12 To add space between buttons drag one button away from the other button or To remove space between buttons drag one button toward another button 13 Click OK Setting Your Default Start Folder By default GroupWise displays your Mailbox folder After you set up your Home folder you might prefer to start in your Home folder instead 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Environment 2 Click the Default Actions tab 3 Select if you want to start GroupWise in the Mailbox folder or Home folder 4 Click OK Setting Default View
228. d folder don t automatically have rights to edit the document Before they can edit the document you must give them Edit rights on the Document Sharing tab You can share personal folders with other users Recipients of the shared folder receive a notification explaining that you have shared the folder with them They can then accept the folder or decline the folder Getting Organized 57 58 In Remote and Caching modes changes in shared folders are updated whenever you connect to the master GroupWise system Sharing an Existing Folder with Other Users 1 Inthe Folder List right click the folder you want to share then click Sharing o oN Oo Ff Plans Properties General Display Sharing Not shared Shared with Name Share list Name Status Access BenjiGensomino Pending Read Add David Jones Pending Read Add Ishmael Yacoub Pending Read Add Marie Lamaroux Pending Read Add Richard Steadman Pending Read Add Additional access Click Shared with In the Name field start typing the name of a user or click the Address Book button to select the user from the Address Selector dialog box When the user s name appears in the field click Add User to move the user into the Share list Click the user s name in the Share list Select the access options you want for the user Repeat Step 3 through Step 6 for each user you want to share the folder with Click OK If you want the folder to have a s
229. d from your Mailbox and the new item is added in the appropriate location such as the Calendar Saving Received E Mail to Disk or a GroupWise Library Saved items remain in your Mailbox and Calendar as well as being copied to the location you specify Items saved to disk can be saved as a text file rich text file or Internet mail Attachments are saved in their original format 1 In your Mailbox or Calendar click the item you want to save then click File gt Save As ES Items to save Computer Undates HTML Message Close Attachment computer specs tat Save to Disk Saved message format Rich text RTF x Save file as Computer Updates rtf Current directory C Program Files x86 Novell GroupWise Browse v Report file name conflicts 2 Ctrl click the item and attachments you want to save 3 Select to save the item to disk or to a GroupWise Library 4 In the Save file as field type a filename for the item or In the Subject field type a subject name E Mail 113 3 4 4 5 To save the item in a different directory than is shown in the Current directory field click Browse then select the new directory or To save the item in a different GroupWise Library click the drop down list then select a library name 6 If you are saving to disk select Report filename conflicts to be prompted before replacing a file with the same name 7 Ifyou ar
230. d in the Format group box Print Address Book Es Form _ Content Dptions Format Form size List Letter Ad Labels 5 5 8 5in A5 Custom Width Height 850 in 11 00 in Franklin sizes Available forms ONASA LIS m Name and Telephone Name Address and Telephone One Item Per Page Form orientation Portrait Landscape f Preview Printer Setup Close i To print all the address book information for each entry make sure Mailing Address is selected in the Available forms list box or To print only some of the address book information for each entry click Selected Fields in the Available forms list box Click the Content tab deselect the fields you don t want to print then click the Form tab GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide You can only print information that has been entered in the address book fields If there is no information for a particular field nothing is printed for that field 9 Click a paper size in the Form size group box 10 Click Portrait or Landscape in the Form orientation group box 11 Click the Content tab 12 Specify the number of rows and columns you want 13 Click Font make selections then click OK 14 Click the Options tab then make selections 15 Click Preview to see how the labels will look 16 Click Print 6 6 2 Printing Lists 1 Inthe Main Window click S on the toolbar 2 Click the address book that contains the entries
231. d into earlier versions of GroupWise However GroupWise 8 can export nab files in ANSI character format which is compatible with earlier versions of GroupWise Click Save To stop the export press Esc then click Yes GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 6 5 19 Using the LDAP Address Book Adding a Directory Service to an Address Book on page 219 Searching for a Person through a Directory Service on page 219 Establishing a Secure Connection to a Directory Service on page 220 Modifying the Properties of a Directory Service on page 220 Specifying the Search Criteria a Directory Service Uses on page 220 Changing the Length of Time for Directory Service Searches on page 221 Adding a Directory Service to an Address Book 1 Make sure you know the server name and port number of the LDAP directory service You can get this information from your Internet service provider or system administrator In the Main Window click on the toolbar In the left pane click LDAP Address Book In the right pane click Directories then click Add a Ff N Follow the prompts When you specify the server address you can specify an IP address or Internet domain name 6 Click Finish 7 Ifyou are adding a directory service to search for security certificates the directory service must be set as the default Click the directory service account you just added then click Set as Default 8 Clic
232. d or a non integrated application Saving Documents in Non Integrated Applications on page 339 Saving Documents in Integrated Applications on page 339 Saving Documents Outside of the GroupWise Library on page 339 Saving Documents in Non Integrated Applications If you are using non integrated applications all Windows 3 1 applications and many Windows 95 applications you can t save the document as a new version from the application To create a new version of the a document you must create the new version in GroupWise before you open the document in the application To make sure your changes are saved in the library don t rename the document when you save it from within the application Saving Documents in Integrated Applications If you are using an integrated application GroupWise can integrate its document management features with the application s Save As feature When you select Save As in the application you have the option of saving the document as a new version in GroupWise Library In addition you can select the GroupWise folder you want to save the document in Saving Documents Outside of the GroupWise Library To share documents with users who do not have access to GroupWise use Save As to make a copy of a document outside of the Library When you use Save As any changes you make to the saved document are not updated in the library 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox 2 Click File
233. d to connect now or later to your Online Mailbox to retrieve the document You can also send items with document reference attachments from Remote mode However if the document does not exist in your Remote Library any recipients who do not have sufficient rights to the document in the Master Library or who are not using an e mail product that supports GroupWise Library do not receive a copy of the document In addition if the Master Library is unavailable recipients do not receive a copy of the document If any of these conditions exist you need to attach an actual copy of the document in addition to the document reference GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 11 2 8 Allowing Offline Send Receive 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Environment 2 Click the Default Actions tab 3 Select your allow level for Offline Send Receive 4 Click OK Remote and Caching Modes 283 284 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 2 POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts 12 1 12 1 1 12 1 2 If you have multiple e mail accounts you know that it s inconvenient to change locations to look at each account You can add your POP3 and IMAP4 Internet mail accounts to GroupWise so that you can read and send messages for all your accounts from GroupWise Section 12 1 Understanding POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts on page 285 Section 12 2 Adding POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts to GroupWise on page 286 Section 12 3 Configuring POP3 and IMAP4
234. d to efficiently manage groups of documents Section 15 15 1 Preparing for a Mass Operation on page 343 Section 15 15 2 Selecting Documents for the Mass Operation on page 343 Section 15 15 3 Acting as the Librarian on page 344 Section 15 15 4 Copying a Group of Documents on page 345 Section 15 15 5 Changing the Properties of a Group of Documents on page 348 Section 15 15 6 Changing Sharing for a Group of Documents on page 351 342 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 15 1 15 15 2 Section 15 15 7 Deleting a Group of Documents on page 356 Section 15 15 8 Moving a Group of Documents on page 358 Preparing for a Mass Operation Before you can perform a mass operation on a group of documents you must have sufficient rights to the documents If you have Manage rights you re called a librarian and you can perform the mass document operations on all the documents in the library If you re not a librarian you can only perform mass document operations on the documents to which you have rights The following table shows which rights you must have to perform each operation Document Operation Required Rights Move Requires View and Delete rights to the document or you must be a librarian for the library In addition you must have Add rights to the destination library Copy Requires View rights to the document or you must be a librarian for the library In
235. d to last Friday of the month Auto Date Formula Operators An operator is a character or word you insert in an auto date formula to perform a specific operation Each operator is assigned a priority meaning that when a formula is evaluated some operations are performed before others You can use grouping operators to group operators according to their priorities The table below lists operators and their priorities Additional details about the operators are provided following the table Function Priority A blank space high priority And Plus or Minus or To or Every Starting Every Ending Before On Before After On After Near Near After Oror Not or And or amp low priority And _ SP OP aA aaa amp gew amp a A A WO NN ND Grouping Operators Use parentheses as grouping operators to change the priority of operators or to group functions together for clarification For example because the high priority And operator a space has a higher priority than the Or operator a comma the formula below means that all scheduled days must fall on a Tuesday or must fall on a Thursday and be in the month of July or must be in the month of August tue thu julaug In other words the formula is performed as if parentheses were inserted as follows tue thu jul aug Now examine the following formula Calendar 149 150 tue thu jul aug This formula schedules all Tuesda
236. d you want to delete 2 Click the Delete icon on the toolbar Deleting a Subscribed RSS Feed 1 Inthe GroupWise Feeds folder in the Folder list click the RSS feed you want to delete 2 Right click the feed to delete then click Delete RSS Feeds 303 304 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide D Document Management 15 1 If your system administrator has set up libraries and enabled document management all of your documents are stored in a library in GroupWise allowing you to manage all your documents from your Mailbox Section 15 1 Managing Your Documents in GroupWise on page 305 Section 15 2 Creating Documents on page 310 Section 15 3 Organizing Your Documents on page 313 Section 15 4 Importing Documents into a GroupWise Library on page 316 Section 15 5 Sharing Documents on page 320 Section 15 6 Publishing Documents to the Web with WebPublisher on page 324 Section 15 7 Viewing the History of a Document on page 327 Section 15 8 Checking Out Documents on page 328 Section 15 9 Opening Documents on page 331 Section 15 10 Checking In Documents on page 333 Section 15 11 Deleting Documents on page 335 Section 15 12 Copying Documents on page 337 Section 15 13 Saving Documents on page 338 Section 15 14 Storing Multiple Versions of a Document on page 340 Section 15 15 Managing Groups of Documents on pag
237. dar on page 152 Keeping a Copy of an Accepted Item in Your Mailbox on page 152 Accepting or Declining an Item 1 Open the appointment task or reminder note 2 Click Accept or Decline on the toolbar or Click the down arrow to the right of the button to select an Accept level of availability Accept with Options or to select Decline with Options 3 Optional If you selected Accept with Options or Decline with Options you can type a comment then click OK By default the sender can view your comment by viewing the item properties in the Sent Items folder However for a more noticeable indication when someone declines an item the sender has the option under Tools gt Options gt Send gt Appointment Task Reminder Note to set Return Notification When Declined to Mail Receipt Notify or both 4 Ifthe item is an Auto Date item click This Instance to accept or decline this one Auto Date item or click All Instances to accept or decline all instances of the Auto Date item Accepting an Item to a Personal Calendar 1 Open the appointment task or reminder note 2 Click the down arrow to the right of the Accept button then select Accept with Options 3 Select the personal calendar where you want the item to appear then click OK Keeping a Copy of an Accepted Item in Your Mailbox When you accept an item you can also select to keep a copy of the item in your Mailbox folder 1 Click Tools gt Options then double c
238. dd a description of the ics file If a folder already exists with the same name as the folder that was specified the data in that folder is deleted before the ics file data is imported Aggregated Shared Calendars You can now select to display shared calendars in your main calendar view Displaying Accepted Calendar Items in Your Mailbox You can now select to continue displaying accepted items in your Mailbox after you have accepted them See Keeping a Copy of an Accepted Item in Your Mailbox on page 152 Modify Recipients v8 0 1 After an appointment has already been sent it might be necessary to send that appointment to another person When you add a person to the appointment the appointment is sent to the new person without retracting and resending the appointment to everyone who has already received it See Modifying Recipients on page 144 Appointment Conflicts v8 0 1 When you receive a new series of recurring appointments that conflict with existing appointments you now have the option to select This Instance or All Instances instead of resolving the conflicts individually for each appointment Tasklist The GroupWise Checklist feature has been greatly expanded and enhanced and renamed the Tasklist Tasklist items can be found in the Tasklist folder but can also be placed in other folders including the Mailbox and Calendar For more information see Chapter 5 Tasks and the Tasklist on page 167 What
239. dditional information double click the newly created subtask Moving an Existing Item to a Subtask 1 Click Tasklist to open the Tasklist folder 2 Select the item you want to be a subtask 3 Drag the item below the tasklist item that the subtask is to belong to An indented arrow indicates the position where the item will be placed The item is moved to the specified position in the list To move a subtask from beneath a tasklist item drag and drop the item to the bottom of the tasklist 5 4 4 Assigning a Due Date to a Tasklist Item 1 Open an item in the Tasklist folder 2 Click the Tasklist tab 3 Select Due on then click a date E3 Mail From Ishmael Yacoub e File Edit View Actions Tools Windo Help X Close 4 Reply Ba Reply All d Forward 3 O A laja Mail Properties Personalize Tasklist Discussion Thread E Orde 2 MovetoTop Move to Batton Completed Due on Thu Sep 4 2008 Complete 0 Here are the not Today 9 4 2008 Message marketing notes bt 5 4 5 Tracking Status in the Tasklist Folder You can specify a completion percentage for items in the Tasklist Folder This percentage helps you track the completion status of your tasks Specifying a Completion Percentage on page 177 Displaying the Completion Percentage in the Tasklist Folder on page 177 Checking the Completion Status of a Task You Sent on page 177 176 GroupWise 8 Windo
240. ddress Book is usually large because it contains information for your entire organization If you don t need all the information in the GroupWise Address Book when using GroupWise away from your office use System Address Book Filter to retrieve only the user addresses resource addresses and public groups you need from the GroupWise system For example the filter statement Dept Marketing instructs GroupWise to retrieve all addresses with Marketing in the Department column in the Address Book This way you can contact anyone from your Marketing department while you re traveling You should also retrieve GroupWise address book information before leaving your office to save downloading time and costs especially if you re planning to travel to a location where you will incur long distance phone charges 1 If you re running GroupWise in Online mode click Tools gt Hit the Road type your Online Mailbox password select a connection phone number if prompted then click OK or If you re running GroupWise in Remote mode click Accounts gt Send Retrieve gt GroupWise Options 2 Click System Address Book then click Filter System Address Book Filter Options Include entries where Wesi End First Name Last Name Netld Phone Post Office Title User ID 3 Click an Address Book column in the first drop down list For example click Dept to search for addresses from a specific department 4
241. ddress book you want to rename You cannot rename the Frequent Contacts address book 3 Click File gt Rename Book 4 Type the new name then click OK Copying a Personal Address Book 1 In the Main Window click amp on the toolbar 2 Click the personal address book you want to copy 3 Click File gt Save As Book 4 Type a name for the address book then click OK Deleting a Personal Address Book 1 Inthe Main Window click on the toolbar 2 Click the personal address book you want to delete 3 Click File gt Delete Book then click Yes After it is deleted a personal address book cannot be recovered NOTE You cannot delete the Frequent Contacts address book Contacts and Address Books 205 6 5 7 Setting Address Book Properties You can choose and view various properties and options for your address books Setting Personal Address Book Properties on page 206 Viewing an Address Book s Properties on page 206 Setting Frequent Contacts Properties on page 207 Setting Personal Address Book Properties Use the Address Book Properties dialog box to view the properties of each of your address books including the GroupWise Address Book There are three property tabs in the address books not all of them are visible from every address book The General tab is visible from all address books Use the General tab to view the name of the address book the MAPI service provider if known a summary
242. ders on page 166 Understanding the Calendar You can use Graphic Display to show appointment duration in blocks to visualize time use in your schedule or you can use Text Display to better comprehend the sequence of your appointments Time intervals in the Appointments List can be adjusted from ten minutes to two hours depending on how detailed you want the list to be You can also define your work schedule to display only your office hours on your Calendar And by using Show Appointment As you can display levels of availability for appointments in and in your Calendar You can have multiple calendars that display in your calendar view You can create a unique color for each calendar making it quickly identifiable in the calendar view You can share each calendar or all calendars with other users If you set automatic archiving items that have been archived are no longer displayed on your calendar To make them appear on your calendar unarchive the item from your archive calendar For more information on how to unarchive an item see Section 16 3 6 Unarchiving Items on page 377 Use the Find drop down lists in the Calendar header to find scheduled items according to category or other find criteria Many types of calendar views and printouts are available to let you choose the one that displays the information you need Calendar 123 4 2 1 124 4 2 Managing Your Calendar Section 4 2 1 Viewing You
243. ditional help when working with GroupWise you can find useful information in the About GroupWise section of the Help menu This section contains information that is helpful to support personnel and administrators including Program release version Build number Installed languages Current username Your GroupWise post office Location of your GroupWise post office To find this information click Help gt About GroupWise from your Main Window Maintaining GroupWise 387 388 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Novell Messenger Novell Messenger is a corporate instant messaging product that uses eDirectory for its user database You can create a Contact List send instant messages create an archive of messages allow and block others from seeing your availability and more Figure 17 1 Novell Messenger Main Window Novell Messenger lt 2 Eo File View Actions Tools Help John Mitchell Online Contact List 43 Michelle C Co workers 1 4 Adam Marsden KAI Christie Zervos 1 Elizabeth Ferris 49 John Astin Q Send a message E Start a meeting 3 Send a broadcast Add a contact iB Add a folder IMPORTANT Novell Messenger must be installed on your workstation in order for Messenger functionality to be available in GroupWise Section 17 1 Enabling Messenger in GroupWise on page 389 Section 17 2 Sending an Instant Message from Novell Messenger on
244. dress books click Personal Address Books 7 To retrieve copies of GroupWise Library documents from your Online Mailbox select the Documents check box click Documents select your documents mark applicable documents as In Use then click OK Marking a document as In Use prevents others from modifying the document If you don t mark a document as In Use someone can edit it while you have the copy in your Remote Mailbox If you then edit the document and return it to the Master Library your document is saved as a new version and the edits are not saved to the other version If you don t plan to edit a document don t mark it In Use When you exit an In Use document you re asked to send the document to the Master Library and mark it as Available If you re done with the document the document should be marked Available to allow others editing access to it 8 If you are in Remote mode and you want to specify your remote location and connection before downloading click Configure select your remote location from the Connecting from drop down list select a connection from the Connecting to drop down list then click OK 9 Click Connect or Finish If you are in Remote mode all items in your Pending Requests list are sent at this time GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Sending Items in Remote Mode 1 Create a new item then click Send on the toolbar Remote places the item in the Pending Requests list When you connect to
245. duce download time See Filtering the GroupWise Address Book for Your Remote Mailbox on page 281 Frequent Contacts Address Book Use the Frequent Contacts address book to access your most frequently used or most recently used entries When you use an address in a message the entry is copied to the Frequent Contacts address book if the book s options are set to do so You can view the date and time you last used an entry and the number of times you have used it The Frequent Contacts address book is marked with a El icon in the Address Book list Although the Frequent Contacts address book is created by GroupWise it is considered a personal address book because you can edit the information for contacts After an entry is placed in Frequent Contacts it remains there until you delete it The entry also remains in its original address book You can use Frequent Contacts Properties to decide which addresses to capture if any from either received or sent items and how long you want addresses to remain in the address book before deleting them For more information see Setting Frequent Contacts Properties on page 207 If you select the Junk Mail Handling option to only accept mail from contacts in personal address books you can receive mail from any contact in the Frequent Contacts address book For more information see Junking E Mail from Users Not In a Personal Address Book on page 120 Personal Address Books You can
246. e Check In Check in method Check In and move document Close Check in and copy document Check in only Remove Update without checking in Documents to be checked m List of documents Show original list Show all checked out documents in selected library Select library Support Library Default Y Checked out location and filename Browse 3 Click the Check in method drop down list then click Update without checking in 4 Click Update GroupWise updates the document in the library with any changes you have made to the checked out document but the document is not checked in You can use Update without checking in if you are still in the process of editing a document but want to allow other users to view the changes you have made 15 9 Opening Documents When you double click a document reference in your Mailbox or folder GroupWise opens the document in the associated application You can then edit the document If you only have rights to view the document you can open the document two ways you can open the document as a read only file in the application or you can open the document in the GroupWise viewer Section 15 9 1 Opening a Document on page 332 Section 15 9 2 Opening Multiple Versions of a Document on page 333 GroupWise sets the status of the selected version as In Use while you have it open This status locks the selected document version and prevents other users
247. e on page 110 Adding a Note to an E Mail You Receive on page 111 Attaching a File to an Item You Receive on page 111 Assigning a Category to an E Mail You Receive on page 112 Adding a Contact to an E Mail You Receive on page 112 Changing the Subject of an E Mail You Receive If you personalize a subject the new subject displays in your Mailbox and Calendar and in the Mailbox and Calendar of anyone who proxies for you If you change the subject of an item in a shared folder other users of the shared folder still see the original subject 1 Open an item from your Mailbox or Calendar 2 Click the Personalize tab 3 Type anew subject in the My Subject field EJ Mail From Ishmael Yacoub 0 6 File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help X Close 4 Reply Ba Reply All Forward 8 7 O Q amp laja Mail Properties Personalize Discussion Thread My Subject My Notes Category 5 Edit Categories Contacts fc Subject Marketing Briefing Notes Here are the notes from marketing D Message marketing notes bt To see the original subject open the item and look in the Subject field in the item header When you perform a Find with a specific word in the Subject field the Find results shows items whose original subject or personalized subject contains this word When you create an advanced find use the Subject field to search for the origi
248. e 342 Section 15 16 Viewing Documents When Your Network or GroupWise Is Unavailable on page 361 Section 15 17 Integrating GroupWise with Your Applications on page 363 Section 15 18 Returning Documents to the Library on page 367 Section 15 19 Replacing a Document with a Backup File on page 369 Managing Your Documents in GroupWise Your GroupWise library documents display as items in your Mailbox and folders along with your mail messages tasks appointments and so on Section 15 1 1 Storing Documents in Libraries on page 306 Section 15 1 2 Understanding Document References on page 307 Section 15 1 3 Specifying Document Properties on page 308 You can select a document reference to create delete check out check in open move or copy the corresponding document Document Management 305 15 1 1 In addition the GroupWise Library makes it easy to maintain multiple versions of a document determine who has access to a document and share a document with others Storing Documents in Libraries If your system administrator has set up libraries and enabled document management all of your documents are stored in a library in GroupWise GroupWise assigns a unique number to each document This number identifies the document and makes it easy to find You can look up a document in the GroupWise Library by its document number much like you can look up a book in a library b
249. e 376 You must be on the physical computer that contains the directory where the archive exists 4 Archive all of the items that you want to move into your main archive as described in Section 16 3 3 Moving an Item to the Archive on page 376 5 Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 for any additional archives that you might have until you have archived items in only your main archive Using Mailbox Storage Size Information Use Mailbox Storage Size Information to view your mailbox size and to manage items to regain space Your GroupWise administrator might set a size limit on your Mailbox If your Mailbox size exceeds the limit you cannot send new items until you archive or delete some of your existing items You can check your Mailbox storage size at any time Section 16 4 1 Viewing Your Mailbox Size Information on page 380 Section 16 4 2 Deleting E Mail by Using Mailbox Storage Size Information on page 380 Section 16 4 3 Archiving E Mail by Using Mailbox Storage Size Information on page 380 Maintaining GroupWise 379 16 4 1 Viewing Your Mailbox Size Information 1 Click Tools gt Check Mailbox Size Mailbox Storage Size Information eS Your mailbox has no storage limit View Mailbox information Tesh M Curent mailbox size 861 KB Sent items DM Maximum storage limit Unlimited lt a Received Items Posted Dratt items Size Date Subject To Le Di 8 4 2008 3 38 PI Janet DeSo
250. e Folder List Likewise the Full Folder List displays a list of personal Contacts folders under the Frequent Contacts folder Contacts and Address Books 181 6 3 6 3 1 Addressing Items There are multiple ways to address an item in GroupWise Section 6 3 1 Using Name Completion on page 182 Section 6 3 2 Using the Address Selector on page 183 Section 6 3 3 Using the Frequent Contacts Address Book on page 184 Section 6 3 4 Sending Mail from a Contacts Folder on page 185 Section 6 3 5 Sending Mail from the Address Book on page 185 Section 6 3 6 Sending Mail to an Entire Address Book on page 186 Using Name Completion Configuring Name Completion on page 182 Addressing an Item with Name Completion on page 182 Name Completion with Duplicate Names on page 183 Configuring Name Completion 1 In the Main Window click on the toolbar 2 Click File gt Name Completion Search Order 3 Inthe Available Books box click or Ctrl click the books you want Name Completion to search then click Add 4 To change the search order of an address book select the address book in the Selected Books list then click Down or Up 5 To disable Name Completion select the Disable Name Completion check box 6 Click OK Addressing an Item with Name Completion When you begin typing a name in the To CC or BC fields of an item you are creating Name Completion tri
251. e Folder Lists as needed Building Your Favorites Folder List There are two ways to add folders to the Favorites Folder List Right click a folder anywhere in your Mailbox then select Add to Favorites Select multiple folders to add to your Favorites Folder List To conveniently select multiple folders 1 Right click your Favorites Folder then click Choose Favorites Add to Favorites Put a check mark next to the folders you want ta show in the Favorites Folder List Folder ist Cancel 1 anet DeSoto Home 4 M Mailbox Sent Items MF Calendar E E Frequent Contacts 5 0 Documents M M Tasklist Op Work In Progress T Cabinet 3 Trash Getting Organized 47 2 3 3 2 Select the folders to add or remove 3 Click OK Reorganizing Your Folders 1 Click Edit gt Folders Folders Select the folder below that you want opened Folder list fat Janet DeSoto Home Ham Mailbox Sent Items Ems Calendar Frequent Contacts Documents J Tasklist Work In Progress Move Up Cabinet F Trash Move Down Cancel New i Move Righ From the Folders dialog box you can create delete rename and move folders Alphabetizing a Folder List 1 Right click your Home folder 2 Click Sort Subfolders Closing the Folder List You can also close your Folder List to leave more room for other
252. e View Actions Help Close Ed Save v a Delete Send Mail A Send Contact N E Busy Search Summary Contact Details Address Advanced Oo _ Notes History Default Prnt Art Ramirez Engineer Group B x11010 aramirez Corporate net x11010 x11010 Development Categories E Frequent Contacts You can also double click an e mail address on the Contact page or click Send Mail on any page 3 Type a subject and message in the mail message that opens 4 Click Send on the toolbar 6 3 5 Sending Mail from the Address Book Use Mail Message to send items from an address book If you have opened the address book from the Main Window the address book is not connected to an item view Mail Message lets you open an item view from the address book 1 In the Main Window click on the toolbar Contacts and Address Books 185 ms Address Book a fom ex File Edit View Help PT New fp B JD Find CA Action si D Novell GroupWise Ad Look For Inside Name 7 7 5 Novell LDAP Address ti Family Name E Mail Address Office Phone Department 8 Ahman Dhama adhamapalan Corporate 11022 Marketing T 8 At Ramirez aramirez Corporate net x11010 Development g Janet Desoto B Baseball car pool New Hires B Benji Gensomino bgelsomino Comporate net 11003 Marketing Conference Room 11055 Corporate 38 Doug Newman dnewman Corpor
253. e appointment to your pager at the designated alarm time 8 7 Turning Off Notification 1 Make sure Notify is running 2 Right click amp in the Windows notification area then click Exit Depending upon how you installed and configured GroupWise Notify might be set to automatically start when you log in to Windows or when you start GroupWise To stop Notify from starting when you log in to Windows 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Startup 2 Right click Notify then click Delete 3 Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete Notify To stop Notify from starting when you start GroupWise 1 With GroupWise open click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt General Notify 247 3 Deselect Launch Notify at startup 4 Click OK 248 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 9 1 9 2 Rules You can automate many GroupWise actions such as replying when you re out of the office deleting items or sorting items into folders by using Rules to define a set of conditions and actions to be performed when an item meets those conditions Section 9 1 Understanding Rules on page 249 Section 9 2 Actions a Rule Can Perform on page 249 Section 9 3 Events That Trigger a Rule on page 251 Section 9 4 Creating a Rule on page 251 Section 9 5 Editing a Rule on page 254 Section 9 6 Enabling or Disabling a Rule on page 254 Section 9 7 Running a Rule Manually o
254. e check box by the name 7 To insert all the names in your Proxy List click Edit then click Insert Proxy List 8 To reset the list click Edit click Remove All click Edit then click Insert Last List 9 Click OK to save and exit the dialog box or Click Apply to save without exiting Creating a Multi User Calendar View You must have the appropriate Proxy rights to add users to a Multi User List and view their schedules in a Multi User view See Section 10 Mailbox Calendar Access for Proxy Users on page 257 1 2 3 4 ol Click Calendar in the Nav Bar Right click the Calendar toolbar then click Properties Click New then specify a new Name so you can distinguish Multi User views from one another Click Multi User in the View Name drop down list then click OK twice The Multi User List dialog box displays If a user or resource you want in the Multi User view is not listed click Add User 6 Double click a user or resource click OK then repeat for each user you want to add 7 Select the check boxes of the users whose calendars you want to display then click OK You can create additional Multi User views for other groups of users or resources Calendar 163 4 11 Printing a Calendar Use Print Calendar to print appointments tasks and reminder notes in different formats and on various page sizes You can also print the Calendar in different page layouts including Daily Appointments Daily Text Calend
255. e day you want to deselect on the Dates tab 7 Click OK If you want the item to be scheduled annually just type the month and date in the formula text field for example June 20 An annual appointment is helpful for reminder items like birthday reminders You can also set a birthday or anniversary reminder through the Contacts folder For more information see Adding a Contact on page 187 You can schedule auto dated items by formula dates or example Formulas should only be used if you prefer them scheduling is much easier by dates or example Auto Date Formula Functions Use the auto date functions listed below to schedule specific days of a week month or year You must use the exact spelling of the functions For example GroupWise reads tue but not tues GroupWise formula functions are not case sensitive Day of the Week For example TUE schedules all Tuesdays Day of the Month For example the number 3 schedules the third day of the month Also the word LAST schedules the last day of the month Day of the Year For example 35 schedules the 35th day of the year GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Month of the Year For example JAN schedules all days in January Year For example 2009 schedules all days in 2009 Weekday of the Month For example TUE 1 This schedules the first Tuesday of the month Also SUN LAST schedules the last Sunday of the month and FRI LAST 1 schedules the secon
256. e days of the week for example Mon Wed and Fri To include all days double click any day in the group box 7 Click Last then click the Last button 8 Specify the number of days to offset then click OK twice 9 To verify the dates you have scheduled click the Dates tab and check the dates selected in the calendar 10 Click OK Scheduling Auto Dates by Formula You can use a formula to schedule items for events that occur on the same day each week for example every Monday the same day each month for example the 15th and last day the same day of the year each year for example June 20 or in a defined period of time for example every 14 days However you can accomplish the same type of scheduling more easily using the Example or Dates tabs Use formulas only if you are comfortable working with them 1 In an appointment task or reminder note you are scheduling click Actions gt Auto Date 2 Click the Formula tab 3 Inthe Range group box specify the starting date and ending date or To specify a certain number of occurrences rather than a range specify the starting date click Occurrences in the End drop down list then specify the number of occurrences 4 Type the formula text 5 If you want to clear the Auto Date dialog box click Reset 6 To verify that you have scheduled the correct days click the Dates tab The days you scheduled are selected in the calendar If you want to deselect any occurrence click th
257. e deleted 1 From the Full Folder List right click the Documents folder then click Properties To access the Full Folder List click the folder list header drop down list above the Folder List it probably displays Online or Caching to indicate what mode of GroupWise you are running in then click Full Folder List 2 Click the Documents tab 3 Type a number in the Document display count field The maximum number you can specify is 5000 If you don t want any document references placed in the Documents folder type 0 4 Click OK Document Management 315 15 4 15 4 1 15 4 2 15 4 3 Importing Documents into a GroupWise Library You can import documents created outside of GroupWise into GroupWise Library Section 15 4 1 Specifying Files to Import on page 316 Section 15 4 2 Choosing an Import Method on page 316 Section 15 4 3 Using Quick Import to Import Documents on page 316 Section 15 4 4 Using Custom Import to Import Documents on page 318 Specifying Files to Import When you specify the documents you want to import you can select individual files or you can select one or more folders and import all the documents in those folders This makes it easy to import large numbers of documents without having to select each document individually When you import a folder GroupWise imports the documents in the folder however GroupWise does not import the folder itself or the folder s
258. e details for the new account then click Next The details you need to enter include the incoming and outgoing mail servers your login name your e mail address and the name that appears in the From field when you send an e mail 6 Select whether to connect to the account through a LAN or a modem and phone line then click Next 286 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 12 2 2 7 Select the folder to use for the account or create a new folder 8 Click Finish Importing POP3 and IMAP4 E Mail The GroupWise E Mail Importer utility lets you import information from supported POP3 and IMAP4 clients into GroupWise The Accounts menu gt Account Options gt Add option lets you create new accounts if you are in Caching mode or if your administrator allows POP and IMAP or NNTP on your GroupWise system Use the GroupWise E Mail Importer utility to import existing POP3 and IMAP4 accounts into GroupWise In addition to importing messages from your existing POP3 and IMAP4 accounts you save time by not retyping address book entries into the GroupWise address book 1 Click File gt Import POP3 IMAP Fie New gt Open Save As Print Mode gt Open Archive Open Backup Work Offline Import Export gt Import Documents Import POP3 IMAP Properties Alt Enter t Contacts Exit Alt Fa Export Contacts The Installed E Mail Clients list box displays the e mail accounts installed on your machine 2 Select the
259. e folders in this account or Click the Subscribed tab to see the folders you are currently subscribed to 4 If you want to list folders containing specific text in the folder name instead of listing all of the folders type the text in the Search for Folders Containing text box then click Search 5 Click the folder name then click Subscribe or To unsubscribe to a folder click the folder name then click Unsubscribe 6 Click Close 12 6 2 Alphabetizing the Folders in an IMAP4 Account 1 In the Full Folder List right click the IMAP4 account folder then click Sort Subfolders This option is not available if the folders are already alphabetized 292 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 12 6 3 Downloading Only the Header Subject for IMAP4 Accounts 1 Click Accounts gt Account Options 2 Click the IMAP4 account then click Properties 3 Click the Advanced tab My IMAP4 Account Properties xa General Server Connection Advanced Signature Boot folder path V Only show subscribed folders v Download headers only v Download new items only V Send Retrieve when folder is selected Remove items from trash as they are deleted Incoming mail server IMAP4 143 Use SSL Certificate Temporary session only certificate Qutgoing mail server SMTP 25 Use SSL Certificate emporary session only certificate 1 Minutes to wait for server to respond Download external file bodies Detailed error messages o
260. e invalid or the message text has been changed since the item was sent Viewing Received Security Certificates and Changing the Trust 1 Click Contacts in the Full Folder List To access the Full Folder List click the folder list header drop down list above the Folder List it probably displays Online or Caching to indicate what mode of GroupWise you are running in then click Full Folder List or Open the Address Book 2 Double click a contact then click the Advanced tab 3 Click Manage Certificates 4 Click a certificate then click View Details If you initially did not trust a recipient s security certificate and want to trust it open a digitally signed item from the recipient click the security certificate click Modify Trust click a trust option then click OK If you no longer want to trust a recipient s security certificate click the security certificate click Remove then click Yes When you remove a recipient s security certificate from the list it is removed from your certificate database If you receive an item using that security certificate in the future it is considered unknown E Mail 89 90 Viewing Your Own Security Certificates 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Certificates 3 Click a certificate then click View Details If you have multiple security certificates the default security certificate is indicated by a check mark To change the default click a certificate then click Set As
261. e item is automatically marked Completed because the external recipient cannot mark it and sent to the next user on the route If you want to prevent a proxy from marking routed items Completed you can require a password to complete a routed item This section contains the following topics Creating a Routed Message on page 81 Addressing a Routed Item with an Address Book on page 82 Requiring a Password before Marking a Routed Item Completed on page 82 Completing a Routed Item on page 83 Creating a Routed Message 1 Open a mail message or task 2 Click Actions gt Routing Slip E3 Mail To File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help kaj 4 Send XX Cancel Address H See MS Spell Check 4 aja Mail Send Options From v Benji Gensomino Route Subject eu fe Brie sui pri imi ni ut at M M m 3 age E Account Novell GroupWise 3 Inthe Route box type a username then press Enter Repeat for each user included in the route or Click Address on the toolbar to select usernames from the Address Selector dialog box E Mail 81 You can also specify personal groups as recipients of a routed item When you use the Address Selector dialog box the group is expanded into its members so that you can specify the order of the users in the route 4 Type a subject and message 5 If you want to prev
262. e made to the attachment and saved toa copy in the original e mail 1 Open an item containing the attachment you want to edit 2 Right click the attachment and click Edit or If you want to select the program to edit the attachment with right click the attachment and click Edit with select the program you want to use and click OK 3 Make the desired changes to the attachment and save The modified attachment is saved to the original item as Modified copy of filename GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 3 3 Viewing an Attached vCard vCards are electronic business cards formatted according to standards set by the Internet Mail Consortium To view a vCard that has been attached to an item 1 Right click the vCard attachment 2 Click View Attachment For information about importing vCard information into an address book see Importing Contacts from a vCard on page 216 Replying to E Mail Use Reply to respond to an item You can reply to everyone who received the original item or to the sender only without creating and addressing a new message You can also include a copy of the original message in your reply Your reply includes Re preceding the original subject text You can modify the subject text if you want Replying to an E Mail on page 107 Including the Sender s Message or Attachments in a Reply on page 107 Setting the Default Reply Format on page 108 Setting Up an Automated
263. e mail account you want to import into GroupWise then click Next 3 Select the appropriate check boxes to import the account information into GroupWise You can choose e mail messages address books account settings or any combination of the three 4 Click Next 5 Click the folders that you want to import from your existing e mail account into GroupWise 10 11 12 When you import a folder all messages and subdirectories in that folder are also imported Click Next Type a name for the new GroupWise folder to contain the imported messages and folders use the Up Down Right and Left buttons to position the folder in the GroupWise Cabinet then click Next Type a name for the new GroupWise address book to contain the imported addresses The name you type displays on a new tab in the GroupWise Address Book Click Next Click the accounts that you want to import into GroupWise then click Next Accept the default name for the new account then click Next or Select the account folder in the list box click Change Folder type anew name click OK then click Next Review the summary information to ensure that it is correct then click Next or POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts 287 Click Back to change your import options 13 Ensure that the e mail account was successfully imported then click Done 12 3 Configuring POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts The Accounts menu in the GroupWise Main Window allows you to access account feature
264. e saving to a GroupWise Library make sure Set properties using default values is selected unless you want to specify document properties at this time 8 Click Save then click Close Dragging and Dropping E Mails You can drag and drop an item from within GroupWise to the location where you want to save the file For example you could drag and drop a message into a project folder on your Windows desktop or another e mail client Files that you drag and drop are saved in one of two formats a shortcut to the original message in gwi format or a copy of the original message in eml format To change the format 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt Default Actions 3 Under Drag message to desktop select Create a shortcut gwi or Create a copy eml Deleting E Mail Use Delete to remove selected items from your Mailbox You can also use Delete to retract items you have sent You can retract mail and phone messages if the recipients have not read them or if they have not been sent to the Internet You can retract appointments reminder notes and tasks at any time For information on how to retract items you have sent see Section 3 2 2 Retracting Sent E Mail on page 98 If you receive junk mail that requires frequent manual deletion you might want to set up Junk Mail Handling See Handling Unwanted E Mail Spam on page 116 for more information To delete items from your mailbox 1 Inthe Main Window
265. e to specify the contact s office home and any other addresses To specify the default mailing address Select Set as mailing address Advanced Use this page to view add and edit user defined fields All system and user defined fields display For more information see Defining Custom Fields in a Personal Address Book on page 205 Click Manage Certificates on this page to view or remove security certificates you have received from this contact change the trust of the certificates edit certificate properties and import and export certificates For more information see Viewing Received Security Certificates and Changing the Trust on page 89 Notes Use this page to add information about your interaction with this contact Your notes become like a journal of your contact interactions History Displays all the items you have sent to or received from this contact unless the items have been archived You can use Quick Find to create custom searches in the History For additional information on using Quick Find see Chapter 7 Finding Items on page 225 6 Click Close then click Yes to save your changes When you create a note on this page a reminder note is created and placed on the calendar page in the Reminder Notes list When you create a comment the comment is created only on the Notes page and is automatically time stamped You can also assign a category for the contact on the Notes page To specify a category
266. e to your GroupWise system E Mail 95 96 Displaying Sent Item Properties Properties lets you check the status of any item you send For example you can see when an item was delivered and when the recipient opened or deleted the item If a recipient accepted or declined an appointment and included a comment you see the comment in the Properties window You also see if a recipient marked a task Completed The Properties window also shows information about items you receive You can see who else received the item except for blind copy recipients the size and creation date of attached files and more Understanding Sent Item Properties on page 96 Viewing Sent Item Properties on page 96 Saving the Status Information of an Item on page 96 Printing the Status Information of an Item on page 97 Understanding Sent Item Properties There are two views for the properties Basic Properties Displays the Properties header and a list of recipients The list of recipients displays the recipient s name and user ID what actions the recipient has taken with the item the date and time of the last action and any comments Advanced Properties Displays the Properties header recipients Post Offices files and options for the item The Advanced Properties page is helpful to system administrators when they need to track the item for troubleshooting purposes For information about a document use the Activity Lo
267. eSoto Office Party 09 03 08 2 12 PM i Tasklist G Marie Lamaroux Working from Home 09 04 08 Ai Benji Gensomino Computer Upgrades 09 04 08 12 16 PM GY Janet DeSoto Home Qiell Richard Steadman New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 19 PM ae ce Benji Gensomino Implementation 09 04 08 12 20 PM 5 2 Mailbox 1 a j pl j 2 Feten BEN ishmael Yacoub Marketing Briefing Notes 09 04 08 12 21 PM fal Calendar David Jones Lunch 09 04 08 12 30 PM amp Billing Ar Janet DeSoto Re New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 40 PM 5 Frequent Contacts Ae Richard Steadman Re New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 42 PM H Janet DeSoto Ar Janet DeSoto Re New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 42 PM E Documents amp Richard Steadman Re New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 42 PM S Tasklist Gi David Jones Training Slides 09 04 08 Work In Progress Cabinet Trash 15 Selected 0 Total 14 The Default Library folder contains document references for all the documents you have access to in the default library You can change or delete the Authored and Default Library folders You can create other document Find Results folders according to your needs For example you can create a Find folder for a specific library subject author or document type See Saving the Results of a Find on page 229 Specifying When Document References Are Added to the Documents Folder 1 From the Full Folder List right click the Documents folder then
268. eader 2 Click a column you want to add or Click More Columns 2a In the Available columns list select one or more columns then click Add 2b Use Up and Down to position the new columns relative to the existing columns 2c Click OK Sorting by a Column 1 Click the folder containing the items you want to sort 2 Click View gt Display Settings gt Sort Sort es Sat Complete a Accepted Cancel Account Assigned Author Authority Begin Caller Name Category CC m Company Completed Completed Created Creator z Order Ascending Descending 3 Click the item property you want to sort by in the list box 4 Click Ascending to sort from A to Z or Click Descending to sort from Z to A 5 Click OK You can also sort the Item List by clicking a column heading To reverse the sort order click the column heading a second time Removing a Column Drag the column heading off the column header bar Getting Organized 52 2 3 5 Moving or Linking an Item to Another Folder When you move an item into a folder it is taken from one location and placed in another When you link an item to a folder the item still exists in its original folder and it also appears in the new folder When you change a linked item it is also changed in the other folders 1 Drag an item from the Item List to the folder you want Press Alt while you drag the item to remove it from all folders it was
269. eated It displays the NNTP folder icon in your Folder List For more information see Chapter 13 Newsgroups on page 295 RSS Feeds Folder When you subscribe to RSS feeds the GroupWise Feeds folder is created It displays the RSS folder icon in the Folder list A list of subscribed feeds is displayed under the GroupWise Feeds folder You can create subfolders under the GroupWise Feeds folder and move feeds to the subfolder When you click the subfolder the message list displays a list of all the topics for all the feeds under the subfolder For more information see Chapter 14 RSS Feeds on page 301 Displaying the QuickViewer for Folder Items Use the QuickViewer to scan the contents of your items in a folder The QuickViewer saves time because you don t need to open each item you simply click an item or press the Down arrow key to read your items If you click a document reference the document displays in the QuickViewer You can display an item s attachment by clicking the attachment in the drop down list on the QuickViewer toolbar OLE attachments however do not display in the QuickViewer E Novell Group Wire Mailbox teloe file pdt View Actions Toots Window Help LEURS Mailbox el 07 CRE ere cond Address took p New Mad D NewAppt F New Task Ma 6 B onines v Ma Find A oo E B Gi Reply Ba kept an Cf Mail Properties Personalize Discussion Threa
270. ect on non integrated applications Turning On Integrations for One Application 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Documents 2 Click the Integrations tab 3 Select the Enable integrations check box 4 In the Registered applications list box click the application for which you want to turn on integration The Registered Applications list box shows the applications that are registered on your machine It doesn t mean that the applications listed are ODMA enabled 5 Most applications have only one executable filename however if the application you selected has two executable files for example WordPerfect click Advanced then click the Executable tab Type the name of the main executable file in the Dual Executable filename field then click OK 6 Click Enabled then click OK Document Management 365 15 17 5 Using Non Integrated Applications If you re using non integrated applications most Windows 3 1 applications MS DOS applications and many Windows 95 applications you can t integrate GroupWise with your application however you can still use GroupWise documents with these applications You cannot take advantage of the integrated Open and Save features You can use the options on the Non Integrated tab in Advanced Integration options to specify whether or not you want GroupWise to display a warning message when GroupWise loses contact with a non integrated application This message reminds you that you
271. ection 3 2 5 Confirming Delivery of E Mail You Send on page 99 Working with Sent Items You can track status information about an item in the Sent Items folder Usually this option is turned on by default to track delivered and opened information If you choose not to add items to the Sent Items list GroupWise cannot track any information for them Listing Sent Items on page 95 Displaying Sent Item Properties on page 96 Setting the Sent Items Default View Action on page 97 Configuring Sent Item Information to Track on page 97 Listing Sent Items You might want to display items you previously sent For example you can read a sent item resend it with or without corrections and in some cases retract it if it has not already been opened by the recipient 1 Click the Sent Items folder in the Nav Bar The icons next to an item can also give you helpful status information See Section 1 9 Identifying Icons Appearing Next to Items on page 28 All sent items reside in this folder unless they are moved to a folder other than the Mailbox or Calendar If a sent item is moved to another folder it no longer displays in the Sent Items folder To display sent items that have been moved to other folders open those folders If you are sending messages to non GroupWise systems remember that those systems must have status tracking capability in order to return the status of your outgoing messag
272. ects Sample re AaBbYyZz E Underline mths Color MM Black Script Westem X 3 Click a font and a font style 4 Click a size 5 Click any other options you want to change then click OK Setting the Default Viewer When viewing a message attachment in GroupWise you can select to use the default viewer application for the file type of the attachment The following viewers are available for use within GroupWise Adobe Acrobat Microsoft Office OpenOffice org Apple QuickTime Macromedia Flash AutoVue To change the default viewer 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt Editors Viewers 3 Inthe Viewers group box select the viewer to use 4 Click OK Setting the Web Browser Behavior 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt Default Actions 3 Select if you want to Use existing window or Open new window 4 Click OK GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 3 2 Marking an Item Read Later If you open an item and then decide you want to read the item later you can mark the item read later Marking the item read later changes the item to bold and changes the item s icon to unopened so you know you still need to read the item 1 In the Mailbox click the item in the Item List 2 Click Actions gt Read Later If you have opened an item marking it read later does not change the status of the item in Properties For example if you have opened an item then marked the
273. ed or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors Click Finish to copy the documents Copying a Group of Selected Documents oar OON In your Mailbox or folders select the document references for the documents you want to copy Click Tools gt Mass Document Operations In the Operation group box click Copy In the Selection method group box click Use currently selected documents then click Next In the Select library to copy documents to list box click the destination library then click Next Specify the directory where you want to save the log file You can click Generate a log file without performing the copy operation to see the outcome of the copy without actually copying the documents If you are a librarian in the destination library you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents you are copying Allow Documents With Validation Errors To Be Created or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors Click Finish to copy the documents Document Management 347 15 15 5 Copying a Group of Documents Listed in a File 1 Click Tools gt Mass Document Operations 2 Inthe Operation group box click Copy 3 In the Selection method group box click Use documents listed in a file 4 Specify the name of the file that contains a list of documents you want to copy
274. eep track of GroupWise tasks and other items that require action Think of it as a master list of all your tasks When you post or accept a task it automatically appears in the Tasklist folder In addition any item type mail appointment task reminder note phone message can be placed in the Tasklist folder For example you can place an e mail in the Tasklist folder to remind yourself that you need to act on it NOTE The Tasklist replaces the Checklist folder in previous versions of GroupWise Checklist items appear in the Tasklist folder but are not converted to tasks Tasks and the Tasklist 167 5 3 5 3 1 Items in the Tasklist folder do not always appear on the Calendar Only items with a due date appear on the Calendar If you want an item in the Tasklist folder to appear on your Calendar you must assign that item a due date as explained in Section 5 4 4 Assigning a Due Date to a Tasklist Item on page 176 Figure 5 1 Mailbox Showing the Tasklist Folder 5 gt Novell GroupWise Tasklist LES File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help Home Mailbox 1 Calendar Sentitems Contacts Address Book NewMail D NewAppt M NewTask EB A In F 2 p J A 3 YM oe Ff g F8 Onlines v MTasklist Find v vy Favorites F1 Calendar Mailbox 1 esi E nes t NEE DeSoto 09 04 08 09 11 Janet DeSoto Janet DeSoto 09 09 08 Calendar Ai M
275. eid ee es ee E 168 5 3 2 Tracking Task Completion 170 5 4 Using the Tasklist Folder 171 5 4 1 Adding an Item to the Tasklist Folder 171 5 4 2 Creating a Tasklist in a Folder Other Than the Tasklist Folder 173 5 4 3 Organizing the Tasklist Folder 174 5 4 4 Assigning a Due Date to a Tasklist Item 176 5 4 5 Tracking Status in the Tasklist Folder 176 5 4 6 Printing the Contents of Your Tasklist Folder 177 Contacts and Address Books 179 6 1 Understanding Address Books 179 6 1 1 GroupWise Address Book 179 6 1 2 Frequent Contacts Address Book 180 6 1 3 Personal Address Books irys ri orae geeky Sep bebe Goede eee eee eee eee es 180 6 1 4 LDAP Address Book icerir eiae dater Oe are E adler 181 6 2 Understanding Contacts Folders 181 6 30 Addressing tems 2422882 tee eng Yee a Oded EROE eet a Reda eed wees 182 6 3 1 Using Name Completion 182 6 3 2 Using the Address Selector
276. eive a message indicating that The attachment can only be viewed with an external application then you must open the file For information on opening an attachment see Opening Attached Files on page 106 E Mail 105 106 Opening Attached Files When you open an attached file by double clicking it GroupWise determines the correct application to open the file in You can accept the suggested application or you can type the path and filename to another application 1 Open the item containing the attachment 2 Double click the attachment or Right click the attachment then click Open or Open With or If you cannot see an icon representing the attachment in your view click File gt Attachments gt Open By default GroupWise warns you if an attachment is larger than 1000 KB 1 MB To eliminate the warning message 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt Default Actions 3 Deselect Warn if larger than You can also adjust the attachment size for when the warning message is displayed 4 Click OK Dragging and Dropping Attachments When you receive an item you can drag any of its attachments into a folder or onto your desktop A document reference attachment that you drag and drop becomes a shortcut to a document reference or to a copy of the document depending on your rights to the document and the availability of the library Editing Attachments When you receive an attachment you can edit changes can b
277. em or alarm Notify sound Notify plays a system beep or sound file when you receive an item When you receive an alarm the sound plays once every five minutes until you clear the alarm from the Notification List Notification list The Notification List is a dialog box that lists all of the new unopened items and alarms you have received You can leave it open on your desktop or open it from the Notify icon when you want to see it You can receive alarms and notifications for another user if that user gives you those rights in the Access List and if you are on the same post office as that user See Section 10 Mailbox Calendar Access for Proxy Users on page 257 If you are sending messages to non GroupWise systems remember that those systems must have status tracking capability in order to return the status of your outgoing message to your GroupWise system Notify is installed in the same folder as GroupWise when you run GroupWise Setup Notify runs minimized in the background while you run other programs When Notify is running appears in your Windows notification area Notify 241 8 8 2 2 1 8 2 2 242 8 3 Starting Notify There are two ways to start Notify If you cannot start Notify as described in this section you should re install the GroupWise client then select to install Notify when the GroupWise client is installed If your GroupWise administrator installed the GroupWise client for you contact your
278. en click Add User ao Ff O N 6 Select the check boxes for the rights you want to grant to the selected user or group 7 Click OK GroupWise applies the default sharing rights to every document you create or import in the selected library Default Sharing Rights and Proxy If a proxy creates a document in your Mailbox the new document receives the default sharing rights the proxy specified in his or her Mailbox not the default sharing rights you specified in your Mailbox Document Management 321 15 5 3 15 5 4 322 Default Sharing Rights and Remote You can specify default sharing rights in your Remote Mailbox however the default sharing rights you specify in Remote only affect the documents while they are stored in your Remote Library Specifying Users Rights to the Document You can give users rights to view edit delete or share a document When you give users rights to share a document they can put the document in a shared folder You can also give users rights to modify the security settings for a document To have Modify rights a user must also have Edit rights The rights you specify are for all versions of a document If you want to specify different rights for each version of a document click the Version Level Security button When you grant users Edit or Delete rights GroupWise automatically gives them View rights to the document If users don t have View rights they can t see the document in the res
279. en you print an item the From To Date Subject CC and attachment names are displayed at the top of the page Section 3 5 1 Selecting a Printer on page 115 Section 3 5 2 Printing E Mail with Attachments on page 115 Section 3 5 3 Displaying a Header on page 116 Section 3 5 4 Changing the Default Printed Font Size on Plain Text Items on page 116 Section 3 5 5 Printing an Item List on page 116 Section 3 5 6 Configuring the Default Print Option for Distribution Lists on page 116 Selecting a Printer 1 Ineither the QuickViewer or in an open item right click the message then click Print 2 Inthe Name field select the printer to use 3 In the Items to print field select the items to print then click Print Printing E Mail with Attachments 1 In the Item List in your Mailbox open the item you want to print 2 Click File gt Print 3 Select the items and attachments you want to print E Mail 115 3 9 3 3 5 4 3 5 5 3 5 6 3 6 Select Print attachment with associated application to launch the application in which an attached file was created if that application is available This might increase printing time but ensures correct formatting of the file Printing from GroupWise can save time but the formatting of the attached file might change 4 Click Print If you launch an associated application you need to select to print the file after the application i
280. ent a proxy from marking routed items Completed you can require the recipient s GroupWise password to mark the item Completed Click the Send Options tab click Security then select Require password to complete routed item 6 Click Send on the toolbar Addressing a Routed Item with an Address Book 1 Ina mail message or task click Address on the toolbar 2 Select the Routing Slip check box Address Selector Look in Novell GroupWise Address Book v Route Look for Match Name x Selected Routing Slip Z Name E Mail 8 8 Benji Gensomino David Jones 8 Ishmael Yacoub iyacot 8 Janet DeSoto jdesot 8 Julia Smith JSmitt 8 Marie Lamaroux mlam 8 Richard Steadman rstead _ 7 w 8 Details x Cerca 3 Ctrl click names in the order you want to route the item then click Route or Double click names in the order you want to route the item Use drag and drop to change the order of names in the list of addresses 4 Click OK Requiring a Password before Marking a Routed Item Completed To require a password for all routed items you create 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Security then click the Send Options tab 3 Select Require password to complete routed item 4 Click OK For information on GroupWise passwords see Section 1 3 Assigning a Password to Your Mailbox on page 18 82 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Completing a Routed Item When you a
281. ent version sS Find only official document versions 4 Inthe Library drop down list click the library you want to search 5 Ineach field specify the information you want to look for 6 Click Next 7 Inthe Select library to move documents to list box click the destination library then click Next 8 Click Preview to see a sample of the documents that will be moved based on the Find criteria you specified You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview 9 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file Document Management 359 360 10 You can click Generate a log file without performing the move operation to see the outcome of the move without actually moving the documents If you are a librarian in the destination library you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents you are copying Allow Documents With Validation Errors To Be Created or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors Click Finish to move the documents Moving a Group of Selected Documents OO a fF O N In your Mailbox or folders select the document references for the documents you want to move Click Tools gt Mass Document Operations In the Operation group box click Move In the Selection method group box click Use cu
282. entries you want placed in To CC or BC fields of the item you are addressing You can use the drop down list to restrict the list of entries to contacts groups or resources You can search the list by name first name or last name by using the Match drop down list If an entry is marked with a it has multiple e mail addresses You can add and remove columns and change the column order in the list of address entries You can change the sort order of the list based on the entries in any column You can resize the Address Selector by dragging a corner of the window You can open a contact entry to view details by clicking the contact then clicking Details Contacts and Address Books 183 6 3 3 You can add contacts to the right pane and then create a group by clicking Save Group If you click the down arrow on the Save Group button you can select which address book the group is saved to Otherwise it is saved to the address book displayed in the Address Selector You can create new contacts by using the New Contact button This button is not active if you are currently displaying the GroupWise Address Book or any other address book that you don t have rights to edit for example a shared address book or an LDAP Address Book To create a new contact click New Contact enter the contact information in the different tabs then click OK For more information see Section 6 4 2 Managing Contacts on page 187 To create a routing sli
283. eplying to Sent E Mail on page 98 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide A4 Calendar Improvements A 5 Several calendar enhancements have been made to the GroupWise 8 Windows client Some of the key improvements include Publishing and Subscribing to Internet Calendars You can select to publish any personal calendar to the Internet When you to publish a personal calendar to the Internet it is copied to the Calendar Publishing Host server You can select the time period of the content to publish as well as what to publish from just free busy information to your entire calendar See Section 4 8 Publishing Personal Calendars on the Internet on page 160 You can subscribe to calendars that have been published to the Internet After you have subscribed to an Internet calendar it displays as a new calendar in your Calendar list See Section 4 7 Subscribing to an Internet Calendar on page 158 Displaying an Additional Time Zone You can now add an additional time zone to GroupWise When you select to display an additional time zone it displays in another column next to your time in the Calendar Each time zone is assigned a label of your choice You can also quickly switch among the time zones as you travel back and forth from locations See Displaying Two Time Zones in the Calendar on page 127 Importing ICS Files When you import ics files you can now name the folder that the ics file is imported into and a
284. er you make your selection the name is added to your Frequent Contacts and is your default selection the next time you send an e mail to that name Using the Address Selector When you are composing a new item and you click E aes On the item view toolbar the Address Selector displays The Address Selector presents a simplified address book view providing you with the options you need to select a name or create a group Understanding the Address Selector on page 183 Addressing an Item with the Address Selector on page 184 Understanding the Address Selector The Address Selector displays in other places throughout GroupWise such as when you are selecting members of a group or entries for a Find It might be slightly modified to show only context appropriate options Figure 6 2 The Address Selector Address Selector E Look in Novell GroupWise Address Book z Io cc BC Look for Match Name x Selected Routing Slip Name s E Mail a armapalan adharn B Alex Skoczylas askocz 8 Anita Olivos aolivos 8 Art Ramirez aramire 8 Basil Forsgren bforsgr 8 Benji Gensomino bgelsoi 8 Conferencing Administrator confad 8 Doug Newman dnewrr 8 Flavian Haughey fhaugh a m r 8 fa Details gx AD ss In the Address Selector you view one address book at a time To choose a different address book to look at click an address book in the Look in drop down list Double click the
285. ere can be any number of problems that can cause this to happen When it does occur GroupWise often has problems reading items in your Mailbox Running Repair Mailbox can fix most of these problems If you are having problems reading items in your Mailbox or other GroupWise databases it is a good idea to run Repair Mailbox to resolve these problems For additional information on how to repair your mailbox see Section 16 7 4 Analyzing and Fixing Databases on page 383 and Section 16 7 5 Rebuilding the Mailbox Structure on page 384 Installing GroupWise Check Depending on how GroupWise Check is installed you can have a Repair Mailbox item on the Tools menu that enables you to run GWCheck from the client If the GWCheck program is available to you you can perform database maintenance on your Remote Caching and archive mailboxes For the Repair Mailbox item to display on the Tools menu the following files must be installed in the GroupWise directory by default this is c novell groupwise gwcheck exe gwchkxx d11 Replace xx with your language code gwchkxx chm Replace xx with your language code The GroupWise administrator can install these files by using SetupIP to install your GroupWise Windows client and selecting to install and enable GWCheck During installation the files are copied to the novell groupwise gwcheck directory The default is for SetupIP is to install GWCheck but not enable it If you do
286. errors in a log file click Store all status and error messages in a log file then specify a filename 7 Click Next GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Select Library Select Library Novell coms lt Back Net gt Cancel 8 Click the library you want to store the documents in 9 Click Next Create Document References g N ove l Display documents in folder Select folder for document references OR Billing A Frequent Contacts E Janet DeSoto 3 0 Documents Authored D Default Library OM Tasklist Work In Progress Cabinet oO Projects O Plans pw i oO lt Back _Net gt Cancel 10 If you want GroupWise to create document references for each document click Display documents in folder then click the folder where you want to store them or If you do not want to create document references click import without displaying documents in a folder 11 Click Next Document Management 319 15 5 Set Document Property Options lt N ove l Set properties using default values l Modify Default Values n V Use current filename as the document subject lt Back Net gt Canal 12 To specify properties for each document you are importing click Prompt for properties of each document individually or To have GroupWise specify properties based on the default property valu
287. ertain day of the week if you are always unavailable for meetings on that day Deletes items from the Trash when the rule conditions are met For example your rule could empty items received from a company that routinely sends you junk mail Moves items to a folder when the rule conditions are met For example you might want all items with certain words in the Subject box moved to a common folder Links items to one or more folders when the rule conditions are met Linking an item to a folder lets you view the item from more than one folder For example if you have an item that relates to Marketing and Personnel you can place it in the Marketing folder then link it to the Personnel folder You can then open the item from either folder Marks all items matching the rule conditions as Private When an item is marked Private you can restrict your proxies from accessing the item For example your rule could mark all items from your family members to be Private Marks all items matching the rule conditions as if they have been read For example if you are skimming a reply thread in a shared folder and don t want to follow the thread anymore your rule could mark all the items in the thread as if they had been read so they wouldn t sort to the top of the Item List Archives items when the rule conditions are met For example your rule could archive all items regarding a certain subject Archive is not available to use as an action when the
288. ertificate Revocation List Warn if revocation server is offline You receive a warning if the revocation server is offline when GroupWise checks for it Warn if there is no certificate revocation information in certificates You receive a warning if there is no certificate revocation information inside the certificate 88 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Do not check certificate for S MIME compliance The certificate is not checked for compliance with S MIME Check certificate for Compliance with S MIME version 2 The certificate is checked for compliance with the S MIME version 2 standard Check certificate for Compliance with S MIME version 3 The certificate is checked for compliance with the S MIME version 3 standard 4 Make selections in the Encrypted item group box 5 Click OK twice then click Close The available encryption methods depend on the security service provider you have selected Checking Whether the Digital Signature of an Item Was Verified 1 Open a digitally signed item that you received 2 Click File gt Security Properties 3 Click the tabs to view information about the security certificate that was used The digital signature is verified when you open the item If there are any concerns about the certificates that sign the item a warning or an error displays immediately and the status bar of the item displays Untrusted If the digital signature was not verified the security certificate might b
289. es 261 11 1 2 Figure 11 1 Mailbox View with Caching Mode Selected Eile Edit View Tools Window Help G Address Book F 8 B F8 Cachingy Yr Favorites E Calendar 2 Mailbox 1 E Training Slides M Tasklist From David Jones 9 4 2008 Self Review From Janet DeSoto 9 9 2008 A3 anet DeSoto Home Marketing Briefing Notes H 2 Mailbox 1 From Ishmael Yacoub 9 4 2008 Sent Items S Calendar MER Billing M Frequent Contacts Documents M Tasklist amp 7 Work In Progress k 5 A Cabinet Q3 Project P Trash 3 Name E Today Thursday September 04 200 Re New Program Instructions From Richard Steadman 9 4 200 Last Connection 9 4 2008 2 00 PM If you run Caching Mode and Remote Mode on the same computer the same local mailbox also called the Caching Mailbox or Remote Mailbox can be used to minimize disk space usage For information about Remote mode see Chapter 11 2 Using Remote Mode on page 266 If disk space is limited you can restrict the items that are downloaded to your local mailbox You can specify to get the subject line only or specify a size limit Your system administrator can specify settings that do not allow you to use Caching mode or that require you to use only Caching mode Setting Up Your Caching Mailbox Setting up a Caching Mailbox requires enough disk space either on your local ha
290. es not display Adding Month Calendars to the Month View By default the Month view shows the current month s appointments To show the month calendars for the previous month and the next several months change the Month view from Month Default to Month and Calendar 1 Click Calendar on the Nav Bar 2 Right click Month then click Properties Calendar 131 132 The Calendar View Properties dialog box opens 3 Select Month then click Edit The Edit View dialog box opens 4 Click the down arrow to open the View drop down list 5 Select Month and Calendar then click OK to close the Edit View dialog box 6 Click OK to close the Calendar View Properties dialog box Now when you view the monthly calendar as many month calendars display below the current month s appointment calendar as can fit in your GroupWise window Adding Extended Navigation to the Calendar By default the Calendar opens with the Simple Navigation feature selected Simple Navigation allows you to move forward or back one day week month or year depending on the selected calendar view by clicking the forward or back button Figure 4 5 Simple Navigation Forward and Back Buttons 4 gt The Extended Navigation feature provides additional functionality by making it possible to move forward or back 1 7 31 or 365 days Figure 4 6 Extended Navigation Forward and Back Buttons dib 47b 431d 4555 1 Click Calendar on the Nav Bar 2 Right click any view then
291. es specified in Document options click Set properties using default values 13 If you want to specify different default values for this import session only click Modify Default Values specify the values then click OK 14 Click Next 15 Click Finish to begin the import Sharing Documents When you create or import a document in GroupWise you can specify whether you want to share the document with other users If you share a document you can specify which users or groups you want to share the document with and what rights each user has In addition you can specify which sharing rights if any you want GroupWise to automatically apply to all the documents you create Section 15 5 1 Specifying Users Who Can Share the Document on page 321 Section 15 5 2 Specifying Default Sharing Rights for Documents on page 321 Section 15 5 3 Specifying Users Rights to the Document on page 322 Section 15 5 4 Giving a User Rights for All Document Versions on page 322 Section 15 5 5 Giving a User Rights to a Specific Document Version on page 323 Section 15 5 6 Giving Users Rights to Modify the Sharing Settings for a Document on page 323 Section 15 5 7 Preventing Other Users from Accessing a Document on page 323 When you create a new document GroupWise inserts lt General User gt and lt Creator gt in the Share List By default general users all users with access to the library
292. es to complete the name for you It searches the address books in the order you specify in the Name Completion Search Order dialog box for entries that match what you re typing If Name Completion finds the name you are looking for you can stop typing If Name Completion doesn t find it continue typing Name Completion searches again after each new character you type If Name Completion finds a name that is close to but doesn t exactly match the one you are looking for you can use the Up or Down arrows to scroll to adjacent names in the address book You can also press Ctrl Enter at any point to display matches up to that point If Quick Info is enabled as described in Section 6 5 12 Displaying Quick Info on page 210 contact information displays as you type to help you identify the contact you want If the contact you want has multiple e mail addresses you can use the Up arrow or Down arrow keys to select the e mail address you want to use You can also right click the completed name then select the e mail address from the drop down list 182 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 6 3 2 Name Completion with Duplicate Names When you use name completion you might have two contacts with the same name When name completion finds two people with the same name but different e mail addresses it displays a prompt so you can select the correct name to use Additional information is provided to help you select the correct name to use Aft
293. ess book according to the results it found After a filter has been defined for an address book you can enable the filter whenever you want by displaying the address book in which you want to enable the filter and clicking View gt Custom Filter Clicking OK enables it it remains in effect until you turn it off or delete it Customizing an Address Book Display You can control which address books are displayed in the Address Book list by opening and closing address books For example you might have a personal address book for an account that you deal with only six months out of the year You can close it when you don t need it and open it again six months later You can also control the information that is displayed in a single address book In order for you to change displayed information in an address book that address book must be opened Opening and Closing Address Books on page 214 Specifying the Columns to Display in an Address Book on page 214 Viewing Links to the GroupWise Address Book on page 214 Choosing the Display Format of Names on page 215 Contacts and Address Books 213 Opening and Closing Address Books 1 In the Main Window click S on the toolbar 2 Click File gt Open Book If all of your address books are open Open Book is dimmed 3 Click or Ctrl click one or more address books then click OK 4 To close an address book select the address book then click File gt Close Bo
294. etup If you didn t install Integrations you can run Setup again to install them See Section 15 17 Integrating GroupWise with Your Applications on page 363 Understanding Document References The document items that appear in your Mailbox and other folders are only references that point to the actual documents in the library Sharing Document References with Other Users on page 308 Document References and Remote Caching Modes on page 308 Document Management 307 15 1 3 Di ayy SSS File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help Mailbox 1 Reflet cui er ETS G Address Book S po A 2 New Mail New Appt M NewTask r EME Er LA 3 AE d D amp H E8 Onlinev v Mailbox Find fy Favorites From Subject Date z F1 Calendar Q3 Project ee El ap Janet DeSoto Office Party 09 03 08 2 12 PM M Tasklist G Marie Lamaroux Working from Home 09 04 08 Ai Benji Gensomino Computer Upgrades 09 04 08 12 16 PM GY Janet DeSoto Home en Richard Steadman New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 19 PM A a 2 T 2 Benji Gensomino Implementation 09 04 08 12 20 PM H amp Mailbox 1 a y P T Kai BEN ishmael Yacoub Marketing Briefing Notes 09 04 08 12 21 PM GP Calendar 3 David Jones Lunch 09 04 08 12 30 PM F E Billing QP Janet DeSoto Re New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 40 PM dy Frequent Contacts Ae Richard Steadman Re New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 42 PM Janet DeSoto QP
295. ext to any folder except for shared folders the number of unread items is shown in square brackets Next to the Sent Items folder the number in square brackets shows how many items are pending to be sent from Caching or Remote mode You can organize items in your folders by moving or linking them When you move an item into a folder it is taken from one location and placed in another When you link an item to a folder the item still exists in its original folder and it also appears in the new folder When you change a linked item it is also changed in the other folders If an item is linked to multiple folders and you delete the original item the copies in your other folders remain You can define a different set of properties for each folder in your Mailbox For example you can sort the items in one folder by date and sort the items in another folder by company Simple Folder List The Simple Folder List is a context sensitive folder list It displays the folders that are relative to the folder you are currently in The following are context sensitive Simple Folder Lists Calendar Displays a list of all calendars From here you can select to display the contents of a calendar in the main calendar In addition you can change the color of a calendar Contacts Displays a list of all personal address books By default the main Contacts folder is the Frequent Contacts address book Documents Displays a list of your document libr
296. f all items you send click Tools gt Options Send 2 Select Notify Recipients 100 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 3 3 3 1 Users are automatically subscribed to Notify in Options If they have deselected to receive alarms and notifications they cannot be notified of messages you send For more information see Section 8 5 Being Notified of Someone Else s Messages on page 245 3 Return to the item you are composing or Click OK then click Close to save the setting for all items Receiving E Mail GroupWise stores all the mail messages appointments and other items you receive in your Mailbox Section 3 3 1 Reading Received E Mail on page 101 Section 3 3 2 Reading Attachments on page 105 Section 3 3 3 Replying to E Mail on page 107 Section 3 3 4 Forwarding E Mail on page 109 From your Mailbox you can read items reply to items and forward items you receive You can organize items by assigning them to categories or by creating a Tasklist You can delegate tasks and appointments to other users You can handle unwanted Internet e mail with Junk Mail Handling You can even change an item such as a mail message to another type of item such as an appointment Figure 3 1 Mailbox View Novell GroupWise Mailbox File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help Mailbox 1 Sent Items GR Address Book B A Qynewmait NewAppt M NewTask B Si
297. f the item and schedules one copy for each date If you send the item to other users you have five outgoing items with a five occurrence Auto Date If you receive the event you find five copies of the incoming item in your Mailbox each scheduled for a different date You can create an Auto Date in three ways Dates lets you select specific days from a year calendar Example lets you schedule events on the same day every week the same day each month or periodically Formula lets you enter the scheduling information in text format This section contains the following topics Scheduling a Recurring Item by Dates on page 146 Scheduling a Recurring Item by Example on page 146 Scheduling a Recurring Item Based on Another Day of the Week on page 147 Scheduling a Recurring Item Based on the Last Day of the Month on page 147 Scheduling Auto Dates by Formula on page 148 Scheduling a Recurring Item by Dates 1 In an appointment task or reminder note you are scheduling click Actions then click Auto Date 2 Click the days you want to schedule 3 To move to a different year click the year button type the new year then click OK 4 If you want to clear all the dates you have selected click Reset 5 Click OK Scheduling a Recurring Item by Example 1 In an appointment task or reminder note you are scheduling click Actions gt Auto Date 2 Click the Example tab 3 Inthe Range group bo
298. f the username or resource you can click a scheduled time across from the username or resource on the Individual Schedules tab to display more information about the appointment in the box below However the user or resource owner must give you appointment Read rights in their Access List before the icon appears See Granting Proxy Rights as a Mailbox Owner on page 257 To exclude a username or resource from the search without deleting it click the Available Times tab then click the check box next to the user or resource to deselect it Excluding a person or resource from the search is useful if a user like a CC recipient should be invited to a meeting but does not necessarily need to attend To include a user or resource name that has been excluded click the check box next to the user or resource to select it Click Auto Select to select the first available meeting time then click OK to transfer the users resources and selected time and duration back to the appointment you were scheduling or Click Auto Select until the time you want is displayed then click OK to transfer the users resources and selected time and duration back to the appointment you were scheduling or Click the Available Times tab to see possible meeting times click a time to select it then click OK to transfer the users resources and selected time and duration back to the appointment you were scheduling To remove a user or resource from the Invite t
299. f you do not specify a folder the rule is triggered when an item is moved to any folder The rule is triggered when a task is marked as completed The rule is triggered when you open a specific folder If you do not specify a folder the rule is triggered when you open any folder The rule is triggered when you close a specific folder If you do not specify a folder the rule is triggered when you close any folder The rule is triggered when you start GroupWise The rule is triggered when you exit GroupWise The rule can only be triggered manually by selecting the rule in the Rules dialog box then clicking Run For example instead of a rule always moving certain items into a folder you might want the items to accumulate in your Mailbox until you re ready for them to be moved all at once To trigger a rule manually you must first select the items or folders the rule affects in your Mailbox or Calendar view Creating a Rule Rules can help you sort your messages inform others that you re on vacation or forward your messages to another e mail account Section 9 4 1 Creating a Basic Rule on page 252 Section 9 4 2 Creating a Vacation Rule or Auto Reply on page 252 Section 9 4 3 Creating a Rule to Forward All Mail to Another Account on page 253 Section 9 4 4 Creating a Rule that Sends a New E Mail on page 253 Section 9 4 5 Copying a Rule to Make a New Rule on page 253 Se
300. ference rooms is free at a specific time IMPORTANT You must have the appropriate Proxy rights for each user or resource in order to include them in a Multi User view See Section 10 Mailbox Calendar Access for Proxy Users on page 257 For example if you do not have Read rights for appointments you cannot see another person s schedule in the Multi User view For each Multi User view you need to create a list of the users or resources whose calendars you want to display The order of names in the list called a Multi User List determines the order in which the calendars display in the Multi User view This section contains the following topics Section 4 10 1 Viewing the Calendars of Multiple Users or Resources on page 162 Section 4 10 2 Modifying a Multi User List on page 163 Section 4 10 3 Creating a Multi User Calendar View on page 163 Viewing the Calendars of Multiple Users or Resources You must have the appropriate Proxy rights to add users to a Multi User List and view their schedules in a Multi User view See Section 10 Mailbox Calendar Access for Proxy Users on page 257 1 Click Calendar in the Nav Bar then click the Multi User view button on the Calendar toolbar 2 If this is the first time you have used the Multi User view right click in the Multi User view click Multi User List select the check boxes by the names of the users whose calendars you want to view then cli
301. fied You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview Specify the directory where you want to save the log file You can click Generate a log file without performing the operation to see the outcome of the operation without actually modifying the documents If you are a librarian in the destination library you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents you are copying Allow Documents With Validation Errors To Be Created or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors Click Finish to change document properties Changing Sharing for a Group of Documents You can give modify or remove a user s access to a group of documents To do this you can modify a user s rights in the existing Share List for the group of documents or you can create a new Share List to replace the existing Share List for each document in the group Modifying the Existing Share List on page 352 Replacing an Existing Share List with a New Share List on page 352 Changing the Sharing Rights for a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example on page 352 Changing Sharing Rights for Selected Documents on page 354 Changing Sharing Rights for Documents Listed in a File on page 355 Document Management 351 Modifying the Existing
302. for an item open a new item click Send Options gt Status Tracking or To change the sent information to track for all items you send click Tools gt Options gt Send then click the tab for the item type IMPORTANT The Create a sent item to track information option is selected by default It is highly recommended that you do not deselect it If this option is not selected no sent item is created when you send an item therefore you do not have a copy of the items you send unless you save them yourself 2 Select the information to track Delivered Tracks when an item you have sent was delivered to a user s mailbox Delivered and opened Tracks when an item you have sent was delivered and when it was opened by the recipient All information Tracks when an item you have sent was delivered opened deleted and emptied 3 Optional Decide if you want to Auto delete sent item enabled This removes sent items from your mailbox after all the recipients have deleted the items and emptied them from their Trash 4 Return to the item you are composing or Select the information to track for each item type click OK then click Close to save the setting for all items E Mail 97 98 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 Retracting Sent E Mail Use Delete to retract a sent item from the recipient s Mailbox You can retract a mail or phone message from those recipients who haven t yet opened the item You can retract an appointme
303. from editing it while you have it open When you exit the document the In Use status is removed and the version is unlocked If you want to lock a version of a document for multiple editing sessions use Check Out Check Out lets you copy the selected version of a document to another location and it remains locked until you check it in For more information see Section 15 8 Checking Out Documents on page 328 Document Management 331 15 9 1 Opening a Document 1 Double click the document reference in your Mailbox If you do not have access to the application the document was created in GroupWise prompts you to specify an application You might be able to open the document in a related application Opening Read Only Documents on page 332 Opening Documents in Non Integrated Applications on page 332 Opening Documents in Integrated Applications on page 332 Opening Documents in GroupWise Remote or Caching Modes on page 332 Opening Read Only Documents If you don t have Edit rights to a document you can open a read only copy of the document in an application This makes it possible for you to see graphics and layout elements that might not display correctly in the GroupWise viewer If you have Edit rights to a document read only documents are also a useful way to view a document if it is marked In Use or if it is checked out You can only open one read only document at a time in each applicati
304. g Meeting within GroupWise on page 400 Other Enhancements Several other enhancements have been made to the GroupWise 8 Windows client Some of the key improvements include Rules When you have marked an item as completed you can create a rule to trigger an event to happen A Vacation Rule Wizard has been created to help you quickly create a rule for times when you are away from the office Rules In GroupWise 8 0 2 and later you can set up a rule to forward messages as attachments What s New in GroupWise 8 405 Quick Find In this version of GroupWise Filter has been replaced with Find on the toolbar Now you can search across all folders your default library all libraries and by item type In addition you can select from recent finds as you type Categories You can now quickly search on similar categories directly from the Item List by simply clicking the Category icon then clicking Find 406 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide GroupWise Frequently Asked Questions The GroupWise 8 Client Frequently Asked Questions FAQ http www novell com documentation gw8 gw8_userfag data gw8_userfaq html is intended to help GroupWise client users who have not found the information they need in the GroupWise client online help or User Guides How Do I Find What I Need in the GroupWise Client Documentation http www novell com documentation gw8 gw8_userfaq data gw8_userfaq html userfaq_howdoi GroupWise W
305. g a Group of Selected Documents In your Mailbox or folders click the document references for the documents you want to delete Click Tools gt Mass Document Operations In the Operation group box click Delete In the Selection method group box click Use currently selected documents then click Next a fF Q N Specify the directory where you want to save the log file You can click Generate a log file without performing the delete operation to see the outcome of the delete without actually deleting the documents 6 Click Finish to delete the documents Deleting a Group of Documents Listed in a File 1 Click Tools gt Mass Document Operations 2 Inthe Operation group box click Delete 3 Inthe Selection method group box click Use documents listed in a file Document Management 357 15 15 8 4 Specify the name of the file that contains the list of documents you want to delete then click Next If the file you specify is a log file from a previous delete operation you can click Process errors only and GroupWise processes only the documents that generated errors during the previous session 5 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file 6 You can click Generate a log file without performing the delete operation to see the outcome of the delete without actually deleting the documents 7 Click Finish to delete the documents Moving a Group of Documents You can move a group of documents to another librar
306. g box by clicking o 4 Make sure Subscribe to alarms and Subscribe to notification are selected You are automatically subscribed to alarms and notification for yourself If you deselect Subscribe to alarms and Subscribe to notification for yourself you no longer receive alarms and notifications You need to repeat the steps in this topic for your username 5 Click OK Notify must be open or minimized in order to receive notification or alarms For more information see Section 8 2 Starting Notify on page 242 Creating a Rule for a Resource If you are the owner of a resource you have full Proxy rights to that resource including the ability to create rules for it The following steps show you how to create a rule that accepts all requests for an available resource This is an example of one rule that is useful for a resource You can create other rules that perform different actions For example you might create a rule that declines requests for a resource that is already scheduled 1 Click the Mode Selector then click Proxy 2 Click the resource you own If the resource you own isn t listed in the Proxy dialog box type the name of the resource you own in the Name field then click OK Click Tools gt Rules then click New Type a name for the rule Click Appointment Make sure the other item types are deselected Click the Appointment conflict exists drop down list then click No Click Add Action click Accept type a
307. g in Document Properties See Section 15 7 Viewing the History of a Document on page 327 Viewing Sent Item Properties In your Sent Items folder 1 Right click an item 2 Click Properties 3 Scroll to the status information near the bottom of the Properties page The icons next to an item can also give you helpful status information See Section 1 9 Identifying Icons Appearing Next to Items on page 28 If you are sending messages to non GroupWise systems remember that those systems must have status tracking capability in order to return the status of your outgoing message to your GroupWise system Saving the Status Information of an Item 1 Right click an item then click Properties 2 Click File gt Save As GroupWise gives the item a temporary filename You can change the filename and default folder 3 Click Save GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Printing the Status Information of an Item 1 Right click an item then click Properties 2 Right click in the Properties window then click Print Setting the Sent Items Default View Action When you double click an item in the Sent Items folder you can choose whether the message or the item properties are displayed 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt Default Actions 3 Select if you want the sent item to Open item or Show properties 4 Click OK Configuring Sent Item Information to Track 1 To change the sent information to track
308. ge 154 Changing the Type of an Item in Your Calendar 1 Click Calendar in the Folder List 2 Click the item you want to change in the Appointments Tasks or Reminder Notes List 3 Drag the item to the list that corresponds to the type of item you want to change it to For example drag a task to the Appointments List to change it to an appointment To copy an appointment task or reminder note press Ctrl while you drag the item 4 Type any necessary information 5 Click Send or Post on the toolbar Changing a Posted Item to a Group Item 1 In your Calendar click a posted item 2 Click Edit gt Change To then click More Change To P am Item type Views Mail Posted Appointment Phone Task Group Posted OK Cancel 3 Click Group then click OK 4 Type any necessary information 5 Click Send on the toolbar 154 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 4 4 5 4 5 4 5 1 Saving Calendar Items Saved items remain in your Calendar as well as being copied to the location you specify Items are saved with a rtf extension so that they can also be opened in a word processor Attachments are saved in their original format 1 In your Mailbox or Calendar click the item you want to save then click File gt Save As 2 Ctrl click the item and attachments you want to save 3 Select to save the item to disk or to a GroupWise library 4 Type a filename for the item in the Save file as field or Type a
309. given amount of time To ensure that your items are not deleted you can archive them manually For information on how to archive GroupWise items see Section 16 3 Archiving E Mail on page 375 Section 2 3 1 Understanding Folder Lists on page 45 Section 2 3 2 Displaying Folder Lists on page 47 Section 2 3 3 Working with Folders on page 48 Section 2 3 4 Managing Item Lists in Folders on page 50 Section 2 3 5 Customizing Folder Display Settings on page 52 Section 2 3 6 Understanding Find Results Folders on page 56 Section 2 3 7 Using Shared Folders on page 57 Understanding Folder Lists All folders are subfolders of your Home folder Click and to expand and collapse folders in a Folder List You can choose to display any of three different kinds of Folder Lists Full Folder List on page 45 Simple Folder List on page 46 Favorites Folder List on page 46 Full Folder List The Full Folder List displays all the folders that you have The default Full Folder List looks like this Getting Organized 45 Figure 2 3 Folder List fg Kuan Huang Home ETS a Sent Items FR Calendar ia Frequent Contacts Documents WI Tasklist E7 Work In Progress He 9 Cabinet Trash For information about the individual folders you might have in your Folder List see Section 2 3 1 Understanding Folder Lists on page 45 N
310. gning a Task to Other Users on page 169 Assigning a Task to Yourself on page 169 168 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Assigning a Task to Other Users 1 Click File gt New gt Task 4 Task To Richard Steadman File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help EE a Send X Cancel A Address ll h X 2 B A BW speicher A i Task Send Options From x Janet DeSoto To Richard Steadman BC Startdate Thu Sep 4 2008 a Due on Thu Sep 4 2008 a Subject Update Assignment List Priority Gui Evl Bs Ul P E EER Et al ew Please update your assignment list for me Account Novell GroupWise Folder Tasklist N In the To field type a username then press Enter Repeat for additional users If necessary type usernames in the CC and BC fields or To select usernames from a list click Address double click each user then click OK To change the From name to another account or proxy click then click a name Type the date you want the task to begin and the date you want the task to be completed You can type the same date in both fields or A Click to specify dates or auto dates for your task Type the subject ol 6 Optional Type a priority for the task The task priority can consist of a character followed by a number such as A1 C2 B or 3 7 Type a description of the task Optional Click the Send Op
311. group Account Folder 25 1 5 15 RSS Feeds Folder torisi estate earth den ees 25 1 6 Displaying the QuickViewer for Folder Items 25 1 6 1 Turning the QuickViewer On and Off 25 1 6 2 Positioning the QuickViewer 26 1 6 3 Using the QuickViewer 26 1 7 Using Panels in the Home Folder 22 26 1 8 Understanding GroupWise Item Types 27 1 8 1 Mall sn nent fan lee re te ee hs el AN te de st eid Les 27 1 92 Appointments s adrera une An ee ie ee ta ARR eet ee 28 NOB TASK EE E a En ayia th Aare ha haven ER M Reno tS teeta 28 1 8 4 Reminder Note izes gears bia ot eh dae donb wide eh ba eee tp ee Ab he Deel oe dr 28 1 8 5 Phone Messageri ioner sided ant hp ed een aes a Bee eg Sepa hn aA anak ot 28 1 9 Identifying Icons Appearing Next to Items 28 1 10 Learning More 2 trinket Spt ah Pla Rent Latch eine tet din et igh Mier entree due 30 1 10 1 Online Help 5 26s ht Cee oe hs BY AE SR ee Pe eee 30 1 10 2 GroupWise 8 Documentation Web Page 30 1 10 3 End User Training Web Page 31 1 10 4 GroupWise Cool Solutions
312. hat is sent to your GroupWise e mail address Section 3 6 1 Understanding Junk Mail Handling on page 117 Section 3 6 2 Blocking or Junking All E Mail from a Particular User on page 118 116 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 6 1 Section 3 6 3 Blocking or Junking E Mail from a Particular Internet Domain on page 119 Section 3 6 4 Junking E Mail from Users Not In a Personal Address Book on page 120 Section 3 6 5 Preventing E Mail from a User or Internet Domain from Being Junked or Blocked on page 120 Section 3 6 6 Modifying Junk Mail Handling Lists and Settings on page 121 Section 3 6 7 Automatically Deleting Items from the Junk Mail Folder on page 122 Section 3 6 8 Manually Deleting Items from the Junk Mail Folder on page 122 Understanding Junk Mail Handling Internet e mail includes all e mail where the sender s address is in the form of name example com name example org and so forth The following figure is an example of an e mail message from the Internet Figure 3 2 E Mail from the Internet Mail From user domain tedka File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help I Close sl Reply BG RepyAal C Foward amp 2 O ma Mail Properties Personalize Discussion Thread From user example com 6 30 2008 8 39 25 AM To Janet DeSoto Subject Marketing Briefing Notes Junk Mail Handling does not apply to internal e mail or app
313. he Send Options tab then click Status Tracking or To always get a return receipt for items you send click Tools gt Options double click Send then click the tab for the item type Send Options 2 Send Options Mail Appointment Task Reminder Note Secunty Delivered Delivered and opened All information _ Auto delete sent item Return notification When opened gt None When deleted None gt Internet mail F Enable delivery confirmation if supported Send notifications to my mailbox CE Coes 2 Inthe Return notification group box specify the type of return receipt you want None No action is taken Information is tracked in the properties for sent items Mail Receipt You receive an e mail Notify You receive an alarm in Notify Notify and Mail You receive an e mail and an alarm in Notify This feature is not supported when sending to a non GroupWise system E Mail 99 If you have deselected to receive alarms and notifications you cannot receive notifications with Notify For more information see Section 8 2 Starting Notify on page 242 If you are sending an item to an Internet address you can click Enable delivery confirmation If the receiver s Internet e mail system enables status tracking you can receive status about the item you send Requesting a Reply for Items You Send You can inform the recipient of an item that you need a reply Grou
314. he path to the post office The u option is used to display a login dialog box where a user can supply login information whenever he or she opens GroupWise This option is useful when two or more users share a workstation but have separate GroupWise Mailboxes 4 Start GroupWise GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide C 3 GroupWise Language Codes The following table lists the languages the GroupWise client has been localized into for GroupWise 5 5 and later versions Some versions might not include all of these languages For the most current information see your local reseller Language Arabic Chinese Simplified Chinese Traditional Czech Danish Dutch English United States Finnish French National German Germany Hebrew Hungarian Italian Japanese Korean Norwegian Polish Portuguese Brazil Russian Spanish Swedish Language Code AR CS CT CZ DA NL EN Fl FR DE HE HU IT JA KO NO PL PT RU ES SV Startup Options 411 412 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Shortcut Keys You can use a number of shortcut keys in GroupWise for accessibility or to save time when you perform various operations The table below lists some of these keystrokes what they do and the context where they work Table D 1 Shortcut Keys Keystroke F1 Ctrl F1 F2 F3 Ctrl F3 F4 Alt F4 Alt F4 Alt F4 F5 Alt F6 Ctrl F7 F8 F9 F11 Alt letter Shift letter Ctrl A Ctrl B Ctrl C
315. he type of mail server being used POP3 or IMAP4 your account name and password and the name of the incoming and outgoing mail servers You can get this information from your Internet service provider ISP or LAN administrator Microsoft Secure Password Authentication is supported for accessing Exchange servers and MSN accounts Section 12 2 1 Adding a POP3 or IMAP4 Account on page 286 Section 12 2 2 Importing POP3 and IMAP4 E Mail on page 287 12 2 1 Adding a POP3 or IMAP4 Account Make sure you know the type of mail server being used POP3 or IMAP4 your account login name and password and the name of the incoming and outgoing mail servers Contact your Internet service provider for this information You can add a POP3 or IMAP4 account only if the Accounts menu is displayed The Accounts menu is displayed if you are in Caching mode or if your administrator allows POP and IMAP or NNTP on your GroupWise system 1 Click Accounts gt Account Options 2 Click Add Create Account Ea Type the name you will use to refer to this account Often people use the name of their Internet Service Provider however you may use any name you would like Account name Select what type of account your Internet Service Provider has given you IMAP4 POP3 3 Type an account name and select the desired account type 4 Select whether to upload the new account to the GroupWise Mailbox then click Next 5 Provide th
316. heduled for meetings or other uses Resources can include rooms computer projectors cars and more The system administrator defines a resource by giving it an identifying name and assigning it to a user Resources can be included in a busy search just as users can Resource IDs are entered in the To box A user assigned to manage a resource is the owner of that resource The owner of a resource is responsible for accepting and declining appointments for the resource In order to do so the owner must have full proxy rights to the resource As a resource owner you can select to receive notification of appointments for the resource Understanding Resources on page 198 Adding a Personal Resource on page 199 Modifying a Personal Resource on page 199 Accepting and Declining Resource Requests on page 199 Receiving Notification for Another User or Resource on page 200 Creating a Rule for a Resource on page 200 Deleting a Personal Resource on page 200 Understanding Resources Each resource in a Contacts folder is marked with When you double click a resource the resource item view displays Figure 6 4 Resource Item View i C3 Conference Room fo File View Actions Help 3 Close H Save 8 Delete D Summary Details l Advanced Name Conference Room Phone 11055 Type Email Address Owner Janet DeSoto lad Comments l Categones E E Frequent Contacts
317. hin your department or company you can share information with anyone on the Internet To use newsgroups you must have access to an NNTP server Your Internet service provider ISP will give you the correct server information and login name if necessary You can also search the Internet for a list of free NNTP servers that you can use Section 13 1 Setting Up Newsgroups on page 295 Section 13 2 Working With Newsgroup Messages on page 297 Section 13 3 Working With Newsgroups on page 299 Setting Up Newsgroups Section 13 1 1 Adding a News Account on page 295 Section 13 1 2 Subscribing to a Newsgroup on page 296 Adding a News Account 1 Click Accounts gt Account Options 2 Click the News tab then click Add 3 Type an account name then click Next The name can be anything you want The name you type displays next to the folder in your Folder List Newsgroups 295 Create News NNTP Account Your Internet Service Provider will give you the correct server information and login name if necessary You may also add a name to be used for the From text when you post to a news group News NNTP server My server requires authentication Login name Password E mail address jdesoto corporate com From name Janet DeSoto 4 Type the name of the News NNTP server To use newsgroups you must have access to an NNTP server Your Internet service prov
318. hments to messages in your mailbox actually exist in the attachment directories A contents check also makes sure that your rules and personal groups are valid Collect Statistics If you select Contents you can also collect statistics during the contents check The statistics include the number of messages and appointments in your mailbox the amount of space consumed by your mailbox and so on Select Fix Problems to repair your mailbox If you deselect Fix Problems problems with your mailbox are reported but not fixed On the Databases tab select one or more databases to analyze and optionally fix For information about the databases see Section 16 7 Repairing Your Mailbox on page 382 On the Logging tab the Log File field shows that by default a file named gwchk32 1log is created in the GroupWise client installation directory Optional Specify a different filename and location You can also select Verbose Logging to record more detailed information during the analyze fix process Click Run to start the Analyze Fix Database option A progress log displays during the analyze fix process You can click Stop at any time to stop the analyze fix process An error code is displayed but it simply indicates that the process has been stopped You can click Statistics at any time during the analyze fix process to add interim statistical information to the log such as how many problems have been identified and fixed so far in
319. ibe folders in the GroupWise Folder List x No el ise Mailbox File Edit View Actions Tools Mailbox 9 Address Book 5 P Qjnewmail Newappt 3 E Reply amp Reply All Il Window Help Calendar ER Forward Sent Items Contacts M New Task ER Onlinew v Mailbox 9 Find a Anita Olivos Home a From Subject Date Mailbox 9 lt jsumi corporate net gt Check for Sales Conference updates 9 14 2007 12 3 amp Sent Items amp lt jsumi Corporate net Don t forget the Halloween party 10 1 2007 11 amp F Calendar lt jsumi corporate net gt How long is the conference going te 10 4 2007 6 5 E Frequent Contacts lt szeeman corporate r What s a blog 10 5 2007 9 1 B Documents Gustav Bock This is a private appointment 1 2 2008 1 30 P M Tasklist amp lt teamingadmin corpo Message 3 from Teaming to GroupV 6 19 2008 2 0 g Wark In Progress lt teamingadmin corpo Message sent Friday 6 20 2008 12 L Cabinet amp lt admin your com con Test for Ira 7 8 2008 10 2 3 Trash 5 amp lt teamingadmin corpo Scheduled mail notification for Wo 7 8 2008 11 5 GQ Novell Teaming f Sophie Jones Shared folder notification 12 1 2008 5 1 Olivos Anita aolivos Skip Zeeman Text BCC of group 1 21 2009 5 4 Blog Janet DeSoto Marketing Strategy 5 5 2010 12 30 TD Caviaar _Janet DeSoto Market Evaluation Phase 1 5 5 2010 3 30 P R a Meeting Minutes 5 6 2010 2 2
320. ick Save 9 4 6 Limiting Items Affected by a Rule Use Define Conditions to further limit the items affected by a rule 254 9 5 9 6 1 2 In the Rules dialog box click Define Conditions Click the first drop down list then click a field For more information about the options that you can choose from see Section 7 3 2 Selecting Fields in Advanced Finds and Rules on page 231 Click the operator drop down list then click an operator To learn how to use operators see Using Advanced Find on page 230 Type the criteria for the rule or If a drop down list is provided click the drop down list then click existing criteria If you type criteria such as a person s name or a subject you can include wildcard characters such as an asterisk or a question mark Text you type is not case sensitive To learn more about wildcard characters and switches see Finding Items Anywhere in Your Mailbox on page 227 Click the last drop down list then click End or Click the last drop down list then click And or Or to further limit the items affected by the rule Editing a Rule 1 2 3 4 Click Tools gt Rules Click the rule you want to edit then click Edit Make changes to the rule Click Save Enabling or Disabling a Rule A rule must be enabled before it can be triggered When you disable a rule the rule cannot be triggered However the rule is still listed in the Rules dialog box so
321. icons that appear in your calendar give you additional information about items For more information see Section 1 9 Identifying Icons Appearing Next to Items on page 28 Understanding Calendar Shading Appointments on your calendar appear in different shades depending on how the appointment is shown Busy The appointment displays as gray Free The appointment displays as white Out of the Office The appointment displays as dark gray Tentative The appointment displays as gray with white and gray stripes on the side GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 4 2 2 4 2 3 To change an appointment s Show Appointment As status 1 Click Actions gt Show Appointment As then select Busy Free Out of the Office or Tentative Viewing Any Folder As a Calendar This method of viewing your calendar is useful if you store all your appointments or other items for a specific project or client in one folder and want to see your schedule for that project only 1 Click a project folder in the Folder List 2 Click View gt Display Settings gt As Calendar to display all scheduled accepted items that are saved in that folder display Opening a New Calendar View You can open a new Calendar view in a separate window outside your Calendar folder 1 Click Window gt Calendar then click a calendar view You can view the Calendar by day week week and month month and year Other views are also available such as Des
322. ide 16 2 5 16 2 6 16 3 16 3 1 Using Mailbox Passwords in Remote Mode To use Remote mode you must assign a password to your Online Mailbox If you assign a password when you re running Remote the password is synchronized back to GroupWise the next time you connect to your Online Mailbox When the password synchronized it changes your Online Mailbox and your Caching password For more information about Remote mode see Section 11 2 Using Remote Mode on page 266 If your system administrator has turned on LDAP authentication and has disabled changing your LDAP password in GroupWise you might need to use a different application to change your password Contact your system administrator for more information 1 Click Accounts gt Account Options then select your GroupWise account 2 Click Properties then click Server 3 Change the password in the Online mailbox password field 4 Click OK Using Mailbox Passwords with Proxies Setting a password for your Mailbox does not affect a proxy s ability to access your Mailbox A proxy s ability to access your Mailbox is determined by the rights you assign him or her in your Access List Archiving E Mail Use Archive to save mail or phone messages appointments reminder notes or tasks to a designated database on a local drive Archiving items saves network space and keeps your Mailbox uncluttered It also protects items from being automatically deleted Section 16 3 1
323. ider will give you the correct server information and login name if necessary You can also search the Internet for a list of free NNTP servers that you can use 5 Ifthe server requires authentication click My server requires authentication then fill in the Login name and Password fields 6 Fillin the E Mail address and From Name fields then click Next 7 Click Connect through my local area network LAN or Click Connect using my modem and phone line click a dialing option then click a connection in the Dial Up Networking connection to use list box 8 Click Next 9 Type a folder description position the folder in the Folder List then click Finish 13 1 2 Subscribing to a Newsgroup 1 Click Accounts gt Account Options 2 Click the News tab click an account then click Newsgroups 296 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 13 2 13 2 1 13 2 2 Accounts x Mail News Close Marked Account Type Incoming Server Add 7 fens News NNTP nntp groupwise Remove Properties General Options Newsgroups 3 Click a newsgroup or Type a search term click Search click a newsgroup then click Subscribe To unsubscribe to a newsgroup repeat Step 1 and Step 2 click the Subscribed tab click a newsgroup click Unsubscribe then click Yes Working With Newsgroup Messages Section 13 2 1 Reading Newsgroup Messages on page 297 Section 13 2 2 Posting a New Discuss
324. ificate save it to a diskette and deliver it to you You then import the public certificate Receiving a Secure Item Secure items are marked in your Item List with the following icons Icon Description Rg Signed item it Encrypted item iy Signed and Encrypted item Using Security Service Providers Depending on the security software you have installed you can select different security service providers for the items you send For example your organization might require you to use one security service provider for work items because of a preferred encryption method but you might want a different security service provider for sending personal items The security options available depend on the security service provider you select See Selecting a Security Service Provider on page 87 for more information GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Advanced Information GroupWise is compatible with the S MIME version 2 and 3 specification The security service providers that GroupWise supports have common encryption algorithms such as RC2 and RC4 When digitally signing an item GroupWise hashes the item into a message digest using the standard SHA 1 algorithm The message digest is distributed with the item being sent See Selecting a Security Service Provider on page 87 for more information Digitally Signing or Encrypting a Message To encrypt an item and have the recipient decrypt it you must have received the recipien
325. ify that the items in this folder be automatically deleted after a certain number days E Mail 117 Figure 3 4 Full Folder List Showing the Junk Mail Folder Janet DeSoto Home Mailbox 6 Sent Items F calendar a Contacts Janet DeSoto H E Documents M Tasklist E7 Work In Progress Cabinet ce EE Trash 6 You can specify that any e mail items from users whose addresses are not in your personal address books including your Frequent Contacts address book and any personal address books you have created are sent to the Junk Mail folder This is sometimes called white listing For information about the Junk Mail folder see Junk Mail Folder on page 24 In addition to the Block List and Junk List there is a Trust List Use this list to add e mail addresses or Internet domains that you do not want blocked or junked no matter what is specified in the other two lists For example you have zcompany com in your Block List but you have one friend whose address is myfriend example com Add this friend s e mail address to the Trust List If you specify Junk Mail Handling options in Caching or Remote mode make sure to synchronize with your Online Mailbox in order to see the same options when you log in to GroupWise on another computer Your system administrator can turn off Junk Mail Handling so that it is not available 3 6 2 Blocking or Junking All E Mail from a Particular User 1 Right click an item wi
326. in text or phrases that you specify The name of the person who authored a document Text appearing in the Caller s Company field of a phone message Text appearing in the Caller field of a phone message A phone number appearing in the Phone field of a phone message The category assigned to an item A person s name appearing in the CC field of an item The date when a user marks a task Completed The type of message a user receives To CC or BC The date you clicked the Send button or posted an item to your Calendar The date a document was last opened GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Field Criteria Entry Specify the task completion percentage You can use equal to less than greater than and so on Specify GroupWise POP3 IMAP or NNTP Depending on the operator you can specify a time period that the task falls within or specify an exact date Select an attachment from the drop down list Specify attachment text Specify the document author s name Specify a company name Specify a caller name Specify a phone number Specify an existing category Specify a CC field name Specify the task completion date You can use equal to or you can use before or after today s date Select To CC or BC from the drop down list Depending on the operator you can specify a time period that the item falls within or specify an exact date Depending o
327. indows Client FAQ http www novell com documentation gw8 gw8_userfaq data gw8_userfaq html userfaq_windows GroupWise Linux Mac Client FAQ http www novell com documentation gw8 gw8_userfaq data gw8_userfag html userfag_linmac GroupWise WebAccess Client FAQ http www novell com documentation gw8 gw8_userfaq data gw8_userfaq html userfaq_webaccess Non GroupWise Clients FAQ http www novell com documentation gw8 gw8_userfaq data gw8_userfaq html userfaq_nongwclients GroupWise Client Comparison http www novell com documentation gw8 gw8_userfaq data gw8_userfaq html userfaq_comparison Where Do I Go for More Help http www novell com documentation gw8 gw8_userfag data gw8_userfaq html userfaq_morehelp GroupWise Frequently Asked Questions 407 408 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide C 1 Startup Options GroupWise has startup options that you can use when you start the program Some of them are for your convenience and others are necessary to run GroupWise on your particular hardware Section C 1 GroupWise Startup Options on page 409 Section C 2 Using a GroupWise Startup Option on page 410 Section C 3 GroupWise Language Codes on page 411 GroupWise Startup Options This Startup Option u u USER ID bl c cm d pathname iabs ipa ijp_address_or_name ipp port_number l XX la network_id Does This Displays a login dialog box whenever you
328. ing and Dropping GroupWise Items into Vibe Folders on page 394 Viewing Vibe Teaming Feeds in the GroupWise Folder List You can view live Vibe Teaming feeds directly from the GroupWise client Vibe Teaming feeds conveniently display the most recent entries that you are interested in See Section 18 5 Viewing Vibe Feeds in GroupWise on page 395 GroupWise 8 0 2 Hot Patch 2 and Later Starting in GroupWise 8 0 2 Hot Patch 2 GroupWise integrates with Novell Vibe OnPrem 3 as well as with Novell Teaming The Novell Teaming folder available in earlier versions of GroupWise becomes the Novell Vibe OnPrem folder in Hot Patch 2 regardless of whether it accesses a Vibe site or a Teaming site Novell Conferencing GroupWise 8 0 2 and later provide the following integrations with Novell Conferencing Scheduling a Conferencing Meeting within GroupWise You can schedule a Novell Conferencing meeting directly from the GroupWise client See Section 19 1 Scheduling a Conferencing Meeting within GroupWise on page 397 Starting a Conferencing Meeting within GroupWise If you are the creator of a Conferencing meeting you can start the meeting directly from the GroupWise client See Section 19 2 Starting a Conferencing Meeting within GroupWise on page 400 Joining a Conferencing Meeting within GroupWise You can join a Novell Conferencing meeting directly from the GroupWise client See Section 19 3 Joining a Conferencin
329. inistrator has set and other products you have installed Remembering My Password on page 373 Using the No Password Required Option with eDirectory on page 373 Using Single Sign On on page 374 Bypassing Your GroupWise Password on page 374 Remembering My Password When you are logged in to the network as yourself and have selected Remember My Password in Security Options or during login you are not prompted for your password on the current workstation Windows remembers the password Using the No Password Required Option with eDirectory When you are logged in to Novell eDirectory as yourself on any workstation and have selected No password required with eDirectory in Security Options you are not prompted for your password Because eDirectory has identified you the password is not required Maintaining GroupWise 373 16 2 4 Using Single Sign On When you are logged in to eDirectory as yourself on any workstation where Novell SecureLogin is installed and you have selected Use single sign on in Security Options or during login you are not prompted for your password Single sign on locates your stored password If other users log in to GroupWise on your workstation they should deselect this option during login This does not turn the option off but makes sure the other password is not stored in place of yours Bypassing Your GroupWise Password The availability of this option depends on the platform o
330. ion 1 Click Accounts gt Send Retrieve gt GroupWise Options 2 Click Configure click Connect To click the connection then click Edit 3 Make the necessary changes then click OK Deleting a Remote Connection 1 Click Accounts gt Send Retrieve gt GroupWise Options 2 Click Configure click Connect To then click the connection 3 Click Delete then click Yes Specifying Your Remote Location 1 Click Accounts gt Send Retrieve gt GroupWise Options then click Configure Remote and Caching Modes 273 Advanced Signature Connecting from My Location Connect From Connecting to Client Server connection to Post Offic x Connect using TCP IP Connect through my local area network LAN Connect using my modem and phone line Automatically dial Prompt before dialing Manually dial Dial Up Networking connection to use Properties 2 To select your remote location click the Connecting from drop down list then click the remote location 3 To change the dialing properties of your modem click Connect From specify changes in the Dialing Properties dialog box then click OK For help on specifying dialing properties see your Windows documentation Specifying Remote Properties You can change the way Remote mode is set up including your connection time zone how often to send and retrieve items system information delete optio
331. ion fields Requires users who registered for the meeting to provide a first name last name and phone number Users can also provide a company name state and job title if they want 6 Click the Features tab to specify additional settings GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Appointment To Anita Olivos Janet DeSoto File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help i Send XX Cancel a ddress 2 se Busy Search tal foe Appointment Send Options Conference Audio Video Camera and Microphone v C Auto microphone Auto hands free General M Public Chat Private Chat Resources M Computer Screen Whiteboard v Features M pose odes M Participant list M Assistant Documents Recording Lobby OB KK a Participants 150 ti Account Novell GroupWise Folder Calendar Audio Video Use the drop down list to determine audio and video availability for the meeting Auto microphone Automatically assigns microphones to the first two attendees who join the meeting after the cameras have been assigned If the camera is enabled the host is automatically assigned a camera If Auto microphone is selected then the first user who enters the meeting is also assigned a camera Public Chat Enables attendees to chat with all other attendees Auto hands free Enables users who have the camera or microphone assigned to them to speak without needing to click Talk in the Audio Visual Broadcaster
332. ion to a Newsgroup on page 297 Section 13 2 3 Replying to a Message in a Newsgroup on page 298 Section 13 2 4 Marking Messages According to Your Interests on page 298 Section 13 2 5 Adding a Signature to All Newsgroup Items You Send on page 298 Section 13 2 6 Changing the Display Name for Newsgroup Postings on page 299 Section 13 2 7 Deleting a Newsgroup Message on page 299 Reading Newsgroup Messages If you subscribe to an NNTP newsgroup account an NNTP folder is created It displays the NNTP folder icon in your Folder List The NNTP folder displays a list of each newsgroup you have subscribed to When you click a subscribed newsgroup in your Folder List the Item List displays a list of available news stories To read a news story 1 Double click the news story in the Item list to view the story in a new window or Select the news story to view the story in the QuickViewer Posting a New Discussion to a Newsgroup 1 Right click the newsgroup then click New Discussion 2 Type a subject 3 Type a message Newsgroups 297 13 2 3 13 2 4 13 2 5 4 To change the newsgroup you are posting to or to post to additional newsgroups click Newsgroups 5 Click OK 6 Click Post on the toolbar You cannot retract an item posted to a newsgroup If there is a problem posting an item to a newsgroup for example the NNTP server reports an out of disk space error your message
333. irst possible meeting day click El then click a date 3 Click Busy Search on the toolbar Busy Search Lee Start Busy Search To begin the Busy Search immediately press Connect Now To start the Busy Search the next Connect Later time you connect press Connect Later Connecting From My Location To 136666551677 Configue 4 To immediately connect to your master GroupWise system and search for available times click Connect Now or To search for available times later click Connect Later Clicking Connect Later creates a busy search request but doesn t send the request to the master GroupWise system You can save your appointment as a draft item in the Work In Progress folder until you are ready to send it When you re ready to check appointment times later click Busy then click Connect Now When the Choose Appointment Time window appears click Auto Select for the first available meeting time Click Auto Select until the best available time is displayed then click OK or Click the Available Times tab click an available time then click OK 6 Complete the appointment then click Send on the toolbar If you are disconnected before all schedule information returns from a busy search clicking Busy again lets you update the information from the original busy search request GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Filtering the GroupWise Address Book for Your Remote Mailbox The GroupWise A
334. is Turns off AutoRefresh If this option is selected click View then click Refresh whenever you want to update the display with the items currently in your Mailbox Lets you specify the path to the post office In order to use this switch you must have a drive mapped to the post office and have Write rights to the databases that make up your mailbox This configuration is not supported Opens GroupWise in Caching mode GroupWise must be restarted when you change from Online mode to Caching mode Opens GroupWise in Remote mode This startup option can be used in the Target field only Opens GroupWise in Safe mode This startup option can be used if you are unable to launch GroupWise Safe mode disables the following features Start in the home folder Synchronize at startup Auto synchronize Panels Message preview Display settings are not saved C8po s Auto archive purge and delete Quick Find indexing Novell Vibe OnPrem and Novell Teaming C 2 Using a GroupWise Startup Option 410 1 Right click the GroupWise icon on the desktop then click Properties 2 Click the Shortcut tab 3 Inthe Target field after the GroupWise executable type a space type the startup options then click OK Separate multiple startup options with a space like this j grpwise exe ph pathname u In this example ph is the startup option to specify the path to the post office The pathname is t
335. is displayed but it simply indicates that the process has been stopped You can click Statistics at any time during the rebuild to add interim statistical information to the log such as how many problems have bee corrected so far in the structural rebuild process 6 Click Close then click OK when the structural rebuild is complete 7 Click Close to return to your GroupWise mailbox Managing Trash All deleted mail and phone messages appointments tasks documents and reminder notes are stored in the Trash Items in the Trash can be viewed opened or returned to your Mailbox until the Trash is emptied Emptying the Trash removes items in the Trash from the system You can empty your entire Trash or empty only selected items Items in the Trash are emptied according to the days entered in the Cleanup tab in Environment Options or you can empty the Trash manually The system administrator can specify that your Trash is emptied automatically on a regular basis Section 16 8 1 Displaying Items in Your Trash on page 385 Section 16 8 2 Undeleting an Item in Your Trash on page 385 Section 16 8 3 Saving an Item From Your Trash on page 386 Section 16 8 4 Emptying the Trash on page 386 Displaying Items in Your Trash 1 Inthe Full Folder List click To access the Full Folder List click the folder list header drop down list above the Folder List it probably displays Online or Caching to indica
336. is greater than or equal to the number of recipients who have deleted the item Items that have been completed Items that have not been accepted Items where the From field contains Bill such as items from Bill Jones Bill Smith and so on Does not support wildcard characters Items where the From field does not contain Bill such as items from Bill Jones Bill Smith and so on Does not support wildcard characters Items where the To field begins with cli such as Client Group or Clive Winters Items where the Subject field reads Customer Reports Items that were sent today Items that were sent yesterday or later Items that were sent later than but not including yesterday Tasks that are due before tomorrow 7 3 4 Operator lt On or Before gt Within lt Previous On Date gt After Date gt On or After Date lt Before Date lt On or Before Date Example Result Includes Due End Date lt Tasks that are due tomorrow or earlier Tomorrow Due End Date gt 3 Day Tasks that are due between and including today and three days after today Due End Date lt 3 Day Tasks that were due between and including today and three days before today Created 5 29 11 Items that were created on May 29 2011 Created gt 5 29 11 Items that were created after May 29 2011 Created gt 5 29 11 Items that were created on or after May 29 2011 Created l
337. is saved in your Work in Progress folder so that you can try to post it again later Replying to a Message in a Newsgroup Right click the item in the Item List then click Reply Click a Reply option Click OK Type a reply To change the newsgroup you are posting to or to post to additional newsgroups click Newsgroups Press F1 in the Select Newsgroups dialog box for more information 6 Click OK 7 Click Post on the toolbar a fF N You cannot retract an item posted to a newsgroup If there is a problem posting an item to a newsgroup for example the NNTP server reports an out of disk space error your message is saved in your Work in Progress folder so that you can try to post it again later Marking Messages According to Your Interests 1 Right click the newsgroup item click Mark Thread then click Watch Read or Ignore You can then filter messages based on thread status to see only the messages containing your postings Adding a Signature to All Newsgroup Items You Send 1 Click Accounts gt Account Options 2 Click the News tab click Properties then click the Signature tab 3 Click Signature or Electronic business card vCard 4 If you selected Signature type the text you want as the signature in the Signature field This signature is different from the one you can create for regular GroupWise messages or for IMAP or POP3 accounts 5 Click Automatically add to add a signature to every item you post
338. isplay tab then click More Display Settings 3 Select Sent under Choose item source 4 Click OK twice then specify a name for the display setting 5 Click OK Panels A panel displays a customized view of information in GroupWise For example the default Home view includes an Unread Messages panel which displays a list of items you have not read The Tasklist panel is another default panel on the Home view The Tasklist panel displays items that are in your Tasklist folder As Calendar The As Calendar view displays all scheduled items that are saved in a particular folder This is useful if you organize all your appointments and other items for a specific project in one folder As Tasklist The As Tasklist view displays a Tasklist area at the top of your Item List where you can create a Tasklist from items in your Item List Each item that is dragged to the Tasklist area displays with a check box so that you can mark it completed You can assign due dates priorities and more to Tasklist items Any items you move to the Tasklist area also display in the Tasklist folder in the Folder List For more information about creating a Tasklist see Section 5 3 1 Assigning a Task on page 168 Changing or Deleting Folder Display Settings You can control the name that appears in the Display drop down list the source of the items in the folder the column display and the order in which items sort in the folder The display settings a
339. ist Work In Progress Cabinet Trash 15 4 m Library Document Version Support Library Default 3 Current x 0K a En 2 Inthe Library drop down list click the library that contains the document you want to access 3 Inthe Document field type the document number If you don t know the number of the document you can use Find to locate the document if the document has not been deleted and create a reference to the document in your Mailbox or folder 4 Inthe Version drop down list click the version you want the document reference to point to 5 Click OK Organizing Your Documents Your document references are organized in the Documents folder so you can locate them easily The Documents folder can contain only documents If any other type of item is moved to this folder by a GroupWise client older than version 5 5 for example from an older version of GroupWise Remote the item is deleted Any document references you create or open are added to the Documents folder if you specify any document references you view or import are also added You can also specify that none of these actions adds a document reference to the Documents folder The Documents folder contains by default your 20 most recent document references You can change this number from 0 to 5000 document references After the maximum number is reached the oldest document reference is deleted You can also manually delete do
340. istrator can use this information to restore specific versions of deleted documents Viewing the Activity of a Document 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox 2 Click File gt Properties 3 Click the Activity Log tab Document 3 ES Document Version Sharing Activity Log Personalize Show selected version Show all versions Activity log Date Name Action Version 09 04 08 2 28PM Janet DeSoto Closed 1 09 04 08 2 28 PM Janet DeSoto Opened 1 09 04 08 2 28 PM Janet DeSoto Closed 1 F 09 04 08 2 28 PM Janet DeSoto Opened 1 09 04 08 2 28 PM Janet DeSoto Closed 1 09 04 08 2 28 PM Janet DeSoto Opened 1 09 04 08 2 28 PM Janet DeSoto Properties Update 1 09 04 08 2 28 PM Janet DeSoto Security Modified 1 09 04 08 2 19PM Janet DeSoto Downloaded Versi 1 09 04 08 2 19PM Janet DeSoto Downloaded Versi 1 09 04 08 2 19PM Janet DeSoto Downloaded Versi 1 09 04 08 2 19PM Janet DeSoto Created 1 A m r Status In Use Janet DeSoto Any document activity appears in the list box check out check in delete and so forth Document Management 327 15 7 3 15 8 15 8 1 Viewing Who Has a Document Open or Checked Out To view document activity you must have View rights for the selected document version 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox 2 Click File gt Properties 3 Click the Activity Log tab to view who has the document open or checked out You can also view who has a document open by
341. item read later the sender of the item still sees the item status as Opened in the Properties window Marking an Item Read 1 In the Mailbox click the item in the Item List 2 Click Actions gt Mark Read Marking an item Read changes the status of the item in Properties For example if you have not opened an item but you marked the item read the sender of the item sees the item status as Opened in the Properties window Reading Attachments GroupWise has the ability to send and receive attachments with items When you receive an attachment with an item the list of attachments is displayed in the Attachment Window or to the right of the subject Viewing Attached Files on page 105 Opening Attached Files on page 106 Dragging and Dropping Attachments on page 106 Editing Attachments on page 106 Viewing an Attached vCard on page 107 Viewing Attached Files When you click an attached file the attachment is displayed in the message pane of the QuickViewer This is usually faster than opening the attachment however the attachment might not be formatted properly If the attachment type is not supported you receive an error 1 Open the item containing the attachment 2 Click the attachment or Right click the attachment then click View Attachment or View in New Window or If you cannot see an icon representing the attachment in your view click File gt Attachments gt View If you rec
342. ith Vibe OnPrem Location Updates Chapter 18 Novell Vibe OnPrem on page 393 Updated for the version from Vibe OnPrem 3 to Vibe OnPrem 3 1 December 9 2010 Compatibility with Vibe OnPrem Location Updates Chapter 18 Novell Vibe OnPrem on page 393 Updated for the product name change from Novell Teaming to Novell Vibe OnPrem July 14 2010 GroupWise 8 0 2 Location Updates Organizing Contacts with Categories on page 190 Added instructions on how to organize your contacts by using categories Sending Messages to a Personal Organization on Added instructions on how to send a message to a page 202 personal organization Documentation Updates 419 420 F 4 Location Section 12 2 1 Adding a POP3 or IMAP4 Account on page 286 Section 16 3 7 Moving Your Archive from One Location to Another on page 378 Section 19 1 Scheduling a Conferencing Meeting within GroupWise on page 397 Section 19 3 Joining a Conferencing Meeting within GroupWise on page 400 Updates Specified the conditions under which the Accounts menu is displayed Added instructions on how to move your archive from one location to another Added instructions on scheduling a Conferencing meeting within GroupWise Added instructions on joining a Conferencing meeting within GroupWise August 31 2009 GroupWise 8 0 1 Location Section 3 2 4 Replying to Sent E Mail on page 98 Sectio
343. ity reasons To display the images in the message click the message that reads GroupWise has prevented images on this page from displaying Click here to display images To set your default setting for displaying external HTML images 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Environment 2 Click the Default Actions tab 3 Select if you want to Always show warning Never show warning or Check Frequent Contacts If you select Check Frequent Contacts images display from senders in your Frequent Contacts address book but the warning displays for everyone else 4 Click OK Changing the Font of Received Items This information applies to reading an item in an item view or in the QuickViewer This font change is only in effect while you read the item If you close the item and re open it the font returns to the Windows system default font or the font that the sender composed the item in The Windows system default font affects every program on your desktop To change the Windows system default font open the Control Panel and change the Display Properties You cannot change the font in the QuickViewer if the item was composed in HTML view 1 Select the text you want to change 2 Click Edit gt Font E Mail 103 104 Font Font Font style Size Fea eq eq boi el 2 ENS Shruti talic 10 Cance SimHei Bold 1 jg O Simplified Arabic Bold ttalic 12 Simplified Arabic Fxed 14 SimSun 16 O SimSun EtB i 18 mj Eff
344. ives on page 379 4 Click Apply Conditional If you have not previously enabled archiving you are prompted as to whether you want to enable archiving Click Yes 378 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 6 Conditional If you are moving your archive to a directory that does not already have archive files you see a message asking if you want to move the contents of your archive to the new location Novell GroupWise 23 Do you want to move the contents of your existing archive C Users bcombs gwarchive2 to your new archive C Users bcombs gwarchive3 E 7 Ensure this is the location where you want to move your archive then click Yes 8 Click OK 16 3 8 Combining Archived Items from Multiple Archives 16 4 You might have items in multiple archives that you want to combine into one archive 1 Inthe GroupWise client specify the archive directory that contains the fewest archived items For information on how to specify an archive directory in GroupWise see Section 16 3 2 Specifying Where Archives Are Stored on page 376 You must be on the physical computer that contains the directory where the archive exists 2 Unarchive all the items in the archive as described in Section 16 3 6 Unarchiving Items on page 377 3 Specify your main archive directory For information on how to specify an archive directory in GroupWise see Section 16 3 2 Specifying Where Archives Are Stored on pag
345. k Click Directories then click a directory service Click Properties then click the Searching tab a Ff O N a Drag the bar under Amount of time to search before timing out until it shows the amount of time you want 6 Click OK click Close then click Close again Advanced Address Book Options Defining Copy Options on page 221 Changing Your MAPI Configuration on page 222 Defining Copy Options Use Copy Options to select the copying format to use when you copy address book data to the clipboard When the address book data is copied to the clipboard it is formatted as a virtual business card vCard or address book text A vCard includes all of identifying information for an individual that is included in an address book There are two copy formats you can select Display Data ASCII text format or vCard Data vcf stream format When you select a format the vCard data copied thereafter with the standard Windows text copy procedure select text then press Ctrl C can be pasted in that format into other applications such as personal information managers and Web applications to fill your particular needs For example you could paste the display text into an HTML editor or a word processor for import into a database or for formatting as a mail merge document Or if you chose to copy in vCard format you could paste the data into a vCard editor or viewer to include sound clips graphics or additional text Yo
346. k Calendar Notebook Day Projects Day Planner and Project Planner These views open in a separate window and provide alternatives to viewing your current calendar Options such as the Desk Calendar provide a creative view of your appointments and tasks and still provide the flexibility to add appointments and tasks as needed Reading a Calendar Entry 1 Inthe Folder List click Calendar 2 Double click the item you want to read In all views except the Year view you can mouse over most items and see more information such as Subject Time Place and To Creating a Personal Calendar 1 Click File gt New gt Calendar Manage Calendars P Calendars Calendar Move Up M Personal v New Calendal New olo Nol OK Cancel 2 Type a name for the new calendar Calendar 129 3 Optional Click Color Select a color for the calendar by clicking the colored square Click OK 4 Select what order you want your calendars to display in by selecting the calendar then clicking Move Up or Move Down 5 Click OK 4 2 4 Customizing a New Calendar 130 You can set several options to customize your Calendar view For example you can make it easier to see your work days by specifying the first day of the week and highlighting weekends Customizing Your Calendar Views for a New Calendar on page 130 Defining Your Work Schedule on page 133 Changing the First
347. k Close Searching for a Person through a Directory Service 1 In the Main Window click on the toolbar 2 Click the LDAP Address Book Address Book balaja File Edit View Help r5 X 8 J Find A Action E Novell GroupWise Ad DEEE on g Family pee II a E Frequent Contacts Directories Retrieve Gear Al_ _ Stoo Name E Mail Address Title 3 Select a directory service from the Look In drop down list 4 Type the name you want to search for or Contacts and Address Books 219 220 Type an e mail address you want to search for If other search fields are available specify the information you want to search for 5 Click Retrieve 6 When the search is complete double click the name you want 7 Click Close If you want to save the names you find in the search click the names click Edit gt Copy To select a personal address book then click OK Establishing a Secure Connection to a Directory Service OO a fF O N In the Main Window click gS on the toolbar Click the LDAP Address Book Click Directories then click a directory service Click Properties Click Connect using SSL Specify the path to your digital certificate file This file enables GroupWise to use SSL to authenticate to the LDAP server that is the directory service you have chosen Contact your system administrator to learn the location of this certificate file or obtain a certificate file f
348. k Use documents listed in a file 4 Specify the name of the file that contains a list of the documents for which you want to change sharing rights then click Next You can specify any text file ASCII or ANSI as the source file for a change sharing operation as long as the file contains a list of document IDs If you re creating a file make sure that each document ID is at the beginning of a line and that there is only one document per line If the file you specify is a log file from a previous operation you can click Process errors only and GroupWise processes only the documents that generated errors during the previous session 5 Click Add new users and rights to selected documents to modify the existing Share Lists for each document in the group or Click Replace share lists for selected documents to create a new Share List that will replace the existing Share List for each document in the group 6 Inthe Name field type the name of the user for whom you want to modify sharing rights then click Add User 7 Inthe Share list click the name of the user for whom you want to modify sharing rights 8 In the Rights for all versions group box click the rights you want to give the user to the selected group of documents 9 If you want to specify sharing rights for specific versions click Version level security specify the rights for each version then click OK 10 Click Next 11 Click Preview to see a sample of the documents
349. l Instances 3 Make your changes then click Send on the toolbar 4 Click Yes to retract the original item To reschedule an appointment for a new time on the same day open your Calendar and drag the appointment to the new time Rescheduling Recurring Appointments 1 In your calendar right click the appointment you want to reschedule then click Resend If you are rescheduling just one appointment in a series of recurring appointments select the appointment on the day you want to reschedule 2 Click All Instances for all appointments in the recurring appointment or Click This Instance for only one appointment in the series of recurring appointments 3 Make your changes then click Send on the toolbar 4 Click Yes to retract the original item To reschedule an appointment for a new time on the same day open your Calendar and drag the appointment to the new time Calendar 143 4 3 3 Canceling an Appointment You can cancel an appointment if you scheduled it or if you have the necessary Proxy rights to the scheduler s Mailbox 1 In your calendar right click the appointment you want to cancel then click Delete 2 Select Delete this item from all other recipient s mailboxes to remove it from other users mailboxes Leave this option deselected if you want to delete it only from your own mailbox 3 Optional Type a message explaining the cancellation 4 Then click OK A Meeting Cancelled message is sent to each user that
350. l Line in an HTML Message In an open HTML message 1 Select a location in the e mail where you want the line to appear 2 Click the Horizontal Line icon Adding a Bulleted or Numbered List in an HTML Message In an open HTML message 1 Use the HTML toolbar to insert a bulleted or numbered list 2 Type a list item then press Enter to create the next item in the list 3 To turn off the list formatting press Enter then press Backspace after the last item Adding a Table in an HTML Message In an open HTML message 1 On the HTML toolbar click the Table Options icon E 2 From the drop down menu select the size of the table or select Other and specify your own dimensions The table is displayed in the e mail and adjusts to fit the text 70 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Adding Images in an HTML Message In an open HTML message 1 Inthe area where you want the image to appear click the Insert Picture icon 2 Specify the name of the graphic you want to add or browse to and select it then click OK Adding a Background Image in an HTML Message In an open HTML message 1 Click the Background Image icon c 2 Specify the name of the graphic you want to use as a background or browse to and select it 3 Click OK Adding a Hyperlink in an HTML Message Hyperlinks directly connect a specific word phrase or image to a specific Web site In an open HTML message 1 Select the word phrase or image you want to use
351. larm tab Select if you want the Notify pop up dialog box to display Select if you want to play a sound If you select to play a sound click the folder to browse to and select the sound you want Notify to play Select if you want Notify to launch a program when notifying you 7 Select if you want Notify to send the alarm to your pager If you select to send the alarm to a pager you must specify the gateway service with options and the PIN For example skytel b4 12345 Click OK Setting How to Be Notified about Outgoing Message Status NO oO fF N Make sure Notify is running Right click in the Windows notification area then click Options Click the Return Status tab Deselect Use same settings for all types Click the Settings for drop down list then select the item type you want to make selections for Select how you want to be notified for different status changes of that item type Click OK If you are sending messages to non GroupWise systems remember that those systems must have status tracking capability in order to return the status of your outgoing message to your GroupWise system Setting How to Be Notified about Return Status Messages 1 Make sure Notify is running 2 Right click amp in the Windows notification area then click Options 244 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 8 5 3 Click the Return Status tab 4 Select the type of item that you want to set notification for or Select
352. lbox on your machine for document echoing to occur If you have chosen to use the same local mailbox for both your Remote Mailbox and Caching Mailbox your echoed documents are available in both Remote and Caching modes If you run Remote mode and Caching mode from separate local mailboxes you can echo documents to either your Remote Mailbox or your Caching Mailbox Documents are echoed whenever you close or check in a document in your Online Mailbox The document reference for the document is added to your Documents folder in your Remote Caching Mailbox and the document is copied to your Remote Library which is used for both Remote and Caching mode In Remote and Caching mode you can use Tools gt Manage Library Size to remove unneeded documents that take up extra disk space Document echoing does not occur when you close or check in documents in Remote or Caching mode Enabling Document Echoing If you want to echo documents to a Caching Mailbox it must be set up before you enable document echoing If you want to use a Remote Mailbox the document echoing process helps you create a basic Remote Mailbox if you don t have one already 1 In Online mode click Tools gt Options then double click Documents 2 Click the General tab Document Management 361 362 Documents Setup Ex Library Configuration Integrations General Document echoing Document echoing copies the documents you edit to your GroupWise Remo
353. lder or your Mailbox before you open the Mass Document Operations Wizard You can specify the name of a file on disk that contains a list of document IDs Document Management 343 15 15 3 Previewing the Results of a Mass Document Operation When you use Find in the Mass Document Operations Wizard to specify which documents you want to move copy delete or change you can click the Preview button on the last dialog box in the wizard to see a list of the documents that will be moved copied deleted or changed based on the criteria you specified in Find This makes it possible for you to review these results and verify that the criteria are accurate and select the correct documents If not you can return to the wizard and modify the Find criteria to expand or limit the documents included in the operation Notifying the Author of Changes After You Perform a Mass Document Operation If you make any changes to the author or sharing rights of a document the original author of the document receives a mail message that notifies him or her of the change Using Mass Document Operations in Remote Caching Modes IMPORTANT The Mass Document Operations Wizard is not available in Remote or Caching mode You can perform the same tasks on individual documents while you re in your Remote Caching Mailbox but not on groups of documents Acting as the Librarian The system administrator can give users Manage rights to a library When you have
354. le Engineer Group B Company E Email Address Office Phone aramirez Coporate net x11010 Add Email Address Home Phone Add Messenger ID Mobile Phone Fax Add Phone Number Frequent Contacts 4 Type anew name in the Display field for example Art Ramirez Contacts and Address Books 191 192 You can also click the Display drop down list to select Last First or First Last for example Ramirez Art or Art Ramirez 5 Click OK The next time you address a message Name Completion fills in this display name File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help i Send 3 Cancel GI Address A E fso MF Spell Check a aja Mail Send Options Janet DeSoto ce A Sir Subject Segoe UI jjo By Bz u Gl EEE S tn le li l BJ Eh La 4 E 4 Account Novell GroupWise Viewing All Correspondence with a Contact 1 Click a Contacts folder 2 Double click a contact 3 Click the History tab All items you have received from or sent to this contact display GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 6 4 3 e 8 Art Ramirez En File View Actions Help Close i Save Delete 2 Send Mail Y Send Contact QN E Busy Search Summary Contact Details Address Advanced Notes History Defaut Eint gt Contact History Find v Subject Name i E Wednesday
355. le blocks of time on a specific date or range of dates You can use Busy Search to check for a time when all the users and resources you want for an appointment are available When you perform a Busy Search for users who are in a different time zone that you GroupWise takes into consideration the difference in time zones For example if you are trying to schedule a meeting with a co worker whose time zone is seven hours later than your own that co worker s workday is blocked out in the Busy Search sometime after 10 00 a m your time When you schedule an appointment and include yourself as a participant GroupWise automatically accepts the appointment for you Scheduling an Appointment for Yourself on page 137 Scheduling an Appointment for Multiple People on page 138 Using Busy Search to Check Availability on page 139 Understanding All Day Events on page 141 Time Input on page 141 Specifying a Time Zone for an Appointment on page 142 Rescheduling an Appointment on page 143 Rescheduling Recurring Appointments on page 143 Canceling an Appointment on page 144 Canceling a Recurring Appointment on page 144 Modifying Recipients on page 144 136 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Scheduling an Appointment for Yourself If you are not available for meetings schedule a posted appointment for those times When another user includes you in an app
356. lem see Section 16 3 8 Combining Archived Items from Multiple Archives on page 379 Moving an Item to the Archive 1 If you have not previously done so specify the archive path in File Location in the Environment dialog box See Section 16 3 2 Specifying Where Archives Are Stored on page 376 2 In your Mailbox select the items you want to archive 3 Click Actions gt Move to Archive 376 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide When you archive an item you have sent you cannot track the status of that item 16 3 4 Archiving Items Automatically 16 3 5 16 3 6 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Environment then click the Cleanup tab Environment P Reply Fomat Editors Viewers Signature Appearance General Views File Location Cleanup Default Actions Mail and phone Manual delete and archive Auto delete after 30 S days Auto archive after Appointment task and reminder note Manual delete and archive Auto delete after mes 14 E days Auto archive after Empty trash Manual Automatic after 7 gt days ok Cancel A 3 Select Auto archive after for the item type you want 4 Specify the number of days after the item is delivered or completed that you want it to be archived 5 Click OK If your system administrator has specified that items are automatically archived on a regular basis you might not be able to change this option
357. lick Calendar 2 On the General page select On accept continue to display the item in the Mailbox 3 Click OK 152 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 4 4 2 4 4 3 Accepting or Declining Internet Items You can accept or decline appointments all day events and tasks that are sent from Internet enabled collaboration clients Some of these clients include Microsoft Exchange Lotus Notes and Macintosh iCal 1 Open the appointment task or reminder note 2 Click Accept or Decline on the toolbar or Click the down arrow to the right of the button to select an Accept level of availability or to select Decline with Options 3 Optional If you selected Decline with Options you can type a comment then click OK 4 Ifthe item is an Auto Date item click This Instance to accept or decline this single Auto Date item or click All Instances to accept or decline all instances of the Auto Date item By default a message is sent to the sender of the item indicating the action you took In addition you can right click the Internet item and select Import Calendar This creates a new calendar and imports the item to the new calendar Delegating Calendar Items Use Delegate to reassign a scheduled item to someone else The sender can determine who you delegated the item to by looking at the item s properties Delegating an Appointment Task or Reminder Note from the Main Window on page 153 Delegating an Appointment Ta
358. m click one of the available options 4 To free up disk space click Edit gt Empty Trash This permanently removes all deleted items from your Remote Mailbox The next time you connect to your master GroupWise system the changes in your Remote and Online Mailboxes automatically synchronize You can turn off this synchronization by changing the delete options in Remote Properties See Changing Remote Delete Options on page 276 Deleting Unneeded Documents from Your Remote Library Deleting files from your Remote Library Disk Space Management does not remove them from the Master Library It also doesn t remove the document references for the deleted documents The files are removed only from the computer where you have your Remote Mailbox freeing disk space for you 1 In Remote mode click Tools gt Manage Library Size 2 Click the documents you want to delete then click Delete 3 When you re done click Close If you delete an In Use document the status of the document in the Master Library is reset to Available the next time you connect to your Online Mailbox Document Reference Attachments and Remote Mode You might receive an item with a document reference attachment when you are running in Remote mode When you open the attachment the document opens your Remote Library even if the document in your Remote Library is an older version than the attachment If the document does not exist in your Remote Library you are prompte
359. m Filter Define fporate net x11010 Development Filter for at Least 3 References b Corporate net Marketing Filter for Groups 11055 Filter for Contacts l n porate net 11000 Development Filter for Resources morstenet 11017 Marketing Filter for Organizations PCorporatenet 11015 Sales Name Format porate net 11006 Marketing porate net System Book Links fporate net x11022 Development Refresh F5 porate net m r 4 To return to the non filtered address book view click View gt Filter Off In the Address Selector click a predefined filter from the drop down list to filter for contacts groups and resources The following icons identify contacts resources groups and organizations in address books amp Contacts Resources 83 Groups amp Organizations Editing a Distribution List in the GroupWise Address Book If your GroupWise administrator has granted you rights to modify a public distribution list in the GroupWise Address Book 1 In the Main Window click on the toolbar or Click on the toolbar in an item you are composing Select the GroupWise Address Book Double click the public distribution list that you have rights to edit Make changes as necessary oa Ff N Click Close then click Yes to save your changes Searching for Address Book Entries You can quickly find entries in an address book by using the Search List You can also specify search criteria by defining one o
360. m being delivered to the destination post office or transferred to the Internet Next to the Sent Items folder the icon indicates that there is at least one item that has been queued but the queue has not been uploaded o A sent item that has been opened by at least one person The icon displays until all recipients have 1 opened the mail phone message or reminder note 2 accepted the appointment or 3 completed the task fe Next to your Calendar folder the icon indicates that you have an appointment that day GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide D YP w S amp F iF fF tt F tf 4 KS ho l Description Next to an item you have sent the icon indicates that the item couldn t be delivered to the destination post office or it failed to transfer to the Internet Next to an appointment or task the icon indicates that at least one person has declined deleted the item Next to a mail message phone message or reminder note the icon indicates that at least one person has deleted the item without opening it One or more attachments are included with the item Draft item An item you have sent An item you have replied to An item you have forwarded An item you have delegated An item you have replied to and forwarded An item you have replied to and delegated An item you have forwarded and delegated An item you have replied to forwarded and delegated A posted item Signed item Encrypted item
361. mation about your Calendar Publishing Host see your system administrator The ability to publish your personal calendar can be enabled and disabled by your system administrator If your system administrator has disabled the ability to publish personal calendars this option is not displayed in the GroupWise client Section 4 8 1 Publishing a Personal Calendar on page 160 Section 4 8 2 Modifying a Published Calendar s Settings on page 160 Section 4 8 3 Unpublishing a Calendar on page 161 Publishing a Personal Calendar You cannot publish the main GroupWise calendar you can only publish a personal calendar If you want items to display in your published calendar as well as your main GroupWise calendar hold down the right mouse button while you drag an item to the published folder then click Link To Categories assigned with a published calendar are not displayed on the Web 1 In the Calendar Folder List right click the calendar you want to publish then click Publish 2 Select Publish this calendar Select the time period Select Entire calendar to send your entire calendar or Select Previous to send part of your calendar If you select Previous you must specify a range of days to send 4 Select Private Items to include private items 5 To send someone a link to your published calendar click Send Publish Link If you click Send Publish Link anew e mail message is opened with a link Select who you want
362. mber a Categories g Frequent Contacts El Modified 3 Inthe Full Name field specify the contact s full name 4 Inthe Display As field specify the name you want to use for the contact Information in the Display As field displays in the contact list 5 Optional Specify any other information you want to record about the contact Contact Use this page to specify the contact s name multiple e mail addresses multiple phone numbers and multiple instant messaging IDs Click the Display As drop down list to select how you want the name to display in Name Completion You can select Last First First Last or you can specify any display name you choose When you want to address an item to this contact type the display name in an address field To CC BC of the item If you fill in the Company field with a name for which you have created an organization the organization information is automatically retrieved into the appropriate fields of the new contact If you click Send Mail on the Contact page a new mail view is opened addressed to this contact If you click Instant Message your instant messaging product is opened and a conversation is initiated with this contact If the Instant Message button is dimmed no compatible instant messaging product is installed You can specify multiple phone numbers To select the primary phone number click next to the phone number you want to identify as the primary numbe
363. me of the person who last opened this version of a document Text in attachments that have been added to received items Text appearing in the Place field of an appointment Name appearing in the From field of a posted item The priority of an item high standard or low Items with a Reply Requested send option The size of an item including its attachments The start date of a task When a task is carried forward to the next day the start date becomes the new date Other items such as forms custom messages and C3PO programs Text appearing in the Subject box of an item The alphabetical priority of a task A B C and so on The numerical priority of a task 1 2 3 and so on The state assigned to an item in a message thread A person s name appearing in the To field of an item GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Field Criteria Entry Depending on the operator you can specify an integer or select a variable from the drop down list Depending on the operator you can specify an integer or select a variable from the drop down list Depending on the operator you can specify an integer or select a variable from the drop down list Specify a name Type the text to search for Type part or all of the Place field Specify the From field Select the priority from the drop down list Select the option from the drop down list Specify an
364. ment Properties Every document in GroupWise must have a set of attributes associated with it such as the author s name the creation date and the document type These attributes are called document properties The document property information is used for finding and categorizing documents Specifying a Default Value for a Document Properties Field on page 309 Understanding Document Types on page 310 308 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide You can use the Document tab in Properties to view version information for the specific version of a document view the document activity history and control sharing of the document with other users Figure 15 1 Documents Properties Dialog Box Document 3 Es Document Version Sharing Activity Log Personalize Library Support Library Document number 3 Subject Work Assignment Document type Document Author Janet DeSoto Creator Janet DeSoto Date created 9 4 2008 2 19 PM Official version 1 Current version 1 pem Available You can determine which fields display on the Document tab in Properties and customize their size and order by using the options in the Library Setup Properties dialog box To open this dialog box click Tools gt Options double click Documents then click Properties Specifying a Default Value for a Document Properties Field A default value is information author subject etc that is automatic
365. ments then click Next To modify the existing Share Lists for each document in the group click Add new users and rights to selected documents or To create a new Share List to replace the existing Share List for each document in the group click Replace share lists for selected documents In the Name field type the name of the user for whom you want to modify sharing rights then click Add User In the Share list click the name of the user for whom you want to modify sharing rights In the Rights for all versions group box click the rights you want to give the user to the selected group of documents If you want to specify sharing rights for specific versions click Version level security specify the rights for each version then click OK Click Next Click Preview to see a sample of the documents that will be modified based on the Find criteria you specified You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview Specify the directory where you want to save the log file You can click Generate a log file without performing the operation to see the outcome of the operation without actually modifying the documents Click Finish to modify the document sharing GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Changing Sharing Rights for Documents Listed in a File 1 Click Tools gt Mass Document Operations 2 Inthe Operation group box click Change sharing 3 Inthe Selection method group box clic
366. message 6 Click Send on the toolbar If you can t accept an appointment task or reminder note you can delegate the item instead of forwarding it Delegating places a Delegated status in the item s Properties window letting the sender know you have transferred responsibility for the item to another person Forwarding Multiple E Mails 1 In your Mailbox select the items you want to forward by pressing Ctrl click on each item 2 Click Actions gt Forward as Attachment 3 Add the names of the users to whom you want to forward the item 4 Optional Type a message 5 Click Send on the toolbar Managing Received E Mail Section 3 4 1 Personalizing Received E Mail on page 110 Section 3 4 2 Changing E Mail to Another Item Type on page 112 Section 3 4 3 Saving Received E Mail to Disk or a GroupWise Library on page 113 Section 3 4 4 Deleting E Mail on page 114 Section 3 4 5 Viewing the Discussion Thread of a E Mail on page 115 E Mail 109 3 4 1 Section 3 4 6 Viewing the Source of External Messages on page 115 Section 3 4 7 Archiving and Backing Up E Mail on page 115 Personalizing Received E Mail When you receive an e mail message you can click the Personalize tab to add personal information to the e mail You can change the subject add a note select a category and add associated contacts to the message Changing the Subject of an E Mail You Receiv
367. mproved with an updated look and feel more customizable user interface more attractive buttons and icons and many other changes The main improvements include Panels A panel is a customized view of information in GroupWise A panel can be created to display a multitude of information from unread items to a summary calendar A predefined list of panels has been created but you can also create your own custom panels You can now create three or more panels and you can also create multiple Web panels for displaying Internet pages in GroupWise Simple Folder List The Simple Folder List has been changed to include the ability to create a Favorites list RSS Feeds list Contacts list Calendar list NNTP list and Documents list See Section 1 5 Exploring the Folder List on page 21 Time Zone Synchronization with Your Workstation When you change the time zone on your workstation GroupWise automatically switches its time to match the workstation without restarting GroupWise Discussion Thread Tab on an Item View When you view an item you can click the Discussion Thread tab to display a list of items that were sent back and forth on the same thread See Discussion Threads on page 53 Display Settings Several improvements have been made to the display settings in GroupWise When you change the display settings from the main menu the settings are preserved in your next session In addition you can now save your display set
368. must manually return the document to the library You can also specify how many seconds you want GroupWise to wait for non integrated applications to open Turning Off the Warning Message for Non Integrated Applications On or Off on page 366 Specifying How Long GroupWise Waits for a Non Integrated Application to Open on page 366 Turning Off the Warning Message for Non Integrated Applications On or Off GroupWise displays the warning message when it loses contact with the application The message reminds you to manually return the document to the library 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Documents 2 Click the Integrations tab click Advanced then click the Non Integrated tab 3 To turn on the warning message make sure the Display message check box is checked or To turn off the warning message deselect the Display message check box Specifying How Long GroupWise Waits for a Non Integrated Application to Open GroupWise waits the number of seconds you specify for the non integrated application to open If GroupWise doesn t detect the application opening GroupWise times out and loses contact with the document which means GroupWise can t return it to the library If this happens you must manually return the document If you have an application that loads very slowly you can increase the wait interval to prevent GroupWise from timing out before the application opens 1 Click Tools gt Options then double
369. n Check In Sa Check in method Renin Check in and move document awe Close Check in as Checked out version Remove Documents to be checked in List of documents Show original list Show all checked out documents in selected library Select library Support Library Default Z Checked out location and filename Browse 3 Click the Check in method drop down list then click Check in and copy document 4 Click the Check in as drop down list then click a version 5 Inthe Checked out location and filename field specify the path and filename of the document you are checking in 6 Click Check In 334 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 10 2 15 10 3 15 10 4 15 11 Checking In an Unchanged Document 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox 2 Click Actions gt Check In 3 Click the Check in method drop down list then click Check in only 4 Click Check In GroupWise checks in the document without saving changes made while the document was checked out Checking In a Document and Deleting It from the Check Out Location Click the document reference in your Mailbox for the document you want to check in Click Actions gt Check In Click the Check in method drop down list then click Check in and move document Click the Check in as drop down list then click a version a fF N In the Checked out location and filename field specif
370. n 7 Click Save For a rule to function it must be enabled See Enabling or Disabling a Rule on page 254 9 4 2 Creating a Vacation Rule or Auto Reply 252 When you create and activate a vacation rule GroupWise blocks out your calendar with All Day Events for the dates that you specify showing you with Out of Office status 1 Click Tools gt Vacation Rule 2 Select Activate my vacation rule For your vacation rule to truly be active you must select this option and specify a date range Because the vacation rule is active only within the date range that you specify leaving this option always selected does not mean that your vacation rule is always active Your vacation rule expires after the last day in the date range that you specify GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 4 5 6 7 If you deselect this option before the rule has expired the All Day Events are deleted from your calendar Type a subject for the automatic reply Subjects appear in parentheses after the original message subject in the reply For example if the subject was Out of Office reply and the message Budget monitoring was sent to you the Auto Reply feature returns the subject Re Budget monitoring Out of Office reply Type the message that you want to appear in the automatic reply Select whether you want to reply to e mails from outside your internal network Specify the dates when the rule will go into effect and when it
371. n 3 3 4 Forwarding E Mail on page 109 Section 3 4 3 Saving Received E Mail to Disk or a GroupWise Library on page 113 Section 4 2 1 Viewing Your Calendar on page 124 Section 4 3 2 Scheduling Appointments on page 136 Section 16 9 GroupWise Support Information on page 387 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Updates Added instructions on replying to a sent e mail Added instructions for forwarding multiple e mails Added additional information on ways to save e mails by dragging and dropping Added information about additional calendar views that are available with GroupWise 8 Included instructions for using the Time Input window Added information on where you can find GroupWise support information
372. n Toolbar on page 36 Understanding Item Lists The most common way to display information is in an Item List For example the Item List for your Mailbox is the list of messages you have received The Item List header displays the name of the folder whose contents are being listed It also provides the Find field for quickly finding items in the folder Mailbox Find v From Subject Date ap Janet DeSoto Office Party 09 03 08 2 12 PM G Marie Lamaroux Working from Home 09 04 08 Ai Benji Gensomino Computer Upgrades 09 04 08 12 16 PM Aci Richard Steadman New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 19 PM Q Benji Gensomino Implementation 09 04 08 12 20 PM en Ishmael Yacoub Marketing Briefing Notes 09 04 08 12 21 PM David Jones Lunch 09 04 08 12 30 PM Dp Janet DeSoto Re New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 40 PM de Richard Steadman Re New Program Instructions 09 04 08 12 42 PM Ar Janet DeSoto i Item lists are organized into columns which help you display the items in the order most useful for you You can drag a column to a new position in the column header You can resize a column by dragging the edge of the column heading You can sort by columns and add new columns For complete instructions on customizing Item Lists see Section 2 3 4 Managing Item Lists in Folders on page 50 and Section 2 3 5 Customizing Folder Display Settings on page 52 The right click menus provide different options depending on which c
373. n each include up to 1000 entries If more than 1000 entries are added the least used entries are discarded 4 If the Junk List or Block List is not enabled select Enable Junk List or Enable Block List At any time you can click Tools gt Junk Mail Handling click Junk List or Block List then click New to add an Internet domain to the Junk List or Block List 3 6 4 Junking E Mail from Users Not In a Personal Address Book 1 Click Tools gt Junk Mail Handling 2 Select Enable Junk Mail using personal address books Junk Mail Handling 2 CS Settings Junk List Block List Trust List Junk Mail Handling provides the ability to deal with unwanted e mail based on the address of the sender There are several options available Junk Mail You can specify that e mail be placed in the Junk Mail folder If the Junk Mail folder does not exist it will be created when any of these options are enabled J Enable Junk List Mail from addresses in the Junk List will be placed in the Junk Mail folder W Enable Junk Mail using personal address books Mail from addresses not in a personal address book including Frequent Contacts will be placed in the Junk Mail folder Enable Junk Calendaring using personal address books Appointments and tasks from addresses not in a personal address book including Frequent Contacts will be placed in the Junk Mail folder 7 Automatically delete items from the Junk Mail Folder Items are moved
374. n item in the Mailbox is red when the priority is high white when the priority is standard and gray when the priority is low 3 Return to the item you are composing or Click OK then click Close to save the setting for all items Concealing the Subject of E Mail You Send For sensitive information you can conceal the subject line The subject is visible only when the recipient opens the item 1 To conceal the subject for one item open an item view click Send Options gt Security or To conceal the subject for all items you send click Tools gt Options gt Send gt Security 2 Select Conceal subject 3 Return to the item you are composing or Click OK then click Close to save the setting for all items Delaying Delivery of an Item When you delay delivery of an item the item is delivered on the day and time that you specify You can modify or retract the item before it is delivered as described in Section 3 2 Managing Sent E Mail on page 95 1 To delay the delivery of one item open an item view then click Send Options gt General or To delay delivery of all items you send click Tools gt Options gt Send gt Send Options 2 Click Delay delivery 3 In the text box specify how many days later you want the item delivered or Select a date and time under Until 4 Return to the item you are composing or Click OK then click Close to save the setting for all items GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide
375. n list then click your name TIP You can work with several Mailboxes open at one time Click Window click New Main Window then switch to the Mailbox you want You can tell the Mailboxes apart by looking for the Mailbox owner s name which appears as the root folder label for each Mailbox Removing a user from your Proxy List does not remove your rights to act as proxy for that user The user whose Mailbox you access must change your rights in his or her Access List Mailbox Calendar Access for Proxy Users 259 260 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 11 1 11 1 1 Remote and Caching Modes You can store a copy of your mailbox including your messages and other information on your local drive in two different ways Caching mode saves network traffic because it doesn t require continuous access to the network while Remote mode allows you to specify the type of connection you have and also allows you to restrict how much information is retrieved Section 11 1 Using Caching Mode on page 261 Section 11 2 Using Remote Mode on page 266 To see how to back up your mailbox while in Remote or Caching mode see Section 16 6 Backing Up E Mail on page 381 Using Caching Mode Caching mode stores a copy of your network mailbox including your messages and other information on your local drive This allows you to use GroupWise whether or not your network or Post Office Agent is available Because you are no
376. n page 255 Section 9 8 Deleting a Rule on page 255 Understanding Rules When you create a rule you must do the following Name the rule Select an event The event is the trigger that starts the rule Select the types of items that will be affected by the rule Add an action The action is what you want the rule to do when it is triggered Save the rule Make sure the rule is enabled You can specify many more options to limit which items a rule affects For example you can apply a rule to only accepted appointments to items with a certain word in the Subject box or to items with a high priority Use Define Conditions to limit your rules further See Limiting Items Affected by a Rule on page 254 Actions a Rule Can Perform The following table shows the actions you can perform by setting up rules Action Result Send Mail Sends a prepared mail message to the recipients you specify when the rule conditions are met For example if you need to inform your boss each time you receive a monthly report from another group of people you can have a rule send a message as soon as you receive the report Rules 249 250 Action Forward Forward as Attachment Delegate Reply Accept Category Delete Decline Empty Item Move to Folder Link to Folder Mark as Private Mark as Read Archive Mark as Unread Result Forwards items to one or more users when the rule conditions
377. n the Item List When you sort the Item List by category items are sorted by their primary category By default the first category you assign is the primary category 4 To set the primary category for this item select a category then click Primary 5 Click OK Removing a Category from an Item 1 Right click the item 2 Click Categories gt More to display the Edit Categories dialog box 3 Deselect the category to remove then click OK The category is removed from the item Getting Organized 43 2 2 3 Working with Categories Adding a New Category on page 44 Renaming a Category on page 44 Finding Items by Category in a Folder on page 44 Sorting Items by Category on page 45 Deleting a Category on page 45 Adding a New Category 1 Click Actions gt Categories gt More to display the Edit Categories dialog box Edit Categories i EE pe Cancel Personal j E Urgent Primary Rename Delete Text E Color Sample PEENES Follow up Background Oly New Category lt Type here to add a new category gt dd 2 Type the category name in the New Category field at the bottom of the Edit Categories dialog box 3 Click Add The Add button becomes active when you begin typing a category name 4 To assign a color to a category select the category name in the list then select the text and background colors 5 Click OK to save the new category TIP You
378. n the list of users select one of them then mouse over the selected user Quick Info is enabled by default To disable Quick Info 1 In the Main Window click S on the toolbar 2 Click View gt Disable Quick Info Viewing Contacts Groups Organizations or Resources in an Address Book Use the predefined filters in the Entry Filter to display only groups users organizations or resources in an address book By default address books display all entries Although all groups organizations and resources are marked by icons finding specific entries in large address books can prove difficult A predefined filter displays only the type of entry you are looking for There is one predefined filter that applies only to the Frequent Contacts address book Filter for at Least X References You can use it to filter all entries with at least the number of references you specify To view groups organizations or resources in an address book 1 In the Main Window click on the toolbar 2 Click an address book 3 Click View then click the filter you want to sort by Contacts and Address Books 211 6 5 14 6 5 15 A Address Book File Edit View Help New Details ER Disable Quick Info fs CI Define Custom Filter F Nov fs 3 Ex Now Define Filter for References Inside Name zj 3 5 Fan Office Phone Department 3 0 Frel Filter Off h Comorate 11022 Marketing a Hg No Custo
379. n the operator you can specify a time period that the document falls within or specify an exact date Field Name Delivered Document Created Date Document Creator Document Number Document Type Due End Date Filename Extension From Item Source Item Status Item Type Library Message My Subject Number Accepted Number Completed This Field Refers to The date and time that the item appeared in the recipients Mailboxes The date the document was created The name of the person who created the document The number of a document The type of a document in the library such as a form expense report or memo The date that a task is due or the end date and time of an appointment The filename extension of a document in a library The name of a person in the From field of an item Whether the item was received sent posted or a draft Whether an item has been accepted completed opened read marked private or the subject is concealed Types of items such as mail messages appointments and so on The library in which documents are stored Text appearing in the Message field of an item Text appearing in the My Subject field of the Personalize tab The number of recipients that have accepted an item you sent The number of recipients that have completed an item you sent Field Criteria Entry Depending on the operator you can specify a time period tha
380. n which you run GroupWise the options your system administrator has set and other products you have installed 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Security then make sure the Password tab is selected 3 Select No password required with eDirectory or Type your password type a new password type the new password again then select Remember Password or Use single sign on 4 Click OK then click Close You can also select Remember my password or Use single sign on in the Startup dialog box at login Using Mailbox Passwords in Caching Mode To use GroupWise in Caching mode you must assign a password to your Online Mailbox If you assign a password when you re in Caching mode the password is synchronized back to GroupWise the next time you connect to your Online Mailbox When the password synchronized it changes your Online Mailbox and your Remote Mailbox password For more information about Caching Mode see Section 11 1 Using Caching Mode on page 261 If your system administrator has turned on LDAP authentication and has disabled changing your LDAP password in GroupWise you might need to use a different application to change your password Contact your system administrator for more information 1 Click Accounts gt Account Options then select your GroupWise account 2 Click Properties then click Advanced 3 Change the password in the Online mailbox password field 4 Click OK 374 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Gu
381. nal subject and use the My Subject field to search for the personalized subject 110 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide When you create a rule that looks for a specific word in the Subject field the rule only looks at the original subject Adding a Note to an E Mail You Receive When you add a note to an e mail you receive the note is visible to you and anyone who proxies for you You can only view the note only by using the Personalize tab for the e mail 1 Open an item from your Mailbox or Calendar 2 Click the Personalize tab 3 Inthe My Notes field type your note The note is automatically saved when you leave the Personalize tab Attaching a File to an Item You Receive You can add a personal attachment to items that you have received The attachment is only visible to you and is not sent when replying to or forwarding an item To attach a personal file to an item 1 Right click in the attachment window then click Attach Personal File 2 Browse to and select the file or files you want to attach Attach File Lookin CET GG lt Name Size Type Date modified ay Recent Places h aie a Desktop A Computer W A Network com lt Lu Computer A Network Fie name 7 Files of type Al Fies xl Cance Document Reference To remove an attached file right click the attachment then click Delete 3 Click OK You can also drag and drop an attachment to the attachment window
382. nality directly from the GroupWise Windows client Section 18 1 Accessing Vibe through the Novell Vibe OnPrem Folder or the Novell Teaming Folder on page 393 Section 18 2 Accessing Vibe from a GroupWise Web Panel on page 394 Section 18 3 Searching GroupWise and Vibe Simultaneously on page 394 Section 18 4 Dragging and Dropping GroupWise Items into Vibe Folders on page 394 Section 18 5 Viewing Vibe Feeds in GroupWise on page 395 Section 18 6 Understanding Task and Calendar Synchronization between Vibe and GroupWise on page 396 See the Novell Vibe OnPrem 3 1 User Guide http www novell com documentation vibe_onprem31 vibeprem31_user data bookinfo html for complete usage instructions Feet Vibe through the Novell Vibe OnPrem Folder or the Novell Teaming Folder After GroupWise Vibe integration as been set up as described in Enabling GroupWise Vibe Integration for GroupWise Windows Client Users in the GroupWise 8 Interoperability Guide you can easily access the Vibe site from the GroupWise client by using the following integration points The GroupWise Folder List includes a Novell Vibe OnPrem folder or a Novell Teaming folder at the bottom Inthe Vibe or Teaming folder you have a folder that accesses your personal Vibe workspace and a folder named My Teams that lists all the teams that you belong to Novell Vibe OnPrem 393 18 2 18 3 18 4 From any
383. nce with S MIME version 2 Check certificate for compliance with S MIME version 3 Canca Use recipient s preferred encryption algorithm if available GroupWise attempts to use the recipient s preferred encryption algorithm if it is available Search for Recipient encryption certificates in the default LDAP directory defined in LDAP Address Book GroupWise uses the defined LDAP Address Book to attempt to find encryption certificates for the recipient Default encryption algorithm In the Encrypted Item box the encryption algorithm drop down lists are scrollable and include all encryption algorithms that are supported by the version of the Web browser installed on the workstation where you are running the GroupWise client The following list is a sample 3DES 168 bits DES 56 bits RC2 128 bits RC2 40 bits RC2 56 bits RC2 64 bits RC4 128 bits Broadcast my preferred encryption algorithm in signed item as When you send an encrypted item you can specify your preferred encryption algorithm to use Send the message portion in clear text format clear signing Sends the message in clear text otherwise it is sent as a PKCS7 encoded message Include my Certificate Authority s certificates Your Certificate Authority s certificate is included in the message you send Check incoming outgoing security item for revoked certificates Checks the incoming and outgoing security item against the C
384. ncing conferencing_admin_guide data bookinfo html and in Using GroupWise with Conferencing in the GroupWise 8 Interoperability Guide Conferencing users can find usage instructions in the Novell Conferencing User Guide http www novell com documentation novell_conferencing conferencing _user_guide data bookinfo html Section 19 1 Scheduling a Conferencing Meeting within GroupWise on page 397 Section 19 2 Starting a Conferencing Meeting within GroupWise on page 400 Section 19 3 Joining a Conferencing Meeting within GroupWise on page 400 Section 19 4 Receiving Conferencing Calendar Items within GroupWise on page 400 Scheduling a Conferencing Meeting within GroupWise For convenience you can use GroupWise to schedule Conferencing meetings This enables you to leverage GroupWise features such as Busy Search so you know when users are available to attend a meeting Also this enables Conferencing appointments to display in your GroupWise calendar When you schedule a Conferencing meeting within GroupWise GroupWise automatically includes the URL to your Conferencing meeting in your GroupWise appointment 1 Click New Appt on the toolbar 2 Click the Conference tab 3 Sign in to Conferencing using your Conferencing username and password 4 Select This appointment is a conference Conferencing 397 398 Appointment To Anita Olivos Janet DeSoto File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help
385. nd requests and other important messages If a Caching request hasn t been processed yet you can delete it by clicking the request then clicking Delete Only requests that haven t been sent to the GroupWise system and have the Waiting to be Sent status can be deleted If you have already sent a request to the GroupWise system you cannot cancel the request Displaying Connection Status By default the Connection Status window is not displayed in Caching mode but you can display it by clicking Account gt Show Status Window Changing the Download Interval Time for Your Caching Mailbox You can specify how often GroupWise refreshes the items in your GroupWise Caching mailbox 1 Click Accounts gt Account Options 2 Click General Options 3 Inthe Send Retrieve All Marked Accounts every x minutes field specify the number of minutes to refresh the accounts 4 Click OK Using Remote Mode Remote mode is familiar to GroupWise users who use Hit the Road Similar to Caching mode a copy of your network mailbox or the portion of the mailbox you specify is stored on your local drive You can retrieve and send messages on a periodic basis with the type of connection you specify modem network or TCP IP If you do not want a complete copy of your network mailbox you can restrict what is retrieved such as only new messages or only message subject lines Section 11 2 1 Preparing to Use Remote Mode on page 267 Section 11 2 2
386. nderstanding All Day Events on page 141 4 Specify a start time and duration Duration can be in minutes hours or days 5 Specify how you want the appointment to appear with the Show As drop down menu Appointments can appear as Busy Free Out of the Office or Tentative 6 Optional Type a message You can specify many options such as making this appointment a high priority and more by clicking the Options tab Calendar 137 138 7 Optional Specify a Show Appointment As type by clicking Actions gt Show Appointment As then clicking a type 8 Click Post on the toolbar Scheduling an Appointment for Multiple People 1 Click E New appt gt on the toolbar 2 Inthe To field type a username then press Enter Repeat for additional users Include any resource IDs such as conference rooms in the To field If necessary type usernames in the CC and BC fields or To select usernames or resources from a list click Address on the toolbar double click each user then click OK Your name is automatically added to the To field of the appointment When you send the appointment it is automatically added to your calendar If you do not want to be included in the message delete your name from the To field 3 To change the From name to another account or proxy click From then click a name 4 Type the place description in the Place field 5 Specify the start date or Click to specify a date or auto date fo
387. ndow on page 19 Section 1 4 2 Understanding the Main Menu on page 19 Section 1 4 3 Understanding the Nav Bar on page 20 Section 1 4 4 Understanding the Main Toolbar on page 20 Section 1 4 5 Understanding Item Lists on page 21 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 1 4 1 1 4 2 Understanding the Main GroupWise Window Your main work area in GroupWise is called the Main Window From the Main Window of GroupWise you can read your messages schedule appointments view your Calendar manage contacts change the mode of GroupWise you re running in open folders open documents and much more For an interactive tutorial about the Home View click Help gt Training and Tutorials Figure 1 1 The Main Window Nav Bar Toolbar Folder list Panels G Favorites Calendar Task a Mailbox 4 p M Tasklist Fro vi 8 2009 Marketing Briefing Notes 3 From Ishmael Yacoub 9 4 2008 12 21 y Janet DeSoto Home 6 9 10 Budget Survey E Cabinet 3 From Benji Gensomino 7 8 2009 3 F Calendar 202 3 Self Review MR Billing 3 From Janet DeSoto 7 8 2009 MB marketing Project Planning Conf RGGHIS B Documents Frequent Contacts Janet DeSoto Mailbox 4 Sent Items M Tasklist P Trash 24 25 26 27 i Project Review Conf Room 1 E Thursday September 04 2008 Work In Progress 3 Re New Program Instructio From Richard Steadman 9
388. ne 4 Click OK GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 2 9 4 2 9 0 Setting the Interval for Refreshing GroupWise When you refresh GroupWise GroupWise checks for new e mail and refreshes the screen to show new or changed information By default GroupWise refreshes every minute However you can change the refresh interval 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt General 3 Under Refresh Interval specify the number of minutes and seconds you want to pass before a refresh then click OK Customizing Date and Time Formats GroupWise offers several date and time formats that determine the way dates and times display throughout the application For example you might prefer dates to appear with the day first followed by the month and then the year such as 24 August 2010 The time and date formats in GroupWise are highly customizable You can specify the order of elements the type of separators between elements whether dates are spelled out or represented by numbers and several other options Setting Default Date and Time Formats on page 65 Setting the General GroupWise Format on page 65 Setting Specific GroupWise Formats on page 66 Setting Default Date and Time Formats There are three configurable date and time settings Time Use the Time setting to determine how times display Short Date Format Use the Short date setting to specify how the date appears in its short format
389. ne click the current time zone then click OK 4 Click Time Zone click the Date amp Time tab change your computer s clock to match the new time zone then click OK For more information about using Date Time Properties see your Windows documentation Sending and Retrieving Items At Regular Intervals 1 In Remote mode click Tools gt Options then double click Accounts Remote 2 Make sure the remote account is marked with a check mark 3 Click the General Options 4 Select Send Retrieve All Marked Accounts every __ minutes then specify the number of minutes 5 Click OK For this option to work your computer must stay connected to the network or phone line depending on the connection you re using To quickly turn this option on and off click Accounts gt Auto Send Retrieve It is active when a check mark is displayed Specifying User and System Information for Your Remote Mailbox 1 In Remote mode click Tools gt Options double click Accounts Remote then click General Options 2 Inthe Display name field type your first and last name This name appears in the From field of an item you send someone The name is also used as your user folder name Click OK Click the remote account click Properties then click the Server tab Type your GroupWise user ID Type the domain name of your Online Mailbox Type the post office name of your Online Mailbox ON OO oO FF WO To change the password for your Online Mail
390. nent of GroupWise WebAccess GroupWise WebAccess provides users with GroupWise functionality in their Web browsers Check with your system administrator to see if WebAccess and WebPublisher are available before attempting to publish documents Section 15 6 1 Composing a Document on page 324 Section 15 6 2 Publishing a Document on page 324 Section 15 6 3 Locating and Viewing a Published Document on page 326 Composing a Document You can compose a document in over 250 document formats and WebPublisher converts it into HTML When you make changes to the document the changes are automatically reflected in the published document GroupWise WebPublisher supports publishing documents in a variety of languages but each document should contain only one language character set For example you could publish one document in Chinese and another in Hebrew but you should not attempt to publish a document that contains both Chinese characters and Hebrew letters Publishing a Document In order to publish a document you must be the author of the document or the creator of the document must give you rights to modify the document Publishing a Document to the Web on page 325 Unpublishing a Document from the Web on page 326 Your system administrator can create one or more GroupWise WebPublisher user accounts and grant them rights to specific libraries These user accounts represent WebPublisher and do not ha
391. ner can ask the proxy user to mark items as Read Later after the proxy user has viewed a message There is no way for a mailbox owner to know if a proxy user has opened a message To grant another user proxy rights to your mailbox 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Security then click the Proxy Access tab 3 To add a user to the list type the name in the Name field then when the full name appears click Add User 4 Click a user in the Access List Mailbox Calendar Access for Proxy Users 257 10 2 Security Options Password Notify Proxy Access Send Options Name a Add U B Remove User Access list Name Address lt All User Access gt Greg Famsworth gfamsworth Marketi Marie Lamaroux mlamaroux Marketin Access rights for Greg Famsworth Mail phone V Read Write Appointments v Read Write Remindernotes Read E Write Tasks F Read Write Subscribe to my alarms Subscribe to my notifications Modify options rules folders Read items marked private Cancel 5 Select the rights you want to give to the user Read Read items you receive Write Create and send items in your name including applying your signature if you have one defined Assign categories to items change the subject of items perform tasklist options on items and delete items Subscribe to my alarms Receive the same alarms you receive Receiving alarms is supported only if the pro
392. ng an Item from a POP3 or IMAP4 Account on page 291 12 41 Using POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts in Online Mode If the Accounts menu is not available in your Online Mailbox your system administrator has specified that POP3 and IMAP4 accounts cannot be used in Online mode 288 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 12 4 2 Using POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts in Remote and Caching Modes While you are using Remote mode you can check Internet mail accounts without connecting to GroupWise The Accounts menu is always available in Remote mode If you are using GroupWise in either Remote mode or Caching mode you have the option of not uploading a POP3 or IMAP4 account to your Online Mailbox To make sure you don t upload click Accounts gt Account Options select an account click Properties then deselect Upload this account to the GroupWise Online Mailbox 12 43 Changing the Length of Time for POP3 and IMAP4 Server Timeouts Click Accounts gt Account Options Click the account name Click Properties Click the Advanced tab Type the number of minutes in the Minutes to wait for server to respond field Click OK then click Close oa Aa OON 12 4 4 Using SSL to Connect to a POP3 or IMAP4 Server You can connect to your POP3 or IMAP4 mail server by using SSL which is an Internet security protocol that helps maintain the confidentiality of your messages In order for you to use this option your mail server must support SSL 1 Click Ac
393. nished E Mail on page 91 Junk Mail Folder All e mail items from addresses and Internet domains that are junked through Junk Mail Handling are placed in the Junk Mail folder jg This folder is not created in the folder list unless a Junk Mail option is enabled While Junk Mail options are enabled this folder cannot be deleted However the folder can be renamed or moved to a different location in the folder list If all Junk Mail options are disabled the folder can be deleted The folder can also be deleted if the Junk Mail Handling feature is disabled by the system administrator For more information about Junk Mail Handling see Handling Unwanted E Mail Spam on page 116 Trash Folder All deleted mail and phone messages appointments tasks documents and reminder notes are stored in the Trash folder 3 Items in the Trash can be viewed opened or returned to your Mailbox before the Trash is emptied Emptying the Trash removes items in the Trash from the system You can empty your entire Trash or empty only selected items Items in the Trash are automatically emptied according to the number of days entered in the Cleanup tab in Environment Options or you can empty the Trash manually The system administrator can specify that your Trash is emptied automatically on a regular basis For more information see Section 16 8 Managing Trash on page 385 Shared Folders A shared folder sg is like any other folder in yo
394. nistrator to find out the location of the GroupWise client Setup program setup exe 2 Make sure you are logged in as yourself on your computer 3 Click Start gt Run browse to the file location select setup exe then click OK 4 Follow the instructions in the Setup Wizard 5 Continue with Starting GroupWise Starting GroupWise When you start GroupWise you might be prompted to type information such as your password the TCP IP address of your post office agent and so forth This Startup dialog box changes depending on the information GroupWise needs to be able to open your Mailbox and the GroupWise mode that you log in to Your system administrator might restrict the GroupWise modes you can log in to Getting Started 17 18 1 3 1 4 On your own workstation 1 Start GroupWise by double clicking e on your desktop to display the GroupWise Main Window If you have not specified a password for your Mailbox and GroupWise needs no additional information you bypass the Startup dialog box and GroupWise opens To force the GroupWise Startup dialog box to display right click the GroupWise icon on the desktop click Properties click the Shortcut tab in the Target field after the GroupWise executable type a space type u then click OK For information about other startup options see Appendix C Startup Options on page 409 2 If you are prompted for a password type the password in the Password field 3 Click
395. ns 2 Inthe Operation group box click Change sharing Mass Document Operations Ex Select the operation you want to perform The operation will affect all versions of a document Operation Change properties Change sharing Move Copy Delete Selection method Use Find Advanced Find to select documents Use documents listed in a file D Back _Net gt Canca 3 In the Selection method group box click Use Find by Example to select documents then click Next 352 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Item type Document Library Support Library Default mi Document text Document number Subject Document type Author Creator P Date created i Official version Current version sS Find only official document versions 4 Inthe Library drop down list click the library you want to search 5 Ineach field specify the information you want to look for 6 Click Next Add new users and rights to selected documents Replace share lists for selected documents Name Add User Remove User Share list Name Security Rights for all versions View Edit Delete Share Modify security Version Level Security 7 Click Add new users and rights to selected documents to modify the existing Share lists for each document in the group or Click Replace share lists for selected documents to c
396. ns signature and so forth in Remote Properties For information about changing your connections see Configuring Your Remote Connections on page 269 Specifying Time Zone Settings on page 275 Sending and Retrieving Items At Regular Intervals on page 275 Specifying User and System Information for Your Remote Mailbox on page 275 Changing Remote Delete Options on page 276 Changing Your Signature on page 276 274 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Specifying Time Zone Settings The items in your Calendar are scheduled according to the time zone settings in the Windows Date Time Properties You can access this dialog box in Remote Properties on the Server tab If you use GroupWise in another time zone you can change to that new time zone so that your scheduled items reflect the time zone difference Typically if you re leaving your office for several days you will use your Calendar information to attend and schedule appointments Therefore you need to use the local time zone However if you re leaving your office for a short time for example a day you will probably keep the same time zone as your GroupWise system If you change time zone settings be sure to change your computer s clock to match the new time zone 1 In Remote mode click Tools gt Options then double click Accounts Remote 2 Click the remote account click Properties then click the Server tab 3 Click Time Zo
397. nt s proxies can open the item without rights If you mark an item Private when you receive it it cannot be read by your unauthorized proxies but it can be read by the sender s proxies Appointments marked Private display in Busy Search according to the status you selected when you accepted the appointment 1 Inan open item click Actions gt Mark Private or In your Calendar click an item in the Appointments Reminder Notes or Task List then click Actions gt Mark Private It is also possible to set up a rule to automatically mark an item as Private when it is moved into a certain folder or calendars For example if you want to keep all items in a sub calendar private you can assign a rule to mark all items in that calendar as Private For more information on creating a rule see Creating a Rule on page 251 Becoming a Proxy User in Another User s Mailbox 1 Inthe Main Window or Calendar click File gt Proxy or Click the Mode Selector then click Proxy 2 To add a user type the name in the Name field then click OK The user s Mailbox is opened The name of the person for whom you are acting as proxy is displayed at the top of the Folder List If the user has not yet given you proxy rights in his or her Access List the name is added to the Proxy List but the user s Mailbox is not opened 3 To remove a user click the name then click Remove 4 To return to your own Mailbox click the folder list header drop dow
398. nt reminder note or task at any time Items that have been sent through the Internet to other e mail systems cannot be retracted 1 Click the Sent Items folder in the Nav Bar 2 Right click the item you want to retract then click Delete If you click Delete and Empty items are deleted and purged and they cannot be recovered 3 Select the appropriate option My Caching and Online Mailbox Deletes the item from your caching and online mailbox My Caching Mailbox Deletes the item from your caching mailbox Recipient s Mailbox Deletes the item from the mailbox of all recipients but not from your mailbox All Mailboxes Deletes the item from your mailbox and the mailbox of all recipients 4 If you have selected to retract this item from other recipients mailboxes you can type a comment to the recipients explaining why the item was retracted 5 Click OK To see which recipients have opened your message right click the item then click Properties E mail cannot be retracted if it has already been opened Resending E Mail Use Resend to send an item a second time perhaps with corrections Click the Sent Items folder in the Nav Bar Right click the item you want to resend then click Resend If the item was an auto date item click This Instance or All Instances Make any changes to the item if necessary then click Send on the toolbar a BB WO N Click Yes to retract the original item or Click No to leave the origin
399. nt to process the outstanding requests To see what requests still need to be processed click Requests Sending and Retrieving Items in Remote Mode Use Send Retrieve to synchronize your Online and Remote Mailboxes When you connect to your GroupWise system items you sent from your Remote Mailbox are delivered to the recipients Remote also sends a request to your Online Mailbox to retrieve your items such as mail Your GroupWise system processes the request then sends your items to your Remote Mailbox restricting the items according to the limits you set in the Send Retrieve dialog box In addition to items you can retrieve rules documents and address books Connecting to GroupWise While Sending or Retrieving Messages on page 278 Downloading Items Rules Addresses and Documents to Your Remote Mailbox on page 278 Sending Items in Remote Mode on page 279 Viewing Pending Requests on page 279 Retrieving Items That Were Not Completely Downloaded on page 279 Using Busy Search in Remote Mode on page 280 Filtering the GroupWise Address Book for Your Remote Mailbox on page 281 Deleting Items from Your Remote Mailbox on page 282 Remote and Caching Modes 277 278 Connecting to GroupWise While Sending or Retrieving Messages If you try to send or retrieve messages in Remote mode when you do not have a connection to GroupWise a dialog box opens so you can select whether to
400. nt to set up your Remote Mailbox such as your home computer then run setup exe from the diskette Go to Step 10 7 Type the path for your Remote Mailbox then click Next 8 Select the phone numbers you use to connect to your Online Mailbox then click Next 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Select the items you want to copy to your Remote Mailbox then click Finish Exit GroupWise Right click the Windows desktop then click New gt Shortcut Type c Program Files Novell GroupWise grpwise exe pr path_to_remote_mailbox The path is the path you typed in Step 7 Click Next Type a name for the shortcut such as Remote Click Finish After setting up your Remote Mailbox you can begin sending and retrieving items and address book information from your Online Mailbox GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Setting Up Multiple Remote Mailboxes on a Shared Computer These steps should be completed by each user who is setting up a Remote Mailbox on the shared computer 1 Run GroupWise in Online mode then click Tools gt Hit the Road 2 If prompted enter your password 3 To create a Remote Mailbox setup diskette click Another Machine 4 Follow the steps in the Hit the Road Wizard inserting a blank diskette in the last step to save the setup files ol Log in to Windows on the shared computer using a unique username 6 Insert the setup diskette into the shared computer then run setup exe from the diskette Make sure GroupWi
401. nts Section 7 1 1 Finding Items on page 225 Section 7 1 2 Finding Contacts on page 226 Section 7 1 3 Clearing a Find on page 226 Section 7 1 4 Creating and Saving a Find on page 226 Section 7 1 5 Using a Saved Find on page 227 Section 7 1 6 Deleting a Saved Find on page 227 Finding Items 1 Open the folder you want to search 2 Type a word or phrase in the Find field in the Item List header The word or phrase can be any string of consecutive characters contained in the item you are trying to find 3 Choose the item you want from the displayed list of items To provide search criteria 1 Open the folder you want to search Finding Items 225 2 If desired type a word or phrase in the Find field Find searches on subject sender or recipient 3 Click Find 4 Select the desired search criteria In Folder Name Folder Specify information related to the sender recipient subject message attachment or category of the items you want to find Categories Specify the category of items you want to find The initial choices are the default categories of Low priority Urgent Follow up and Personal Click More to list additional choices Item Type Select the type of items you want to find received items sent items posted items or draft items Items with Attachments Select this option to display only items that have attachments You might want to limit a fin
402. nts in a Folder If you don t create document references during the import you can create them later using File gt New gt Document Reference 5 Click Next 6 Click Finish to begin the import GroupWise copies the documents into the specified library Document Management 317 You can also import a document by dragging it from a window or your desktop to a GroupWise folder 15 4 4 Using Custom Import to Import Documents 318 1 Click File gt Import Documents 2 Click Add Individual Files select the files you want to import then click OK To select multiple files to import Ctrl click each additional document or Click Add Entire Directory then select the folder or folders you want to import Type a file extension such as doc or wpd in the File Name Filter field if you want import specific types of files from the selected folder or folders then click OK 3 Make sure Quick Import is deselected 4 Click Next l import Method x Move files into GroupWise Store all status and error messages in a log file so that import can run without stopping eoomds AppD ata Local T emp Parpy Bro ll Eee cancel Click Copy Files into GroupWise to place a copy of the files in the library and leave the original files in the source location or Click Move Files into GroupWise to move the files into the library and delete the original files from the source location To save any import
403. o Meeting list after the search click the Available Times tab click the username or resource to remove press Delete then click Yes This is useful if you want to include several conference rooms in the search to find one that is available then eliminate those you do not want 7 Complete and send the appointment GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide If you want to do a busy search before creating an appointment click Tools gt Busy Search Specify information in the Busy Search dialog box then click OK to perform a busy search When you find a time you want for a meeting click Request Meeting to transfer the information to anew appointment view then complete the appointment You can change the search range for one appointment by scheduling the appointment with Tools gt Busy Search and changing the number in the Number of days to search field This method is useful when you are scheduling recurring appointments or planning appointments that may be further in the future Changing Busy Search Options You can change the search range time and days default for all appointments on the Busy Search tab in Date Time Options 1 Click Tools gt Options double click Calendar then click the Busy Search tab 2 Change the options you want Options include the range of dates or specific days to search 3 Click OK Understanding All Day Events When you are creating a GroupWise appointment you can choose to make the appointment an all
404. o e mail recipients If the recipient is a GroupWise user he or she can then import the setting and select it from a list of available display settings This is helpful for example when you want your entire company to have the same layout for the Home folder The display settings are sent as an attachment with the file format of gws 1 Select the folder that you want to send the display settings for 2 Click View gt Display Settings gt Send Current An e mail message appears with the settings as an attachment 3 In the To box type a username then press Enter Repeat for additional users If necessary type usernames in the CC and BC boxes or To select usernames from a list click Address on the toolbar double click each user then click OK 4 To change the From name to another account or proxy click From then click a name 5 Type a subject 6 Type a message You can specify many options such as making this message a high priority requesting a reply from the recipients and more by clicking the Send Options tab 7 Click Send on the toolbar Getting Organized 55 56 2 3 6 Importing a Display Setting You can import a GroupWise display setting from another GroupWise system even if you are not on the same system This is helpful for example when you want your entire company to have the same layout for the Home folder You must have a message that contains an attachment with the file format of gws 1 Ina
405. o fF Q Confirm that the time zone shown is correct If the time zone is incorrect right click the clock in your Windows notification area select Adjust Date Time click the Time Zone tab then select the correct time zone 7 Click OK Changing the First Day of the Week in Your Calendar 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Calendar then click the General tab 3 Select a day in the Calendar Display Options group box then click OK Highlighting Weekends To highlight weekends and make weekends and weekdays easier to differentiate in your Calendar 1 Click Tools gt Options gt Calendar then click the General tab 2 Select the Highlight weekends check box then click OK Showing Week Numbers 1 Click Tools gt Options gt Calendar then click the General tab 2 Select the Show week number check box then click OK Setting Whether to Include Yourself on New Appointments By default GroupWise automatically includes your name in the To list when you create a new appointment To disable this feature so you are not automatically included or to enable it if it has been disabled 1 Click Tools gt Options gt Calendar then click the General tab 2 Select the Include myself on new appointments check box then click OK Calendar 133 134 Setting How to Display Appointment Length When you configure how to display the length of new appointments you can select whether to display the appointment length by duration or b
406. o update the folders contents when you start GroupWise 5 Click OK Deleting a News Account 1 Click Accounts gt Account Options 2 Click the News tab click the account you want to delete then click Remove 3 Click Yes 300 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 14 1 14 1 1 RSS Feeds RSS is a Web format used to publish frequently updated content such as blog entries news headlines or podcasts An RSS document which is often called a feed Web feed or channel contains either a summary of content from an associated Web site or the full text RSS makes it possible for people to keep up with their favorite Web sites in an automated manner that s easier than checking them manually Section 14 1 Subscribing to RSS Feeds on page 301 Section 14 2 Reading RSS Feeds on page 303 Section 14 3 Refreshing an RSS Feed on page 303 Section 14 4 Deleting an Individual RSS Entry on page 303 Section 14 5 Deleting a Subscribed RSS Feed on page 303 Subscribing to RSS Feeds When you subscribe to RSS feeds the GroupWise Feeds folder is created It displays the RSS folder icon in the Folder list A list of the feeds that you are currently subscribed to is displayed under the GroupWise Feeds folder You can create subfolders under the GroupWise Feeds folder and move feeds to the subfolder When you click the subfolder the message list displays a list of all the topics for all the feed
407. ocument click Find to locate the document in the library To attach a document displayed in the Find Results dialog box click the document then click OK 7 Inthe Version drop down list click which version you want to attach If you select Specific Version type the version number in the Version field 8 Click OK 9 Click Send on the toolbar Embedding an OLE Object in an Item In order for a recipient of an item to view or edit embedded OLE objects the recipient must be using GroupWise for Windows 1 Open and address an item 2 Click File gt Attachments gt Attach Object 78 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 1 6 Insert Object es Create New Si Paintbrush Picture Cancel Create from File WordPad Document Result Inserts a new Package object into your document 3 To embed an existing object click Create from File type the path and filename then click OK Skip to Step 8 or To create a new object and embed it follow Step 4 through Step 8 4 Click Create New then select a type of object 5 Click OK to open the application 6 Create the object you want to embed 7 Click the application s File menu then click Exit This step might differ depending on the application 8 Complete the item if necessary then click Send on the toolbar If the recipients open the object and edit it they must save it under a new filename Otherwise when they try to close the mail message they
408. ocument then click OK The selected version and its properties are copied to a new version Document Management 341 15 14 3 Viewing Version Information for a Document 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox 2 Click File gt Properties then click the Version tab Document 3 Document Version Sharing Activity Log Personalize Version 1 Description Original Status In Use Janet DeSoto Creator Janet DeSoto Date created 09 04 08 2 19 PM Opened by Janet DeSoto Date opened 09 04 08 2 29 PM Current location C Users Current filename 3 1 txt Expiration date Fri Sep 4 2009 Expiration action Archive File extension txt File Size 186 Status In Use Janet DeSoto 15 14 4 Specifying the Official Version of a Document To set the official version you must have rights to modify security settings and the system administrator must have given you rights to set the official version of a document If you don t specify an official version GroupWise uses the current version as the official version 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox 2 Click Actions gt Version List 3 Click the version you want to mark official 4 Click Actions then click Mark Official Version 15 15 Managing Groups of Documents Whether you re a user responsible for twenty documents or a system administrator responsible for thousands of documents you can use the Mass Document Operations Wizar
409. of connection you specify modem network or TCP IP If you do not want a complete copy of your network mailbox you can restrict what is retrieved such as only new messages or only message subject lines For more information about setting up Remote Mode see Chapter 11 2 Using Remote Mode on page 266 Changing Modes GroupWise starts in Online mode by default After you have set up a Caching Mailbox it is easy to change between modes as needed 1 Click the Mode Selector in the upper left corner of the Main Window 2 Select the desired mode Restart GroupWise to change modes Changing Your Display Name You can change the name that is displayed in items that you send from GroupWise You can only change your display name if the Accounts menu is displayed The Accounts menu is displayed if you are in Caching mode or if your administrator allows POP and IMAP or NNTP on your GroupWise system 1 Click Account gt Account Options 2 Click the Mail tab then click General Options 3 Type your display name in the Display Name field 4 Click OK then click Close Changing Your Time Zone GroupWise gets its time zone setting from your operating system where GroupWise is running If you want to change your GroupWise time zone you must change the time zone of your operating system 1 Right click the clock in your Windows notification area 2 Select Adjust Date Time 3 Click the Time Zone tab then select the correct time zo
410. of what the address book contains and so forth You can also use it to add a description of the address book The Options tab is visible only from the Frequent Contacts address book Use the Options tab to specify what is saved in Frequent Contacts and how this address book should be cleaned up See Setting Frequent Contacts Properties on page 207 The Sharing tab is visible for personal address books for which you are the owner including your Frequent Contacts address book Use the Sharing tab to choose whether or not to share an address book who to share it with and which access rights each person should have You can also share your personal groups by placing them in an address book you share with others Viewing an Address Book s Properties 1 In the Main Window click on the toolbar 2 Click the address book you want to view the properties for If the book is not visible the book is not open 3 Click File gt Properties 206 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide General Sharing g Family Type Novell Personal Address Book Access All Owner Janet DeSoto Press the button to see a summary of this address book s contents Description 4 To view the number of individuals resources companies and so forth click Contains If the address book is large this might take some time The status bar measures the progress of this operation 5 To add or modify a description fo
411. ohn joan join and so on Matches zero or more characters For example mountain finds all items containing the words mountain mountains mountainous and so on Items containing a specific word regardless of case For example NOCASE ZOO finds both Zoo and zoo Finding Items 237 1 4 1 5 1 5 1 Wildcard Character s and What the Find or Rule Will Match Switches WILDCARD default Items containing the search terms where and are treated as wildcard characters For example WILDCARD jo n finds john joan and join Finding Text in Items 1 Inan open item click Edit gt Find Text 2 Type the text you want to search for in the Find what field 3 Click Find Next to search for the text you typed You can also search for text in the QuickViewer Comparing the GroupWise Find Methods Section 7 5 1 Comparing Search Results on page 238 Section 7 5 2 Comparing Find Functionality on page 239 Section 7 5 3 Comparing GroupWise Versions on page 240 Comparing Search Results Like other search engines the GroupWise search engine creates an index of whole words that are contained in the items being searched When you search with Global Find GroupWise compares your search criteria and attempts to match them with the words in the search index Because Global Find searches for whole words Global Find does not locate punctuation or parti
412. ointment and does a busy search the user can see that you are not available at those times but can still schedule over your appointment Posted appointments are placed in your Calendar on the date you specify They are not placed in your Mailbox or in any other user s Mailbox Similarly all posted appointments are saved to your main GroupWise calendar To move them to a personal calendar drag and drop them to the personal calendar after they are created 1 On the toolbar click the arrow on the Oy New Appt button then click Posted Appointment Ponce Appommen bis File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help Pot X Conca Q El Le X gt B AA 289 Spell Check ae Appointment Options Subject One on One Place My Office Start date Sat Aug 30 2008 3 00 PM o All Day Event Duration 1 Hour o Busy n m j Segoe UI or Er Bz e EEM Please bring any concerns you may have to our One on One Account Novell GroupWise Folder Calendar or In your Calendar open a view with an Appointments List click a date then double click a time in that day 2 Optional Type a subject and a place 3 Specify the start date or Click to specify a date or auto date for your appointment To create a recurring appointment see Section 4 3 4 Scheduling Recurring Items on page 146 or Select All Day Event for an all day event For more information about all day events see U
413. ointments Internal e mail is e mail where the sender is part of your GroupWise system and the From field shows only the name of the sender not an Internet address as explained above If you want to block or junk internal e mail or appointments you can use rules For more information see Section 9 4 Creating a Rule on page 251 The following figure is an example of an internal e mail message Figure 3 3 E Mail from a Groupwise User C Mail From Benji Gensomino talaka File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help X Close 45 Reply Ba Reply All Forward 8 gt amp Mail Properties Personalize Discussion Thread From Benji Gensomino 9 4 2008 12 16 31 PM To Janet DeSoto Subject Comparer Lumades You have three options for blocking or junking Internet e mail You can add individual e mail addresses or entire Internet domains to a Block List Items from these addresses or Internet domains are blocked and never arrive in your Mailbox An Internet domain is the part of the e mail address that comes after the For example in the address Henry example com the Internet domain is example com However e mail from contacts in your Frequent Contact address book and your corporate address book is not blocked You can add individual e mail addresses or entire Internet domains to a Junk List Items from these addresses or Internet domains are delivered to the Junk Mail folder in your Mailbox You can spec
414. ok Closing an address book does not delete it you can open it again at any time Specifying the Columns to Display in an Address Book 1 In the Main Window click S on the toolbar or Click a Address 2 Click the address book where you want to change the displayed columns in an item you are composing 3 Right click a column heading then click a column name If the column name is not displayed click More columns To add a column click the column in the Available columns list box click Add then click OK Select Columns 2 Available columns Selected columns Additional Routing a Name AIM IM Screen Name E Mail Address Assistant Cancel Assistant Phone gt gt Add gt gt Birthday Blackberry PIN lt lt Bemove lt lt Business 2 Phone Callback Phone Car Phone Category Children Column position Comments Company Phone Down Computer Network Name 5 Column width lt lt lt Smaller Larger gt gt gt Name 4 To remove a column drag the column heading off the address book 5 To arrange columns drag a column heading to another position Viewing Links to the GroupWise Address Book 1 In the Main Window click on the toolbar 2 Click the personal address book where you want to view links A linked contact in an address book is shown with the amp icon 3 Click View gt System Book Links to select it Links show that an entry in a personal
415. older Ctrl click each file you want to attach The Attach File dialog box defaults to the previous location you used to attach a file Attach File Lookin fam EEE OF P Name Size Type Date modified ab Recent Places h pie s Desktop A Computer Wi A Network com ue Computer A Network Fie name 7 Files of type AI Fies x Cancel Document Reference 4 Click OK 5 Click Send on the toolbar TIP You can also attach a file or an item by dragging the file or item into the attachment window In addition you can right click a file in Windows then click Send To gt GroupWise Recipient A new item is created with the attachment in the attachment window To remove an attachment before you send the item 1 Right click the attachment then click Delete If you delete an attached file it is not erased from disk or network drive it is simply removed from the attachment list Moving or deleting a file on a disk or network drive does not affect a file you attached to an item and sent Attaching a Document Reference to an Item If the file you want to attach is a document stored in GroupWise Library you can attach a document reference When a recipient opens the attachment the document in the library opens if the recipient has rights to open or view the document and if the library is available If any recipients do not have sufficient document rights or if they are not using an e
416. olumn you click in In the item type icon column you can select a category for the item In the first text column for example Name you can select an item action Reply Forward and so on In the other text columns for example Subject Date and so on you can select a display setting for example Show Group Labels View Discussion Threads and so on Exploring the Folder List The Folder List at the left of the Main Window lets you organize your GroupWise items by creating folders to store your items in Next to any folder except for shared folders the number of unread items is shown in square brackets Next to the Sent Items folder the number in square brackets shows how many items are pending to be sent from Caching mode Getting Started 21 22 1 5 1 1 5 2 f Janet DeSoto Home amp gt BEES amp Sent Items F1 Calendar E Frequent Contacts HE Documents M Tasklist Work In Progress amp 7 Cabinet Junk Mail 3 Trash The Folder List header includes the Mode Selector for changing between Online mode and Caching mode Some folders are available by default Additional folders are created as you use additional GroupWise features Section 1 5 1 Home Folder on page 22 Section 1 5 2 Mailbox Folder on page 22 Section 1 5 3 Sent Items Folder on page 23 Section 1 5 4 Calendar Folder on page 23 Section 1 5 5 Frequent Contacts Folder on page 23 Section
417. om an IMAP4 or POP3 account click the item then press Delete See also Section 12 5 2 Deleting Items from a POP3 Mail Server on page 292 and Section 12 6 5 Deleting Items from an IMAP4 Mail Server on page 293 12 5 POP3 Features Section 12 5 1 Storing Your Items on a POP3 Mail Server on page 291 Section 12 5 2 Deleting Items from a POP3 Mail Server on page 292 12 5 1 Storing Your Items on a POP3 Mail Server 1 Click Accounts gt Account Options 2 Click the POP3 account name 3 Click Properties 4 Click the Advanced tab My POP3 Account Properties g General Server Connection Folder Advanced Signature Leave a copy of messages on the server Remove from server after 5 day s e from server after deleting from Tra Incoming mail server POP3 110 Use SSL Certificate Temporary session only certificate Qutgoing mail server SMTP 25 e Default UseSSL Certificate Temporary session only certificate 1 Minutes to wait for server to respond Detailed error messages ox _ Cancel 5 Click Leave a copy of messages on the server 6 Click OK then click Close POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts 291 12 5 2 Deleting Items from a POP3 Mail Server To delete POP3 items from the POP3 server as they are downloaded 1 Click Accounts gt Account Options 2 Double click the POP3 account then click Advanced 3 Deselect Leave a copy of messages on the server then click OK
418. om the following resources Section 1 10 1 Online Help on page 30 Section 1 10 2 GroupWise 8 Documentation Web Page on page 30 Section 1 10 3 End User Training Web Page on page 31 Section 1 10 4 GroupWise Cool Solutions Web Community on page 31 Online Help Complete user documentation is available in Help In the Main Window click Help gt Help Topics then use the Contents tab Index tab or Search tab to locate the help topics you want GroupWise 8 Documentation Web Page For a complete set of GroupWise user and GroupWise administration documentation go to the GroupWise 8 Documentation Web site http www novell com documentation gw 8 The User Guide is also available in the GroupWise client by clicking Help gt User s Guide 30 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 1 10 3 1 10 4 End User Training Web Page Various tutorials training materials and tips are available at the GroupWise End User Training Web site http www novell com products groupwise brainstorm_training_groupwise8 index html This link is also available in the GroupWise client by clicking Help gt Training and Tutorials GroupWise Cool Solutions Web Community At the Cool Solutions Web site http www novell com communities coolsolutions gwmag you ll find tips tricks feature articles and answers to frequent questions The link is also available in the GroupWise client by clicking Help gt Cool
419. on Opening Documents in Non Integrated Applications If you are using non integrated applications most Windows 3 1 applications MS DOS applications and many Windows 95 applications GroupWise copies the document back to the library when you close the application not when you close the document Opening Documents in Integrated Applications If you are using an integrated application GroupWise can integrate the document management features with the application s Open and Save As feature When you select Open in the application a dialog box displays all the available document references in your Mailbox You can select a document reference to open the document or you can click the Select Document Using Application Dialog button to use the application s regular Open dialog box For more information see Section 15 17 Integrating GroupWise with Your Applications on page 363 Opening Documents in GroupWise Remote or Caching Modes If you are using Remote mode you must manually mark the document version as In Use when you retrieve it from your Online Mailbox When you exit the document Remote prompts you to clear the In Use status If you are using GroupWise in Caching mode and the GroupWise server is available GroupWise automatically retrieves the document giving you a chance to mark it In Use when you choose to open a document 332 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 9 2 15 10 Opening Multiple Versions of
420. on You can organize your messages by moving them into folders within your Cabinet and you can create new folders as necessary For more information see Section 2 3 Using Folders to Organize Your Mailbox on page 45 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 1 5 3 1 5 4 1 5 5 1 5 6 1 5 7 1 5 8 You can also organize your messages by assigning categories to them Each category displays as a different color in your Mailbox You can search for categories For more information see Using Categories to Organize Items on page 40 Sent Items Folder The Sent Items folder displays all the items you have sent By checking the properties of your sent items you can determine their status Delivered Opened and so on Calendar Folder The Calendar folder shows several calendar view options The Calendar folder also contains any additional calendars that you have created You can use the Folder List to choose which calendars to display The selected calendars are displayed in the calendar view For more information about your Calendar see Section 4 1 Understanding the Calendar on page 123 Frequent Contacts Folder The Frequent Contacts folder represents the Frequent Contacts address book Any modification you make in the Frequent Contacts folder is also made in the Frequent Contacts address book From this folder you can view create and modify contacts resources organizations and groups For mo
421. on contains the following topics Emptying Selected Items from the Trash on page 386 Emptying the Trash Automatically on page 386 Emptying Selected Items from the Trash 1 Inthe Full Folder List click 8 To access the Full Folder List click the folder list header drop down list above the Folder List it probably displays Online or Caching to indicate what mode of GroupWise you are running in then click Full Folder List 2 Select one or more items 3 Click Edit gt Delete then click Yes Emptying the Trash Automatically 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Environment then click the Cleanup tab 386 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 16 9 Environment Reply Format Editors Viewers ignature Appearance General Views File Location Cleanup Defauit Actions Mail and phone Manual delete and archive D Auto delete after y i 30 S days Auto archive after Appointment task and reminder note Manual delete and archive Auto delete after wy 14 days Empty trash D Manual Automatic after 7 S days 3 Select the Automatic After button in the Empty trash group box then specify the number of days between automatic deletions 4 Click OK If your system administrator has specified that your Trash is automatically emptied on a regular basis you might not be able to change this option GroupWise Support Information If you need ad
422. on name field type a description 5 Click the country code then type the area code and phone number for the gateway to your GroupWise system 6 Type the gateway login ID 7 Click Password type the gateway password click OK retype the password then click OK 8 Click the Advanced tab Advanced Modem settings Modem A Modem script Disconnect method Redial When all updates are received Attempts 5 Do not wait for responses gt Manually Retry interval 7 S min ox Cana 9 If your modem requires a script click Edit Script then specify the necessary When Given and Respond With commands To save the script without changing its filename click Save then click Close or To save the script with a new filename click Save As then click Close 10 To retrieve an existing script file click select the script file then click Open 11 Click a disconnect method 12 Inthe Attempts field specify the number of times to redial if the line is busy Remote and Caching Modes 271 13 Inthe Retry interval field specify the time interval between each redial attempt 14 Click OK then click Close Creating a TCP IP Connection Click Accounts gt Send Retrieve gt GroupWise Options 2 Click Configure click Connect To then click New 3 Click TCP IP then click OK TCP IP Connection ees Connection name IP Address IP Port Disconnect method When all upd
423. on page 335 Check In and Copy Copies the document back to the library and leaves a copy in the check out location For more information see Section 15 10 1 Checking In a Document and Leaving a Copy in the Check Out Location on page 334 Check In Only Checks in the document but does not update the document in the library with any changes you made to the checked out version For more information see Section 15 10 2 Checking In an Unchanged Document on page 335 Update Without Updates the document in the library with any changes you have made but Checking In does not unlock the document For more information see Section 15 8 4 Updating a Checked Out Document without Checking It In on page 330 When you check in a document you can specify which version you want the document checked in as There are three possible versions Document Management 333 Version to Check In What It Does Checked Out Version Updates the version of the document that you are checking in New Version Creates a new version of the document New Document Creates a document and lets you specify new document properties for it For more information about checking in a document and creating a new version see Section 15 10 4 Checking In a Document and Making It a New Version on page 335 15 10 1 Checking In a Document and Leaving a Copy in the Check Out Location 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox 2 Click Actions gt Check I
424. on to change your password using a different application Contact your system administrator for more information 1 Inthe Main Window click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Security then click the Password tab 3 Inthe Old password field type the password you want to change 372 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 16 2 3 4 Inthe New password field type the new password 5 Inthe Confirm new password field type the new password again click OK then click Close Using Single Sign On If you use Novell Single Sign On you can configure GroupWise to use the single sign on password In this case you do not need to enter a separate GroupWise password when you start GroupWise 1 Inthe Main Window click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Security then click the Password tab 3 Select Use single sign on then click Close Removing Your Password 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Security then click the Password tab 3 Type your old password then click OK 4 Click Clear Password 5 Click OK then click Close NOTE If your system administrator has turned on LDAP authentication you are required to have a password and you cannot remove it Bypassing Your GroupWise or LDAP Password If you have a password but do not want to be prompted for it every time you start GroupWise you have several options The availability of these options depends on the platform on which you run GroupWise the options your system adm
425. on to select the user from the Address Selector dialog box When the user s name appears in the field click Add User to move the user into the Share list Click the user s name in the Share list Select the access options you want for the user Repeat Step 3 through Step 6 for each user you want to share the folder with Click OK If you want the calendar to have a specific function you can create a new display setting Right click the calendar click Properties then click Display 4 6 2 Posting a Calendar Entry to a Shared Calendar 158 4 7 1 In the shared calendar open a view with an Appointments List click a date then double click a time in the Appointments List 2 Optional Type a subject and a place if necessary 3 Specify the start date or Click to specify a date or auto date for your appointment To create a recurring appointment see Section 4 3 4 Scheduling Recurring Items on page 146 or Select All Day Event for an all day event 4 Specify a start time and duration Duration can be in minutes hours or days 5 Specify how you want the appointment to appear as Appointments can appear as Free Tentative Busy or Out of the Office Optional Type a message You can specify many options such as making this appointment a high priority and more by clicking the Options tab Optional Specify a Show Appointment As type by clicking Actions gt Show Appointment As then clicking a t
426. one 11022 amp Corporate Office Phone 11006 8 Mar Ai Janet DeSoto Home Organization Corporate mde Ch 5 2 Mailbox 8 8 Art Ramirez 8 Janet DeSoto Title Gin Sent Items aramirez Corpora 8 Doug Newman jdesoto Corporate net Departr k amp F Calendar 4 c EPER Office E itle i Corp T y Frequent conte Title Engineer Grou newman Corporate n I New Hires Department Development Department Development ason evens i m Family Office Phone x11010 Office Phone 11000 istevens Corporate net 8 Rich n Janet DeSot Title Tester Group B iste op E Documents 2 Rte peel 8 Flavian Haughey Department Development san m Le fhaughey Corporate net Office Phone x41022 B sam 7 Work In Progresi z A Cabinet o Department Marketing smu s E Junk Mail 8 Benjii Gensomino Office Phone 11017 8 Lori Tanaka Title t Trash 1 bgelsomino Corporate net Itanaka Corporate net Departr yy Department Marketing 8 Greg Farnsworth Office Cw Office Phone 11003 gfarnsworth Cor 38 Lunch Group Fax Nur x Department Sales Lv Office Phone 11015 Z m i m fe l Selected 0 Totat 19 Any modification you make in a Contacts folder is also made in the corresponding address book Frequent Contacts or other personal address book The Simple Folder List displays a list of your personal Contacts folders under the Frequent Contacts folder You can quickly select a different Contacts folder by clicking it in the Simpl
427. ons 2 Click Calendar gt Busy Search 3 Select Publish my free busy information 4 Click OK Sending Free Busy Information To notify Internet users about your free busy information 1 Inthe Main Window click Tools gt Options 2 Click Calendar gt Busy Search 3 Click Send Free Busy Publish Location This creates an e mail with your free busy location 4 Address the e mail then click Send Using Free Busy Information In GroupWise you can use Busy Search to check other users Calendars for available times If you receive a ifb file from a non GroupWise user you can associate that free busy information with that user s contact information so that Busy Search can identify available times for non GroupWise users 1 In your Mailbox open the e mail containing the free busy location 2 Block and copy the free busy location Calendar 161 4 10 4 10 1 3 Display the contact information for the sender as described in Modifying a Contact on page 189 or Add the user as a GroupWise contact as described in Adding a Contact on page 187 4 Inthe contact information click the Details tab 5 Paste the location into the Free Busy field 6 Click Save then click Close Using the Multi User Calendar The Multi User Calendar view lets you see the schedules of several users or resources side by side Use this view to find out what everyone s schedule is for the day or find out which of your company s con
428. open GroupWise allowing you to supply any necessary login information Lets you use your GroupWise user ID to open GroupWise as yourself on another user s computer The other user remains logged on to the network Prevents the GroupWise splash screen from being displayed when you enter the program Checks for unopened items If there are unopened items GroupWise opens as usual Otherwise GroupWise does not start Checks for unopened items If there are unopened items GroupWise opens minimized and a beep sounds Otherwise GroupWise does not start Lets you specify the path of the temp directory Initializes the Address Book when GroupWise starts Lets you specify the IP address x x x x or the name of the IP address when you are running in client server mode Lets you specify the IP port when you are running in client server mode Applies only if you have two or more language versions or language modules This option instructs GroupWise to override the default environment language under General Environment in Options with the language specified by the language code xx The language codes are listed in Section C 3 GroupWise Language Codes on page 411 Lets you log on to another user s computer by using your network ID The other user remains logged on to the network Startup Options 409 This Startup Option nu ph pathname pc path_to_caching_mailbox pr path_to_remote_mailbox safe Does Th
429. open a backup copy of your Mailbox to view and restore items You need Read and Write access to the restore area if it is on the network Section 16 6 1 Backing Up Your Mailbox on page 381 Section 16 6 2 Restoring Items from Backup on page 381 Backing Up Your Mailbox 1 To manually back up your local Mailbox in Remote or Caching mode click Tools gt Backup Mailbox 2 Specify the location for the backup if prompted then click OK You can also set up an automatic backup 1 In Remote or Caching mode click Tools gt Options then click double click Environment 2 Click the Backup Options tab then select Backup remote mailbox 3 Specify the location for the backup The default location is c novell groupwise backup 4 Specify how often you want to back up your Mailbox 5 Optional Select Do not prompt before performing backup The backup takes place each time you exit GroupWise If your mailbox is large the backup can take some time You might or might not want to back up your mailbox every time you exit GroupWise Restoring Items from Backup 1 Click File gt Open Backup Maintaining GroupWise 381 16 7 16 7 1 GroupWise Restore Path ES Restore from amp Css 2 Type the full path or browse to the path of the backed up mailbox then type your password if required 3 Select the item you want to restore then click Actions gt Restore You cannot restore GroupWise Library document
430. or deselect the following options Check words with numbers Check duplicate words Check irregular capitalization Prompt before auto replacement Show phonetic suggestions 3 Continue with spell checking as usual Editing Your User Word List Changes you make in a user word list are effective only if you have QuickCorrect turned on In the Message box of an item you are creating click Tools gt QuickCorrect then make sure the Replace Words As You Type check box has a check mark For more information about user word lists click Tools gt Spell Check in an item you have created In the Writing Tools dialog box click Customize click User Word Lists then click Help To make changes in your user word list 1 In the Spell Checker click Customize gt User Word Lists then click the list you want to modify If you haven t added lists of your own the default word list is the only list available E Mail 75 E User Word Lists Ex Word lists Close Language English U S US X Word lists Help WT61US UWL Add List Remove L Word list contents Contents of 20omos AppD ata Local Novell Groupwise WT61US UWL Word Phrase Replace with acsesory accessory acomodate accommodate accessory adn and adress address already already Add Entry Delete Entry 2 To add a new entry type it in the Word Phrase field then click Add Entry or To delete an entry select it then click Delete
431. ore the appointment and or All Day Event the alarm should notify you 5 Click OK Calendar 155 4 5 2 Setting an Alarm on a Calendar Item Notify must be running for an alarm to sound 1 In your Mailbox or Calendar click an appointment 2 Click Actions gt Alarm Alarm BA Hours before o Minutes before 5 lt Set Program to launch when alarm goes off 3 Specify the number of hours or minutes before the appointment that you want the alarm to sound 4 Click Set If Alarm is dimmed make sure that the appointment time hasn t already passed To remove an alarm that has been set for an appointment 1 Click the appointment 2 Click Actions gt Alarm 3 Click Clear 4 5 3 Sending an Alarm to an Electronic Pager You can set an alarm in your mailbox or calendar to notify you about the status of a message through an electronic paging device See Section 8 2 1 Starting Notify When GroupWise Starts on page 242 for more information 4 6 Sharing a Personal Calendar A shared calendar is like any other calendar except other people have access to it and it also appears in their calendar lists You can share existing personal calendars in your calendar list You choose whom to share the calendar with and what rights to grant each user Then users can post calendar entries to the shared calendar You can t share your main calendar This is what the contents of a typical shared calendar look like 156 Grou
432. organization a phone and fax number the primary contact in this organization the address Web site and comments about this organization In the Primary Contact field you can specify a contact that is already in a Contacts folder or you can use the arrow button to create a new contact entry Adding a Personal Organization The GroupWise Address Book includes organizations defined by your GroupWise administrator You can add an organization to the Frequent Contacts folder or another personal Contacts folder 1 In the Folder List select the Contacts folder where you want to add a personal organization 2 Click New Organization on the toolbar 3 Inthe Organization field specify the name of the organization 4 Optional Specify any other information you want to record for the organization 5 Click Close then click Yes to save your changes Contacts and Address Books 201 202 6 5 Modifying a Personal Organization 1 In the Folder List select the Contacts folder where you want to modify a personal organization 2 Right click the organization then click Details Organizations are marked by the amp icon 3 On the Details tab modify any information as needed 4 Click Close then click Yes to save your changes Deleting a Personal Organization 1 In the Folder List select the Contacts folder where you want to delete a personal organization 2 Right click the organization then click Delete Organizations are marked by the
433. osing them from your calendar When you move an item to a folder it is not archived Items in all folders are affected by the Cleanup options you specify in Environment Options and by any archiving or cleanup options your administrator specifies Archived items are never deleted unless you manually go into your archive and delete them Specifying Where Archives Are Stored 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Environment then click the File Location tab Environment P s Reply Fomat Editors Viewers Signature Appearance General Views File Location Cleanup Default Actions Archive directory Custom views C Program Files x86 Novell Groupwise Save check out Caching mailbox directory C Users username AppD ata Local Novell GroupWise gwstrbyu ok _ Cancel aon 3 Specify the location of your archive directory in the Archive directory field 4 Click OK For information on how to archive items in your Mailbox see Section 16 3 Archiving E Mail on page 375 IMPORTANT If you run GroupWise on multiple workstations make sure that the archive location you specify exists on only one of the workstations After the initial creation of your archive the archiving process occurs only if GroupWise can access the specified location If the archive exists on multiple computers the result is multiple archives which is a situation that you want to avoid For information on how to remedy this prob
434. ou can click Generate a log file without performing the operation to see the outcome of the operation without actually changing the documents If you are a librarian in the destination library you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents you are copying Allow Documents With Validation Errors To Be Created or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors Click Finish to change the document properties Changing the Properties for Selected Documents 1 oOo oa fF WO ND In your Mailbox or folders select the document references for the documents for which you want to modify properties Click Tools gt Mass Document Operations In the Operation group box click Change Properties In the Selection method group box click Use currently selected documents then click Next Specify new values for any of the document property fields then click Next Click Preview to see a sample of the documents that will be modified based on the Find criteria you specified You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview Specify the directory where you want to save the log file You can click Generate a log file without performing the operation to see the outcome of the operation without actually modifying the documents GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 1
435. oup but not necessarily both End Designates the last row of conditions in the search criteria If you select End in a row that is followed by other rows or groups the subsequent rows and groups are deleted 5 Click OK to transfer your search criteria to the Find dialog box Optional Click Save if you want to store your search criteria for future use Saving enables you to use the same criteria in the future without needing to enter it again 7 Click OK to begin the Advanced Find 7 3 2 Selecting Fields in Advanced Finds and Rules This section explains many of the fields available to you when you re creating an Advanced Find or a rule Other user defined fields might also be available Finding Items 231 232 Field Name Complete Account Assigned Date Attachment List Attachments Author Caller s Company Caller s Name Caller s Phone Number Category Cc Completed Date Copy Type Created Date Opened This Field Refers to The percentage complete for a task The account used to send or the account the item was received from The start date of a task Types of attachments such as files sounds movies or OLE objects Rules that inspect the attachment list for attachments recognize attachments only when the attachments are at the first level of the message Attachments that are nested further down in the message hierarchy are not recognized by the rule Attachments containing certa
436. own Left and Right buttons to select the folder s location Click Finish oa Ff WO N Posting an Item to a Shared Folder 1 Click the shared folder in your Folder List to open it 2 Click File gt New gt Discussion Note If you want to post a different type of item such as a task click Edit gt Change To then click an item type Type a subject Type your message Click Attach to attach files Click Post on the toolbar oOo ao Aa Q To reply to an existing item in a shared folder open the item click Reply select a reply option then click OK See Replying to an E Mail in a Shared Folder on page 108 for more information Viewing Discussion Threads in a Shared Folder 1 Ina shared folder click View gt Display Settings gt Discussion Threads 2 To expand or collapse a discussion thread click the and next to the original discussion item 3 To scroll through different discussions press Ctrl Left arrow or Ctrl Right arrow Deleting a Shared Folder To delete a folder that is shared with you 1 Right click the folder 2 Click Delete 3 Click Yes Deleting a folder that is shared with you just deletes the folder from your GroupWise Mailbox All other users are unaffected However if you are the one who shared the folder with others then deleting that folder removes it from all other users as well Getting Organized 59 2 4 Using Panels to Organize Your Home Folder Panels enable you to display mul
437. p in the item you are creating click Routing Slip For more information see Creating a Routed Message on page 81 Addressing an Item with the Address Selector Use the Address Selector to address items you are composing For more information about the Address Selector see Section 6 3 2 Using the Address Selector on page 183 In an item you are composing click E aress On the toolbar Select an address book from the Look in drop down list Double click the names you want as primary To recipients of your message To address carbon copy recipients click CC then double click the names you want To address blind copy recipients click BC then double click the names you want Click the drop down list to show only contacts groups or resources in your list N Oo O4 Ff WD Click the Match drop down list to select how you want to locate a recipient by name last name or first name then type the recipient s name 8 Click OK If you know the person s name begin typing it in the To field of the item view In the Address Selector Name Completion searches the currently selected address book When Name Completion finds the person you want to send a message to you can stop typing If Name Completion finds a name that is close to but doesn t exactly match the one you are looking for use the Up arrow or Down arrow keys to scroll to adjacent names in the address Book If Name Completion does not find the person sele
438. p mon fri 15 mon fri This formula means that all scheduled days must fall on the 15th of the month and must be a day from Monday to Friday Another way of describing the formula is that all scheduled days must fall on the 15th of the month and must be a Monday or Tuesday or Wednesday or Thursday or Friday Periodic Operators The three periodic operators are Every Starting and Ending Use Every in combination with Starting and or Ending to schedule days at regular intervals beginning on a specific date and or ending on a specific date For example suppose you want to schedule a meeting for once a week starting on March 3 2011 and continuing through June 11 2011 You could use the following formula every 7 starting mar 3 2011 ending jun 11 2011 The formula schedules every seventh day starting with March 3 2011 and ending with June 11 2011 The starting date is always scheduled as the first day and the ending date is scheduled only if it naturally falls at the Every interval If you do not use both the Starting and Ending operators the starting or ending date is the first or last date in the Calendar file For example examine the following formula every 7 starting mar 3 2011 The above formula schedules every seventh day starting on March 3 2011 and continuing to the last date in the Calendar file The Every command works with numbers up to 30 For example every 45 starting mar 3 2011 is not a valid formula Relative Oper
439. pWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Figure 4 8 Shared Calendar View GE Address Book BS A Qrewmai NewAppt if NewTask El 3 a Borine 9 Favorites FA Calendar 2 Mailbox 1 M Tasklist Y Janet DeSoto Home O Mailbox 1 n Sent Items FA Calendar amp Work In Progress E Cabinet Trash 7 ZA Zw 2225222520 8 88 3 8 318 8 8 3 8 8 8 3 8 3 8 es 8s 8 E 8 In Remote and Caching modes changes in a shared calendar are updated whenever you connect to the master GroupWise system Section 4 6 1 Sharing an Existing Calendar with Other Users on page 157 Section 4 6 2 Posting a Calendar Entry to a Shared Calendar on page 158 4 6 1 Sharing an Existing Calendar with Other Users 1 In the Folder List right click the calendar you want to share then click Sharing General I Display Sharing Not shared Shared with Name Add User oe ee Remove User Share list Name Status Access BenjiGensomino Pending Read Add David Jones Pending Read Add Ishmael Yacoub Pending Read Add Marie Lamaroux Pending Read Add Richard Steadman Pending Read Add Additional access Z Add C Edt Delete 2 Click Shared with Calendar 157 oN OO oO Ff In the Name field start typing the name of a user or click the Address Book butt
440. pWise adds a sentence to the item stating that a reply is requested and changes the icon in the recipient s Mailbox to a double arrow 1 To request a reply for one item open an item view click the Send Options tab then click General or To request a reply for all items you send click Tools gt Options then double click Send 2 Click Reply requested then specify when you want to receive the reply rc Mail To oc fot fa File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help 4 Send 3 Cancel E Address 4 EH Ho 9 B ale Mail Send Options Category i Edit Categories Contacts fs General High Priority Expiration date Standard Priority After 0 days Low Priority Classification Delay delivery S Normal X For 0 days Tracking Until Reply requested T A hen convenient TEE N J days Security v Notify recipients MIME Encoding ures z Account Novell GroupWise The recipient sees next to the message If you select When Convenient Reply Requested When convenient appears at the top of the message If you select Within x Days Reply Requested By xx xx xx appears at the top of the message 3 Return to the item you are composing or Click OK then click Close to save settings for all items Notifying Recipients About Items You Send 1 To notify the recipients of one item open an item view then click Send Options gt General or To notify the recipients o
441. pWise personal address book If your former address book was a MAPI service provider your conversion should be smooth If not your address books can still be imported with some reformatting Novell address books are best exported in nab format and importing address books is also more accurate if the nab format is used You can also import and export your personal groups Address books from supported POP3 and IMAP4 e mail clients can be imported by using the GroupWise E Mail Client Import utility You can also share personal address books See Sharing an Address Book with Another User on page 208 Importing a Novell Personal Address Book into a Personal Address Book on page 215 Importing Contacts from a vCard on page 216 Importing Third Party Address Books on page 216 Exporting Addresses from the Address Book on page 218 Importing a Novell Personal Address Book into a Personal Address Book 1 If you have received a Novell personal address book nab file as an attachment right click the attachment click Save As select the folder or diskette where you want to save it then click Save Contacts and Address Books 215 216 Novell address book files are text files with specific formatting GroupWise 8 nab files use UTF 8 character encoding and cannot be imported into earlier versions of GroupWise However GroupWise 8 can export nab files in ANSI character format which is compatible with earlier
442. page 390 Section 17 3 Sending an Instant Message from the File Menu on page 390 Section 17 4 Displaying the Messenger Contact List on page 390 Section 17 5 Displaying the Novell Messenger Presence Status on page 390 Section 17 6 Adding Contacts from GroupWise to Novell Messenger on page 391 Section 17 7 Specifying Whether to Start Novell Messenger When GroupWise Starts on page 391 Section 17 8 Displaying Novell Messenger Options on page 391 17 1 Enabling Messenger in GroupWise 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt General Novell Messenger 389 17 2 17 3 17 4 17 5 3 Select Launch Messenger at startup 4 Select Show Messenger presence 5 Click OK Sending an Instant Message from Novell Messenger 1 In GroupWise click the Address Book icon 2 Click the person you want to send a message to The Quick Info information for that user is displayed with the Novell Messenger Presence displayed 3 Click the Presence icon A Novell Messenger Conversation window displays 4 Type the message 5 Press Enter to sent the message Sending an Instant Message from the File Menu 1 In GroupWise click File gt New gt Instant Message 2 Click the person you want to send a message to or Click the Find User button to search for a person who is not in your Contact List 3 Click OK 4 Type the message 5 Press Enter or press Alt Enter Displaying the Mes
443. pecific function you can create a new display setting For example if the folder is for shared discussions you should create a setting that views items by reply thread and contains both sent and received items Right click the folder click Properties then click Display Creating a Shared Folder 1 2 3 4 on OO UO In the Folder List click File gt New gt Folder Select Shared folder then click Next Type a name and description for the new folder Click Up Down Right or Left to position the folder where you want it in the Folder List then click Next In the Name field start typing the name of the user When the user s name appears in the field click Add User to move the user into the Share List Click the user s name in the Share List Select the access options you want for the user GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 9 Repeat Step 5 through Step 8 for each user you want to share the folder with 10 Click Next 11 Specify the display settings you want for the folder 12 When you re done click Finish For more information about shared folders see Using Shared Folders on page 57 Accepting Shared Folders 1 Click the Shared Folder Notification in your Mailbox A screen appears showing the name of the folder you have been granted rights to and the type of rights you have been given Click Next The name of the folder is filled in by default Make any desired changes to the name Use the Up D
444. play the Edit Categories dialog box select the category then click OK To assign a category to an address book entry 1 Open a personal address book 42 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 2 Locate the user you want 3 Right click the user 4 Click Details then click Categories 5 Click a category in the menu then click OK Assigning a Category by Using Item Properties 1 Open an existing item click the Personalize tab then click Edit Categories or Open a new item to compose click the Send Options tab then click Edit Categories Edit Categories ets Cota Cancel Personal Digent C Eim O EE Cons Text L_ ka Color Sample CET Follow up Background Oly New Category lt Type here to add a new category gt Add If you assign one of the default categories Follow Up Low Priority Personal and Urgent to an item you are sending the item arrives in the recipient s Mailbox with that category assigned If you assign a category that you created to an item you are sending the item arrives in the recipient s Mailbox with no category assigned 2 Inthe Edit Categories dialog box select a category then click OK Assigning Multiple Categories 1 Right click the item 2 Click Categories gt More to display the Edit Categories dialog box 3 Select the desired categories When you assign multiple categories to an item the color of the primary category is the color that shows i
445. previously linked to and place it in only that folder Press Ctrl while you drag the item to link it to that folder You can also click an item click Edit gt Move Link to Folders select the folders you want to move or link the item to then click Move or Link Select Delete old links to remove the item from all folders it was previously linked to and place it in the selected folder If the item you move is a folder and a folder with the same name already exists in the new location a dialog box opens so you can change the name of the folder you are moving If you delete the original item the copies in your other folders remain Changing the Item Read Options You can select to have the folder display either the first unread item or the last item read However if the folder contains a large number of items it could take a while for the contents of the folder to display To select the default read option for the folder 1 Right click the folder to modify 2 Click Properties 3 On the General tab select Select first unread item when folder is opened If you deselect Select first unread item when folder is opened the folder displays the last item read 4 Click OK Customizing Folder Display Settings Display settings determine how GroupWise displays the information in a particular folder For example the Home folder has a default display setting that includes the Folder List and panels These settings are saved in the GroupWise d
446. ptions 2 Click Environment gt General 3 Select Read next after accept decline or delete then click OK Changing the GroupWise Interface Language If you have the multilanguage version of GroupWise you can select the interface language for GroupWise 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Environment then click the General tab 3 Click a language in the Interface language drop down list then click OK TIP To change the Spell Checker language see Selecting the Spell Checker Language on page 76 Using Categories to Organize Items Categories provide you with a way to organize your items You can assign a category to any item including contacts You create and add categories and can give each category an identifying color The colors display in the Item List and in the Calendar Section 2 2 1 Understanding Categories on page 40 Section 2 2 2 Assigning Categories to Items on page 42 Section 2 2 3 Working with Categories on page 44 Understanding Categories When you assign a category to an item the item is displayed in the color of the category Categories help you to quickly organize items in groups 40 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Figure 2 1 Mailbox Showing Items With Categories cts Adress Book D 8 Qnewmait New Appt M NewTek E A amp Reply BG Reply All FY Accept T Decline FE Delegate Q9 a Find v From Subject
447. r then click Set As Primary If you click the photo area in the upper left corner of the Contact tab you can add or replace a photo for the contact Browse to and select the photo that you want to represent the contact GroupWise accepts various types of image files such as jpg gif png bmp and tif and then converts the image to jpg with a maximum width or height of 64 pixels Details Use this page to specify the contact s profession department location manager assistant birthday anniversary spouse children hobbies and any Internet addresses associated with the contact To specify a birthday and anniversary select the month and date from the appropriate drop down lists To view the birthday or anniversary in a week calendar view click the Calendar icon 188 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide When the check box next to the date is selected the birthday or anniversary information is displayed on the Summary page and in the Birthday column if you have added one to an address book In addition selecting the check box adds the birthday or anniversary to your Calendar as a posted All Day Event If you deselect the check box the birthday information is available only on the Personal page To specify an Internet address for the contact s office personal or free busy information specify the address in the appropriate fields Click a Web site button to launch a browser and go to the Web site Address Use this pag
448. r Calendar on page 124 Section 4 2 2 Reading a Calendar Entry on page 129 Section 4 2 3 Creating a Personal Calendar on page 129 Section 4 2 4 Customizing a New Calendar on page 130 Section 4 2 5 Sending a Calendar on page 135 Section 4 2 6 Exporting a Calendar on page 135 Section 4 2 7 Importing a Calendar on page 135 Viewing Your Calendar There are several different ways to view your GroupWise calendar from a day view to a month view Likewise you can view your calendar and a proxy s calendar at the same time All unaccepted items in your Calendar are italicized to help you easily identify which items you have not yet accepted Customizing Your Calendar Views When Viewing a Calendar on page 124 Switching the Calendar View Between Graphic Display and Text Display on page 126 Selecting Calendars to Display on page 126 Viewing a Different Date in the Calendar on page 126 Viewing All Day Events in the Calendar on page 126 Navigating in the Calendar on page 127 Displaying Two Time Zones in the Calendar on page 127 Working with Time and Date Differences on page 128 Understanding the Calendar Item Icons on page 128 Understanding Calendar Shading on page 128 Viewing Any Folder As a Calendar on page 129 Opening a New Calendar View on page 129 Customizing Your Calendar Views When Viewing a Calendar
449. r View Properties Pa View list Name View Day Default TT Week Week Default Month Month Default Move Up Year Year Default Multi User Multi User Default Move Down New Edit Delete Simple Navigation Extended Navigation The Calendar View Properties dialog box lets you change the view used to display your Day Week Month Year and Multi User calendars 3 Select the name of the view you want to change then click Edit The Edit View dialog box opens Edit View Name Day View Day Default X l Cancel 3 4 Click the down arrow to open the View drop down list The View drop down list contains a variety of available views 5 Select the view you want to use then click OK to close the Edit View dialog box 6 Click OK to close the Calendar View Properties dialog box Removing the Month Calendar from the Week View You might want to remove the month calendar from the Week view to allow more space for your weekly appointments to display 1 Click Calendar on the Nav Bar 2 Right click Week then click Properties The Calendar View Properties dialog box opens 3 Select Week then click Edit The Edit View dialog box opens 4 Click the down arrow to open the View drop down list 5 Select Week not Week Default then click OK to close the Edit View dialog box 6 Click OK to close the Calendar View Properties dialog box Now when you view the weekly calendar the month calendar do
450. r directly responsible for it All recipients can see that a carbon copy was sent They can also see the names of the CC recipients BC Blind Copy Blind copy recipients BC receive a copy of an item Other recipients receive no information about blind copies Only the sender and the blind copy recipient know that a blind copy was sent If a recipient replies and chooses Reply to All the blind copy recipient does not receive the reply 4 To change the From name to another account or proxy click From then click a name 5 Type a subject 6 Type a message You can specify many options such as making this message a high priority requesting a reply from the recipients and more by clicking the Send Options tab When you use the Categories option only the four default categories carry over to the recipient 7 Include any attachments by clicking Attach a File on the toolbar 8 Click Send on the toolbar GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 1 3 Formatting E Mail The formatting options you have when composing a message depend on the Compose View you have selected The options described in this section apply to the message you are composing NOTE If the recipient of the item is using the HTML Read view he or she sees the e mail as you formatted it The recipient cannot change the font of an HTML formatted item If he or she is using the Plain Text Read view HTML formatting is lost However the recipient can click View gt H
451. r is a subfolder named with your e mail address 1 In Internet Explorer locate an RSS feed that you want to subscribe to 2 Click the RSS feed button or URL on the Web page 3 On the RSS feed Web page click the Subscribe link GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 14 1 3 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 4 Select the folder that is named with your e mail address as the location for the RSS feed then click Subscribe The RSS feed is immediately added to the GroupWise Feeds folder in your mailbox GroupWise 1 In your Web browser locate an RSS feed that you want to subscribe to 2 In GroupWise click File gt New gt RSS Feed to open the Subscribe to RSS dialog box 3 Copy the RSS feed URL into the Source field 4 Follow the instructions for Firefox starting with Step 7 on page 302 Reading RSS Feeds 1 In the GroupWise Feeds folder in the Folder list select the RSS feed you want to read 2 Double click the feed in the message list to view the feed in a new window or Select the feed to view it in the QuickViewer 3 In the upper right of the window click Full Page to see the full feed or Click Summary to see a summary of the feed Refreshing an RSS Feed 1 Inthe GroupWise Feeds folder in the Folder List select the RSS feed you want to refresh 2 Right click the feed you want to refresh then click Refresh Deleting an Individual RSS Entry 1 In the GroupWise Feeds folder in the Folder List select the RSS fee
452. r more filters For example you can define a filter that displays only entries with last names that begin with D Searching for Users Resources Organizations and Groups on page 213 Using Filters to Narrow an Address Search on page 213 212 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 6 5 16 Searching for Users Resources Organizations and Groups 1 In the Main Window click on the toolbar or ya Click Dis on the toolbar in an item you are composing 2 Select the address book you want to search 3 In the Look For field begin typing what you are searching for Name Completion completes the name Using Filters to Narrow an Address Search 1 In the Main Window click on the toolbar 2 Click View gt Define Custom Filter Building a Filter Find entries where Name begins with lt anything gt E Ea Cees Reset Click the first drop down list then specify the column you want to filter Click ps then specify an operator An operator is a symbol used with a condition to specify a particular value For example to create a filter that lists only users whose last name is Davis click the Last Name column click Equal To then type Davis In this example Equal To is the operator and Davis is the condition For more information see Using Advanced Find on page 230 Type the condition you want to filter by then click OK The filtered search sorts the addr
453. r the address book click the Description field then type or edit the description 6 Click OK to save your changes and close the Properties dialog box or Click Apply to apply your changes and keep the Properties dialog box open Setting Frequent Contacts Properties 1 In the Main Window click S on the toolbar 2 Click the Frequent Contacts address book 3 Click File gt Properties then click the Options tab General Options Sharing E Save addresses of items that are received E From extemal sources Intemet F From intemal sources F Save addresses of items that are sent V To extemal sources Intemet 7 To intemal sources E Delete addresses not referenced within time period Te od Mats Dae Contacts and Address Books 207 4 Select the options you want If you cannot change these options your GroupWise administrator has locked them To stop names from being placed into the Frequent Contacts address book click Auto saving off To delete names from this book select the Delete addresses not referenced within time period check box type a number in the Time period field click a time period from the drop down list from hours to years then click Delete Now to remove old addresses Click OK to save your changes and close the Properties dialog box or Click Apply to save your changes and keep the Properties dialog box open 6 5 8 Using Predefined Filters for
454. r your appointment To create a recurring appointment see Section 4 3 4 Scheduling Recurring Items on page 146 or Select All Day Event for an all day event For more information about all day events see Understanding All Day Events on page 141 6 Specify a start time and duration Duration can be in minutes hours or days 7 Specify how you want the appointment to appear as Appointments can appear as Busy Free Out of the Office or Tentative Recipients in the CC and BC fields receive the appointment as Free 8 Type a subject and message GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide a _ SSS SSS Appointment To Ishmael Yacoub Janet DeSoto ES File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help Send X Cancel Address A Busy Search gt Gl amp e amp 4 A Appointment Send Options nn From x Janet DeSoto cc To Ishmael Yacoub Janet DeSoto BC Place My Office Start date Thu Sep 4 2008 2 00PM O JAI Day Event Duration 1 Hour o Busy Subject One on One Segoe UI 0 7 By B z u E ESE sss exc Please bring any concerns you may have to our One on One Account Novell GroupWise Folder Calendar 9 If you want to make sure the people and resources for the appointment are available you can do a busy search by clicking Busy Search on the toolbar For more information see Using Bus
455. ration you want to perform The operation will affect all versions of a document Operation Change sharing Move Copy Delete Selection method Use Find dvanced Find to select documents Use Find by Example to select documents Use currently selected documents Use documents listed in a file Browse C Process errors only lt Back 3 Inthe Selection method group box click Use Find by Example to select documents then click Next Item type Document w Library Support Library Default Z Document text Document number Subject Document type Author Creator Date created Official version Current version lt Find only official document versions 4 Inthe Library drop down list click the library you want to search 5 Ineach field specify the information you want to look for 6 Click Next Document Management 349 350 7 8 10 Document xs Subject Document type B Author a Cie Ce Specify new values for any of the document properties then click Next Click Preview to see a sample of the documents that will be modified based on the Find criteria you specified You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview Specify the directory where you want to save the log file Y
456. rd drive or another network drive to store all the data in your mailbox 1 Make sure GroupWise is installed on the computer where you want to set up your Caching Mailbox 2 Click File gt Mode gt Caching or Click Caching on the drop down list above the Folder List 262 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide E Address Book is B Cachingy v G Manet DeSotoHome acg r Favorites Janet DeSoto FA ca Online M Y Caching a Training Slides M Ta Remote a From David Jones 9 4 2008 Work Offline From Janet DeSoto 9 9 2008 Janet Des Tu Marketing Briefing Notes A Sel 8 Benji Gensomino Self Review From Ishmael Yacoub 9 4 2008 F Calendar 17 8 9 10111213 BE Billing 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 f Frequent Contacts 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 Documents 28 29 30 M Tasklist Work In Progress October 2008 E Cabinet SMTWTES F Trash 1 2 35 4 5 8 9 1011 l Lunch Cafeteria B Q3 Proj act Name 0 E Today Thursday September 04 200 a Re New Program Instructions From Richard Steadman 9 4 200 83 8 3 8 8 8 sis 88 2820202 838888 3 Type the path for your Caching Mailbox then click OK GroupWise automatically updates the Caching Mailbox with an image of the Online Mailbox The initial update or priming should not be interrupted until it is complete You are prompted to restart GroupWise to change to the Caching
457. rdering the Tasklist Folder Dragging and Dropping Items to the Position You Want on page 174 Moving Items Up or Down in the Tasklist on page 175 Moving an Item to the Top or Bottom of the Tasklist on page 175 Moving an Open Item in the Tasklist on page 175 Assigning a Numerical Position to an Item on page 175 Dragging and Dropping Items to the Position You Want 1 Click Tasklist to open the Tasklist folder 2 Select the item you want to move to a different place in the Tasklist 3 Drag the item to the desired location in the Tasklist folder An arrow indicates the position where the item will be placed The item is moved to the specified position in the list 174 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Moving Items Up or Down in the Tasklist 1 Open the Tasklist folder 2 Select the item you want to move 3 Conditional To move the item up in the list click the up arrow located above the Folder List until the item is in the desired position 4 Conditional To move the item down in the list click the down arrow located above the Folder List until the item is in the desired position Moving an Item to the Top or Bottom of the Tasklist 1 Open the Tasklist folder 2 Select the item you want to move 3 Conditional To move the item to the top of the list click the Move to top arrow located above the Folder List 4 Conditional To move the item to the bottom of the list click the Mo
458. re finished with the assignment or instructions in the routed item open the item If you need to view and edit an attachment to the routed item open the attachment in its associated application make your changes then save the file The file is saved to your computer s temporary files directory Do not change the path or your changes are not included when the routed item is sent to the next recipient Close the application IMPORTANT To be able to edit attachments in a routed item you must have the GroupWise 5 5 Enhancement Pack or higher installed In the item select Actions gt Mark Completed then click OK You can also select the Completed check box in the item header If the sender has required a password to complete the item type your GroupWise password then click OK The item is sent to the next user on the route Click Close 3 1 8 Sending S MIME Secure Messages GroupWise works with security software you have installed to send secure items Understanding Secure Message Concepts on page 83 Digitally Signing or Encrypting a Message on page 85 Digitally Signing or Encrypting All Messages on page 85 Obtaining a Security Certificate from a Certificate Authority on page 86 Selecting a Security Service Provider on page 87 Selecting a Security Certificate for Digitally Signing Items on page 87 Using LDAP to Search for Recipient Encryption Certificates on page
459. re information see Section 6 4 Using Contacts Folders on page 186 If other users proxy into your mailbox they never see your Frequent Contacts folder Tasklist Folder Use the Tasklist folder f to create a task list You can move any items mail messages phone messages reminder notes tasks or appointments to this folder and arrange them in the order you want Each item is marked with a check box so that you can check off items as you complete them For more information see Chapter 5 Tasks and the Tasklist on page 167 Documents Folder Your document references are organized in the Documents folder so you can easily locate them The Documents folder includes an Authored folder for documents you have written and a Default Library folder for documents you have access to in your default library The Documents folder can contain only documents For more information see Section 15 3 Organizing Your Documents on page 313 Cabinet Folder The Cabinet A contains all of your personal folders See the following topics for information about rearranging your Cabinet folder Reorganizing Your Folders on page 48 Alphabetizing a Folder List on page 48 Getting Started 23 1 5 9 1 5 10 1 5 11 1 5 12 1 5 13 Work in Progress Folder The Work In Progress folder py is a folder where you can save messages you have started but want to finish later For more information see Saving an Unfi
460. re set at the folder level If you want to use the same display settings for multiple folders save the display settings then use that display setting for the other folders Right click any folder in the Folder List then click Properties Click the Display tab Click the display setting you want to modify in the Setting name drop down list Make any changes to the display settings in the dialog box Click Save As change the display settings name as required then click OK To delete a folder display setting click the display setting then click Delete Click OK NO O0 BB WO N GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Saving Your Display Settings After you have customized your display settings the way you like them you can save those display settings for future use The display settings are saved in the GroupWise database so they follow you from machine to machine 1 Click View gt Display Settings gt Save Current Selecting Saved Display Settings for a Folder You can select from a variety of default display settings from previously saved display settings Right click the folder to change the display settings for then click Properties Click the Display tab In the Settings name drop down list select the name of the display setting 1 2 3 4 Optional Type a description of the folder 5 Set the remaining settings as desired 6 Click OK Sending a Display Setting You can send a display setting as an attachment t
461. re the author of the document or that the creator of the document has given you rights to modify the document Make sure you know the GroupWise WebPublisher username for the publishing site from which you want to unpublish the document 1 Click the document reference for the document you want to unpublish 2 Click File gt Properties then click the Sharing tab 3 Click the GroupWise WebPublisher username in the Share List 4 Deselect View then click OK If you want to remove the document entirely in addition to unpublishing it delete the document from the library Locating and Viewing a Published Document Web users can locate and view your published documents three ways They can access the GroupWise WebPublisher site and then search for the document To do this they must know the IP address of the GroupWise WebPublisher site the library the document is in and a key word such as the title Contact your system administrator for the IP address and for library names the library names in your GroupWise system might be different from the library names that display in WebPublisher You can locate the document copy the complete URL and send it to the users You can create a separate Web page that contains links to your documents and supply users with that URL Each document published with WebPublisher must be indexed before it can be seen on the publishing site The Post Office Agent indexes documents at intervals set b
462. reate a new Share List to replace the existing Share List for each document in the group 8 Inthe Name field type the name of the user for which you want to modify sharing then click Add User Document Management 353 354 10 11 12 13 14 15 In the Share list click the name of the user for whom you want to modify sharing rights In the Rights for all versions group box click the rights you want to give the user to the selected group of documents If you want to specify sharing rights for specific versions click Version level security specify the rights for each version then click OK Click Next Click Preview to see a sample of the documents that will be modified based on the Find criteria you specified You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview Specify the directory where you want to save the log file You can click Generate a log file without performing the operation to see the outcome of the operation without actually modifying the documents Click Finish to modify the document sharing Changing Sharing Rights for Selected Documents 1 a Ff WO N 10 11 12 13 In your Mailbox or folders select the document references for the documents for which you want to change sharing rights Click Tools gt Mass Document Operations In the Operation group box click Change sharing In the Selection method group box click Use currently selected docu
463. rom your Internet service provider You can click the Browse button to find the exact location of the file Modifying the Properties of a Directory Service oa A OON a In the Main Window click on the toolbar Click the LDAP Address Book Click Directories then click a directory service Click Properties Click the Connection Searching and Field Mapping tabs to find the properties you want to modify Modify the properties then click OK Specifying the Search Criteria a Directory Service Uses oar WN In the Main Window click on the toolbar Click the LDAP Address Book Click Directories then click a directory service Click Properties Click the Searching tab then click Search Fields Select up to four fields If you want to add search fields that you do not see listed click the Field Mapping tab then click Retrieve All LDAP Fields Click a MAPI search field name then click the right arrow button to add it to the LDAP Fields List Click Apply click the Searching tab click Search Fields then select the fields you want to search The available search fields depend on the selected directory service GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 6 5 20 Many directory services allow you to search using only the Name and E Mail Address fields 7 Click OK twice then click Close twice Changing the Length of Time for Directory Service Searches In the Main Window click S on the toolbar Click the LDAP Address Boo
464. roupWise then click Next 3 Select the Address Books check box then click Next 4 Type a name for the new GroupWise personal address book that will contain the imported addresses The name you type displays on a new tab in the address book list 5 Click Next 6 Review the summary information to ensure that it is correct then click Next or Click Back to change your import options Check to see if the e mail account was successfully imported then click Done Exporting Addresses from the Address Book To export addresses from an address book in NAB Novell Address Book format 1 In the Main Window click on the toolbar 2 Click the address book from which you want to export names Select the addresses you want to export If you want to export an entire address book you don t need to select any names 4 Click File gt Export 5 Click Entire Address Book if you want to export the entire address book or Click Selected Items if you want to export the addresses you have selected 6 Type a filename for the exported file then click a folder where you want the file to be saved 7 Inthe Save as type drop down list select the file type to save the addresses as 8 You can save the file as a Novell Address Book nab a vCard vcf or a comma separated file csv Novell address book files are text files with specific formatting GroupWise 8 nab files use UTF 8 character encoding and cannot be importe
465. rovider based on the encryption strength of the certificate you are using The encryption strength of a certificate depends on the encryption strength of the browser used to obtain the certificate For example if you have Internet Explorer with 128 bit encryption installed the encryption is high and only works with Microsoft Enhanced Cryptographic Provider 8 Click OK 9 Double click Certificates click the certificate you want to use then click Set As Default 10 Click OK then click Close GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Selecting a Security Service Provider 1 Inthe Main window click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Security then click the Send Options tab 3 Select a security service provider from the Name drop down list 4 Click OK then click Close The security service provider you select takes effect as soon as you log in to the provider if login is required The options and encryption methods available depend on the security service provider you have selected The ability to select security service provider options in an item is disabled You must do it from the Main Window Selecting a Security Certificate for Digitally Signing Items If you are using Entrust there is only one security certificate These instructions apply to other security providers 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Certificates 3 Click the certificate name 4 Click Set As Default 5 Click OK then click Close Using
466. rrently selected documents then click Next In the Select library to move documents to list box click the destination library then click Next Specify the directory where you want to save the log file You can click Generate a log file without performing the move operation to see the outcome of the move without actually moving the documents If you are a librarian in the destination library you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents you are copying Allow Documents With Validation Errors To Be Created or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors Click Finish to move the documents Moving a Group of Documents Listed in a File 1 2 3 4 Click Tools gt Mass Document Operations In the Operation group box click Move In the Selection method group box click Use documents listed in a file Specify the name of the file that contains the list of documents you want to move then click Next You can specify any text file ASCII or ANSI as the source file for a move operation as long as the file contains a list of document IDs If you re creating a file make sure that each document ID is at the beginning of a line and that there is only one document per line If the file you specify is a log file from a previous move operation you can click Process errors only and GroupWise
467. rs you don t want to search Click OK to begin the Find messages from two or three users at once Select the Find only official document versions check box to locate only the official document version of a document with multiple versions Narrowing a Global Find You can use Find to narrow your search Inthe first field of the Find dialog box type the uncommon words you notice in the item If you search using common words the results of your search are likely too large to be very helpful To increase the speed of your search deselect the folders and libraries you know do not contain the item you are looking for For example if you know your document is not in Library C click the plus sign next to All Libraries in the Look in box then click Library C to deselect it GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide If you are searching for more than one word or want to search for words in a particular field of an item like the Subject field click Advanced Find to set up your search The words you type can be combined with operators to further narrow the search Ifyou cannot find the document or message check your search criteria for misspelled words Also check the syntax of your search to make sure you are telling Find to search for exactly what you want 7 2 3 Finding an Item by Example 1 Click Tools gt Find then click the Find By Example tab Find p Find Find by Example Item type Mail
468. ry Change the document properties author document type subject an so on of a group of documents in the library Change the sharing rights to a group of documents in the library Reset a document s status Use the GroupWise third party APIs to generate reports on all the documents in the library 344 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 15 4 Viewing Document Properties in Remote and Caching Modes The librarian can see all the properties of a document while in Remote and Caching mode however the librarian can t change the author or sharing rights of a document while he or she is using Remote or Caching mode Librarians and Older Versions of GroupWise If a librarian accesses a library using an older version of the GroupWise client such as GroupWise 5 1 or 5 2 he or she does not have librarian access to documents because neither the Manage right nor the librarian role existed in earlier releases of GroupWise Copying a Group of Documents You can copy groups of documents by using the Mass Document Operations Wizard To copy a group of documents you must have View rights to each document or you must be a librarian for the library In addition you must have Add rights in the library to which you want to copy the documents Copying a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example on page 345 Copying a Group of Selected Documents on page 347 Copying a Group of Documents Listed in a File
469. ry when GroupWise is open See Using Reset Document Status on page 368 Replacing a Document with a Backup File You can replace a document in the library with a file you ve restored from a backup system or with any other file This is useful if documents have become corrupt through machine failures network problems and so on To do this you must be a librarian in the GroupWise library where the document is found or you must be a librarian in any GroupWise library and have Edit rights to the document If a file needs to be restored from a backup system and you are uncertain which one to restore you can see a list of all the BLOB filenames that have ever been assigned to that document version A BLOB binary large object is a document that has been compressed and encrypted in a GroupWise library To restore a file from a backup follow the directions for your standard backup software Then you can replace the corrupt document with the restored file in GroupWise by using Replace Document with Backup You can use this feature in Remote Mode only if the document has been downloaded and marked In Use 1 Click the document reference 2 Click Tools gt Replace Document with Backup Document Management 369 3 If necessary look at the entire list of BLOB filenames that have been assigned to that document version and decide which file needs to be restored from backup files or Skip to Step 6 4 If necessary exit GroupWise Using
470. s LDAP Address Books are marked with a 4 icon You can connect to an LDAP server through Secure Sockets Layer SSL to assure increased security for the LDAP Address Books you access Connecting through SSL requires that you have a digital certificate which enables GroupWise to use SSL to authenticate to the LDAP server you have chosen After you complete a directory service search you can add the names you find to your personal address books While using Remote or Caching mode you can perform a directory service search without connecting to GroupWise Understanding Contacts Folders The Frequent Contacts folder in the GroupWise Folder List represents the Frequent Contacts address book Additional Contacts folders represent your personal address books Figure 6 1 Main Window Showing a Contacts Folder EJ Novell GroupWise Frequent Contacts ago x File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help Home Mai lbox 8 Calendar Sent Items G Address Book O BQ Qnewmai NewAppt M NewTask E A A l6 8 New Contact New Resource New Organization ga New Group 3 v m 3 Online x Frequent Contacts Find A j 8 Ahman Dharmapalan Conference Room 8 Ishmael Yacoub gt S New Hires P Family adharmapalan Corporate net Office Phone 11055 jyacoub Corporate net mla Cod E Janet DeSoto Department Marketing Department Marketing A Office Ph
471. s on page 226 Organizing Contacts with Categories Like with other items in GroupWise you can assign categories to your contacts This can help you organize your contacts by giving contacts an identifying color Categories that have been assigned to contacts are shown in the contact folder as well as the address selector For more information about the address selector see Section 6 3 2 Using the Address Selector on page 183 To assign a category to a contact 1 Click a Contacts folder 2 Right click the name of a contact 3 Click Categories then click the category that you want to assign to the contact For more information about using categories see Section 2 2 Using Categories to Organize Items on page 40 Sending a Contact 1 Click a Contacts folder 2 Double click a contact Click Send Contact to open a Mail To window with the contact s information attached to the message in vCard format 4 Address and send the message as usual The recipient can import the contact into a personal address book as described in Importing Contacts from a vCard on page 216 TIP You can also attach a contact to an item by dragging and dropping it from a Contacts folder into the Attachments window of a new message Changing the Display Name of a Contact The display name is the name that displays when you begin typing in the To or BC or CC field of a message When you begin typing a name for example
472. s open When printing is complete close the application Displaying a Header To display a header on the page when printing an item 1 Right click a text item then click Printer gt Print Options 2 Inthe Job Name field add a f to display the filename and a p to display the path 3 Click OK Changing the Default Printed Font Size on Plain Text Items To change the default printed font size on plain text items 1 Open the e mail you want to print 2 Click File gt Print gt Print Options 3 Click Change under Default font and select the desired font and size 4 Click OK then click OK again to save the changes Printing an Item List The print list feature prints a list of all e mails listed in the selected folder 1 Select a folder 2 Select an item in the folder 3 Click File gt Print gt Print List Configuring the Default Print Option for Distribution Lists When you print an item that has a distribution list you can select to print the entire list or a short distribution list If you select print a short distribution list one line of the distribution list is printed 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Environment 2 Click the Default Actions tab then in the Printing group box select Print short distribution list or Print full distribution list Handling Unwanted E Mail Spam Use Junk Mail Handling to decide what to do with unwanted Internet e mail and calendar appointments also known as spam t
473. s such as adding an account setting account properties and sending and retrieving items from Internet mail accounts 1 Click Accounts gt Account Options 2 Click the account you want to modify Accounts Se Mail News Close Marked A Account Type Incoming Server V Novell GroupWise def V My PO POP3 some_server com 2 v My IMA IMAP4 some_other_ser Gels Set Default General Options Folde 3 Click Properties 4 Click the tabs to find the properties you want to modify 5 Modify the properties then click OK For IMAP4 accounts if you change the account name the name of the IMAP4 folder is also changed 12 4 Using POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts POP3 and IMAP4 accounts let you access your e mail that is stored on other e mail systems that support POP3 and IMAP4 Most e mail systems support this type of connection to download and view your e mail Section 12 4 1 Using POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts in Online Mode on page 288 Section 12 4 2 Using POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts in Remote and Caching Modes on page 289 Section 12 4 3 Changing the Length of Time for POP3 and IMAP4 Server Timeouts on page 289 Section 12 4 4 Using SSL to Connect to a POP3 or IMAP4 Server on page 289 Section 12 4 5 Downloading Items from POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts on page 289 Section 12 4 6 Sending POP3 and IMAP4 Mail from GroupWise on page 290 Section 12 4 7 Deleti
474. s 2 Mi tit l Account Novell GroupWise Folder Calendar In the To field type a username then press Enter Repeat for additional users If necessary type usernames in the CC and BC fields or To select usernames from a list click Address on the toolbar double click each user then click OK 3 To change the From name to another account or proxy click From then click a name 4 Optional Type a subject and the reminder note message 5 Inthe Start Date field type the date this reminder note should appear in the recipients Calendars Calendar 145 4 3 4 or Click to specify a start date or auto date for your reminder note You can specify many options such as making this reminder note a high priority requesting a reply from recipients and more by clicking the Send Options tab 6 Click Send on the toolbar Scheduling Recurring Items Use Auto Date to schedule recurring appointments tasks and reminder notes Auto Dates can occur on the same day every week for example every Monday the same days of the month for example the 15th and last day or any other defined series of dates You can also use Auto Date to schedule irregular or infrequent events such as holidays When you send an Auto Date item GroupWise copies the item and places one of the defined dates in each copy of the item For example if you define five dates for the event GroupWise makes five copies o
475. s Book Properties 206 6 5 8 Using Predefined Filters for the Frequent Contacts Address Book 208 6 5 9 Sharing an Address Book with Another User 208 6 5 10 Accepting a Shared Address Book 209 6 5 11 Synchronizing Address Book Entries 210 6 5 12 Displaying Quick Info 2 210 6 5 13 Viewing Contacts Groups Organizations or Resources in an Address Book 211 6 5 14 Editing a Distribution List in the GroupWise Address Book 212 6 5 15 Searching for Address Book Entries 212 6 5 16 Customizing an Address Book Display 213 6 5 17 Sorting an Address Book 215 6 5 18 Importing and Exporting Addresses and Address Books 215 6 5 19 Using the LDAP Address Book 219 6 5 20 Advanced Address Book Options 221 6 6 Printing Labels and Lists from the Address Book 222 6 6 1 Printing Labels osie sek scx telat Eh dae ei ae chi a hte 222 6 6 2 Printing Fists L Etat dee bet dark dhl NE od din pec donne Ab oad Sap en dy Dad 223 Finding Items 225
476. s New in GroupWise 8 403 A 6 A 7 A 7 1 Address Book Several Address Book enhancements have been made to the GroupWise 8 Windows client Some of the key improvements include Importing and Exporting Contacts You can now import contacts from the Contacts folder instead of opening the Address Book In addition you can now import contacts from a CSV file as well as export contacts in a CSV file See Section 6 5 18 Importing and Exporting Addresses and Address Books on page 215 Contact Birthday Anniversary When you add a contact s birthday and anniversary in the contact s information you can select to have the contact s birthday and anniversary show as a reminder note in the calendar Contacts Folder The Contacts folder now displays a list of all personal address books under the Contacts folder for quicker access to your personal address books Address Card View A new address card view has been created which allows you to add a picture to a contact The address card view is a condensed view of the contact information along with a picture Integrations with Other Novell Products Using GroupWise in conjunction with other Novell products can enhance your collaboration experience Section A 7 1 Novell Vibe OnPrem and Novell Teaming on page 404 Section A 7 2 Novell Conferencing on page 405 Novell Vibe OnPrem and Novell Teaming NOTE Novell Vibe OnPrem 3 is the next product release af
477. s client software Replace jawsdir with the directory that JAWS is installed in Accessibility for People with Disabilities 417 2 Copy all the files to the C groupwisedir directory Replace groupwisedir with the GroupWise installation directory By default the GroupWise installation directory is located at C Program Files Novell GroupWise If you need to make changes to the GroupWise JAWS source files they are located on the GroupWise 8 DVD or in a download of the GroupWise Windows client software The GroupWise JAWS source files are located at client jaws sre 418 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide F 1 F 2 F 3 Documentation Updates This section lists updates to the GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide that have been made since the initial release of GroupWise 8 This information helps you keep current on documentation updates and in some cases software updates such as a Support Pack release The information is grouped according to the date when the GroupWise 8 Windows User Client Guide was republished The GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide has been updated on the following dates Section F 1 June 27 2011 Compatibility with Vibe OnPrem on page 419 Section F 2 December 9 2010 Compatibility with Vibe OnPrem on page 419 Section F 3 July 14 2010 GroupWise 8 0 2 on page 419 Section F 4 August 31 2009 GroupWise 8 0 1 on page 420 June 27 2011 Compatibility w
478. s eee kat el wan ea ee eos GN oe ee te 238 7 5 Comparing the GroupWise Find Methods 238 7 5 1 Comparing Search Results 238 7 5 2 Comparing Find Functionality 2 239 7 5 3 Comparing GroupWise Versions 240 Notify 241 8 1 Understanding Notify 2 42 snc eet fo Gee levee ee oa ee eS ee eee RO E 241 8 22 Starting NOU n oana gaara cok nat eles din es aed entente nanas do eee 242 8 2 1 Starting Notify When GroupWise Starts 242 8 2 2 Starting Notify from the Windows Start Menu 242 8 3 Using Notie 2 rares Mure tn than mener ane node E ni ase hee 242 84 Customizing Notify oiea sa kd dt vet ate ead ee eee Pome M i La 243 8 4 1 Setting How Long to Display the Notification 243 Contents 7 8 8 4 2 Setting Notification for New Items 243 8 4 3 Setting Which Folders to Check for New Items 243 8 4 4 Setting How Often to Check for New ltems 244 8 4 5 Setting How to Be Notified for Calendar Alarms 244 8 4 6 Setting How to Be Notified about Outgoing Message Status 244 8 4 7 Setting How to Be Notifie
479. s for Reading Use this option to speed up load time when a user has added extra graphics and images like backgrounds and signatures to his or her default view This option eliminates the added features and shows a default message This option does not modify changes in the sent messages such as font or size unless the changes were actually saved as part of the view 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Environment 3 Click the Views tab 4 Select Use default views for reading Setting the Default Read Compose View and Font Click Tools gt Options Double click Environment Click the Views tab Make selections in the Default Compose View amp Font and Default Read View amp Font group boxes a Ff O N Optional In the Default Read View amp Font group box select Force view next to Plain Text if you want to prevent HTML only messages from being displayed when no plain text version is available If you select Force view a message informs you whenever an HTML only message cannot be displayed however you can still click View gt HTML to view it If you do not select Force view HTML only messages are displayed in HTML even though you have selected Plain Text for the default read view 6 Select a default font style 7 Select a default font size 8 Click OK GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 2 1 7 2 1 8 To change the view in one item 1 Open an item 2 Click View then click Plain Text or HTM
480. s the busy information as well as the subject of the appointment Full Details Sends the busy time and all the information associated with your calendar items Select Include Private Items to include private items Select Include Attachments to include attachments Click OK A new e mail message is generated with a ics attachment Specify who you want to send the message to then click Send Exporting a Calendar When you export a calendar the calendar is exported as an Internet Calendar Internet Calendar attachments have the file extension of ics 1 2 3 4 Right click the calendar to export then click Export Type a filename for the item in the File name field To save the item in a different directory than is shown browse to the new directory Click Save Importing a Calendar You can import a calendar that has been saved as a ics file For information about saving a calendar as a file see Section 4 2 6 Exporting a Calendar on page 135 1 2 Right click the Calendar tab or right click the main calendar then click Import Calendar Specify the filename of the calendar you want to import including the path to the file or click Browse and locate the file Conditional If you want to rename the calendar specify a new name otherwise leave the existing name in the Name field If the name specified for the new calendar is the same as a calendar you already have the new calendar is added into the existing c
481. s through this method For more information see Section 15 19 Replacing a Document with a Backup File on page 369 4 To exit your backed up mailbox click File gt Open Backup Repairing Your Mailbox Periodic mailbox maintenance keeps GroupWise running smoothly Occasionally mailbox maintenance is required to resolve a problem with a mailbox or other GroupWise database GroupWise client users can perform the following mailbox maintenance actions by using the Repair Mailbox feature Section 16 7 1 Understanding Mailbox Maintenance on page 382 Section 16 7 2 Deciding Whether Your Mailbox Needs Repair on page 383 Section 16 7 3 Installing GroupWise Check on page 383 Section 16 7 4 Analyzing and Fixing Databases on page 383 Section 16 7 5 Rebuilding the Mailbox Structure on page 384 Understanding Mailbox Maintenance The mailbox maintenance actions are performed on the mailbox to which the user is currently connected such as the Caching mailbox the Remote mailbox or the Archive The Repair Mailbox function is only available in the menu if you are in Caching Remote or Archive mode In Online mode your GroupWise Mailbox resides in the post office to which you belong and maintenance of your Online Mailbox is performed by your GroupWise administrator In other modes you can perform some of your own maintenance depending on what GroupWise client features you are using Archive
482. s under the subfolder How you subscribe to RSS feeds depends on your Web browser Instructions for setting up RSS feeds from two popular browsers are provided as examples If the RSS feed functionality of your browser does not interact successfully with GroupWise you can set up an RSS feed from within GroupWise Section 14 1 1 Firefox on page 301 Section 14 1 2 Internet Explorer on page 302 Section 14 1 3 GroupWise on page 303 Firefox Version 3 x x on page 301 Version 2 x x on page 302 Version 3 x x 1 In Firefox click Tools gt Options 2 Select Applications then search for Web Feed 3 Under Action select Use other 4 Browse to and select grpwise exe then click Open RSS Feeds 301 14 1 2 302 5 Locate an RSS feed that you want to subscribe to 6 Click the RSS feed button or URL on the RSS feed Web page to open the Subscribe to RSS dialog box The Source field is automatically filled in with the RSS feed URL 7 Specify the name of the folder that you want to create for the RSS feed in GroupWise 8 Select how often you want GroupWise to update the RSS feed 10 11 12 Optional Select if you want to remove the entries from the folder when they are removed from the server Optional Select if you want to download the entire page with each item This displays the entire feed instead of a summary of the feed but requires more disk space Optional Select if yo
483. s when close them Prompt to connect to intemet W Use graphical emoticons _ Always accept invitations to conferences without prompting User interface language English V Remember my password 2 Select the options you want then click OK Novell Messenger 391 392 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 18 1 Novell Vibe OnPrem NOTE Novell Vibe OnPrem is the new name for Novell Teaming Regardless of whether you are currently using Vibe or Teaming with GroupWise the integration with GroupWise is essentially the same GroupWise 8 0 2 and later provides tight integrations with Novell Vibe OnPrem which can enhance your GroupWise collaboration experience by providing additional tools and functionality that are not inherent in e mail applications such as persistent discussion forums that allow users to join ongoing conversations powerful workflows that automate daily processes team workspaces that enable people to work together and more Before you can use Vibe OnPrem with GroupWise as discussed in this section Vibe must be installed and set up by your GroupWise administrator as described in the Novell Vibe OnPrem 3 1 Installation Guide http www novell com documentation vibe_onprem31 vibeprem31_inst data bookinfo html and in Configuring GroupWise for Use with Novell Vibe in the GroupWise 8 Interoperability Guide This section describes important ways that you can leverage Vibe OnPrem functio
484. se is installed on the shared computer 7 Select a folder for your Remote Mailbox files then click OK This folder should not be shared with other users 8 To run GroupWise against your Remote Mailbox each user should log in to Windows with a unique username before starting GroupWise Configuring Your Remote Connections When you run GroupWise in Remote mode you can connect to your Online GroupWise system through a modem connection a network direct connection or a TCP IP connection When you use Hit the Road to set up your Remote Mailbox GroupWise creates the appropriate connections based on how you are currently running GroupWise You can create new connections as well as change or delete existing ones Connections on page 269 Creating a Modem Connection on page 270 Creating a TCP IP Connection on page 272 Creating a Network Connection on page 272 Copying a Remote Connection on page 273 Editing a Remote Connection on page 273 Deleting a Remote Connection on page 273 Specifying Your Remote Location on page 273 Connections You can switch among connection types if there are no pending requests on the connection you are switching from For example if you re retrieving and sending items with a network connection and you disconnect before the transmission is complete you should not switch to a modem connection to process the requests Complete the original reques
485. se is started Retains the saved messages on disk but does not recover them in GroupWise The next time that GroupWise is started the same window reappears Enabling or Disabling Auto Save By default Auto Save is enabled 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Environment 2 Click the General tab then select Disable auto save to disable Auto Save or Deselect Disable auto save to enable Auto Save 3 Click OK Saving an Unfinished E Mail 1 Inan open item click File gt Save Draft 2 Click the folder you want to save the item to then click OK The draft message is placed in the folder you chose in Step 2 The default folder for unfinished messages is the Work In Progress folder Selecting Send Options Changing the Priority of E Mail You Send on page 92 Concealing the Subject of E Mail You Send on page 92 Delaying Delivery of an Item on page 92 Setting an Expiration Date for E Mail You Send on page 93 Changing the Security Setting Classification of All Items You Send on page 93 Changing the MIME Encoding for E Mail You Send on page 93 E Mail 91 92 Changing the Priority of E Mail You Send 1 To change the priority of one item open an item click Send Options gt General or To change the priority of all items you send click Tools gt Options gt Send gt Send Options 2 Select High Priority Standard Priority or Low Priority The small icon next to a
486. senger Contact List 1 In GroupWise click Tools gt Messenger gt Contact List Displaying the Novell Messenger Presence Status In GroupWise you can see the Novell Messenger presence information for people who are in your corporate address book The presence information is displayed in three places the Quick Info in the To CC and BC fields of an item the From field of a received item and the Quick Info of a contact in the Address Book From Novell Messenger you can send a message to contacts who are online or idle 390 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 17 6 17 7 17 8 Adding Contacts from GroupWise to Novell Messenger 1 From an address book in GroupWise drag and drop the contact in to your Novell Messenger Contact List Specifying Whether to Start Novell Messenger When GroupWise Starts 1 In GroupWise click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Environment 3 On the General tab select or deselect Launch Messenger at startup If you are running both GroupWise and Novell Messenger and you exit GroupWise Novell Messenger continues to run until you also exit it Displaying Novell Messenger Options 1 In GroupWise click Tools gt Messenger gt Preferences Options xJ General Message V Run Novell Messenger when Windows starts Alerts Privacy V Show contact list when Novell Messenger starts Appearance History V Show me as Idle when I m inactivefor 49 minutes V Prompt to save conversation
487. sername make sure you have the correct username for your publishing purposes 1 Click the document reference for the document you want to publish 2 Click File gt Properties then click the Sharing tab Documents Document Version Sharing Activity Log I Personalize Not shared Shared with Name Share list Name Security lt Creator Access gt View Edit Delete Share Modify lt General User Access gt Denied Marie Lamaroux View Rights for all versions Status Available OK Css 3 Click Shared with 4 Type the name of the GroupWise WebPublisher user in the Name field then click Add User View rights for the official version are automatically granted to this user 5 Click OK Document Management 325 15 6 3 If you want users to see a version other than the official version you must specify the document and version number in the URL of the document Locate the document and copy the complete URL Modify the part of the URL that specifies Library ID Document Number Version Send the modified URL to other users or use it to create links to your documents on a separate Web page you have created Each document published with WebPublisher must be indexed before it can be seen on the publishing site If you use Find to search for your document in GroupWise and the document is found in its library the document has been indexed Unpublishing a Document from the Web Make sure you a
488. sion Level Security EASA Designate the security options for the selected name s on a version level Official version V View Edit Delete Share Current version V View Edit Delete Share Other versions View Edit Delete Share 7 Select the check box for each right you want the user to have for the version type then click OK twice Users must have sharing rights to put the document reference in a shared folder Giving Users Rights to Modify the Sharing Settings for a Document You must be the creator or author of a document to grant rights to modify security settings Click the document reference in your Mailbox Click File gt Properties Click the Sharing tab Click Shared with In the Name field type the name of the person or group you want to grant Modify Security rights to then click Add User 6 Click the user s name in the Share list click Modify Security then click OK a Ff OD Preventing Other Users from Accessing a Document 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox 2 Click File gt Properties 3 Click the Sharing tab Document Management 323 15 6 15 6 1 15 6 2 Document 3 P ES Document Version Sharing Activity Log Personalize Not shared Shared with Name Share list Name Security Rights for all versions Status Available Cancel 4 Click Not shared then click OK Publishing Documents to the Web with WebPublisher WebPublisher is a compo
489. sk or Reminder Note from the Calendar View on page 153 Delegating an Appointment Task or Reminder Note from the Main Window 1 In the Item list click a task reminder note or appointment 2 Click Actions gt Delegate In the To field type a username then press Enter or To select a username from a list click Address on the toolbar double click the user then click OK 4 Type any additional comments to the recipient 5 Click Send on the toolbar 6 Click Yes if you want this item to remain in your Calendar or Click No if you want this item deleted from your Calendar Delegating an Appointment Task or Reminder Note from the Calendar View 1 Ina Calendar view right click a task reminder note or appointment then click Delegate 2 Inthe To field type a username then press Enter or To select a username from a list click Address on the toolbar double click the user then click OK 3 Type any additional comments to the recipient Calendar 153 4 Click Send on the toolbar 5 Click Yes if you want the item to remain in your Calendar or Click No if you want the item deleted from your Calendar 4 4 4 Changing Calendar Item Types You can drag an item from one folder to another to change the item type of that object For example drag a task to the Appointments List to change it to an appointment Changing the Type of an Item in Your Calendar on page 154 Changing a Posted Item to a Group Item on pa
490. splay QuickViewer QuickViewer at Bottom QuickViewer at Right 4 Click OK then click Close 2 1 2 Customizing Individual GroupWise Appearance Settings There are several ways to change the GroupWise appearance 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Environment gt Appearance 3 Select the appearance settings you want for GroupWise 34 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Reply Format Editors Viewers Signature Appearance Choose a Scheme Schemes i lt Choose Individual Settings v Display Main Menu v Display Folder List W Display Nav Bar v Favorites Folder List o Simple Folder List Z Display Main Toolbar 71 Full Folder List V Use GroupWise Color Schemes Long Folder List sku Blue E Display QuickViewer QuickViewer at Bottom QuickViewer at Right Schemes See Section 2 1 1 Selecting a GroupWise Scheme on page 33 Display Main Menu Displays the Main Menu above the Nav Bar Display Nav Bar Displays the Nav Bar for quick access to your most used folders Display Main Toolbar Displays the Main Toolbar for quick access to your most common functions Use GroupWise Color Schemes Overrides any operating system color schemes for the selected GroupWise color scheme Display Folder List Displays the Folder List on the left side of the window Favorites Folder List Displays a cu
491. st Item select whether you want new items to be created as discussion notes or tasks 4 Click OK Tasks and the Tasklist 171 172 Moving an Item from Another Folder to the Tasklist Folder A common way to place items in the Tasklist folder is to move those items from other folders For example you might receive an appointment for a meeting where you are expected to give a brief presentation You can drag that appointment to your Tasklist folder so it reminds you that you have a presentation coming up 1 Open the folder containing the item you want to make into a task then select that item 2 Drag the selected item to the Tasklist folder in the Full Folder List To access the Full Folder List click the folder list drop down arrow above the Folder List it is to the right of Online or Caching then click Full You can move items to the Tasklist folder from a shared folder only if you are the owner of the shared folder 3 Open the newly moved item and select the Tasklist tab lt Task From David Jones File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help M Accept M Decine 3 Close Ei Reply BORepy Al 7 gt a sf Task Properties Personalize Tasklist Discussion Thread Order 1 Top Move to Bottom Completed Due on Thu Sep 4 2008 E Complete 0 Subject Training Slides Please prepare your slides for the training You can also assign an order number if desired or move the task to the
492. standard backup software restore the file 5 Start GroupWise and repeat Step 1 and Step 2 6 Specify the path and filename for the file that will replace the document 370 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 16 1 16 1 1 16 1 2 Maintaining GroupWise You can adapt GroupWise to your specific needs by archiving and backing up messages changing your password repairing your mailbox and more Section 16 1 Managing Non Standard Login Requirements on page 371 Section 16 2 Managing Mailbox Passwords on page 372 Section 16 3 Archiving E Mail on page 375 Section 16 4 Using Mailbox Storage Size Information on page 379 Section 16 5 Using Remote Library Disk Space Management on page 381 Section 16 6 Backing Up E Mail on page 381 Section 16 7 Repairing Your Mailbox on page 382 Section 16 8 Managing Trash on page 385 Section 16 9 GroupWise Support Information on page 387 Managing Non Standard Login Requirements Section 16 1 1 Logging In to Your Mailbox from Another User s Workstation on page 371 Section 16 1 2 Logging In to Your Mailbox from a Shared Workstation on page 371 Logging In to Your Mailbox from Another User s Workstation 1 Log in to the network with your own user ID or To force the GroupWise Startup dialog box to display right click the GroupWise icon on the desktop click Properties then click the Shortcut tab
493. standing the Main Menu 19 1 4 3 Understanding the Nav Bar 20 1 4 4 Understanding the Main Toolbar 20 1 4 5 Understanding Item Lists 2 21 125 _ Exploring the Folder List ieran yenne eaten bake he we ee nt re VS en 21 1 5 1 Home Folder 4828 dea tts Gee Sh oe at at ed She os 22 1 5 2 Mailbox Folder Sors se seis soe Oe Fee a ae Ged ae ane ees ye ad Bla geek some es 22 1 5 3 Sent Items Folder iseci ot ee ee ee eg eee 23 1 5 4 sGal ndat Folder in tissus nn ere ach yee dde eked Aan ee lene ne Beg lee as 23 1 5 5 Frequent Contacts Folder 2 23 1 5 6 Tasklist Folder frs pad ss lines aes a Seep ade Av pep ale Rope ecg wha queen bones 23 1 5 7 Documents Folder is 254 peeks eee ed eee Seid Ee EOE ee ee CE ee Be 23 1 58 Cabinet Folders jit 2588886 an a te eh acre in Aube Slane add bas Bese 23 1 5 9 Workin Progress Folder 24 1 56 10 Junk Mail Folder teia aoe aed msn ne rene Mean ag Gopi Sora Goer oes 24 t511 Trash Folder gece coe sd bor eae ie aoe fan Wate eae eee Le a ye 24 1 5 12 Shared Folders sier c2ccc kena Pie end de Ye YS eee Se ee Se A 24 1 5 13 IMAP4 Account Folder 24 1 5 14 NNTP News
494. stomized list of folders vr Favorites Mailbox Calendar M Tasklist Home Bugs User Comments Simple Folder List Displays only the folders that relate to the folder you are in For example if you are in your Mailbox folder it displays the Cabinet folder so that you can file messages 1 Cabinet En Weekly Reports Meeting Notes Personal Getting Organized 35 If you are in the Calendar folder it lists personal calendars If you are in the Frequent Contacts folder it lists personal Contacts folders If you are in the Documents folder it lists documents Full Folder List Displays the complete list of folders A Kuan Huang Home ETS amp Sent Items F Calendar H E Frequent Contacts Documents W Tasklist E7 Work In Progress E O Cabinet Trash Long Folder List If the QuickViewer is displayed select this option to extend the Folder List to the bottom of the QuickViewer when it is displayed below the Item List rather than to the right Display QuickViewer Select this option to display the QuickViewer or leave it deselected to prevent the QuickViewer from displaying You can also customize individual folders for QuickViewer display Right click a folder then click Properties gt Display Select or deselect Remember QuickViewer visibility and Show QuickViewer as needed QuickViewer at Bottom If Display QuickViewer is selected this option displays the QuickViewer at the bottom of the window
495. subject line get the contents of mail messages regardless of size or to get the contents of any messages smaller than the sizes you specify This option helps you limit the sizes of messages you retrieve from your mailbox Limiting the sizes of messages speeds download times and preserves space however you might not get the complete messages 5 Select whether to synchronize options between the caching mailbox and your online mailbox Specify whether and when to refresh your address books and rules 7 Click OK 11 1 5 Working in Caching Mode Some GroupWise features work slightly differently in Caching mode than they do in Online mode The Accounts menu is displayed in Caching mode but not in Online mode In the Sent Items folder the number in square brackets shows how many items are pending to be sent from Caching mode If you try to exit GroupWise while items are pending a message warns you that you have unsent items If you change any mailbox options under Tools gt Options while working in Caching mode the settings are transferred to your Online mailbox Changes in shared folders are updated whenever you connect to the master GroupWise system Changes in shared calendars are updated whenever you connect to the master GroupWise system When items are archived from your Caching mailbox they are also removed from your Online mailbox during the next synchronization If you have a POP3 or IMAP4 account you have
496. subject name in the Subject field 5 To save the item in a different directory than is shown in the Current directory field click Browse then select the new directory or To save the item in a different GroupWise Library click the drop down list then select a library name 6 If you are saving to disk select Report file name conflicts to be prompted before replacing a file with the same name 7 Ifyou are saving to a GroupWise Library make sure Set properties using default values is selected unless you want to specify document properties at this time 8 Click Save then click Close Setting Calendar Alarms GroupWise can sound an alarm to remind you of an upcoming appointment It can also send an alarm to an electronic pager In addition you can choose to open a file or to run a program when the alarm goes off For example you can set an appointment to back up your files when you aren t at work and your computer is on Section 4 5 1 Setting the Default Alarm on page 155 Section 4 5 2 Setting an Alarm on a Calendar Item on page 156 Section 4 5 3 Sending an Alarm to an Electronic Pager on page 156 Setting the Default Alarm In Calendar Options you can specify a default that automatically sets an alarm each time you accept an appointment 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Click Calendar gt General 3 Select Appointment and or All Day Event in the Accept Options box 4 Set the amount of time bef
497. t Using a File as a Template to Create a Document 1 Click File gt New gt Document 2 Click Select a File New Document Select an application GroupWise template le Enter filename Library where document will be stored Support Library Default v 3 Type the name of the file you want to use as a template for the new document You can also click the Browse button to find the file 4 Click OK 5 Type a subject To specify additional information about the document such as author name or document type click Properties after you type the subject 6 Click OK 312 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 2 2 15 2 3 15 3 Making Any Document a Template All documents with the document type Template appear in the Templates list in the New Documents dialog box 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox 2 Click File gt Properties 3 Inthe Document type field type template then click OK Creating a Reference to a Document If a document already exists in the library you can create a reference for it in your Mailbox 1 Click File gt New gt Document Reference Select Document Folders Available Documents f Janet DeSoto Home Name Subject Modified am Mailbox 1 amp Sent Items P Authored 06 26 08 10 17 fl Calendar pP Default Library 06 26 08 10 17 8 Frequent Contacts A METEEN Work Assignment 09 04 08 2 25 P 2 Documents M Taskl
498. t s public security certificate 1 Make sure you have a security certificate and that you have selected the security service provider you want to use 2 Open an item view 3 Click the To field type a username then press Enter Repeat for additional users 4 Click to digitally sign the item 5 Click A to encrypt the item 6 Type a subject and message 7 Click Send on the toolbar If you receive a Recipient Certificate Not Found message when you attempt to send the item one of the following is true 1 You are trying to encrypt an item for a recipient and don t have his or her public certificate 2 The e mail address in the public certificate does not match the recipient s e mail address or 3 There is no e mail address in the recipient s public certificate and the recipient s e mail address cannot be verified If 1 is true you need to obtain the recipient s public security certificate If 2 or 3 is true click Find Certificate to locate the recipient s certificate Digitally Signing or Encrypting All Messages 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Security then click the Send Options tab E Mail 85 86 Security Options LES Password Notify Proxy Access Send Options Conceal subject Require password to complete routed item Select a security service provider Name Microsoft Enhanced Cryptographic Provider v1 0 X Logoff No Secure item options Sign digitally Encrypt for recipients Advanced op
499. t 5 29 11 Items that were created before May 29 2011 Created lt 5 29 11 Items that were created on or before May 29 2011 Using Wildcard Characters and Switches in Advanced Finds and Rules The wildcard characters and switches are available in the Advanced Find dialog box and the Define Conditions dialog box only when you selected certain fields that require you to type additional text They are applicable only when you select the Contains operator Wildcard Character s and Switches AND amp or a space OR or NOT or NOCASE default What the Find or Rule Will Match All items that meet two or more conditions For example mountain amp goat mountain AND goat and mountain goat all find items containing the words mountain and goat All items that meet one of two or more conditions For example mountain goat and mountain OR goat both find items containing mountain or goat or both words All items containing one condition but not the other For example mountain goat and mountain NOT goat both find items containing the word mountain but not the word goat Items that contain both are not included All text found within quotation marks For example mountain goats finds all items containing the phrase mountain goats This does not work with documents or document references Matches any one character For example jo n finds all items containing the word j
500. t click Properties then click the Signature tab 3 Change your signature text 4 Click OK For more information about signatures see Adding a Signature or vCard on page 79 Setting a Remote Password To use Remote mode you must have a password set in Online mode When you run in Remote Mode you must use the same password as your Online Mailbox For more information about passwords see Section 1 3 Assigning a Password to Your Mailbox on page 18 Understanding Remote Connection Types When you run GroupWise in Remote mode you can connect to your Online GroupWise system through a modem connection a network direct connection or a TCP IP connection When you use Hit the Road to set up your Remote Mailbox GroupWise creates the appropriate connections based on how you are currently running GroupWise You can create new connections as well as change or delete existing ones You will most likely use Remote away from the office with a computer that has no permanent network access In these situations you can use a TCP IP connection or a modem connection to connect to your GroupWise system Modem connections dial into a gateway in your GroupWise system TCP IP connections use unique IP Internet Protocol address and port information to connect to your GroupWise system 276 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 11 2 4 11 2 5 11 2 6 11 2 7 You can also use Remote in your office and connect to your GroupWise System
501. t Management on page 305 Chapter 16 Maintaining GroupWise on page 371 Chapter 17 Novell Messenger on page 389 Chapter 18 Novell Vibe OnPrem on page 393 Chapter 19 Conferencing on page 397 Appendix A What s New in GroupWise 8 on page 401 Appendix B GroupWise Frequently Asked Questions on page 407 Appendix C Startup Options on page 409 Appendix D Shortcut Keys on page 413 Appendix E Accessibility for People with Disabilities on page 417 Appendix F Documentation Updates on page 419 Audience This guide is intended for GroupWise users Feedback We want to hear your comments and suggestions about this manual and the other documentation included with this product Please use the User Comments feature at the bottom of each page of the online documentation or go to www novell com documentation feedback html and enter your comments there About This Guide 15 16 Documentation Updates For the most recent version of the GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide visit the Novell GroupWise 8 documentation Web site http www novell com documentation gw 8 Additional Documentation For additional GroupWise documentation see the following guides at the Novell GroupWise 8 documentation Web site http www novell com documentation gw8 Installation Guide Administration Guide Multi System Administration Guide Interoperabilit
502. t connected to the network all the time this mode cuts down on network traffic and has the best performance A connection is made automatically to retrieve and send new messages All updates are performed in the background so your work is not interrupted You should use this mode if you have enough disk space on your local drive to store your mailbox Section 11 1 1 Understanding Caching Features on page 261 Section 11 1 2 Setting Up Your Caching Mailbox on page 262 Section 11 1 3 Changing to Caching Mode on page 263 Section 11 1 4 Setting Caching Properties on page 264 Section 11 1 5 Working in Caching Mode on page 264 Section 11 1 6 Changing the Download Interval Time for Your Caching Mailbox on page 264 Section 11 1 7 Synchronizing Your Caching Mailbox with Your Online Mailbox on page 265 Section 11 1 8 Opening a Different Version of a Document in Your Caching Mailbox on page 265 Section 11 1 9 Viewing Pending Requests on page 266 Section 11 1 10 Displaying Connection Status on page 266 Section 11 1 11 Changing the Download Interval Time for Your Caching Mailbox on page 266 Understanding Caching Features Most GroupWise features are available in Caching mode with the exception of subscribing to other users notifications Several users can set up their Caching Mailboxes on a single shared computer Remote and Caching Mod
503. t stays in the staging directory until you return it to the library however as long as the document is in the staging directory the document status is open and no one including you can open or edit the document When you have a document with an Open status in the staging directory you can return it to the library and change its status in two ways you can use the Reset Document Status option or you can use the Unreturned Documents dialog box Section 15 18 1 Using Reset Document Status on page 368 Section 15 18 2 Using Reset Document Status in Remote Caching Mode on page 368 Section 15 18 3 Using the Unreturned Documents Dialog Box on page 369 Document Management 367 15 18 1 15 18 2 Using Reset Document Status Reset Document Status is available any time you right click a document reference in your Mailbox or folders You can use this option to immediately return a document to the library When you do this you can specify whether or not you want GroupWise to update the document in the library with the document in the staging directory If you have GroupWise update the document GroupWise moves the document out of the staging directory updates the document in the library with any changes and makes the document available If you do not have GroupWise update the document GroupWise deletes the document from the staging directory and makes the document available Returning a Document to the Libr
504. t the item falls within or specify an exact date Depending on the operator you can specify a time period that the item falls within or specify an exact date Specify the document creator s name Specify an integer Specify a document type Depending on the operator you can specify a time period that the task or appointment falls within or specify an exact date Specify a filename extension for example exe Specify the From field Select the item source from the drop down list Select the item status from the drop down list Select the item type from the drop down list Select the library from the drop down list Type part or all of the Message field Specify part or all of the My Subject text Depending on the operator you can specify an integer or select a variable from the drop down list Depending on the operator you can specify an integer or select a variable from the drop down list Finding Items 233 234 Field Name Number Deleted Number Opened Number Replied Opened By Personal Attachments Place Posted By Priority Send Options Size Started Subclass Subject Task Category Task Priority Thread State To This Field Refers to The number of recipients that have deleted an item you sent The number of recipients that have opened an item you sent The number of recipients that have replied to an item you sent The na
505. t to check out 2 Click Actions gt Check Out 328 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 8 2 3 4 5 Check Out CP es Check out method Check Out Check out and copy document v Close Remove Selected documents Ver 1 Current Work Assignments Checked out filename 1 C tst Checked out location C Program Files x86 Novell GroupWise v Report filename conflicts In the Checked out filename field type a filename for the document By default GroupWise inserts the document number as the check out filename If you don t specify a different filename make a note of the numbered filename so you can locate your checked out document In the Checked out location field type the path to the location where you want to store the checked out document Click Check Out Changes you make to the checked out document do not appear in the document in the library until you check the document back in or update it Users can view the checked out document in the library if they have View rights but those with Edit rights cannot edit the document while it is checked out Checking Out Multiple Documents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 In your Mailbox Ctrl click the document references for the documents you want to check out Click Actions gt Check Out In the Selected documents list box click a document reference In the Checked out filename field specify a check out filename By default
506. te task See Changing E Mail to Another Item Type on page 112 1 Click File gt New gt Phone Message You can place a New Phone Message button on the toolbar See Customizing the Main Toolbar on page 36 Phone To tataka File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help Send 3g Cancel Address EH fe Xa Blals e Phone Send Options To Caller Company Phone E Telephoned Please call Will call again Returned your call F Wants to see you Came to see you E Urgent Segoe Ul 10 By B z u HP EG Ss 2 2 e From X Janet DeSoto Account Novell GroupWise 2 Inthe To field type a username then press Enter Repeat for additional users or To select usernames from a list click Address on the toolbar double click each user then click OK GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 2 3 2 1 3 Type the caller company and phone number of the caller 4 Select the check boxes that apply to this phone message 5 Type the message in the Message field 6 To change the From name to another account or proxy click From ___ then click a name 7 Click Send on the toolbar Managing Sent E Mail Section 3 2 1 Working with Sent Items on page 95 Section 3 2 2 Retracting Sent E Mail on page 98 Section 3 2 3 Resending E Mail on page 98 Section 3 2 4 Replying to Sent E Mail on page 98 S
507. te Caching Mailbox This makes it possible for you to open and edit these documents when your GroupWise post office is unavailable Echo documents to Remote Mailbox Path to Mailbox C Users eoomds AppD ata Local Novell GroupWwise quwstr 3 Click Echo documents to remote mailbox or Click Echo documents to caching mailbox This option is not available if you do not have a Caching Mailbox If the path to your Remote Mailbox and Caching Mailbox is the same it does not matter which option you choose Echoed documents are available in both Remote and Caching mode If you run Remote mode and Caching mode from separate mailboxes you can echo documents to only one of these mailboxes 4 Click OK If you do not have a Remote Mailbox GroupWise helps you create one for document echoing 5 If prompted type your Online Mailbox password then follow the prompts in the Hit the Road Wizard to set up a Remote Mailbox Only a basic Remote Mailbox is created If you want to download specific folders and items to your Remote Mailbox you can run Hit the Road later Documents are copied echoed whenever you close or check in a document in your Online Mailbox The document reference for the document is added to your Documents folder in your Remote Caching Mailbox and the document is copied to your Remote Library which is used for both Remote and Caching mode GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 16 2 15 17 15 17 1
508. te what mode of GroupWise you are running in then click Full Folder List You can open save and view information on items in the Trash You can also permanently remove items or return them to the Mailbox Right click an item in the Trash to see more options Undeleting an Item in Your Trash 1 Inthe Full Folder List click To access the Full Folder List click the folder list header drop down list above the Folder List it probably displays Online or Caching to indicate what mode of GroupWise you are running in then click Full Folder List 2 Select the items you want to undelete 3 Click Edit gt Undelete Maintaining GroupWise 385 16 8 3 16 8 4 The undeleted item is placed in the folder from which it was originally deleted If the original folder no longer exists the item is placed in your Mailbox You can also restore an item by dragging it from the Trash folder to any other folder Saving an Item From Your Trash You can save items that are in the Trash the same way you would save any other item For more information see Saving Received E Mail to Disk or a GroupWise Library on page 113 Emptying the Trash 1 In the Full Folder List right click then click Empty Trash To access the Full Folder List click the folder list header drop down list above the Folder List it probably displays Online or Caching to indicate what mode of GroupWise you are running in then click Full Folder List This secti
509. team listed in the My Teams folder you can send e mail to the team access the team calendar and subscribe to the team RSS feed if a calendar and RSS feed are available for the team When you subscribe to a team RSS feed a My Team Feeds folder is created under the Vibe or Teaming folder You can click any Vibe folder in the GroupWise Folder List to display the Vibe Web page in the GroupWise Main Window Accessing Vibe from a GroupWise Web Panel You can create a GroupWise panel to display the main Vibe URL or any other Vibe URL that you want to display in GroupWise For instructions see Section 2 4 5 Creating a New Panel on page 61 Searching GroupWise and Vibe Simultaneously GroupWise 8 SP 2 and later enables you to simultaneously search for information that is located either in GroupWise or Vibe 1 Inthe GroupWise client click the Find icon L The Find dialog box is displayed 2 Ensure that all options are selected in the Look in window on the right side of the dialog box 3 Define what you want to search for by specifying the appropriate information in the Find dialog box For information about the options available in the Find dialog box see Section 7 2 1 Using a Global Find on page 227 4 Click OK GroupWise displays a list of GroupWise messages and Vibe folder entries that match your search criteria Dragging and Dropping GroupWise Items into Vibe Folders GroupWise 8 0 2 and later enables you
510. ter Alt Enter Esc Esc Esc Del Shift Del Alt Del Ctrl Up arrow or Ctrl Down arrow Ctrl Shift Left arrow or Ctrl Shift Right arrow Shift Left arrow or Shift Right arrow Shift End or Shift Home Action Open the selected item Turns on off search mode Display the properties of the selected item Cancel without sending Cancel with saving settings Stop a Global Find Delete the selected items Delete and empty the selected item Delete an item Open the previous or next item Select text one word at a time Select text one character at a time Select text to the end or beginning of a line Where It Works Item List In an Item Item List In an item Dialog box Main Window Calendar Item List Item List In an item In an item In text In text In text Shortcut Keys 415 416 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide E 1 Accessibility for People with Disabilities Novell is committed to making products that are accessible and usable by all people including those with disabilities Many accessibility features are built into Novell GroupWise These features are available to everyone without the need for additional accessibility aids Switching the Calendar View Between Graphic Display and Text Display on page 126 Shortcut Keys on page 413 Configuring JAWS for GroupWise on page 417 Configuring JAWS for GroupWise In order for JAWS to function properly
511. ter Novell Teaming 2 1 Regardless of whether you are currently using Vibe or Teaming with GroupWise the integration with GroupWise is essentially the same GroupWise 8 and Later on page 404 GroupWise 8 0 2 and Later on page 405 GroupWise 8 0 2 Hot Patch 2 and Later on page 405 GroupWise 8 and Later GroupWise 8 and later provide the following integration with Novell Vibe OnPrem and Novell Teaming Accessing Vibe Teaming through the Novell Vibe Teaming Folder If your GroupWise administrator enables this integration you can access the Vibe Teaming site within the GroupWise client See Section 18 1 Accessing Vibe through the Novell Vibe OnPrem Folder or the Novell Teaming Folder on page 393 404 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide A 7 2 A 8 GroupWise 8 0 2 and Later GroupWise 8 0 2 and later provide the following integrations with Novell Vibe OnPrem and Novell Teaming Searching GroupWise and Vibe Teaming Simultaneously You can simultaneously search for information that is located either in GroupWise or Vibe Teaming See Section 18 3 Searching GroupWise and Vibe Simultaneously on page 394 Dragging and Dropping Messages from GroupWise to Vibe Teaming You can drag GroupWise e mail messages and drop them into Vibe Teaming folders Vibe Teaming displays the content of the message as a Vibe Teaming folder entry in the folder where you dropped the message See Section 18 4 Dragg
512. th an Internet address then click Junk Mail 2 Click Junk Sender or Click Block Sender Open Save As Print Find in Mailbox folder Reply Forward Forward as Attachment Delete Delete and Empty Archive Change to Junk Mail Trust sender Read Later Junk sender Mark Private Block sender Show in Tasklist Junk Mail Handling Categories gt Properties 3 Select Junk e mail from this address or Block e mail from this address 118 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 3 6 3 If you select Junk the address is added to the Junk List All future e mail items from this e mail address are delivered to the Junk Mail folder gj You can specify that the items in this folder are automatically deleted after a certain number of days This folder is not created in the folder list unless a Junk Mail option is enabled or an address or Internet domain is added to the Junk List which enables the Junk List option If you select Block the address is added to the Block List All future e mail items from this e mail address are not delivered to your Mailbox Your Junk List and Block List can each include up to 1000 entries If more than 1000 entries are added the least used entries are discarded 4 If the Junk List or Block List is not enabled select Enable Junk List or Enable Block List At any time you can click Tools gt Junk Mail Handling click Junk List or Block List then click New to add
513. th any other S MIME enabled e mail product Understanding Security Certificates A security certificate is a file that identifies an individual or organization Before you can send secure items you must obtain a security certificate If you are using Entrust you must use an Entrust certificate If you are using a Microsoft security provider use your Web browser to obtain a certificate from an independent certificate authority See the GroupWise Digital Certificate Web page http www novell com groupwise certified html for a list of certificate authorities and detailed instructions for obtaining a certificate You can also use LDAP to search for a security certificate You use your security certificate to digitally sign items you send You use other users public security certificates to verify digitally signed items they send to you To encrypt an item and have the recipient user decrypt it you must have already received the user s public security certificate An element of this security certificate called the public key is used to encrypt the item When the recipient opens the encrypted item it is decrypted with another element from the security certificate called the private key There are two ways to obtain a user s public security certificate The user can send you a digitally signed item When you open the item you are prompted to add and trust the security certificate The user can export his or her public cert
514. that will be modified based on the Find criteria you specified You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview 12 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file You can click Generate a log file without performing the operation to see the outcome of the operation without actually modifying the documents 13 Click Finish to modify the document sharing Document Management 355 15 15 7 Deleting a Group of Documents You can delete a group of documents by using the Mass Document Operations Wizard To delete a group of documents you must have Delete rights to the documents or you must be a librarian for the library In addition you must have Delete rights to the library from which you want to remove the documents When you delete a group of documents all versions of the documents are deleted however the activity logs for the deleted documents are not removed Document references that point to deleted documents are not deleted If you click a document reference to a deleted document a message appears telling you that the document has been deleted Deleting a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example on page 356 Deleting a Group of Selected Documents on page 357 Deleting a Group of Documents Listed in a File on page 357 Deleting a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example 1 Click Tools gt Mass Document Operations 2 Inthe Operation group bo
515. the Frequent Contacts Address Book 6 5 9 1 2 In the Main Window click on the toolbar Click the Frequent Contacts address book If the Frequent Contacts address book is not visible you must open it by clicking File gt Open Book Click View gt Filter for at Least 3 References or Click View gt Define Filter for References a reference is the number of times you have sent or received items from an entry type the minimum number of references an entry must have in order to be included in the search criteria then click OK Sharing an Address Book with Another User Shared address books are marked with a amp icon This icon might be slightly different depending on whether or not you created the address book You can share personal address books with other users You can give users read only rights or you can give them rights to read add edit and delete information in the address book When you share an address book the users receive a notification that they can accept or decline 1 2 In the Main Window click on the toolbar Right click the address book you want to share then click Sharing If the address book is not visible you can open it by clicking File gt Open Book 3 Click Shared with 4 Type the name of the person with whom you want to share the address book then click Add User to add the user to the Share list If you do not know the name of the person click then search for and select the
516. the QuickViewer to choose other options To close the QuickViewer click on the toolbar When you read an item in the Quick Viewer the icon changes to the opened status For example the closed envelope representing a mail message changes to an opened envelope You can specify that some folders show QuickViewer every time you open them while others never show QuickViewer 1 7 Using Panels in the Home Folder The Home folder is a personalized view of your most important information The Home folder uses panels to display information in sections The first time you open your Home folder you see an introductory page that explains how to customize your Home folder Then you can display your default Home folder GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Figure 1 2 The Default GroupWise Home Folder T B leret deste Ford 2 Mailbox 2 F Calendar 10 17 Sent Items E Frequent Contacts M janet desoto B Documents M Tasklist Work In Progress B Cabinet 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 0 11 12 13 6 18 19 20 X From david jones 08 28 08 Self Review From janet desoto 08 28 08 P Trash E Today Thursday August 28 2008 Bi Computer Updates From benji gensomino 08 28 08 8 Fe From mari 08 28 08 88 88 J20 3188 The default Home folder displays your calendar for the day
517. the appointment was sent to and the appointment is removed from the user s calendar Users who had the appointment delegated to them do not receive a Meeting Cancelled message but the appointment is removed from their calendars Canceling a Recurring Appointment You can cancel a recurring appointment if you scheduled it or if you have the necessary Proxy rights to the scheduler s Mailbox 1 In your calendar right click the recurring appointment you want to cancel then click Delete 2 Select Delete this item from all other recipient s mailboxes 3 Optional Type a message explaining the cancellation 4 Click OK 5 Click This Instance All Instances or This Instance Forward A Meeting Cancelled message is sent to each user that the appointment was sent to and the appointment is removed from the user s calendar Users who had the appointment delegated to them do not receive a Meeting Cancelled message but the appointment is removed from their calendar Modifying Recipients 1 Open your Sent Items folder 2 Find the appointment you want to modify 3 Right click the appointment and select Modify Recipients 4 Specify your new recipients in the To CC and BC fields 5 Click OK Sending Reminder Notes Reminder notes are like mail messages except they are scheduled for a particular day and appear on the Calendar for that date You can use reminder notes to show vacations holidays paydays birthdays and so forth
518. the mode of GroupWise you are logging in to and type additional information as necessary such as the path to the post office the TCP IP address and port of the post office agent and the path to your Caching or Remote mailbox If you do not know the required information contact your system administrator 4 Click OK For instructions to start GroupWise under specialized circumstances see Section 16 1 Managing Non Standard Login Requirements on page 371 Assigning a Password to Your Mailbox You can assign a password to your Mailbox GroupWise passwords are case sensitive for example Wednesday is not the same as WEDNESDAY If you forget your password you cannot access any of your items You must contact your GroupWise administrator to reset it If your system administrator has turned on LDAP authentication your LDAP password is used to access your Mailbox instead of a GroupWise password and you cannot add a password using this method 1 Inthe Main Window click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Security then click the Password tab 3 Inthe New password field type the password 4 Inthe Confirm new password field type the password click OK then click Close For more information about using passwords or for information on how to change your mailbox passwords see Section 16 2 Managing Mailbox Passwords on page 372 Getting to Know the GroupWise Interface Section 1 4 1 Understanding the Main GroupWise Wi
519. tings and send your display settings to others You can also import display settings that are sent to you Drag and Drop Pop Out When you have hidden the Folder List you can drag an item to where the Folder List is located and the Folder List automatically pops out for you to drop your item in What s New in GroupWise 8 401 402 A 2 New Folder Types New folder types give you access to more kinds of information and the ability to better organize your GroupWise items A3 Tasklist Folder The new Tasklist folder replaces and expands upon the old Checklist folder You can move any items mail messages phone messages reminder notes tasks or appointments to this folder and arrange them in the order you want Each item is marked with a check box so that you can check off items as you complete them See Section 5 2 Understanding the Tasklist Folder on page 167 RSS Feeds Folder The GroupWise 8 client for Windows allows you to subscribe to RSS feeds When you subscribe to RSS feeds the feeds are displayed in the RSS folder See RSS Feeds Folder on page 25 and Chapter 14 RSS Feeds on page 301 E Mail Improvements Several e mail enhancements have been made to the GroupWise 8 Windows client Some of the key improvements include Auto Save Every 30 seconds GroupWise automatically saves a copy of the item you are composing This is helpful if GroupWise stops unexpectedly When GroupWise is restarted yo
520. tions Cancel 3 Select Sign digitally or Encrypt for recipients 4 Click Advanced options then make selections 5 Click OK twice then click Close Obtaining a Security Certificate from a Certificate Authority If you are using Entrust you obtain an Entrust certificate from the system administrator These instructions apply to other security providers 1 Click Tools gt Options 2 Double click Certificates 3 Click Get Certificate Your Web browser launches and displays the Novell GroupWise Web page which contains a list of certificate authorities This is only a partial list GroupWise supports a wide variety of certificate authorities 4 Select the certificate authority you want to use then follow the instructions on the Web site 5 If you used Internet Explorer to obtain the certificate the certificate is available in GroupWise If you used Netscape to obtain the certificate you need to export or back up the certificate from Netscape see the Netscape documentation for how to do this then import the certificate to GroupWise For more information see Importing or Exporting Security Certificates on page 90 6 In GroupWise click Tools gt Options double click Security then click the Send Options tab 7 Select Microsoft Base Cryptographic Provider or Microsoft Enhanced Cryptographic Provider from the Name drop down list under Select a security service provider Select the appropriate security service p
521. tions click your GroupWise account click Properties click Advanced then select and specify the number of days in the Refresh Address Books and Rules Every field 5 To update all of the items in your Caching Mailbox at one time click Tools gt Retrieve Entire Mailbox Updating your entire Caching Mailbox can take a lot of time and bandwidth just like the initial priming of your Caching Mailbox and monopolize resources in your client and at the server You should use this complete synchronization sparingly such as for suspected database corruption of your Caching Mailbox If you have GroupWise Library documents in your Mailbox marking a document as In Use prevents others from modifying the document If you don t mark a document as In Use someone can edit it while you have the copy in your Caching Mailbox If you then edit the document and return it to the Master Library your document is saved as a new version and the edits are not saved to the other version If you don t plan to edit a document don t mark it In Use When you exit an In Use document you re asked to send the document to the Master Library and mark it as Available If you re done with the document the document should be marked Available to allow others editing access to it Opening a Different Version of a Document in Your Caching Mailbox 1 Click a document in your Caching Mailbox 2 Click Actions gt Version List 3 Click Remote Libraries to display the
522. tions tab to specify other options such as making this task a high priority requesting a reply from recipients and more 9 Click Send on the toolbar Assigning a Task to Yourself 1 In your Calendar open a view with a Tasks List for example the Day view click a date then double click an empty space in the Tasks List Tasks and the Tasklist 169 9 3 2 x Posted Task File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help er X Cancel El amp e X 1 B AA M Spell Check amp Task Options Subject Priority Start date Sat Aug 30 2008 E Due on Sat Aug 30 2008 E Segoe UI 0 7 E7 B z u E EFFI Account Novell GroupWise Folder Calendar I Completed 2 Type a subject 3 Type a priority for the task The task priority can consist of a character followed by a number such as A1 C1 B or 3 Task priorities are optional Type the date you want the task to begin and the date you want the task to be completed You can type the same date in both boxes or Click to specify dates or auto dates for your task Type a message 6 Optional Click the Send Options tab to specify other options such as making this task a high 7 priority Click Post on the toolbar Posted tasks are placed in your Calendar and in your Tasklist folder They are not placed in your Mailbox or in any other user s Mailbox TIP You can also create a Tasklist that is not associated with
523. tiple panels in a single customized view You can display any folder in a panel You can also display an address book or a Web page ina panel Section 2 4 1 Understanding Panels on page 60 Section 2 4 2 Resizing a Panel on page 61 Section 2 4 3 Moving a Panel on page 61 Section 2 4 4 Customizing a Panel on page 61 Section 2 4 5 Creating a New Panel on page 61 Section 2 4 6 Removing a Panel on page 62 Section 2 4 7 Exporting and Importing Home View Settings on page 62 24 1 Understanding Panels A panel is a customized view of information in GroupWise For example the default Home view has an Unread Messages panel that displays a list of items you have not read The Tasklist panel is another default panel on the Home view The Tasklist panel displays items that are in your Tasklist folder A panel can be created to display a multitude of information from unread items to a summary calendar A predefined list of panels has been created but you can also create your own custom panels Figure 2 8 The GroupWise Panels Panels Lycans ceo el File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help Mailbox 2 Calendar SentItems Contacts TES G Address Book B Qynewmai New Appt M NewTask WG a F8 Onlinev v Gy janet desoto Home Find v vy Favorites Sent Items mee iag August 2008 From david jones 08 28
524. to arche Qr 1632 8 4 2008 2 06 PI Fwd Need budget numbe Doug Newman Delete LA 1554 2 29 2008 3 06 F Notification to Internet cal Marie Barnard de Stopa Op 2 Ar 1290 8 4 2008 2 05 PI Fwd Presentation Doug Newman 1146 8 13 2008 3 37 F _ Iki Janet DeSoto mi 2 Inthe View group box click Trash Sent Items Received Items or Posted Draft Items When you select a view GroupWise searches for items in the selected folder and displays the items in descending order from the largest file size to the smallest You can click Stop Query at any time to stop the query 16 4 2 Deleting E Mail by Using Mailbox Storage Size Information 1 Click Tools gt Check Mailbox Size 2 Inthe View group box click Trash Sent Items Received Items or Posted Draft Items When you select a view GroupWise searches for items in the selected folder and displays the items in descending order from the largest file size to the smallest You can click Stop Query at any time to stop the query 3 Select an item or multiple items then click Delete 4 Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 until the storage size is below the limit set by your GroupWise administrator 16 43 Archiving E Mail by Using Mailbox Storage Size Information 1 Click Tools gt Check Mailbox Size 2 Inthe View group box click Trash Sent Items Received Items or Posted Draft Items When you select a view GroupWise searches for items in the selected folder and displays
525. to Import Documents 1 Click File gt Import Documents 316 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Select Files to Import Ea Novell Files to import B Add Individual Files Add Entire Directo F J Quick import Recommended Copies documents to your default library and creates document references in the folder you specify 2 Click Add Individual Files select the files you want to import then click OK To select multiple files to import Ctrl click each additional document or Click Add Entire Directory then select the folder or folders that contain the documents you want to import Type a file extension such as doc or wpd in the File Name Filter field if you want to import specific types of files from the selected folder or folders then click OK 3 Click Next Create Document References N ove l Display documents in folder Select folder for document references OR Billing a E Frequent Contacts E Janet DeSoto 3 0 2 Documents LD Authored a CP Default Library f OM Tasklist a Op Work In Progress 3 M Cabinet OB Projects Om Plans S m Ceen C cancel 4 If you want GroupWise to create document references for each document click Display Documents in Folder then click the folder where you want to store the document references or If you do not want to create document references click Import without Displaying Docume
526. to the number of proxy accounts you can allow or manage IMPORTANT You can proxy for a user in a different post office or domain as long as that person is in the same GroupWise system You cannot proxy for a user in a different GroupWise system Section 10 1 Granting Proxy Rights as a Mailbox Owner on page 257 Section 10 2 Protecting Private Items as a Mailbox Owner on page 258 Section 10 3 Becoming a Proxy User in Another User s Mailbox on page 259 Granting Proxy Rights as a Mailbox Owner Before you can act as a proxy for someone that person must give you proxy rights in his or her Access List As a mailbox owner you can assign each user different rights to your calendaring and messaging information For example if you want to let users view specific information about your appointments when they do a busy search on your Calendar give them Read access for appointments Keep in mind the following when setting up Proxy access to your mailbox Proxies cannot see your Contacts folder at any time Proxies cannot archive items from your mailbox because the archive directory is typically a local directory that a proxy cannot access After a proxy user opens a mail message the message is displayed both to the proxy user and to the mailbox owner as having been opened If a mailbox owner wants messages that have been opened by a proxy user to be displayed as not having been read then the mailbox ow
527. to them All incoming items are delivered to your Mailbox folder Section 3 1 Sending E Mail on page 67 Section 3 2 Managing Sent E Mail on page 95 Section 3 3 Receiving E Mail on page 101 Section 3 4 Managing Received E Mail on page 109 Section 3 5 Printing E Mail on page 115 Section 3 6 Handling Unwanted E Mail Spam on page 116 Sending E Mail When you send an e mail message from GroupWise you can send the message either as text or HTML Additionally you can choose to attach a file add a signature or vCard to the message and spell check the message before it is sent The address book and name completion help you to quickly and easily find the contacts you need when sending an e mail message Section 3 1 1 Selecting the Default Compose View on page 68 Section 3 1 2 Composing E Mail on page 68 Section 3 1 3 Formatting E Mail on page 69 Section 3 1 4 Spell Checking Messages on page 73 Section 3 1 5 Attaching Files on page 76 Section 3 1 6 Adding a Signature or vCard on page 79 Section 3 1 7 Routing Mail to Multiple Recipients Consecutively on page 81 Section 3 1 8 Sending S MIME Secure Messages on page 83 Section 3 1 9 Saving Unfinished E Mail on page 90 Section 3 1 10 Selecting Send Options on page 91 Section 3 1 11 Posting a Discussion Note on page 94
528. tor the information transfer between your Online GroupWise system and your Remote Mailbox To display detailed connection information use Show Log To display the number of requests the Online GroupWise system needs to process use Requests To stop the information transfer anytime use Disconnect In addition to the Connection Status window the icon in the Windows taskbar lets you know the status of your connection Icon Means You are connected id You are disconnected Oe You are sending items You are receiving items Connection Log Use the Connection Log to display connection information and to troubleshoot connection problems This log includes information about connection time error messages and so forth GroupWise uses three Connection Log files to log the connection information remote1 1log remote2 1og and remote3 1log GroupWise uses the next log file each time you run GroupWise in Remote mode Creating a Modem Connection Contact your system administrator for your gateway s phone number login ID and password 1 Click Accounts gt Send Retrieve gt GroupWise Options 2 Click Configure click Connect To then click New 3 Make sure Modem is selected then click OK GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Connection name Phone Number Country Code AreaCode Telephone Number United States of America 1 Gateway settings Gateway login ID Cancel 4 Inthe Connecti
529. tructure The folders aren t imported because documents in the GroupWise Library are not stored in a folder structure so the folders have no meaning in the library When you import documents in a folder you can specify whether you want to import all some or none of the documents that are contained in the folder s subfolders In addition you can specify which types of files you want to import by specifying the file extensions in the File Name Filter field Choosing an Import Method By default GroupWise performs a Quick Import and copies the documents you specify into your default library If you want to have more control over how your documents are imported deselect the Quick import check box This lets you perform a custom import When you perform a custom import you can specify the following information Whether you want to copy or move the documents into the library The filename and location of a log file for import status messages and errors The library where you want to store the documents Whether or not you want to create document references in a folder If you create document references you can specify which folder in the Folder List you want to store them in Whether you want to specify document properties for each document individually or have GroupWise create document properties using the default values Whether or not the current filenames are used as part of the document subject Using Quick Import
530. ts Window Help Send 3 Cancel E Address Fl fe amp e ma Mail send Options cc sc Name E Mail Address Office Phone Number 11015 Sale Department E Bs u M Eee Es 0 Bs O B Account Novell GroupWise Figure 6 8 shows Quick Info in the Address Book window 210 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 6 5 13 Figure 6 8 Address Book With Information about a User Ki Address Book SES File Edit View Help New G5 Details Delete JO Find C Action DA a Novell GroupWise Ad Look For Inside Name ii ER UET Name E Mail Address Office Phone Department 7 3 Ahman Dharma adharmapalan Comorete 11022 Marketing a c E Frequent Contacts PO At Ramirez aramirez Corporate net x11010 Development B Baseball car pool 38 Benji Gensomino bgelsomino Comorate net 11003 Marketing Qi Conference Room 11055 Corporate 18 Doug Newman dnewman Comorate net 11000 Development Name Flavian Haughey fhaughey Comoratenet 11017 Marketing E Mail Address fhaughey Comorate net Office Phone Number 11017 gfamsworth Corporatenet 11015 Sales Department Marketing iyacoub Corporate net 11006 Marketing 8 Janet DeSoto idesoto Corporate net 8 Jason Stevens istevens Corporate net x11022 Development A 1B Lori Tanaka tanaka Corporate net If multiple users are listed in the To CC BC or From fields of a message click the box to ope
531. ts with the original connection Modem Connections When you connect with a modem connection you dial in to your Online GroupWise system over a phone line You need to set up dialing information for each remote location For example in a hotel you often need to dial 9 to access an outside line but at home you don t Each of these situations requires a separate remote location For more information about setting dialing properties for each remote location see your Windows documentation Remote and Caching Modes 269 270 TCP IP Connections TCP IP connections use an IP address and port to connect to your Online GroupWise system If you use a toll free Internet provider while you re away from your office you can avoid phone charges by using a TCP IP connection In addition you don t need to exit an Internet connection and hang up the phone to connect to your Online GroupWise system via a modem connection You can use the same Internet connection to connect to your Online GroupWise system Network Direct Connections When you re at the office you can run GroupWise in Remote mode with a network connection A network connection is useful for quickly retrieving large amounts of information such as your system address book Connection Status When you use Hit the Road to update your Remote Mailbox before leaving the office or when you send and retrieve items remotely the Connection Status window displays This window lets you moni
532. u are prompted with recovery options for the items See Understanding Auto Save on page 91 Third Party Composers Viewers You can now use third party tools to compose and view your messages You can use Microsoft Word and OpenOffice org to compose your messages and several other viewers to view your messages in their native format See Selecting a Text Editor on page 69 and Setting the Default Viewer on page 104 Editing an Attachment You can now edit attachments you have and save them to the original item These edited attachments are saved to the item as personal attachments See Editing Attachments on page 106 Adding a Note or an Attachment to an Item You Receive You can now add a personal note and attachments to items you receive These notes are not sent to others but are for personal use only See Section 3 4 1 Personalizing Received E Mail on page 110 Adding a Contact to an Item You Receive When you receive an item from a contact you can add additional contacts to that received item This is helpful when you are viewing the history with a contact in the Address Book See Adding a Contact to an E Mail You Receive on page 112 Message Preview In your Item List you can select to display the first few lines of a message in the list This is helpful when you do not have the QuickViewer open Reply to Sent Item v8 0 1 A reply option is now available for all sent items See Section 3 2 4 R
533. u assign a task to a user the user can accept or decline the task but until it is declined or completed the task appears in the user s Tasklist and on the user s Calendar each day The Tasklist folder contains any tasks that you post or accept as well as any other item you place in it as a reminder that the item needs to be acted upon Section 5 1 Understanding Tasks on page 167 Section 5 2 Understanding the Tasklist Folder on page 167 Section 5 3 Using Tasks on page 168 Section 5 4 Using the Tasklist Folder on page 171 Understanding Tasks A task is an item that has a due date and requires a specific action You can post a task for yourself or accept a task from another person After it is accepted a task appears on the Calendar on its start date and carries over to each succeeding day When the due date is past the task displays in red on the Calendar After you finish a task you can mark it as complete When you mark a task as complete it no longer carries over to the next day on your Calendar As the originator of an assigned task you can have GroupWise send you notification when the task is marked as complete You must have Notify running to receive notification A Completed status including the date and time the task was marked as complete is placed in the Properties window for the task Understanding the Tasklist Folder The Tasklist folder is a system folder that is used to k
534. u could also save the data asa vcf file for import into any other application that supports the vCard standard GroupWise supports up to version 2 1 of the vCard standard To select the text format to use for copying 1 In the Main Window click on the toolbar 2 Click Edit gt Copy Options 3 Select the copy option you want The Display Data button copies text as display text The vCard Data button renders text as a vCard data stream 4 To make your current selection the default select the check box 5 Click OK Contacts and Address Books 221 6 6 6 6 1 222 Changing Your MAPI Configuration 1 In the Address Book window click File gt Services 2 Make your changes then click OK If the address book s name is visible it is a MAPI service provider Printing Labels and Lists from the Address Book You can print addresses in labels or in lists from an address book Section 6 6 1 Printing Labels on page 222 Section 6 6 2 Printing Lists on page 223 Printing Labels 1 Inthe Main Window click on the toolbar oO N a BR Click the address book that contains the entries you want to print Ctrl click or Shift click to select individual entries or Make no selections if you want to print the entire address book Click File gt Print If prompted click Selected items or Click Entire address book 6 Make sure the Form tab is selected Make sure Labels is selecte
535. u want to trust HTML external images from the feed If you select this it displays all the images in the feed which could be a security issue Click OK Version 2 x x oa Ff WwW ND In Firefox click Tools gt Options Select Subscribe to the Feed Using then click Choose Application Browse to and select groupwise exe then click Open Select Novell GroupWise Client from the list of available applications then click OK Locate an RSS feed that you want to subscribe to Click the RSS feed button or URL on the RSS feed Web page to open the Subscribe to RSS dialog box The Source field is automatically filled in with the RSS feed URL 7 Specify the name of the folder that you want to create for the RSS feed in GroupWise 8 Select how often you want GroupWise to update the RSS feed 10 11 12 Optional Select if you want to remove the entries from the folder when they are removed from the server Optional Select if you want to download the entire page with each item This displays the entire feed instead of a summary of the feed but requires more disk space Optional Select if you want to trust HTML external images from the feed If you select this it displays all the images in the feed which could be a security issue Click OK Internet Explorer When Internet Explorer is set as your default browser GroupWise creates a GroupWise Feeds folder in the Windows Common Feed List In the GroupWise Feeds folde
536. uide Optional Modify the font by clicking the Font button and selecting your desired font type Print Calendar Form Content Uptions Header Footer Options J Name v Overflow extra text to following pages wi Page huniber Print on both sides of page duplex Print to a text file Print to an HTML file V Use shading Print items Print separator lines between items V Date and time All Center form on page horizontally Insert blank page at beginning of print job Selected folder Use category color l Preview Printer Setup l Close 9 Click the Preview button to see how the page layout looks with the selected options If necessary change the options 10 Click Print If you have created personal calendars personal items are included with the main Calendar items by default 4 11 2 Printing a Specific Calendar In the Folder List select the calendar to print Click File gt Print gt Print Calendar Select calendar print options as desired On the Options tab select Selected folder in the Print items box a A WN Click the Preview button to see how the page layout looks with the selected options If necessary change the options 6 Click Print 411 3 Printing the Calendars of Multiple Users 1 Make sure you have Proxy Read rights to the Mailboxes of all the users whose schedules you want to print 2 Click File gt Proxy to make sure that all of the users whose sched
537. ules you want to print appear in your Proxy List If they do not appear on the list add them 3 Click File gt Print Calendar 4 Click Multi User in the Format group box click Setup then select the users whose schedules you want to print Multi User Setup E Proxy list i Proxies per page Beni Gensorino 2 B C Janet DeSoto Cancel a LA Calendar 165 Specify the maximum number of proxy schedules to print per page in Proxies Per Page For example if you are going to print the schedules of nine users but only want three schedules per page you would specify 3 Click OK Click a calendar view under Available Forms Click a paper size in the Form Size group box Click Portrait or Landscape Click the Content tab then read and select other options Click the Options tab then read and select other options Click the Preview button to see how the multi user page layout looks with the selected options Click Print 412 Junking Calendar Items from Unknown Senders 166 1 2 3 You can configure GroupWise to automatically send calendar items from senders who are not in your personal address books including Frequent Contacts to your Junk Mail folder Click Tools gt Junk Mail Handling Click Enable Junk Calendaring using personal address books Click OK GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 5 1 5 2 Tasks and the Tasklist A task is an item to be completed by a specified date and time When yo
538. ultiple calendars in the main GroupWise calendar You can select to view your main GroupWise calendar personal calendars and shared calendars 1 In the Simple Folder List in the Calendar view select the calendar check box next to the calendars you want to display To display the Simple Folder List click the folder list drop down arrow 7 above the Folder List it is to the right of Online or Caching then click Simple Full or Favorites Viewing a Different Date in the Calendar 1 Ifthe displayed view has a Calendar toolbar click then click a date or If the displayed view has no toolbar click View gt Go to Date specify a date then click OK 2 If the displayed view has a Calendar toolbar click or If the displayed view has no Calendar toolbar click View gt Go to Today Going to a different date is not applicable in some views Viewing All Day Events in the Calendar All day events are located at the top of the calendar in the All Day Events pane when you are in the Day or Week calendar view For information on how to change your calendar view to a Day or Week view see Navigating in the Calendar on page 127 Figure 4 3 All Day Events Pane Training Meeting GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Navigating in the Calendar Use the Calendar toolbar to navigate in your calendar Figure 4 4 Calendar Toolbar 8 27 2008 E 4 gt E Today C Day F1 Week BT Month 65 Year a
539. ults of a Find Giving a User Rights for All Document Versions 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox 2 Click File gt Properties 3 Click the Sharing tab Document 3 Document Version Sharing Activity Log Personalize Not shared Shared with Name A Share list Name Security lt Creator Access gt View Edit Delete Share Modify lt General User Access gt Denied Marie Lamaroux View Rights for all versions Status Available OK Gancel 4 Click Shared with 5 Inthe Name field type the name of the user or group you want to grant rights to then click Add User 6 Select the user s name in the Share list then select the check boxes for the rights you want to grant to this user 7 Click OK Users must have Share rights to put the document reference in a shared folder GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 5 5 Giving a User Rights to a Specific Document Version 15 5 6 15 5 7 You must be the author or creator of a document to grant access rights or the author or creator of the document must grant you rights to modify security for the document Click the document reference in your Mailbox Click File gt Properties Click the Sharing tab Click Shared with In the Name field type the name of the user or group you want to grant rights to then click Add User 6 Select the user s name in the Share list then click Version Level Security a BB N Ver
540. umber Read Number Accepted lt Less Than Field Number Opened lt Total Recipients lt Less Than or Equal to Field Number Opened lt Total Recipients gt Greater Than Field Number Opened gt Number Deleted gt Greater Than or Equal to Field Number Opened gt Number Deleted Includes Item Status Completed Does Not Include Item Status Accepted Contains From Bill x Does Not Contain From x Bill gt Begins With To gt cli Matches Subject customer reports On Created Today gt On or After Created gt Yesterday gt After Created gt Yesterday lt Before Due End Date lt Tomorrow GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Result Includes Items that 4 or fewer recipients accepted Items that more than 6 recipients read Items that 6 or more recipients read Items where the number of recipients who accepted equals the total number of recipients Items where the number of recipients who read the item is not equal to the number of recipients who accepted Items where the number of recipients who opened the item is less than the total number of recipients Items where the number of recipients who opened the item is less than or equal to the total number of recipients Items in which the number of recipients who have opened the item is greater than the number of recipients who have deleted the item Items where the number of recipients who have opened the item
541. up Spell Checker to automatically spell check your messages before you send them Spell Checking an Item with Spell Checker on page 74 Spell Checking Items Automatically with Spell Checker on page 75 Configuring Spell Checker on page 75 Editing Your User Word List on page 75 Selecting the Spell Checker Language on page 76 Spell Checking an Item with Spell Checker If you are using an editor other then GroupWise spell checking is performed by the editor s spell checker See the application s help for additional information on spell checking 1 Click the Subject or Message field or Select the text to spell check 2 Click Tools gt Spell Check Writing Tools Spell Checker Not found afas _ QuickCorrect Replace with AAAS Skip Once Undo Replacements Z Skip Always JI Suggest He Add JI Customize a Addto WTeIUS UWL gt FPA 2 Check Document es Close m i Hep 3 To specify a user word list to add words to click the Add to drop down list and select an option 4 To specify a range of text to check click the Check drop down list and select an option 5 When Spell Checker stops on a word click any of the available options or edit the word manually GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide You can choose from the following options Replace Replaces a misspelled word with a word Spell Checker suggests To replace a misspelled wor
542. up is finished you can turn integration on for one application or for all of your eligible applications Turning On Integrations for All Applications on page 365 Turning On Integrations for One Application on page 365 Before you turn on integration verify that the application is ODMA enabled or is supported by a point to point integration macro The list of applications on the Integrations tab shows all the applications that are registered on your machine It is not a list of ODMA enabled applications it is a list of registered applications If you select an application that is not ODMA enabled and try to turn on integration GroupWise displays a message warning you that the application is not ODMA enabled If you proceed and register the non ODMA application the integration does not work for that application If the application for which you are turning on integrations has two executable files for example WordPerfect you must specify the name of the main executable file such as wpwin exe for WordPerfect on the Executable tab in Advanced Integrations GroupWise launches the executable you specify and that executable launches the application Turning On Integrations for All Applications 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Documents 2 Click the Integrations tab 3 Select the Enable Integrations check box then click OK This turns on integrations for all your integrated applications It doesn t have any aff
543. upWise you must select a document type The document type determines the life of the document in days By default a documents life is 365 days however your system administrator can specify a document life as long as 2 1 billion days When a document expires the document type determines whether the document is archived deleted or retained Document expiration is based on inactivity For example if a document s life is 365 days the document won t be archived or deleted until 365 days have passed since the last time it was viewed or opened You can prolong the life of a document that is close to its expiration date by viewing or opening the document This resets the document s expiration date Creating Documents When you create a document in GroupWise you are adding a document to the library You can also add documents to the library by importing copying or checking in an existing document Section 15 2 1 Selecting a Template on page 310 Section 15 2 2 Making Any Document a Template on page 313 Section 15 2 3 Creating a Reference to a Document on page 313 Selecting a Template When you create a new document using File gt New gt Document GroupWise prompts you to select a template for the document You can use an application s template a GroupWise template or a file on disk as the foundation for your new document Using an Application s Template to Create a Document on page 311
544. ups of Documents on page 342 Deleting a Document Reference from Your Mailbox 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox 2 Click Edit gt Delete 3 Click Remove document from folder then click OK Only the document reference is deleted The document in the library is not deleted and any users with references to the document can still view open edit or delete it depending on their rights You can re create the reference if you need it again Deleting a Specific Version of a Document When you delete the document from the folder the reference is removed from the folder but the document remains in the library When you delete the document version from the library the selected version of the document is removed from the library and the document reference is removed from the folder 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox 2 Click Actions gt Version List 336 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 11 5 15 12 15 12 1 15 12 2 3 Click the version you want to delete 4 Click Edit then click Delete Deleting All Versions of a Document When you delete all versions of the document in the library all versions of the document are removed from the library and the reference is removed from the folder 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox 2 Click Edit gt Delete Delete selected version from library Delete all versions of document from library 3 Click Delete all
545. ur Cabinet except other people have access to it You can create shared folders or share existing personal folders in your Cabinet You choose whom to share the folder with and what rights to grant each user Users can post messages to the shared folder drag existing items into the folder and create discussion threads You can t share system folders which include the Cabinet Trash and Work In Progress folders If you place a document in a shared folder people with rights to the shared folder don t automatically have rights to edit the document Before they can edit the document you must give them Edit rights on the Document Sharing tab For more information see Section 2 3 7 Using Shared Folders on page 57 IMAP4 Account Folder IMAP4 stands for Internet Message Access Protocol version 4 If you have an e mail account that uses IMAP4 you can access that account through GroupWise If you add a folder for an IMAP4 account a icon displays in your Folder List For more information see Chapter 12 POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts on page 285 24 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 1 5 14 1 5 15 1 6 1 6 1 NNTP Newsgroup Account Folder NNTP stands for Network News Transfer Protocol It is a method designed to send and receive posting to newsgroups GroupWise can connect with NNTP newsgroups and incorporate their functions into your Mailbox If you subscribe to an NNTP newsgroup account an NNTP folder is cr
546. ve actual users associated with them You publish documents in those specific libraries by sharing documents with one of the GroupWise WebPublisher users and granting that user view rights 324 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide Your system administrator can configure multiple GroupWise WebPublisher publishing sites For example he or she can configure an Internet publishing site for publishing to the World Wide Web and can also configure an intranet publishing site for publishing to the corporate intranet Check with your system administrator for information about available publishing sites Find out if your system administrator has specified that documents shared with General User all users who have access to the library are automatically published If this is specified you need to be careful not to share documents with General User that you do not want published to the Web Publishing a Document to the Web Before you publish a document to the Web make sure you meet all of the following prerequisites Check with your system administrator to see if GroupWise WebAccess and WebPublisher are available before attempting to publish documents Make sure you are the author of the document or that the creator of the document has given you rights to modify the document Ifyou do not know the name of the GroupWise WebPublisher username on your system ask your system administrator If there is more than one GroupWise WebPublisher u
547. ve rights to the document GroupWise checks for any rights the user inherits as a member of a group If the user doesn t have rights to the document as a member of a group GroupWise checks the rights given to lt General User gt Click Shared With and then click Version Level Security to give users different rights for each version of the document Specifying Default Sharing Rights for Documents If you typically share your documents with the same user or groups you can specify default sharing rights for all the documents you create After you have specified default sharing rights GroupWise applies these sharing rights to every document you create or import in the selected library Default Sharing Rights and Proxy on page 321 Default Sharing Rights and Remote on page 322 If you don t specify any default sharing rights the documents you create or import are not shared which means that only the author and the creator have rights to the document Default sharing rights apply only to the documents you create in the selected library If you create documents in multiple libraries you must specify default sharing rights for each library Click Tools gt Options then double click Documents Click the library for which you want to specify default sharing rights Click Properties then click the Sharing Defaults tab Click Shared with In the Name field type the name of the user or group you want to grant rights to th
548. ve to bottom arrow located above the Folder List Moving an Open Item in the Tasklist 1 Inthe Tasklist folder open the item you want to move 2 Click the Tasklist tab 3 Conditional To move the item to the top of the list click Move to Top 4 Conditional To move the item to the bottom of the list click Move to Bottom When you close the item it is moved to the specified position in the Tasklist Assigning a Numerical Position to an Item 1 Inthe Tasklist folder open the item you want to move 2 Click the Tasklist tab 3 Inthe Order field specify the number of the position where you want to place the item When you close the item it is moved to the specified position in the Tasklist Using Subtasks to Organize Your Tasklist Folder Tasklist items can have subtasks assigned to them This is helpful when several functions must be completed before a task can be marked as completed If you mark the top task completed all the subtasks are marked as completed Likewise if all the subtasks are marked as completed the main task is marked as complete Creating a Subtask for a Tasklist Item on page 175 Moving an Existing Item to a Subtask on page 176 Creating a Subtask for a Tasklist Item 1 Click Tasklist to open the Tasklist folder 2 Right click the tasklist item to create a subtask for then click New Subitem Tasks and the Tasklist 175 3 Type a subject for the new subtask the press Enter 4 To add a
549. versions of document from library then click OK Copying Documents You can copy documents and their properties to create similar documents Copying a document creates a new document in the library When you copy a document you can specify how you want to create document properties for the new document You can specify properties manually for the document or you can have GroupWise create properties for you using the values in the original document Section 15 12 1 Copying Groups of Documents on page 337 Section 15 12 2 Copying a Document on page 337 Section 15 12 3 Copying a Document to Another Library on page 338 Copying Groups of Documents You can copy groups of documents by using the Mass Document Operations Wizard To copy a group of documents you must have View rights to each document or you must have Manage rights and be a librarian for the library For more information see Copying a Group of Documents on page 345 Copying a Document 1 Click a document reference in your Mailbox 2 Click Actions gt Copy Document Document Management 337 15 12 3 15 13 15 13 1 Copy Document Bs Select library to copy to Support Library Default Manually set properties for each document Automatically set properties using default values 0K j Cancel 3 Select the method you want to use for creating document properties 4 Click OK Copying a Document to
550. versions you previously retrieved into your Caching Mailbox or Click Master Libraries to display the versions available in your master GroupWise system If you chose to search the Master Libraries you can connect to your GroupWise system immediately or save the search request until you are ready to connect later 4 Click the versions you want to open in the Versions list box 5 Click Actions gt Open Remote and Caching Modes 265 11 1 9 11 1 10 11 1 11 11 2 Viewing Pending Requests Whenever you perform an action that requires information to be sent from your Caching Mailbox to your Online Mailbox GroupWise creates a request that is placed in the Pending Requests list When you connect to your GroupWise system all the requests are sent to your Online Mailbox Use Pending Requests to check for outstanding requests 1 Click Accounts gt Pending Requests Pending Requests to Online Mailbox P aes Request Status Date Requested elete Update Item Waiting to be Sent 8 30 2008 1 49 F Update Item Waiting to be Sent 8 30 2008 1 49 F Update Item Waiting to be Sent 8 30 2008 1 49 F Update Item Waiting to be Sent 8 30 2008 1 49 F Update Item Waiting to be Sent 8 30 2008 1 49 F Update Item Waiting to be Sent 8 30 2008 1 49 F New Mail Waiting to be Sent 8 30 2008 1 49 F _ Blancs hd wl Utaikan ta ha Cant 079N 9NNO 1 40 T m Last connection 8 30 2008 1 49 PM In Caching mode GroupWise immediately uploads se
551. views such as the Calendar in the Main Window This is convenient when you access your folders through the Nav Bar To hide or show the Folder List click View gt Folder List If you are not displaying your Folder List and you drag and drop an item to where the folder location is the Folder List pops out so you can drag and drop the item to the Folder List Working with Folders Creating a New Folder on page 48 Creating a Specific Folder on page 49 Moving a Folder on page 49 Renaming a Folder on page 49 Deleting a Folder on page 49 Deleting Multiple Subfolders at Once on page 49 Creating a New Folder 1 Right click in the Folder List 2 Select New Folder 3 Type a name for New Folder 48 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide If you create a folder then decide you want it in a different position drag the folder to a new position in the Folder List Creating a Specific Folder 1 Inthe Folder List click File gt New gt Folder 2 Select folder type from list of options then click Next 3 Type the name and description for the new folder 4 Click Up Down Right or Left to position the folder where you want it in the Folder List then click Next 5 Specify the display settings for the folder then click Finish Moving a Folder 1 Drag and drop the folder to the desired location in your folder structure See also Reorganizing Your Folders on page 48 Renaming
552. wever suppose you were to substitute the high priority And a space with a low priority And as in the following formula tue thu and jul aug The above formula indicates that scheduled days must be a Tuesday or must be a Thursday and must be in July or must be in August In the first formula the And operator is evaluated before the Or operators In the second formula the And operator is evaluated after the Or operators 4 4 Receiving Calendar Items Section 4 4 1 Accepting or Declining Calendar Items on page 152 Section 4 4 2 Accepting or Declining Internet Items on page 153 Section 4 4 3 Delegating Calendar Items on page 153 Section 4 4 4 Changing Calendar Item Types on page 154 Section 4 4 5 Saving Calendar Items on page 155 Calendar 151 4 4 1 Accepting or Declining Calendar Items When you receive an appointment task or reminder note you might not be able to accept it In GroupWise you can let the sender know if you accept or decline specify a level of acceptance or availability and add additional comments You can also delegate the item to another user The sender can find your response by checking the item s properties If you decline an appointment after its start time the sender sees the appointment as deleted rather then declined in the appointment s properties Accepting or Declining an Item on page 152 Accepting an Item to a Personal Calen
553. with GroupWise you need to copy the JAWS files from the GroupWise 8 DVD or a download of the GroupWise Windows client software from Novell Downloads http download novell com To install the GroupWise JAWS files for JAWS 5 x and earlier 1 Browse to the client jaws settings directory on the GroupWise 8 DVD or in a download of the GroupWise Windows client software 2 Copy all the files to the C jawsdir settings enu directory Replace jawsdir with the directory that JAWS is installed in To install the GroupWise JAWS files for JAWS 6 x or later 1 Browse to the client jaws settings directory on the GroupWise 8 DVD or in a download of the GroupWise Windows client software 2 Copy all the files to the C Documents and Settings username Application Data Freedom Scientific JAWS version Settings enu directory for a single user Replace username with the name of the person you are installing the JAWS files for and replace version with the version of JAWS that is installed or Copy all the files to the C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Freedom Scientific JAWS version Settings enu directory for all users Replace version with the version of JAWS that is installed If you are installing the GroupWise JAWS files to a Windows XP operating system you must copy two additional files for JAWS to function properly with GroupWise 1 Browse to the jawsdir winxp directory on the GroupWise 8 DVD or in a download of the GroupWise Window
554. ws Client User Guide 5 4 6 Specifying a Completion Percentage You can track progress toward completion of a task by specifying a completion percentage for any item in the Tasklist folder 1 Inthe Tasklist folder open the item whose completion percentage you want to specify 2 Click the Tasklist tab 3 Inthe Complete field specify the completion percentage The completion percentage is automatically saved when you close the item Displaying the Completion Percentage in the Tasklist Folder You can show completion percentages in a column in your Tasklist folder By default this column is not displayed To display the Complete column Open the Tasklist folder Right click the column headers in the Tasklist folder and select More Columns In the Available Columns list click Complete then click Add Click Up or Down to move the column to the position you prefer Click Smaller or Larger to adjust the column width oa fF WD Click OK when you are finished The column now appears in your Tasklist folder Checking the Completion Status of a Task You Sent In the Tasklist folder you can check the status of any task you send NOTE You can only check the completion status of tasks You cannot check the status of e mails and other item types you sent to other people 1 Open the Tasklist folder 2 Open the task you want to check 3 Click the Properties tab Printing the Contents of Your Tasklist Folder From
555. x canci 4 Select Download headers only 5 Click OK then click Close After downloading the headers subjects of items you can download the complete item by opening the item while you are connected to the Internet 12 6 4 Downloading Voice Mail Attachments through an IMAP4 Account If you are accessing a telephony server through this IMAP4 account GroupWise can download the external file bodies for voice mail attachments 1 Click Accounts gt Account Options 2 Click the IMAP4 account then click Properties 3 Click the Advanced tab 4 Select Download external file bodies 5 Click OK then click Close 12 6 5 Deleting Items from an IMAP4 Mail Server When you delete an item it is marked for deletion on the IMAP4 server To remove the item you need to purge it You can download only the subject header of an item or you can download the entire item You can move items from another folder into an IMAP4 folder and the items are created on the IMAP4 server Items marked with a strikethrough indicate that an item was deleted from the server but still exists in GroupWise POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts 293 294 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 13 1 13 1 1 Newsgroups You can view and post newsgroup items from GroupWise Newsgroups are similar to bulletin boards on the Internet You can find newsgroups about almost any topic Newsgroups are similar to GroupWise shared folders except instead of sharing information wit
556. x click Delete Mes Document Operations x Select the operation you want to perform The operation will affect all versions of a document Operation Change properties Change sharing 5 Move 5 Copy Delete Selection method Use Find Advanced Find to select documents by Ei ants Use currently selected documents Use documents listed in a file Ne cn 3 Inthe Selection method group box click Use Find by Example to select documents then click Next 356 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide TRE Item type Document Library Support Library Default Zi Document text Document number Subject Document type Author m Creator a Date created F Official version Current version Find only official document versions Cie Ce In the Library drop down list click the library you want to search In each field specify the information you want to look for Click Next Click Preview to see a sample of the documents that will be deleted based on the Find criteria you specified N oO fF 8 You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview 9 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file You can click Generate a log file without performing the delete operation to see the outcome of the delete without actually deleting the documents 10 Click Finish to delete the documents Deletin
557. x specify the starting date and ending date or 146 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide To specify a certain number of occurrences rather than a range specify the starting date click the End drop down list click Occurrences then specify the number of occurrences 4 Click the Days of the Week drop down list then click an option 5 Click the months to schedule To schedule all of the months double click any month 6 If you clicked Days of the Month click an option from the On drop down list then click the numbered days you want to schedule for example 1 and 15 or If you clicked Days of the Week click the ordinal number across from the day of the week to schedule for example 2nd Tue or If you clicked Periodic specify a period length for example Recur Every 15 Days 7 If you want to clear the dates you have selected click Reset 8 To verify that you scheduled the correct dates click the Dates tab The dates you scheduled in the Example tab are selected in the calendars If you want to deselect any occurrence click the days you want to deselect on the Dates tab Click OK Scheduling a Recurring Item Based on Another Day of the Week You can schedule recurring items for events that occur a specified number of days prior to or after a specified day of the week For example you could schedule a meeting on the Monday following the first Sunday of each month which might or might not be the first Monday of
558. x to each one Caching Mode Caching mode stores a copy of your network mailbox including your messages and other information on your local drive This allows you to use GroupWise whether or not your network or Post Office Agent is available Because you are not connected to the network all the time this mode cuts down on network traffic and has the best performance A connection is automatically made to retrieve and send new messages All updates are performed in the background so your work is not interrupted You should use this mode if you have enough disk space on your local drive to store your mailbox Several users can set up their Caching Mailboxes on a single shared computer If you run Caching Mode and Remote Mode on the same computer the same local mailbox also called the Caching Mailbox or Remote Mailbox can be used to minimize disk space usage Getting Organized 63 64 2 5 2 2 5 3 If disk space is limited you can restrict the items that are downloaded to your local mailbox You can specify to get the subject line only or specify a size limit For more information about setting up Caching Mode see Chapter 11 1 Using Caching Mode on page 261 Remote Mode Remote mode is familiar to GroupWise users on the road Similar to Caching mode a copy of your network mailbox or the portion of the mailbox you specify is stored on your local drive You can retrieve and send messages on a periodic basis with the type
559. xy is on the same post office you are Subscribe to my notifications Receive notification when you receive items Receiving notifications is supported only if the proxy is on the same post office you are Modify options folders Change the options in your Mailbox The proxy can edit any of your Options settings including the access given to other users If the proxy also has Mail rights he or she can create or modify folders Read items marked Private Read the items you marked Private If you don t give a proxy Private rights all items marked Private in your Mailbox are hidden from that proxy Repeat Step 4 and Step 5 to assign rights to each user in the Access List You can select All User Access in the Access List and assign rights to all users in the Address Book For example if you want all users to have rights to read your mail you would assign Read rights to All User Access 7 To delete a user from the Access List click the user then click Remove User 8 Click OK Protecting Private Items as a Mailbox Owner You can limit a proxy s access to individual items in your Mailbox or Calendar by marking items Private When you mark an item Private you prevent unauthorized proxies from opening it Proxies cannot access items marked Private unless you give them those rights in your Access List 258 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 10 3 If you mark an item Private when you send it neither your proxies nor the recipie
560. y Search to Check Availability on page 139 You can specify many options such as making this appointment a high priority requesting a reply from recipients and more by clicking the Send Options tab 10 Click Send on the toolbar Using Busy Search to Check Availability Use Busy Search to find a time when all the people and resources you want to schedule for a meeting are available Performing a Busy Search on page 139 Changing Busy Search Options on page 141 Performing a Busy Search 1 In an appointment you are creating specify usernames and resource IDs in the To field 2 Specify the first possible day for the meeting in the Start Date field 3 Specify the meeting s duration 4 Click Busy Search on the toolbar Calendar 139 140 E Choose Appointment Time kojkadis Available Times Individual Schedules Individual Schedule Grid Invite To Meeting Thursday September 4 2008 Friday Sep 8 9 10 11 12 nO 8 9 10 11 Ishmael Yacoub Janet DeSoto m To view information move the time cursor or click the mouse on a shaded rectangle above Desired Time Start Date Thu Sep 4 2008 Duration 1 Hour Start Time 2 00 PM Status Available Bout Of Office Busy C Tentative Gi Cancel Auto Select The legend at the bottom of the Busy Search dialog box shows the meaning of the various Show Appointment As patterns on the grid If appears to the left o
561. y Guide Troubleshooting Guides GroupWise WebAccess Client User Guide GroupWise Linux Mac Client User Guide GroupWise Client Frequently Asked Questions FAQ GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 1 1 1 2 Getting Started GroupWise is a robust dependable messaging and collaboration system that connects you to your universal mailbox anytime and anywhere This section gives you an overview of the GroupWise Windows client to help you start using GroupWise quickly and easily Section 1 1 Installing the GroupWise Windows Client on page 17 Section 1 2 Starting GroupWise on page 17 Section 1 3 Assigning a Password to Your Mailbox on page 18 Section 1 4 Getting to Know the GroupWise Interface on page 18 Section 1 5 Exploring the Folder List on page 21 Section 1 6 Displaying the QuickViewer for Folder Items on page 25 Section 1 7 Using Panels in the Home Folder on page 26 Section 1 8 Understanding GroupWise Item Types on page 27 Section 1 9 Identifying Icons Appearing Next to Items on page 28 Section 1 10 Learning More on page 30 Installing the GroupWise Windows Client To begin using GroupWise you or your system administrator must install GroupWise on your computer Your system administrator might prompt you to install GroupWise by using ZENworks 1 If you are not automatically prompted to install GroupWise contact your system admi
562. y an end date and time You can also set the default length of appointments Displaying Appointment Length by Duration or by End Date and Time on page 134 Setting the Default Appointment Length on page 134 Displaying Appointment Length by Duration or by End Date and Time By default GroupWise displays appointment length by duration That is when you create an appointment a field displays where you can enter an amount of time such as 30 minutes or 2 hours to indicate the length of the appointment If you prefer you can specify an end date and time for each appointment If you use this option GroupWise displays a field for entering an end date and another for entering an end time when you create a new appointment 1 Click Tools gt Options gt Calendar then click the General tab 2 Under Display appointment length using select either Duration or End date and time then click OK Setting the Default Appointment Length By default a new appointment is one hour long although you can adjust the time when you create the appointment For example if most of the appointments you set up usually last 30 minutes you can change the default to 30 minutes 1 Click Tools gt Options gt Calendar then click the General tab 2 Specify the number of hours and minutes for the Default appointment length then click OK Changing a Calendar s Color 1 In the Folder List click the Calendar colored square 2 Select a color
563. y by using the Mass Document Operations Wizard To move a group of documents you must have View and Delete rights for each document you want to move or you must be a librarian for the selected library In addition you must have Add rights for the destination library The documents you select for the move operation can be stored in multiple libraries on different post offices GroupWise moves all versions of the selected documents and all document properties including document activity and custom fields If the destination library doesn t contain one or more custom fields that exist in the source library GroupWise moves the value for the custom field and stores it with the document in the new library however the value does not display in Document Properties until the system administrator adds that custom field to the destination library Notifying Authors and Users of Moved Documents on page 358 Moving a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example on page 358 Moving a Group of Selected Documents on page 360 Moving a Group of Documents Listed in a File on page 360 Notifying Authors and Users of Moved Documents When the move is complete GroupWise sends a message to you that contains a list of all the moved documents In addition GroupWise sends a message to the author of each moved document that shows the document s new location If a user is the author of multiple moved documents the message contains a
564. y end uses See the Novell International Trade Services Web page http www novell com info exports for more information on exporting Novell software Novell assumes no responsibility for your failure to obtain any necessary export approvals Copyright 2003 2010 Novell Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced photocopied stored on a retrieval system or transmitted without the express written consent of the publisher Novell Inc 1800 South Novell Place Provo UT 84606 U S A www novell com Online Documentation To access the latest online documentation for this and other Novell products see the Novell Documentation Web page http www novell com documentation Novell Trademarks For Novell trademarks see the Novell Trademark and Service Mark list http www novell com company legal trademarks tmlist html Third Party Materials All third party trademarks are the property of their respective owners Contents About This Guide 15 1 Getting Started 17 1 1 Installing the GroupWise Windows Client 17 1 2 Starting GroupWise 228 ened ein eet teeta ler oe ae ee ee ed 17 1 3 Assigning a Password to Your Mailbox 18 1 4 Getting to Know the GroupWise Interface 18 1 4 1 Understanding the Main GroupWise Window 19 1 4 2 Under
565. y its catalog number Specifying a Default Library on page 306 Customizing Your Library Settings on page 306 In each library the documents are compressed and encrypted This saves disk space and maintains the security of documents because it makes it impossible to view the contents of documents outside of GroupWise Before you can access any of the documents in a library you must first have rights to the library Your system administrator determines which people have access to each library After you have imported or created a document in the GroupWise Library you can access that document only from GroupWise This keeps your documents secure If you need to share the document with a user who does not have access to GroupWise you can attach the document reference to a mail message and send it to that user or you can click File gt Save As to save the document in an external file outside the GroupWise Library In either case the file is not updated with any changes made to the document in GroupWise and is not controlled by the sharing rights assigned in GroupWise Specifying a Default Library The default library is where all your documents are stored and the library where Find searches for documents 1 Click Tools gt Options then double click Documents 2 Click the library you want to use as a default 3 Click Set Default then click OK Customizing Your Library Settings GroupWise lets you customize settings for
566. y the path and filename of the document you are checking in 6 Click Check In Checking In a Document and Making It a New Version In your Mailbox click the document reference you want to check in and make a new version Click Actions gt Check In Click the Check in method drop down list then click a check in method Click the Check in as drop down list then click New Version a BB WO N In the Checked out location and filename field specify the path and filename of the file you are checking in 6 Click Check In 7 Type a description for the new version of the document 8 Click OK Deleting Documents When you delete a document from one of your folders you can specify whether you want to remove the document reference from the folder the selected version of the document or all versions of the document To delete the selected version or all versions of a document you must have Delete rights for the document For more information about document rights see Section 15 5 Sharing Documents on page 320 Section 15 11 1 Deleting Documents According to Document Type on page 336 Section 15 11 2 Deleting Groups of Documents on page 336 Section 15 11 3 Deleting a Document Reference from Your Mailbox on page 336 Section 15 11 4 Deleting a Specific Version of a Document on page 336 Section 15 11 5 Deleting All Versions of a Document on page 337 Document Management 335 15
567. y the system administrator If you use Find to search for your document in GroupWise and the document is found in its library the document has been indexed 326 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 15 7 15 7 1 15 7 2 Viewing the History of a Document You can use the activity log to view the activity history for a document The activity log displays the date and time an activity occurred the name of the user who performed the activity the type of activity opened checked out deleted and so forth and the document version affected by the activity You can display the activities associated with the selected version of a document or you can display the activities associated with all versions of a document The most recent document activities display at the beginning of the list Document activity is also logged when you re using Remote mode however you can only view remote activities from the activity log in your Remote Mailbox Section 15 7 1 Viewing the Activity Log for Deleted Documents on page 327 Section 15 7 2 Viewing the Activity of a Document on page 327 Section 15 7 3 Viewing Who Has a Document Open or Checked Out on page 328 Viewing the Activity Log for Deleted Documents When you delete a document GroupWise keeps a copy of the activity log for that document This makes it possible for you to view the events that took place before the document was deleted In addition the system admin
568. you select a Web page type the URL of the Web page in the Selected web page field 5 Select a display setting from the Choose display settings drop down list Calendar Displays the panel as a graphical calendar Details Displays the details for items in the panel Discussion Thread Groups the items in the panel according to threads Tasklist Displays the panel as a Tasklist or Click More Display Settings for additional display settings 6 Optional Click Filter to add a filter to the panel 7 Click OK then click Add to display the panel 2 4 6 Removing a Panel 1 Click the panel drop down arrow then click Close 24 7 Exporting and Importing Home View Settings As with folder display settings you can send your Home View display settings to other GroupWise users Likewise you can import Home View display settings that are e mailed to you For information on how to export your Home View settings see Sending a Display Setting on page 55 For information on how to import Home View settings that are e mailed to you see Importing a Display Setting on page 56 62 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 2 5 2 5 1 Customizing Other GroupWise Functionality Section 2 5 1 Changing GroupWise Modes on page 63 Section 2 5 2 Changing Your Display Name on page 64 Section 2 5 3 Changing Your Time Zone on page 64 Section 2 5 4 Setting the Interval for Refreshing GroupWise on page 65
569. your Calendar In this type of list any item type mail appointment task reminder note phone message can be used For information see Using the Tasklist Folder on page 171 Tracking Task Completion When you finish a task you can mark it as complete Tasks you mark as complete are not carried over to the next day on your Calendar Completed tasks are distinguished by a check mark in your Calendar Overdue tasks display in red If you mark a task as complete then realize you left some part of it incomplete you can unmark it Unmarked tasks display on the current day in your Calendar When you mark a task as complete GroupWise sends notification to the originator of the task if he or she selected return notification in Send Options A Completed status including the date and time the task was marked as complete is placed in the originator s Properties window Marking an Item as Complete on page 171 Checking the Completion Status of a Task You Sent on page 171 170 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 5 4 5 4 1 Marking an Item as Complete 1 Click the Calendar icon on the Nav Bar Tasks can also be marked as completed in the Tasklist folder 2 With the task pane displayed select the check box next to the task To unmark a task that has been marked as completed deselect the marked check box next to the task Checking the Completion Status of a Task You Sent 1 Click the Sent Items folder
570. your master GroupWise system all items in the Pending Requests list are sent 2 Click Accounts gt Send Retrieve then click the remote account or If you want to specify your remote location and connection before sending the item click Accounts gt Send Retrieve gt GroupWise Options click Configure select your remote location from the Connecting from drop down list select a connection from the Connect to drop down list click OK then click Connect At the same time your items are being sent your new items are retrieved according to what you have specified in the Send Retrieve dialog box You can switch between connection types network modem and TCP IP if there are no pending requests on the connection you are switching from For example if you re sending and retrieving items with a network connection and disconnect before the transmission is complete you should not switch to a modem connection later to process the requests Complete the original request with the original connection Viewing Pending Requests Whenever you perform an action that requires information to be sent from your Remote Mailbox to your Online Mailbox GroupWise creates a request that is placed in the Pending Requests list When you connect to your master GroupWise system all the requests are sent to your Online Mailbox Use Pending Requests to check for outstanding requests 1 Click Accounts gt Pending Requests Pending Requests to Online
571. ype Click Post on the toolbar Subscribing to an Internet Calendar Users from other e mail systems can often post their calendars to the Internet for others to utilize such as when a sporting teams post their game schedules online for people to download or subscribe to Similarly you can find a list of holidays as an Internet calendar When you subscribe to an Internet calendar a new personal calendar is created in your Folder List You can then specify how often you want GroupWise to update the Internet calendar s contents Section 4 7 1 Manually Subscribing to an Internet Calendar on page 159 Section 4 7 2 Subscribing to an Internet Calendar from a Link on page 159 Section 4 7 3 Editing a Subscribed Internet Calendar on page 159 Section 4 7 4 Deleting a Subscribed Internet Calendar on page 159 GroupWise 8 Windows Client User Guide 4 7 1 4 7 2 4 7 3 4 7 4 Manually Subscribing to an Internet Calendar 1 2 3 4 In the Folder List right click the main GroupWise calendar then click Subscribe In the Location field type the URL of the Internet calendar you are subscribing to In the Folder Name field type the folder name for the new Internet calendar In the Update Frequency drop down list select how often you want the calendar contents to be updated Click Subscribe Subscribing to an Internet Calendar from a Link 1 From either an e mail message or a
572. ys all Thursdays in the month of July and all days in the months of August Notice how the meaning changes when parentheses are included as in the formula below tue thu jul aug With the above formula all scheduled days must fall on a Tuesday or Thursday and must be in the month of July or August The end result is that only Tuesdays and Thursdays in July and August are scheduled High Priority And A space between two functions acts as an And operator meaning that both functions must hold true For example 25 means the 25th day of all months in all years But 25 oct means that all scheduled days must fall on the 25th day of the month and must be in October And 25 oct 2011 means that all scheduled days must fall on the 25th day of the month and must be in October and must be in the year 2011 Offset Operators You can use a positive offset operator or the word PLUS or a negative offset operator or the word MINUS to add a relative offset to a function or statement For example to schedule an event three days before the first Thursday in February for all years you could enter the following formula thu 1 feb 3 Range The range operator or the word To functions like a series of Or operators see Or on page 151 between each item day month etc in the range For example if you want to schedule the 15th of every month but only if the 15th is a weekday you could enter either of the following formulas 15 am

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manual de Arborização  RECOMMENDED GUIDELINES ON SAFETY FOR COCHLEAR  工場電気設備防爆指針 労働安全衛生総合研究所技術指針 : Free Download, Borrow, and Streaming : Internet Archive  警告 - エスコ  2015-conseils de hameaux-mode d emploi-V6  Hera operating manual  CMU Wiring Procedure v3  Manual de instrucciones  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file